Samsung TV Audio / Vidéo TV LCD 32", LE32D550WXZF, série 5, HD TV, LCD TV LE32D550K1W - Mode d'emploi - Manuel de l'utilisateur

Samsung TV Audio / Vidéo TV LCD 32", LE32D550WXZF, série 5, HD TV, LCD TV LE32D550K1W - Mode d'emploi - Manuel de l'utilisateur - Manuels

SAMSUNG sur FNAC.COM - Liste des manuels utilisateur Samsung - Revenir à l'accueil

Description	Date de distribution	Langue	Fichier
Manuel de l'utilisateur	2012.01.28	ANGLAIS	4.71 MB
Manuel de l'utilisateur	2012.01.28	FRANÇAIS	9.55 MB
Guide rapide	2011.03.22	ENGLISH, DUTCH, FRENCH, GERMAN	12.92 MB

COMMANDER un produit SAMSUNG sur FNAC.COM

Liste des manuels APPLE Liste des produits Sony Liste des produits Dell Liste des Manuels Samsung Listes des Manuels Konica Minolta

Manuels Utilisateurs Samsung :

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-55-Moniteur-LED-UD55A-mur-d-image-bord-fin-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46C6000-UE46C6000RW-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Imprimantes-Photos-SPP-2040-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-16ppm-Multifonction-laser-mono-SCX-3205-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-460DR-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQ12UGBN-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SCX-8240NA-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37B653T5P-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE26A456C2D-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS42A426-PS42A426C1M-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE19B450C4H-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32C5100QW-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV18KBAX-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH060FXEA3A-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40C6900VS-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-AVXCSH028EE-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-AVXTJH036EE-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A457C1D-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV12UGAN-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP355V5C-NP355V5C-S03FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5AH-NP300E5A-S05FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-de-bureau-23-Serie-7-All-In-One-700A3B-DP700A3B-S02FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5C-NP300E5C-S04FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP530U3C-NP530U3C-A04FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP350E7C-NP350E7C-S07FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300V5AH-NP300V5A-S02FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP355V5C-NP355V5C-S01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E7AI-NP300E7A-A04FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-9-NP900X3D-A04FR

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5C-T03FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP355V5C-NP355V5C-S02FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-17-3-Serie-7-Gamer-700G7A-NP700G7A-S02FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-17-3Serie-3-300E7A-NP300E7A-S08FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP530U3C-A05FR-manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5C-T05FR-manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-de-bureau-DP500A2D-S02FR-2-manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32C8700XS-manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE32D6750WS-manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46D6200TS-manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50B550-PS50B550T4W-manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-15-6-Serie-3-300E5A-NP300E5A-S04FR-manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-RVXMHF050EA-manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9103-manuels

Samsung-Stockage-informatique-SSD-MZ-7TD120-manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9100-manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Blu-ray-HT-ES4200-ZFHT-ES4200-manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300V3AH-NP300V3A-S02FR-manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-17-3-Serie-3-300E7A-NP300E7A-S06FR-manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP350V5C-NP350V5C-S07FR-manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-11-6-Serie%209-900X1A-NP900X1A-A01FR-manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-11-6-Serie-7-Slate-PC-700T1AXE-700T1A-A02FR-manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP530U3C-NP530U3C-A01FR-manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-XE500T1C-XE500T1C-A04FR-manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E7AH-NP300E7A-S0DFR-manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Nouveau-Serie-9-900X4C-NP900X4C-A01FR-manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X3C-NP900X3C-A03FR-manuels

Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Haute-Definition-HMX-F800BP-manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-5-550P7C-NP550P7C-T03FR-manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X4B-NP900X4B-A01FR-manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5369-manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-XE700T1A-XE700T1A-HF1FR-manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5C-T06FR-manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-9-NP900X3D-A05FR-NP900X3D-A05FR-manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-300E5A-NP300E5A-S0AFR-manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S24A650S-manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S27C650D-manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S27B970D-manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-YP-GS1CW-manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-XE500T1C-H02FR-manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5C-S08FR-manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-9-900X3C-A05FR-NP900X3C-A05FR-manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-de-bureau-DP500A2D-S02FR-manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-N7100-manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-51-PS51D8000WXZF-serie-8-SMART-TV-3D-HD-TV-PDP-TV-PS51D8000FS-manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-46-UE46D7000WXZF-serie-7-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE46D7000LS-manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS43E450-ZF-PLASMA-43-HD-TV-PS43E450A1W-manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Player-Star-2-noir-Open-market-GT-S5620-manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT45JSTS-manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-S3500-noir-Open-market-GT-S3500-manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-NS071SDXEA-manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37A626-LE37A626A3M-manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-XE500C21-XE500C21-AZ2FR-manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-300E5C-NP300E5C-T02FR-manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-27-UE27D5000WXZF-serie-5-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE27D5000NW-2-manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-E1130-B.manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP700Z5AH-NP700Z5A-S03FR.manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-E1310-NRJ-Mobile-GT-E1310B.manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-E2220.manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQ12TSBN.manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-C3750.manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-E2550D.manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQ12FAN

Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-ES60-SAMSUNG-ES60.manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV12KBAN-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH020FNEA-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46ES6570S-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE32ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-32-SMART-TV-3D-UE32ES6300S-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES6560S-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE32ES6100W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-40-UE40D6300WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE40D6300SS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-46-UE46D8000WXZF-serie-8-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TVUE46D8000YS-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH052FWEA-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37C530-LE37C530F1W.manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-S5620.manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV09KBBN.manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-51-PS51D550WXZF-serie-5-3D-HD-TV-PDP-TV-PS51D550C1W.manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-F480G.manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5AH-NP300E5A-S0CFR.manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES6710-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-TV-3DUE40ES6710S-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-32-UE32D6500WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE32D6500VS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE22ES5410-ZF-Slim-LED-22-SMART-TVUE22ES5410W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40D8000YQ-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV18PSBN-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV18UGAN-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS50C490-PS50C490B3W-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH068FXEA4-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS51D6900DS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32D450G1W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50A676-PS50A676T1M-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH035FEEA-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46ES6540S-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55C8700-UE55C8790XS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46D6570WS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55ES6530S-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46ES6560S-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I8190-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-YP-GI1CW-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9100P-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32S86BD-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS42C96HD-PS-42C96HD-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32T51B-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS42A456-PS42A456P2D-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-46-UE46D5000WXZF-serie-5-FULL-HD-LED-TVUE46D5000PW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS59D530A5W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32C6700-UE32C6700US-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-43-PS43D450WXZF-serie-4-HD-TV-PDP-TVPS43D450A2W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46B7000-UE46B7000WW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-32-UE32D5000WXZF-serie-5-FULL-HD-LED-TVUE32D5000PW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS43D490A1W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-22-UE22ES5400WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32C350D1W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40C6000RH-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-ES6000-ZF-Lecteur-Blu-Ray-3D-SMART-HUB-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32EH4000-ZF-LED-32-HD-TV-UE32EH4000W-Manuals-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40D5000PW-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S19C450MR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S19C200NW-Manuels

Samsung-InformatiqueMoniteur-LCD-S19C450MW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32C4000PW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE22D5000NH-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-HG32EA590LS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32C450-LE32C450E1W-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-Mistral-AQV09PSBN-User-Manuals-Manuel

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE26D4003BW-User-Manuals-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-55-UE55D7000WXZF-serie-7-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE55D7000LS-User-Manuals-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS42A466-PS42A466P2M-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE26A466-LE26A466C2M-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS50C6970-PS50C6970YS-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Telephone-coulissant-Samsung-S5200-bleu-SFRGT-S5200-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32A456-LE32A456C2D-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV12UGAX-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-NH160PHXEA-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS50C7000YW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-22-UE22D5000WXZF-serie-5-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE22D5000NW-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5380-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P3100-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-Galaxy-Tab-GT-P1000-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Nexus-noir-Open-market-GT-I9250-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-S-noir-Open-market-GT-I9000-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Note-GT-N7000-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE22C430C4W-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH052FJEA-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55C8700XS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS63B680-PS63B680T6W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40C630-LE40C630K1W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE50ES6100W-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Oreillette-bluetooth-Kit-Pieton-Bluetooth-HM1700-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32A577P2M-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS64E8000-ZF-PLASMA-64-SMART-INTERACTION-3DPS64E8000GS-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-B1930N-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32B651-LE32B651T3P-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-27-UE27D5000WXZF-serie-5-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE27D5000NW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40B7000-UE40B7000WW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46D6500VH-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-Cathodique-CW29Z504N-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A856-LE40A856S1M-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES8000-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-INTERACTION-3DUE40ES8000S-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE22B450-LE22B450C4W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE39EH5003W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40EH6030W-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32A437T2D-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV12PWAN-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46ES5500-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-TVUE46ES5500W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37C530F1W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32EH5300W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES7000-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-INTERACTION-3DUE40ES7000S-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-AVXWNH022EE-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Oreillette-bluetooth-Kit-Mains-Libres-Bluetooth-HF1000-BHF1000-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-Cassette-4-voies-MH035FMEA-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV09PSBX-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40D550K1W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55ES6100W-AQV09PSBN-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE26C450-LE26C450E1W-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-Mistral-AQV09PSBN-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32EH4000-ZF-LED-32-HD-TV-UE32EH4000W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE60EH6000S-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-Lecteur-Multimedia-Galaxy-S-WiFi-5.0-Blanc-8G-YP-G70CW-Manuels

Samsung TV Audio / Vidéo 3D UE32D6300SS

Samsung TV Audio / Vidéo TV LCD LE32A437T2D

Samsung TV Audio / Vidéo TV PDP PS50A466 PS50A466P2M

Samsung TV Audio / Vidéo TV LED UE46EH5300W

Samsung TV Audio / Vidéo TV LED UE37C6000UE37C6000RW

Samsung Informatique Moniteur LCD 770TFT

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника Плазменные Плазма 51" cерия 5 Full HD PS51E530 PS51E530A3W Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры UE46EH5000W Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры UE46D5000PW Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры Телевизор 26" серия 4 HD LED UE26EH4000UE26EH4000W Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника Плазменные Плазма 42" Серия 4 HD PS42C431A2 PS42C431A2W Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры Телевизор 46" серия 5 SMART TV Full HD LED UE46EH5300 UE46EH5300W Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника Плазменные PS42A410C3 Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника 3D Телевизор 40" серия 6 SMART TV 3D Full HD LED UE40ES6100 UE40ES6100W Russe

Samsung TV Audio / Vidéo TV LCD LE40B651LE40B651T3W

Samsung TV Audio / Vidéo TV LCD LE40B651LE40B651T3W Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры UE55B7000WW Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника 3D UE40ES7500S Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника 3D Телевизор 40" серия 6 SMART TV 3D Full HD LED UE40ES6100 UE40ES6100W Russe4

Samsung Мобильные телефоны Мобильные телефоны C3510 TVGT-C3510T Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника Плазменные PS42B430P2W Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника 3D UE46D7000LS Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника 3D LED телевизор 40" Серия 7 3D SMART TV Full HD UE40D7000L UE40D7000LS Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры 37" FULL HD LED телевизор серии 5 UE37EH5007KUE37EH5007K Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры LED телевизор 32" Серия 5 Full HD UE32C5000Q UE32C5000QW Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры Телевизор 46" серия 5 SMART TV Full HD LED UE46EH5307 UE46EH5307K Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника ЖК-телевизоры ЖК телевизор 40" Серия 5 Full HD LE40C530F1 LE40C530F1W Russe

Samsung Мобильные телефоны Смартфоны Samsung S6012 GT-S5830I Russe

Samsung Мобильные телефоны Смартфоны GT-S5830I Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника ЖК-телевизоры LE40C530F1W Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника 3D UA55D6600WR Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника Плазменные Плазма 43" cерия 4 HD PS43E450PS43E450A1W Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры Телевизор 32" серия 5 Full HD LED UE32EH5040 UE32EH5040W Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры LED телевизор 40" Серия 6 Full HD UE40C6000R UE40C6000RW Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника ЖК-телевизоры LE32B450C4W Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника 3D UA40C7000WR Russe

Samsung Бытовая техника Настенное крепление Настенная сплит-система "Стандарт" AQ07RLAQ07RLN Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры UA40C5000QR Russe

TV Audio / Vidéo 3D 40", UE40D6200WXZF, série 6, SMART TV, 3D, FULL HD, LED TV UE40D6200TS

Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры LED телевизор 32" Серия 4 HD UE32C4000P UE32C4000PW Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника 3D LED телевизор 40" Серия 6 3D SMART TV Full HD UE40D6100S UE40D6100SW Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника 3D Телевизор 55" серия 8 3D SMART TV Full HD LED UE55ES8007 UE55ES8007U Russe

Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры Телевизор 40" серия 5 SMART TV Full HD LED UE40EH5307 UE40EH5307K

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника 3D LED телевизор 46" Серия 8 3D SMART TV Full HD UE46D8000Y UE46D8000YS Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника 3D Телевизор 65" серия 8 SMART TV 3D Full HD LED UE65ES8007 UE65ES8007U Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры UE32D5000PW Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника 3D Плазма 51" Серия 8 3D SMART TV Full HD PS51D8000F PS51D8000FS Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры Телевизор 40" серия 5 Full HD LED UE40EH5047 UE40EH5047K Russe

Samsung Аудиотехника Видеотехника LED-телевизоры Телевизор 40" серия 5 SMART TV Full HD LED UE40ES5537 UE40ES5537K Russe

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-YP-GI1EW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50C430-PS50C430A1W-Francais-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50Q96HD-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46C5100QW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46B7020WW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32C4000PH-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQ09UGFN-Manuels

Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-12-MP-Ecran-LCD-2-7-compact-essentiel-Samsung-ES80-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Lave-linge-frontal-WF1702NHWG-YLE-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-U100-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P5100-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-E570-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40D5720RS-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-de-bureau-DP700A3D-A01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-R200-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37A457C1D-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610-NP-R610-AS06FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610-NP-R610-AS08FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-X420I-NP-X420-JA05FR-France-Manuels

Samsung-TV-AV-LED-UE40B7000WW-Royaume-Uni-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-16-4ppm-Multifonction-lasercouleur-CLX-3185FN-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Couleur-16-4ppm-Imprimante-laser-couleur-CLP-300-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610-NP-R610-AS06FR-Francais-Manuels

Samsung-Monitors-2493HM-USA-Etats-Unis-Manuels

Samsung-Exhibit-4G-Android-Smartphone-SGH-T759-USA-Etats-Unis-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES6100W-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV12PSBN-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-55-UE55D7000WXZF-serie-7-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE55D7000LS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40C7700WS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE32D6500VQ-Manuels

Samsung-Refrigerators-26-CU-FT-FRENCH-DOOR-REFRIGERATOR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-QX510-NP-QX510-S01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-2165W-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SF-5800P-Francais-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-Q35-NP-Q35T007-SEF-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-X420I-NP-X420-JA05FR-Francais-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-CLX-9201NA-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-CLX-9301NA-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-X420I-NP-X420-JA05FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES6900-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-TV-3DUE40ES6900S-francais-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-S5150-gold-Open-market-GT-S5150-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-Neo-Forte-EHS-Hybride-NH022NHXEA-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenagers-Front-Loader-WF710Y4BKWQ-EN-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP350V5C-S06FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-AV-LED-19-D4003-Series-4-LED-TV%20-UE19D4003BW-Royaume-Uni-Manuels

Samsung-PC-Office-Netbook-NP-N220-Royaume-Uni-Manuels

Samsung-PC-Office-Notebook-R519-Royaume-Uni-Manuels

Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Smart-Phone-Galaxy-Camera-EK-GC100-Inde-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SCX-8123NA-Manuels

Samsung-SCX-3400-Pakistan-Manuels

Samsung-PC-Office-Notebook-ATIV-Smart-PC-XE500T1C-3G-XE500T1C-H01SG-Singapour-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenagers-Front-Loader-WF710Y4BKWQ-EN-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP350V5C-S06FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-AV-LED-19-D4003-Series-4-LED-TV%20-UE19D4003BW-Royaume-Uni-Manuels

Samsung-PC-Office-Netbook-NP-N220-Royaume-Uni-Manuels

Samsung-PC-Office-Notebook-R519-Royaume-Uni-Manuels

Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Smart-Phone-Galaxy-Camera-EK-GC100-Inde-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SCX-8123NA-Manuels

Samsung-SCX-3400-Pakistan-Manuels

Samsung-PC-Office-Notebook-ATIV-Smart-PC-XE500T1C-3G-XE500T1C-H01SG-Singapour-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-ML-1674-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55D6300SS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50C430-PS50C430A1W-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-S3100-gris-Open-market-GT-S3100-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32C4000-UE32C4000PW-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-23-Serie-3-Moniteur-LED-TV-T23A350-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32B350F1W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-P1600-BD-P1600A-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Blu-ray-HT-C6930W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE26C4000PW-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R719NP-R719-XA01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-5-550P7C-NP550P7C-T02FR-Manuels

Samsung-Stockage-informatique-SSD-Basic-Kit-64-GoMZ-7PC064B-Manuels

Samsung-Photo-Camescope-NX-Samsung-Smart-Camera-NX210-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Sans-sac-SC8850-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Micro-ondes-Micro-ondes-gril-niche-380-mm-23-L-FG87SST-FG87SST-XEF-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Lave-vaisselle-DW5363PGBSL-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Lave-vaisselle-DW5363PGBWQ-Manuels

Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Feature-Phone-GT-E1175T-Anglais-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46C530-LE46C530F1W-Manuels

Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Smart-Phone-Galaxy-Nexus-GT-I9250-Royaume-Uni-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SF-5800P-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-550-noir-Open-market-GT-I5500-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-de-bureau-DP700A3D-S01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-WB100-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Micro-Chaine-Hi-Fi-MM-E430D-Micro-chaine-DVD-DivX-Double-Dock-USB-Bluetooth-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-YH-820MW-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S22B150N-Manuels

Samsung-Stockage-informatique-Graveur-DVD-Slim-External-8X-DVD-Writer-SE-208AB-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Plaque-de-cuisson-CTN431SC0S-Manuels

24ppm-Multifonction-laser-couleur-CLX-6250FX-Samsung-Manuels

32-UE32D6200WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE32D6200TS-Samsung-Manuels

35-35ppm-Copieur-couleur-CLX-9350ND-Samsung-Manuels

Galaxy-Y-S5360-AndroidGT-S5360-Manuels-Utilisateur-et-Guides-Rapide-Samsung

Manuels-de-l-Utilisateur-19-UE19D4000WXZF-serie-4-HD-TV-LED-TV-UE19D4000NW-Samsung

N145Plus-NP-N145P-Manuels

Samsung-51-PS51E490WXZF-serie-4-3D-HD-TV-PDP-TV-PS51E490B1W-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-R730-Red-Gloss-NP-R730-JS01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-SGH-I320-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46C7700-UE46C7700WS-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-RV-RV510-NP-RV510-S01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-300E7ANP300E7A-A02FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-40-UE40D7000WXZF-serie-7-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE40D7000LS-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-E1150-rouge-Open-market-GT-E1150-Manuels

Samsung-Téléphone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Player-Addict-noir-Open-market-SGH-I900-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R730CE-NP-R730-JT08FR-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Player-Style-Open-market-SGH-F480-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP350V5C-NP350V5C-S03FR-Manuels

Samsung-RV511-NP-RV511-A06MA-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-R590-Crystal-NP-R590-JS01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R530E-NP-R530-JT50FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32C630-LE32C630K1W-Manuels

Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-SAMSUNG-S850-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-55-UE55D6530WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE55D6530WS-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Player-City-blanc-Orange-GT-S5260P-Manuels

Samsung-TV-AV-PDP-2012-PS43E450A1R-43-inch-HD-Ready-Plasma-TV-Emirats-Arabes-Unis-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Robot-Aspirateur-Robot-2-murs-Virtuel-Noir-SR8895-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-E2530-Open-market-GT-E2530-Manuels

Samsung-Peripheriques-pour-PC-Multifonctions-monochromes-SCX-3405W-Manuels

Samsung-I9300-GT-I9300-Afrique-du-Nord-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Player-Addict-noir-Open-market-SGH-I900-Manuels

Samsung-Camera-Camcorder-Compact-ST66-SAMSUNG-ST66-Manuels

Samsung-PC-Office-Mono-Multi-function-SCX-3405FW-Hong-Kong-Manuels

Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Smart-Phone-Samsung-GALAXY-S-III-GALAXY-S3-GT-I9300-Singapour-Manuels

Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Smart-Phone-Galaxy-Music-GT-S6010-Royaume-Uni-Manuels

Samsung-Home-Appliance-Top-Mounted-Fridge-Freezer-SR365TSS-Nouvelle-Zelande-Manuels

Samsung-Home-Appliance-Top-Loader-Top-Load-Washing-Machine-WA10W9-Singapour-Manuels

Samsung-electromenagers-Front-Loader-WF710Y4BKWQ-EN-Belgique-Manuels

Samsung-PC-Office-LCD-LED-S22C200BW-Hong-Kong-Manuels

Samsung-Camaras-Alta-definicion-Videocamara-HD-F80HMX-F80SP-Espagne-Manuels

Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Smart-Phone-Galaxy-Camera-EK-GC100-Emirats-Arabes-Unis-Manuels

Samsung-Sprzet-komputerowy-i-Drukarki-Notebooki-NP-R710-AS04PL-Pologne-Manuels

Samsung-Informatica-LCD-2043SW-Portugues-Portugais-Bresil-Manuels

Samsung-TV-AV-3D-Blu-ray-HT-E3550-English-Anglais-Manuels

Samsung-Camera-Camcorder-Compact-ES90-14.2MP-Digital-Camera-FIND-A-PRODUCT-SAMSUNG-ES90-English-Anglais-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X1B-NP900X1B-A01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-300E7A-NP300E7A-S0CFR-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT50QMSW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46EH6030W-Manuels

Samsung-Home-Appliance-Side-by-Side-RSA1STMG-Arabe-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS59D6900DS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-TV-3DUE40ES6300S-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP700Z7C-NP700Z7C-S02FR-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Side-By-Side-Refrigerateur-Side-By-Side-RS6178UGDSR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X4C-NP900X4C-A02FR-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-S730-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-E590-Manuels

20ppm-Multifonction-laser-couleur-CLX-6220FX-Samsung-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SF-5100P-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-RC710E-NP-RC710-S02FR-Francais-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-XE500T1C-A01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R730CE-NP-R730-JT0BFR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610-NP-R610-FS02FR-francais-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610-NP-R610-FS02FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-RC710E-NP-RC710-S02FR-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9100G-francais-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5C-NP300E5C-AF5FR-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-C520-Hello-Kitty-Open-marketS-GH-C520-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Autres-Samsung-Player-mini-2GT-C3310-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP530U3C-NP530U3C-A06FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP700Z5C-NP700Z5C-S02FR-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Galaxy-Camera-EK-GC100-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-Z360-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46A856-LE46A856S1M-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40B620T2WXXC-LE40B620R3W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A568-LE40A568P3M-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQ18FAN-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE22D450G1W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-46-UE46D6200WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE46D6200TS-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X4C-NP900X4C-A02FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X4D-A02FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-NL22B-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-300E7A-NP300E7A-S0BFR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46A568-LE46A568P3M-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE65ES8000-ZF-Slim-LED-65-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE65ES8000S-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46ES6530S-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-C6625-gris-Open-market-GT-C6625-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46B8000WW-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Corby-Pro-rouge-Open-market-GT-B5310-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Side-By-Side-Refrigerateur-SBS-A-507-L-Blanc-RSA1TWP-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Micro-Chaine-Hi-Fi-Micro-chaine-MM-D430DWXZF-serie-4-DVD-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A626-LE40A626A3M-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Autres-GT-C3310-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-C3520-GT-C3520-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Side-By-Side-Refrig%C3%A9rateur-SBS-A-510-L-Inox-RSH5TERS-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Micro-ondes-Micro-ondes-mono-23L-SILVER-ME82V-Manuels*

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40D503F7W-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-2165-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Side-By-Side-RSA1DTMG-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SF-6900-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-HT-C5530-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S24B300BL-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-HT-D4200-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R730C-NP-R730-JB03FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-R-mix-YP-R1JCP-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-P2470HD-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-P1600-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-J770-Open-market-SGH-J770-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Home-cinema-DVD-5.1-HT-D350WXZF-serie-3HT-D350-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-CLX-6200FX-Manuels

Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-Smart-Camera-WB850F-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP700Z5AH-NP700Z5A-S02FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP305V5AD-NP305V5A-S02FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46ES6530S-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50A456-PS50A456P2D-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40D6570WS-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-22-Serie-3-Moniteur-LED-TV-T22A300-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-S2-YP-S2QB-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-24ppm-Imprimante-laser-mono-ML-2580N-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-3710ND-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40D5003BW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-P2500-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-U600-Open-market-SGH-U600-Manuels

Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Definition-Standard-5-MP-Ecran-LCD-2.7-6.86-cm-Camescope-SD-Samsung-F700-SMX-F700BP-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R710-NP-R710-ASS1FR-Manuels

Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-SAMSUNG-PL101-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-S3-GT-I9300-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A566P1M-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46D550K1W-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH026FWEA-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV07PSBN-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50B850-PS50B850Y1W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE37D5000ZF-UE37D5000PW-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-NH300WHXES-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40ES5700S-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-60-UE60D8000WXZF-serie-8-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE60D8000YS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32D403E2W-Manuels

Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-ST500-SAMSUNG-ST500-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-S5610-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-S3-GT-I9300-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-27-Serie-3-Moniteur-LED-TV-T27A300-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-E1170-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40R86BD-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE22C350-LE22C350D1W-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-J700-SGH-J700G-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Micro-ondes-Micro-ondes-Gril-23L-SILVER-GS89F-1SPGS89F-1SP-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-300E5A-NP300E5A-A02FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-15-6-Serie-4-Gamme-Professionnelle-400B5B-NP400B5B-S02FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-12-5-Serie-4-Gamme-Professionnelle-400B2B-NP400B2B-A01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-17-3-Serie-RC-RC730-NP-RC730-S05FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-Multifonction-monochrome-SCX-3405W-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-de-bureau-23-Serie-7-All-In-One-700A3B-DP700A3B-A01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-15-6-Serie-RC-RC530-NP-RC530-S03FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-15-6-Serie-3-300E5-ANP300E5A-S08FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-Lecteur-blu-ray-BD-D6900WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3DBD-D6900-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37A568-LE37A568P3M-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-24-Serie-3-Moniteur-LED-TV-T24A350-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-G600-Open-market-SGH-G600-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Wireless-Audio-with-Dock-DA-E650-ZF-Double-Dock-Bluetooth-3.0-USB-AUXDA-E650-Manuels

Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Haute-Definition-HMX-QF20BP-Manuels

Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-PL90-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32C550-LE32C550J1W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE23R86BD-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE26C450E1W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32A436T1D-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-E1151-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-P3YP-P3JCB-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-16-4ppm-Multifonction-laser-couleur-CLX-3185W-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique%20Multifonction-Monochrome-24ppm-Multifonction-laser-mono-SCX-4824FN-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-11-6-Serie-7-Slate-PC-700T1A-3G-XE700T1A-H01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9100G-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-F250-Open-market-SGH-F250-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R730-NP-R730-JA05FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE26D4003BW-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Player-Duo-noir-Open-market-SGH-D980-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40C5100QW-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-17-3-Serie-7-Gamer-700G7A-NP700G7A-S01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Nouveau-Serie-9-900X3C-NP900X3C-A01FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-Lecteur-Multimedia-Galaxy-S-WiFi-4.0-Blanc-8GoYP-G1CW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Micro-Chaine-Hi-Fi-Micro-chaine-MM-D470DWXZF-serie-4-DVD-MM-D470D-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Solid-B2100-rouge-Open-market-GT-B2100-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-13-3-Serie-5-ULTRA-530U3B-NP530U3B-A02FR-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Chat-335-gris-Open-market-GT-S3350-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-LE46C750-LE46C750R2W-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Xcover-GT-S5690-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40B530P7W-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Lave-linge-frontal-WF0702NBE-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Blu-ray-Home-cinema-blu-ray-HT-D6750WWXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55C7700-UE55C7700WS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-E8300-ZF-Enregistreur-Blu-Ray-320-Go-SMART-HUB-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-LE46C750-LE46C750R2W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Enregistreur-DVD-DVD-SH893-Manuels

Samsung-Photo-Camescope-NX-Systeme-NX-NX100-14-6-MP-Ecran-7-6cm-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Couleur-Imprimante-couleur-CLP-365-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-305E5A-NP305E5A-A01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-15-6-Serie-2-Gamme-Professionnelle-200A5B-NP200B5B-A01FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-Samsung-Q3YP-Q3CB-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-B3310bleu-Open-market-GT-B3310-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-U600-Open-market-SGH-U600B-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-E250-Open-market-SGH-E250-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S24B350H-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP350E7C-NP350E7C-S0BFR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55ES7000-ZF-Slim-LED-55-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE55ES7000S-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X4D-NP900X4D-A01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP700Z7CH-NP700Z7C-S01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-14-Serie-7-Chronos-700Z3A-NP700Z3A-S02FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-SUR40-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE32D6510WS-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-300V3A-NP300V3A-A01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ultra-Mobilite-NP-NC10-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I5800-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-2160-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R720E-NP-R720-JS03FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R730CE-NP-R730-JT07FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R620E-NP-R620-JS02FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32D5720RS-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP550P5C-NP550P5C-T04FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-55-UE55D8000WXZF-serie-8-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE55D8000YS-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-17-3-Serie-3-300E7A-NP300E7A-A01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-RV-RV515-NP-RV515-S04FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46ES6710-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-TV-3DUE46ES6710S-Manuels

Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-14-2MP-Ecran-3-hVGA-Smart-Camera-Samsung-WB150F-SAMSUNG-WB150F-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES6900-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-TV-3DUE40ES6900S-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-HG40EA590LS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Blu-ray-HT-E8200-ZF-Barre-de-son-Blu-Ray-3D-Bluetooth-HT-E8200-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Electromenager-Micro-ondes-CE117PPT-Manuels

Samsung-TV-AV-3D-TV-TV-UN50ES6350F-Coree-du-Sud-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-19ppm-Multifonction-laser-mono-SCX-4200-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Couleur-32-32ppm-Imprimante-laser-couleur-CLP-770ND-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Couleur-16-4ppm-Imprimante-laser-couleur-CLP-320-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-32-UE32D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE32D5700RS-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9000-RW8-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-TC220W-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9001-M8-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Teos-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5800-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-10.1-Wi-Fi-GT-P5110-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-7.0-GT-P3100-Manuels-Mode-d-emploi

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Galaxy-S-Advance-GT-I9070P-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-LE40C750-LE40C750R2W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32ES5500-ZF-Slim-LED-32-SMART-TV-UE32ES5500W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A676-LE40A676A1M-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5230-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40EH5300W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46B651-LE46B651T3W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE22D5010NW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-Lecteur-Multimedia-Galaxy-S-WiFi%203.6-Noir-8GoYP-GS1CB-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32EH5000-ZF-LED-32-FULL-HD-UE32EH5000W-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Note-blanc-SFR-GT-N7000-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-7.0-Wi-FiGT-P3110-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P7300-M16-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Note-noir-SFRGT-N7000-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5839I-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS63C7700-PS63C7700YS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE50ES6900S-ZF-Slim-LED-50-SMART-TV-3D-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55D6300SS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-46-UE46D6500WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TVUE46D6500VS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32A676-LE32A676A1M-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS63C7700-PS63C7700YS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-55-UE55D6200WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TVUE55D6200TS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55ES6540S-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40D6750WS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32C450E1W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40C530-LE40C530F1W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46D6750WS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40B6000-UE40B6000VW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A556P1F-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46C6710-UE46C6710US-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40C5100QW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50C530-PS50C530C1W-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-14-Serie-5-ULTRA-530U4B-NP530U4B-S01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-DV90-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-Refrigerateur-DP-A306-L-Silver-RT37GBSS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-460DR-2-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT45JSTS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-ME32B-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Refrigerateur-une-porte-RZ90HAWW-Samsung-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT41MASW-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P6800-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-C24B550U-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5839I-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Lave-linge-frontal-Lave-linge-EcoBubble-12kg-1400tours-WF1124XBC-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Ampli-Tuner-AV-HW-E551-ZF-Barre-de-son-Format-46-Convertible-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9305-Phone-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5C-NP300E5C-AF2FR-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV24PSBN-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46C630K1W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE37B6000VW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A466-LE40A466C2M-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37A676-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-AVXDUH112EE-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40B651T3P-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Autres-Samsung-S5220GT-S5220-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-9-900X4C-NP900X4C-A01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT59NBPN-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9305-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S27B750V-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Refrigerateur-une-porte-RZ90HAWW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-ME75B-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT59PMSW-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-13-3Serie-9-900X3A-NP900X3A-A01FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-ME40B-Manuels

Samsung-SGH-D500-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Manuels

Samsung-Table-induction-3-foyers-7-2-KW-CTN463NC01-CTN463NC01-XEF-Manuels

Samsung-RR92HAWW-Refrigerateur-une-porte-Monochrome-Manuels

Samsung-UE40D6510WS-Manuels

Samsung-ML-2160-Imprimante-Monochrome-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-ME46B-Manuels

Samsung-LE37A466-LE37A466C2M-Manuels

Samsung-UE32EH4003W-Manuels

Samsung-LE32D460C9H-Manuels

Samsung-LE40B551A6W-Manuels

Samsung-Zephyr-AQV09YWAN-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-10.1-GT-P5100-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-7.0-GT-P3100-Manuels

Samsung-S22B350B-Manuels

Samsung-51-PS51E490WXZF-serie-4-3D-HD-TV-PDP-TV-PS51E490B1W-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Note-II-GT-N7100-Manuels

Samsung-GT-I9300-Manuels

SAMSUNG/SAMSUNG-DV90-Manuels

Samsung-GT-N8000-Manuels

Samsung-AQV12KBBN-Pologne-Manuels

Samsung-ML-2165W-Roumanie-Manuels

Samsung-Notebook-Serie-7-Chronos-700Z5C-S01-NP700Z5C-S01DE-Manuels

Samsung-Player-One-noir-Open-market-GT-S5230-Manuels

Samsung-LE32E420E2W-Manuels

Samsung-910MP-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-S-SCL-noir-Open-market-GT-I9003-M4-Manuels

Samsung-Samsung-Galaxy-Pro-gris-Open-market-GT-B7510-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Gio-noir-SFR-GT-S5660-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Teos-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5800-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Spica-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5700-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7610-noir-Open-market-GT-B7610-Manuels

Samsung-S5610-GT-S5610-Manuels

Samsung-LE32C650-LE32C650L1W-Manuels

Samsung-LE26D450G1W-Manuels

Samsung-N145Plus-NP-N145P-Manuels

Samsung-N150-NP-N150-Manuels

Samsung-NP20-NP20FK02BG-SEF-Manuels

Samsung-GT-S5570_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_110726_Screen.pdf-Manuels

Samsung-GT-I9070P_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_120710_Screen.pdf-Manuels

Samsung-GT-I9300_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.2_120725_Screen.pdf-Manuels

Samsung-LE32D400E1W-Manuels

Samsung-Gainable-Slim-MH026FEEA-Manuels

Samsung-CW21Z573N-Manuels

Samsung-40-UE40D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE40D5700RS-Manuels

Samsung-UE46C8700-UE46C8790XS-Manuels

Samsung-UE32D5700RS-Manuels

Samsung-UE46ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-TV-3D-UE46ES6300S-Manuels

Samsung-2012_Skype_Eng-0316-1-Manuels

Samsung-NS140SDXEA-Manuels

Samsung-MH050FXEA2B-Manuels

Samsung-UE75ES9000S-Slim-LED-75-SMART-Interaction-3D-Manuels

Samsung-RR92HAWW-Manuels

Samsung-GT-P6200-Manuels

Samsung-Refrigerateur-1porteA-350-L-Blanc-RR82FHSW-Manuels

Samsung-UE26EH4000-ZF-LED-26-HD-TV-UE26EH4000W-Manuels

Samsung-E-MANUAL-X9DVBEU4E-ENG-Manuel

Samsung-GT-S5360_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_111130_Screen-Manuel

Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-10-1-GT-P7500-M16-Manuel

Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-10-1-GT-P7500-M16-Manuels

Samsung-GT-S5360-Manuels

Samsung-Lecteur-Multimedia-Galaxy-S-WiFi-4-0-Blanc-8Go-YP-G1CW-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-551-noir-Open-marketGT-I5510-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Note-10-1-GT-N8000-Manuels

Samsung-GALAXY-S-II-LTE-SC-03D-JP-Manuels

Samsung-GALAXY-Note-SC-05D-JP-Manuels

Samsung-NP-R530-NP-R530-JA02FR-Manuels

Samsung-UE40C6000-UE40C6000RW-Manuels

Samsung-Congelateur-1porteA-277-L-Blanc-RZ80FHSW-Manuels

Samsung-GT-B5310-Manuels

Nexus-S-noir-Open-market-GT-I9023-GT-B5310-Manuels

Samsung-32-LE32D450WXZF-serie-4-HD-TV-LCD-TV-Manuels

Samsung-46-UE46D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE46D5700RS-Manuels

Samsung-UE55ES6560S-Manuels

Samsung-UE46ES8000-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE46ES8000S-Manuels

Samsung-UE55ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-55-SMART-TV-3D-UE55ES6300S-Manuels

Samsung-AQV18UGAX-Manuels

Samsung-UE50EH5300W-Manuels

Samsung-LE46A676-LE46A676A1M-Manuels

Samsung-UE46C7700-UE46C7700WS-Manuels

Samsung-CW21Z503N-Manuels

Samsung-AQ18UGFN-Manuels

Samsung-Refrigerateur-DP-A275-L-Blanc-RT34GBSW-Manuels

Samsung-UE46ES6100W-Manuels

Samsung-RR92HASX-Manuels

Samsung-LE40S71B-Manuels

Samsung-UE32ES6710-ZF-Slim-LED-32-SMART-TV-3DUE32ES6710S-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Ace-noir-Open-market-GT-S5830-Manuels

Samsung-GALAXY-Tab-GT-P1000-GT-P1000-M16-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7330-noir-Open-market-GT-B7330-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-Lite-noir-Orange-GT-B7300-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-S2-GT-I9100-Manuels

Samsung-Nexus-S-noir-Open-market-GT-I9023-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-II-noir-SFRGT-I8000-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-II-noir-SFR-GT-I8000-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-7-noir-Open-market-GT-I8700-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-noir-Bouygues-GT-I7500-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-mini-gris-Open-market-GT-S5570-Manuels

Samsung-XE700T1A-HF1FR-Manuels

17,3" Série 3 300E7A - NP300E7A-S01FR - Manuels

40", UE40D6500WXZF, série 6, SMART TV, 3D, FULL HD, LED TV - UE40D6500VS - Manuels

CLX-3185FW Manuels

Galaxy Ace GT-S5830

Galaxy S II GT-I9100

Galaxy Tab 8.9 GT-P7310/M16

Galaxy Tab 10.1 GT-P7500/M16

Micro-chaîne, MM-D330DWXZF, série 3 - MM-D330 - Manuels

N145Plus - NP-N145P - Manuels

N150 - NP-N150 - Manuels

RSH5UEPN

SGH-F490

Samsung Galaxy Ace noir - Open market - GT-S5830 - Manuels

Samsung Galaxy S II noir - Open market - Manuels

Samsung Galaxy S III - GT-I9300 - Manuels

Samsung Galaxy S noir - Open market - GT-I9000 - Manuels

Samsung Galaxy NoteGT-N7000

Samsung Galaxy SGT-I9000

Série 3 300E7A - NP300E7A-S03FR - Manuels

T23A550 T23A550

UE40D6500ZF UE40D6500VS

UE55ES8000/ZF, Slim LED 55", SMART INTERACTION, 3D - UE55ES8000S - Manuels

Wave 575 GT-S5750E

Wave II GT-S8530

16/4ppm Imprimante laser couleur CLP-310 Manuels

16/4ppm Multifonction lasercouleur CLX-3170FN Manuels

16/4ppm Multifonction lasercouleur CLX-3185FW Manuels Samsung

16/4ppm Multifonction laser couleur CLX-3185 Manuels Samsung

samsung-Wave-II-noir-Open-market-GT-S8530-Manuels

Samsung-Wave-noir-Open-market-GT-S8500-Manuels

Samsung-Wave-M-noir-Open-market-GT-S7250-Manuels

Samsung-Wave-578-noir-Open-market-GT-S5780-Manuels

Samsung-Wave-533-noir-Open-market-GT-S5330-Manuels

Samsung-Wave-3-noir-Open-market-GT-S8600-Manuels

Samsung-Player-HD-noir-Open-market-GT-I8910-Manuels

Samsung-Player-Duo-noir-Open-market-SGH-D980-Manuels

Samsung-Player-Addict-noir-Open-market-SGH-I900-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-W-noir-Open-market-GT-I8350-Manuels

PRODUITS SAMSUNG :

Belkin Chargeur Secteur pour Samsung Galaxy S

Belkin Coque pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noire Translucide

Belkin Etui cuir Verve Folio pour Samsung Galaxy S II

Belkin Etui Pouch pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noir

Belkin Kit de Charge Secteur + Automobile pour Samsung Galaxy S

Belkin Lot de 3 protections d'écran pour Samsung Galaxy S3

Belkin Lot de 3 protections d'écran pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Anti-reflets

Belkin Lot de 3 protections d'écran Screen Guard pour Samsung Galaxy SII - Transparentes

Belkin Micro-Chargeur allume-cigares pour Samsung Galaxy S

Belkin Protection d'écran Screen Guard pour Samsung Galaxy SII - Confidentialité 360°

Câble Omenex Plug & Phone pour Samsung

Coque semi-rigide glossy noire pour Samsung Galaxy S II

Déclencheur sans Fil Hahnel combi TF pour Canon/Pentax/Samsung

Enceintes iLuv iSM524 noir pour Samsung Galaxy Tab

Etui-Brassard Belkin DualFit pour Samsung Galaxy S II

Etui Samsung CC9S70B noir

Fnac chargeur secteur POWY pour Samsung SGH-D800

G-Mobility Pack confort pour Samsung Galaxy SII i9100

Imprimante Samsung CLX-3185FN - Ethernet

Kensington Etui pliant pour Samsung Galaxy Tab

Le Tanneur Etui cuir Pouch pour Samsung Galaxy S11 I9100 - Noir

Lunettes 3D actives Samsung SSG-4100GB

Modelabs 2 protections écran pour Samsung Galaxy ACE S5830

Modelabs Lot de 2 protections d'écran One Touch pour Samsung Galaxy Y S5360 - Transparentes

Modelabs Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Samsung Galaxy Note - Transparentes

Muvit Adaptateur Jack 3,5 mm pour Samsung (ancienne connectique)

Muvit Coque à rabat Agenda pour Samsung Galaxy Note - Noire

Muvit Coque Doodle Coeur pour Samsung i9000 Galaxy S

Muvit Coque Doodle Extraterrestres pour Samsung i9000 Galaxy S

Muvit Coque Doodle Rose pour Samsung i9000 Galaxy S

Muvit Coque silicone pour Samsung Galaxy Ace

Muvit Coque silicone pour Samsung Galaxy - Noire

Muvit Etui Clapet pour Samsung I9100 - Noir

Muvit Etui Slim Clapet pour Samsung Galaxy Note

Muvit Housse Minigel pour Samsung Galaxy - Noire

Muvit Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Samsung nexus S - 1 Miroir/1 Secret

Muvit Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Samsung S5830

Muvit Pack Accessoires pour Samsung S5830

Muvit Sticker Carbone pour Samsung I9100

Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love Ibiza

Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love London

Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love New-York

Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love Paris

Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love Tokyo

Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - United Kingdom

Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - USA

QDOS Coque Cubic pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100

QDOS Coque Steel 4 pour Samsung Galaxy S II

Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED

Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED + Office Famille et Etudiant 2010 1 poste

Samsung B1930HD 18.5" LCD TNT HD

Samsung B5722 Double SIM

Samsung Bac papier supplémentaire ML-S3710A - 520 feuilles

Samsung Batterie ED-BP1310

Samsung batterie IA-BH130LB

Samsung batterie IA-BP420E

Samsung batterie IA-BP85ST

Samsung batterie SLB-10A

Samsung batterie SSB-690 ELS

Samsung C3050 Stratus

Samsung Câble Adaptateur HDTV pour Galaxy Tab 8.9" / 10.1"

Samsung Câble data pour téléphones mobiles Samsung

Samsung caméra Skype CY-STC1100

Samsung CB20A12

Samsung Ch@t335 - GT-S3350 - Noir

Samsung Chargeur allume-cigares micro-USB

Samsung chargeur de voyage pour SGH-P260 et SGH-G600 - Modèle Noir

Samsung Chargeur secteur de voyage micro-USB

Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir

Samsung CLP-620ND - Imprimante Ethernet

Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi

Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir + MCL Samar câble imprimante USB 2.0

Samsung CLX-3185N Ethernet

Samsung CLX-3185W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet

Samsung CLX-6220FX - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet

Samsung Coque pour Galaxy S3 - Blanche

Samsung Coque pour Galaxy S3 - Noire

Samsung CY-SMN1000D meuble TV

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go - 830 Series

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go MZ-7PC128N 830 Series

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256D 830 Series

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256N 830 Series

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 512 Go - 830 Series

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 64 Go - 830 Series

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 64 Go MZ-7PC064D 830 Series

Samsung dongle Wi-Fi WIS12ABGNX

Samsung DP7000A3B 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0 + Samsung ML-2165 - Imprimante Monochrome

Samsung DP7000A3B 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0 + Sennheiser RS170

Samsung DP7000A3B-A01FR 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0

Samsung DP700A3B-S02FR 23" LED Tactile

Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire + 1 Camel

Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire matelassée + 1 Rose

Samsung DV300F Argent/Rouge - WiFi

Samsung DV300F Argent/Rouge - WiFi + Etui

Samsung DV300F Noir - WiFi

Samsung DV300F Noir - WiFi + Etui

Samsung E1150 - Silver

Samsung ES90 Noir

Samsung Etui coque pour Galaxy Note - Noir

Samsung Etui coque pour Samsung Galaxy Y S5360 - Noir

Samsung Etui cuir pour Galaxy S II - Noir

Samsung Etui rabat pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noir

Samsung Eui cuir pour i9000 Galaxy S

Samsung EX1

Samsung Flash SEF15A

Samsung Flash SEF20A

Samsung Galaxy Ace s5830 (sous Android)

Samsung Galaxy Mini (sous Android)

Samsung Galaxy Note

Samsung Galaxy Note - Blanc

Samsung Galaxy Note - Dark Blue

Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Blanc

Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Noir

Samsung Galaxy S3 (I9300) - Blanc Marbre

Samsung Galaxy S3 (I9300) - Bleu Galet

Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 4,2" 16 Go

Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT 16 Go Blanc Wifi

Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT 16 Go Blanc Wifi + HP Housse Mini Sleeve 10,2" pour Netbook et Tablette - Ocean Drive

Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT 16 Go Noir Wifi

Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Blanc + Western Digital My Book Live 1 To Ethernet

Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Noir + Western Digital My Book Live 1 To Ethernet

Samsung Galaxy Tab 2 10,1" 16 Go - Argent

Samsung Galaxy Tab 2 10,1" 16 Go - Blanc

Samsung Galaxy Tab 2 7.0" LED 8 Go

Samsung Galaxy Tab 8,9" TFT Blanc 32 Go Wifi

Samsung Galaxy Y Pro B5510 (sous Android)

Samsung Galaxy Y Young s5360 (sous Android)

Samsung Graveur DVD Externe Wifi - SE-208BW - Noir

Samsung Graveur Externe BluRay SE-506AB

Samsung HMX-F80 Noir

Samsung HMX-Q20 Noir

Samsung HMX-QF20 Noir

Samsung HMX-W350 Noir (tout terrain) + Kit Accessoires Sport + micro SDHC 8 Go

Samsung HMX-W350 Rouge (tout terrain) + Kit Accessoires Sport + micro SDHC 8 Go

Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 10,1"

Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 8,9"

Samsung I9103 Galaxy R (sous Android)

Samsung Kit de connexion USB & SD pour Galaxy Tab 10.1"

Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SDE-3003P/EX

Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SME-4220

Samsung kit HDMI

Samsung kit papier 10 x 15 cm

Samsung kit piéton filaire stéréo Jack 3,5 mm

Samsung LE32E420

Samsung LE40D503

Samsung ML-1630/SCX4500

Samsung ML-2010D3

Samsung ML-2165 - Imprimante Monochrome

Samsung ML-2165W - Imprimante WiFi

Samsung ML-2545 - Imprimante Monochrome

Samsung ML-2955DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi

Samsung ML-2955ND - Imprimante Ethernet

Samsung ML-3310D - Imprimante Monochrome

Samsung ML-3710DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi

Samsung MV800 Noir + Etui Zadig & Voltaire Noir

Samsung NP300E7A-S09FR 17,3" LED

Samsung NP700Z5C 15.6" LED

Samsung NP-RC730-S07FR 17.3"LED

Samsung NX1000 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 18 - 55 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 OIS

Samsung NX200 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 20 - 50 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 ED i-Function + Flash SEF-8A NG8

Samsung NX 50 - 200 mm f/4.0 - 5.6 ED OIS II i-Fonction; Dédié Boîtiers Hybrides

Samsung NX 60 mm f/2.8 ED OIS SSA Macro i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides

Samsung NX 85 mm f/1.4 ED SSA i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides

Samsung NX Pancake 16 mm f/2.4 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides

Samsung NX Pancake 20 mm f/2.8 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides

Samsung NX Pancake 30 mm f/2.0; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides

Samsung Oreillette Bluetooth HM1200

Samsung Pack d'accessoire pour Galaxy S II I9100

Samsung Pack HMX-F800 Noir : Caméscope HD + Etui + Carte SDHC 4 Go

Samsung Pack HMX-Q200 Noir : Caméscope Full HD + Etui + Carte SDHC 4 Go

Samsung PC portable NP300E5A-S0AFR 15.6"LED

Samsung PL210 Noir

Samsung PL210 Noir + Carte mémoire Lexar MicroSDHC 8 Go

Samsung Player mini 2 c3310 - Gris Métal

Samsung Port parallèle ML-PAR100 pour imprimante

Samsung PS43E450

Samsung PS43E490 3D

Samsung PS43E490 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go

Samsung RC530-S03FR 15,6" LED

Samsung RF712 E7P-C7261 17,3" LED 3D Blu-Ray USB 3.0 + lunettes

Samsung S19A100N Moniteur 18,5" - Flat Panel Display

Samsung S22B150N 21,5" LED

Samsung S22B350H 21,5" LED

Samsung S23A750D 23" LED 3D

Samsung S23B350H 23" LED

Samsung S23B550V Moniteur 23" LED

Samsung S24B300HL Moniteur 23,6" LED

Samsung S27B350H 27" LED

Samsung SCX-3405F - Imprimante Multifonctions

Samsung SCX-3405FW - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet

Samsung SCX-3405 - Imprimante Multifonctions

Samsung SCX-3405W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi

Samsung SCX-4200A

Samsung SCX-4729FD - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet

Samsung SCX-4729FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet & WiFi

Samsung SCX-5737FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet

Samsung SE208AB Graveur DVD externe USB 2.0

Samsung SE-218BB graveur DVD externe ultra slim USB 2.0

Samsung SLB07A pour ST50

Samsung SLB-11A pour Samsung WB1000

Samsung ST200F Noir - WiFi

Samsung ST200F Rouge - WiFi

Samsung ST200F Violet - WiFi

Samsung station d'accueil

Samsung station d'accueil HD2

Samsung Station d'accueil pour tablette Galaxy Tab 8,9"

Samsung station d'accueil SSD-760 E2/EUR

Samsung SyncMaster C23A550U 23" LED

Samsung SyncMaster C23A750X 23" LED

Samsung Syncmaster S23A700D 23" LED 3D

Samsung Syncmaster T22A550 21,5" LED Tuner TNT HD

Samsung Système de vidéosurveillance Baby Monitor SEW-3022WP/ EX

Samsung T22A300 21.5" Tuner TNT HD

Samsung T22B300EW 21,5" LED Tuner TNT HD

Samsung T24B301 24" LED Tuner TNT HD

Samsung T27A550 27" LED Tuner TNT HD

Samsung Toner MLT-D101S pour imprimantes Samsung SCX-3405 & ML-2165 - Noir

Samsung UE19ES4000 LED

Samsung UE22ES5000 LED

Samsung UE22ES5410 LED

Samsung UE26EH4000 LED

Samsung UE26EH4500 LED

Samsung UE32EH4000 LED

Samsung UE32EH5000 LED

Samsung UE32ES5500 LED

Samsung UE32ES6300 LED 3D

Samsung UE32ES6300 LED 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go

Samsung UE32ES6710 LED 3D blanc

Samsung UE37ES5500 LED

Samsung UE40D5000 LED

Samsung UE40D6500 LED 3D

Samsung UE40EH5000 LED

Samsung UE40ES5500 LED

Samsung UE40ES6300 LED 3D

Samsung UE40ES6300 LED 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go

Samsung UE40ES6710 LED 3D

Samsung UE46EH5000 LED

Samsung UE46ES5500 LED

Samsung UE46ES6300 LED 3D

Samsung UE46ES6300 LED 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go

Samsung UE46ES6710 LED 3D blanc

Samsung UE46ES8000 LED 3D

Samsung UE55ES6300 LED 3D

Samsung UE55ES6300 LED 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go

Samsung UE60ES6100 LED 3D

Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B 13,3" - Aluminium + Microsoft Explorer Touch Mouse - Souris BlueTrack sans fil

Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B 13,3" LED USB 3.0 - Aluminium

Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B 13,3" LED USB 3.0 - Aluminium+ Samsonite Sac pour ordinateur portable 14,1" S Noir

Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0 + CaseLogic Sacoche double pour ordinateurs 14" & tablettes 10,1" - Grise

Samsung Ultrabook NP530U3C 13,3" HD LED - Série 5 Ultra - Marron

Samsung Ultrabook NP530U3C 13,3" HD LED - Série 5 Ultra - Rose

Samsung Viseur électronique EVF10

Samsung Wave 575

Samsung WB150F Blanc - WiFi

Samsung WB150F Noir - WiFi

Samsung WB690 Noir

Samsung WB700 Noir

Samsung WB850F Noir - WiFi - GPS

Samsung WMN250M accroche murale

Samsung XE700T1A-A02FR 11,6" 64 Go SSD

Samsung YP-F3 bleu 2 Go

Samsung YP-F3 rose 2 Go

Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go

Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go + Casque JVC HA-S155-P rose

Samsung YP-U6 noir 2 Go

Samsung YP-U6 noir 4 Go

Samsung YP-U6 rose 2 Go

Samsung YP-U6 rose 4 Go

Samsung YP-Z3 blanc 4 Go

Samsung YP-Z3 bleu 4 Go

Samsung YP-Z3 rose 4 Go

Samyang 14 mm f/2.8 Aspherical IF ED UMC; Monture Samsung NX

Samyang 35 mm f/1.4 AS UMC; Monture Samsung NX

Samyang Fish-eye 8 mm f/3.5 Aspherical IF MC; Monture Samsung Type NX

Tablette Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 3,6" 8 Go

Tablette Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 3,6" 8 Go + Casque weSC Conga Matte noir

Tablette Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 4,2" 8 Go

Tablette Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 5" 8 Go

T'nB Coque Clip On pour Samsung Galaxy SII - New York

Toner Samsung CLT-C4072S - Cyan

Toner Samsung CLT-C4092S Cyan

Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S - Noir

Toner Samsung CLT-K4092S Noir

Toner Samsung CLT-M4072S - Magenta

Toner Samsung CLT-M4092S Magenta

Toner Samsung CLT-P4092C - Pack de 4 Toners

Toner Samsung CLT-Y4072S - Jaune

Toner Samsung CLT-Y4092S Jaune

Toner Samsung MLT-D1042S - Noir

We Digital by Samsung - Silver We 1 To USB 2.0

We Digital by Samsung - Silver WE 2 To USB 2.0

Xqisit Coque iPlate Glossy pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Blanche

Xqisit Coque iPlate Style pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Transparente/Blanche

Xqisit Coque iPlate Style pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Transparente/Noire

Xqisit Coque Soft Grip pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Blanche

Xqisit Coque Soft Grip pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noire

Xqisit Etui Flipcover pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Blanc

Xqisit Etui Flipcover pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noir

Samsung - Aspirateur robot Navibot SR8845

Samsung - Aspirateur sans sac EcoStyle SC86G0 gris foncé/fuchsia

Samsung - Aspirateur sans sac SC4780 noir

Samsung - Four micro-ondes MW73B - blanc

SAMSUNG - Micro ondes 36 L - Micro ondes 36 L - CP1395ES

SAMSUNG - Micro ondes 42 L - Micro ondes 42 L - CQ1570U

Samsung - Micro-ondes combiné CE117PT-B

SAMSUNG - Micro-ondes Grill simultané GS89F-1SP

Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED

Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED + Office Famille et Etudiant 2010 1 poste

Samsung Aspirateur sans sac EcoStyle SC86H0 gris clair/bleu

Samsung B1930HD 18.5" LCD TNT HD

Samsung B5722 Double SIM

Samsung Bac papier supplémentaire ML-S3710A - 520 feuilles

Samsung Batterie ED-BP1310

Samsung batterie IA-BH130LB

Samsung batterie IA-BP420E

Samsung batterie IA-BP85ST

Samsung batterie SLB-10A

Samsung batterie SSB-690 ELS

Samsung BD-E5300

Samsung BD-E5500 3D

Samsung BD-E8300 3D

Samsung C3050 Stratus

Samsung Câble Adaptateur HDTV pour Galaxy Tab 8.9" / 10.1"

Samsung Câble data pour téléphones mobiles Samsung

Samsung Caméra additionnelle de vidéosurveillance SEB-1015RWP EX

Samsung caméra Skype CY-STC1100

Samsung CB20A12

Samsung Ch@t335 - GT-S3350 - Noir

Samsung Chargeur allume-cigares micro-USB

Samsung chargeur de voyage pour SGH-P260 et SGH-G600 - Modèle Noir

Samsung Chargeur secteur de voyage micro-USB

Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir

Samsung CLP-325 WiFi

Samsung CLP-325 WiFi + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir + MCL Samar câble imprimante USB 2.0

Samsung CLP-620ND - Imprimante Ethernet

Samsung CLX-3185 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir

Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi

Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir + MCL Samar câble imprimante USB 2.0

Samsung CLX-3185N Ethernet

Samsung CLX-3185W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet

Samsung CLX-6220FX - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet

Samsung Coque silicone Croisillons pour nexus S

Samsung CY-SMN1000D meuble TV

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go MZ-7PC128D 830 Series

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go MZ-7PC128N 830 Series

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256D 830 Series

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256N 830 Series

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 64 Go MZ-7PC064D 830 Series

Samsung dongle Wi-Fi WIS12ABGNX

Samsung DP7000A3B 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0

Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire + 1 Camel

Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire matelassée + 1 Rose

Samsung DV300F Argent/Rouge - WiFi

Samsung DV300F Noir - WiFi

Samsung E1150 - Silver

Samsung E2550

Samsung EcoBlue SC61E0 bleu azur

Samsung ES30 Noir

Samsung ES30 Noir + Carte SD 2 Go

Samsung Etui coque pour Galaxy Note - Noir

Samsung Etui cuir pour Galaxy S II - Noir

Samsung Etui flap en cuir pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - Noir

Samsung Eui cuir pour i9000 Galaxy S

Samsung Flash SEF15A

Samsung Flash SEF20A

Samsung Galaxy Ace s5830 (sous Androïd)

Samsung Galaxy Mini (sous Android)

Samsung Galaxy Note

Samsung Galaxy Note - Blanc

Samsung Galaxy Note - Rose

Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Blanc

Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Noir

Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Blanc 32 Go + Western Digital My Book Live 1 To Ethernet

Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Blanc 32 Go Wifi

Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Noir 16 Go 3G

Samsung Galaxy Tab 8,9" TFT Blanc 32 Go Wifi

Samsung Galaxy Xcover s5690 (sous Androïd) - Smartphone Samsung Solide certifié IP67

Samsung Galaxy Y Pro B5510 (sous Androïd)

Samsung Galaxy Y Young s5360 (sous Androïd)

Samsung Graveur DVD Externe Wifi - SE-208BW - Noir

Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 10,1"

Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 8,9"

Samsung HT-ES6200 3D WiFi

Samsung HW-E450

Samsung I9103 Galaxy R (sous Android)

Samsung Kit de connexion USB & SD pour Galaxy Tab 10.1"

Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SDE-3003P/EX

Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SME-4220

Samsung Kit Etui + Clavier Bluetooth pour Galaxy Tab 10,1" - Brun foncé

Samsung kit HDMI

Samsung kit papier 10 x 15 cm

Samsung kit piéton filaire stéréo Jack 3,5 mm

Samsung LE40D550

Samsung Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Galaxy S2 - Transparente/Miroir

Samsung Lot de 2 Protections d'écran pour i9000 Galaxy S

Samsung Lunettes 3D SSG-3050GB

SAMSUNG ME106V-SX

Samsung ME82V Micro-onde monofonction

SAMSUNG ME82V-SX

SAMSUNG Micro ondes MW87Y

SAMSUNG Micro-ondes combiné CE117APT B

SAMSUNG Micro-ondes combiné CE137NEMX

SAMSUNG Micro-ondes FW113T002

Samsung ML-1630/SCX4500

Samsung ML-2010D3

Samsung ML-2165 - Imprimante Monochrome

Samsung ML-2165W - Imprimante WiFi

Samsung ML-2545 - Imprimante Monochrome

Samsung ML-2955DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi

Samsung ML-2955ND - Imprimante Ethernet

Samsung ML-3310D - Imprimante Monochrome

Samsung ML-3710DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi

Samsung MV800 Noir + Etui Zadig & Voltaire Noir

Samsung NP300E7A-S03FR 17,3" LED

Samsung NP700Z5A-S02FR 15,6" LED

Samsung NX 60 mm f/2.8 ED OIS SSA Macro i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides

Samsung NX 85 mm f/1.4 ED SSA i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides

Samsung NX Pancake 16 mm f/2.4 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides

Samsung NX Pancake 20 mm f/2.8 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides

Samsung NX Pancake 30 mm f/2.0; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides

Samsung NX200 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 18 - 55 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 OIS + Flash SEF-8A NG8

Samsung NX200 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 20 - 50 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 ED i-Function + Flash SEF-8A NG8

Samsung Oreillette Bluetooth HM1200

Samsung Pack d'accessoire pour Galaxy S II I9100

Samsung Pack étui cuir + chargeur + protection d'écran pour Galaxy S

Samsung PL170 Noir

Samsung PL210 Noir

Samsung PL210 Noir + Carte mémoire Lexar MicroSDHC 8 Go

Samsung PL90 Noir et Rouge

Samsung Player mini 2 c3310 - Gris Métal

Samsung Player Mini C3300 - Noir

Samsung Port parallèle ML-PAR100 pour imprimante

Samsung RC530-S03FR 15,6" LED

Samsung RC730-S06FR 17,3" LED

Samsung RF712 E7P-C7261 17,3" LED 3D Blu-Ray USB 3.0 + lunettes

Samsung S22A300B 21,5" TFT

Samsung S22B350H 21,5" LED

Samsung S23A750D 23" LED 3D

Samsung S23B350H 23" LED

Samsung S24B300HL Moniteur 23,6" LED

Samsung S27B350H 27" LED

Samsung SC4340 noir ébène

Samsung SC4790 - Aspirateur sans sac - traineau - rouge

Samsung SCX-3405 - Imprimante Multifonctions

Samsung SCX-3405F - Imprimante Multifonctions

Samsung SCX-3405FW - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet

Samsung SCX-3405W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi

Samsung SCX-4200A

Samsung SCX-4729FD - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet

Samsung SCX-4729FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet & WiFi

Samsung SCX-5737FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet

Samsung SE-084D graveur DVD externe slim USB 2.0

Samsung SE208AB Graveur DVD externe USB 2.0

Samsung SLB07A pour ST50

Samsung SLB-11A pour Samsung WB1000

Samsung ST65 Noir

Samsung ST65 Rouge

Samsung station d'accueil

Samsung station d'accueil HD2

Samsung Station d'accueil pour tablette Galaxy Tab 10,1"

Samsung Station d'accueil pour tablette Galaxy Tab 8,9"

Samsung station d'accueil SSD-760 E2/EUR

Samsung SyncMaster C23A550U 23" LED

Samsung SyncMaster C23A750X 23" LED

Samsung Syncmaster S23A700D 23" LED 3D

Samsung SyncMaster S24A350H 24" LED

Samsung Syncmaster T22A550 21,5" LED Tuner TNT HD

Samsung Système de vidéosurveillance Baby Monitor SEW-3022WP/ EX

Samsung T22A350 21,5" LED Tuner TNT

Samsung Toner MLT-D101S pour imprimantes Samsung SCX-3405 & ML-2165 - Noir

Samsung UE19D4010 LED

Samsung UE19ES4000 LED

Samsung UE22ES5000 LED

Samsung UE22ES5410 LED

Samsung UE26EH4000 LED

Samsung UE26EH4500 LED

Samsung UE32D5000 LED

Samsung UE32EH4000 LED

Samsung UE32EH5000 LED

Samsung UE32ES5500 LED

Samsung UE32ES6300 LED 3D

Samsung UE32ES6710 LED 3D blanc

Samsung UE40D5000 LED

Samsung UE40D5710 LED

Samsung UE40D6500 LED 3D

Samsung UE40EH5000 LED

Samsung UE40ES5500 LED

Samsung UE40ES6300 LED 3D

Samsung UE40ES6710 LED 3D

Samsung UE46EH5000 LED

Samsung UE46ES5500 LED

Samsung UE46ES6300 LED 3D

Samsung UE46ES6710 LED 3D blanc

Samsung UE55ES6300 LED 3D

Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" + Microsoft Explorer Touch Mouse - Souris BlueTrack sans fil

Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0

Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0 + CaseLogic Sacoche double pour ordinateurs 14" & tablettes 10,1" - Grise

Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0 + Samsonite Sac pour ordinateur portable 14,1" S Noir

Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED + Microsoft Explorer Touch Mouse - Souris BlueTrack sans fil

Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED USB 3.0

Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED USB 3.0 + CaseLogic Sacoche double pour ordinateurs 14" & tablettes 10,1" - Grise

Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED USB 3.0 + Samsonite Sac pour ordinateur portable 14,1" S Noir

Samsung Viseur électronique EVF10

Samsung WB150F Blanc - WiFi

Samsung WB150F Noir - WiFi

Samsung WB700 Noir

Samsung WB750 Noir

Samsung WIS09ABGN LinkStick WLAN-Adapter

Samsung WMN250M accroche murale

Samsung YP-F3 bleu 2 Go

Samsung YP-F3 noir 2 Go

Samsung YP-F3 rose 2 Go

Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go

Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go + Casque JVC HA-S155-P rose

Samsung YP-U6 noir 2 Go

Samsung YP-U6 noir 4 Go

Samsung YP-U6 rose 2 Go

Samsung YP-U6 rose 4 Go

Samsung YP-Z3 blanc 4 Go

Samsung YP-Z3 bleu 4 Go

Samsung YP-Z3 rose 4 Go

E-MANUAL imagine the possibilities Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product. To receive more complete service, please register your product at www.samsung.com/register Model __________ Serial No.____________Contents Channel Setting • Using the INFO button (Now & Next guide) • Using Channel menu (Watch TV) • Schedule Manager • Channel List • Channel Manager • Retuning Channels 1 2 5 7 11 17 Basic Features • Picture Menu • Sound Menu 35 52 Preference Features • Network for LCD 550 series and above • System Menu • Support Menu 64 92 114 Advanced Features • My Downloads • Anynet+ • AllShare™ for LCD 550 series and above 122 149 163 Other Information • Analogue Channel Teletext Feature • Anti-theft Kensington Lock • Connections Common Interface Slot • Troubleshooting • Licence 167 171 173 175 192▶ ❑ Using the INFO button (Now & Next guide) The display identifies the current channel and the status of certain audio-video settings. The Now & Next guide shows daily TV programme information for each channel according to the broadcasting time. ● Scroll ◄, ► to view information for a desired programme while watching the current channel. ● Scroll ▲, ▼ to view information for other channels. If you want to move to the currently selected channel, press the ENTERE button. * It may differ depending on the model. All Information English◀ ▶ ◀ ❑ Using Channel menu (Watch TV) Press the CONTENT button to select Watch TV, then select the desired menu. Each screen will be displayed. ■ Guide The EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) information is provided by broadcasters. Using programme schedules provided by broadcasters, you can specify programmes you want to watch in advance so that the channel automatically changes to the selected programme channel at the specified time. Programme entries may appear blank or out of date depending on a channel status. Guide Schedule Manager Channel List Channel Manager My Downloads Watch TV Source English English▶ ◀ ▶ Using Guide C A Sche.Mgr B D C A B -24DHours C +24 A BCHours A DB D Ch. Mode ; Information k Page ESchedule DTV Air 3 five Home and Away 18:00 - 18:30 Drama Dani is devastated when scott makes clear his views on marriage... 800 five Guide 2:10 Tue 1 Jun 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 * It may differ depending on the model. Today 19:00 19:30 20:00 20:30 Tsunami Pri... The Curious... No Information No Information No Information 1❑❑❑❑❑❑❑❑❑❑Discovery 2 DiscoveryH&L 3 five 4 price-drop.tv 5 QVC ▼ 6 R4DTT Tine Team Fiv... No Information Dark Angel American Chopper Channel View - All Home and... English English◀ ▶ ◀ 1C A Red ( B Sche.Mgr D ): Moves to the reserved programmes in Sche.Mgr. C2A B Green ( D -24 Hours): Viewing the list of programmes to be broadcasted before 24 hours. 3 C Yellow ( A B +24D Hours): Viewing the list of programmes to be broadcasted after 24 hours. C A B4 D Blue (Ch. Mode): Select the type of channels you want to display on the Channel List window. (All, TV, Radio, Data/Other, Favourites 1-5) 5 ; (Information): Displays details of the selected programme. 6 k (Page): Move to previous or next page. 7 E (Watch / Schedule) ● When selecting the current programme, you can watch the selected programme. ● When selecting the future programme, you can reserve to watch the selected programme. To cancel the schedule, press the ENTERE button again and select Cancel Schedules. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ■ Schedule Manager Cancel or set the Timer Viewing to display the channel you want at the intended time. Using Timer Viewing You can set a desired channel to be displayed automatically at the intended time. Set the current time first to use this function. 1. Press the ENTERE button to add programme to schedule manually. 2. Press the ◄/►/▲/▼ button to set the Antenna, Channel, Repeat, Date, Start Time. ● Antenna: Select the desired broadcasting signal. ● Channel: Select the desired channel. English English◀ ▶ ◀ ● Repeat: Select Once, Manual, Sat~Sun, Mon~Fri or Everyday to set at your convenience. If you select Manual, you can set the day you want. N The (c) mark indicates the day is selected. ● Date: You can set desired date. N It is available when you select Once in Repeat. ● Start Time: You can set start time you want. N If you want to edit or cancel the schedule, select the reserved schedule on the Schedule List, and select the Edit or Cancel Schedules. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ■ Channel List You can view channel information, All, TV, Radio, Data/Other, Analogue or Favourites 1-5. N When you press the CH LIST button on the remote control, Channel List screen will be displayed at once. ● All: Shows all currently available channels. ● TV: Shows all currently available TV channels. ● Radio: Shows all currently radio channels. ● Data/Other: Shows all currently available MHP or other channels. ● Analogue: Shows all currently available analogue channels. ● Favourites 1-5: Shows all favourite channels. Air C A Antenna B CDProgramme A B View DLCH Mode EWatch k Page Channel List All 1 TV#6 2 The Spo... BBC ONE glogal News 3 Pardon... 4 Real Sp... 6 The Daily 7 Pros vs. 8 Today 9 Pardon... English English◀ ▶ ◀ N Favourites 1-5 will be displayed when you set Add to Favourites. N If you want to view favourite channels you added, press the CH LIST button and use L (CH Mode) button to move Favourites 1-5. N Using the remote control buttons with the Channel List. ●C A Red ( B Antenna D ): Switches to Air, Cable or Satellite for LCD 570 series . ● C Yellow ( A B Programme D View /Channel View): Displays the programme when digital channel is selected. Returns to the channel view. ● L (CH Mode/Channel): Move to the All, TV, Radio, Data/Other, Analogue or Favourites 1-5. / Change channels. N When you press the C (Programme A B D View) button, you can move to other channels using L (Channel) button. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ● E (Watch/Information): Watches the channel you select. / Displays details of the selected programme. ● k (Page): Move to next or previous page. Channel Status Display Icons Icon Operations a An analogue channel. ) A reserved programme. \ A locked channel. English English◀ ▶ ◀ How to use Timer Viewing in Channel List (digital channels only) When you set the Timer Viewing in Channel List, you can only set the programme in Programme View. 1. Press the CH LIST button, then select a desired digital channel. 2. Press the C (Programme A B D View) button. 3. Press the ▲ / ▼ buttons to select the desired programme, then press the ENTERE or INFO button. 4. Select Timer Viewing, then press the ENTERE button when done. N If you want to cancel Timer Viewing, follow steps 1 through 3. Select Cancel Schedules. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ■ Channel Manager You can edit the channel to your preference. ● ( ) Channels: Shows the channel list according to channel type. ● ( ) Favourites 1-5: Shows favourite channels. ● ( ) Satellite: Shows the channel list according to satellite signal. for LCD 570 series N Using the colour buttons with the Channel Manager. ●C A Red ( B Antenna D ): Switches to Air, Cable or Satellite for LCD 570 series . C A B ● D Blue (Sorting): Changes the list ordered by number or name. Air C A Antenna B D C A B D Sorting❑❑❑ESelect❑❑❑TTools❑❑❑R Return Channel Manager All Selected item: 4❑❑❑❑❑❑❑❑❑ChannelNumber * It may differ depending on the model. English English◀ ▶ ◀ Channel Status Display Icons Icon Operations a An analogue channel. c A channel selected. F A channel set as a favourite. \ A locked channel. T Displays the Channel Manager option menu. English English▶ ◀ ▶ Set each channel using the Channel Manager Option Channel Menu Manager t menu options (Watch, Add to Favourites/Edit Favourites, Lock/Unlock, Edit Channel Name, Edit Channel Number, Delete, Select All/Deselect All, Reorder for LCD 570 series ). Option menu items may differ depending on the channel status. 1. Select a channel and press the TOOLS button. 2. Select a function and change its settings. English English◀ ▶ ◀ ● Watch: Watch the selected channel. ● Add to Favourites/Edit Favourites: Set channels you watch frequently as favourites. / Add or Delete the selected channel in Favourites 1-5. 1. Select the Add to Favourites/Edit Favourites, then press the ENTERE button. N If the channel is already added to favourite channel, Edit Favourites will be shown. 2. Press the ENTERE button to select Favourites 1-5, then press the OK button. N One favourite channel can be added in several of Favourites among Favourites 1-5. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ● Lock/Unlock: Lock a channel so that the channel cannot be selected and viewed. N NOTE ● This function is available only when the Channel Lock is set to On. ● The PIN input screen appears. Enter your 4-digit PIN, Change the PIN using the Change PIN option. ● Edit Channel Name (analogue channels only): Assign your own channel name. ● Edit Channel Number: Edit the number by pressing the number buttons desired. N Some area may not be able to support Edit Channel Name and Edit Channel Number function. English English◀ ▶ ◀ ● Delete: You can delete a channel to display the channels you want. ● Deselect All: Deselect all the selected channels. N You can only select Deselect All when one or more channels are selected. ● Select All: Select all the channels in the channel list. ● Reorder (when the Antenna is set to Satellite) for LCD 570 series : Rearrange the channel list in numerical order. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ❑ Retuning Channels O MENUm → Channel → ENTERE ■ Antenna Before your television can begin memorising the available channels, you must (Air / Cable / Satellite for LCD 570 series )t specify the type of signal source that is connected to the TV (i.e. an Air, Cable or Satellite for LCD 570 series system). English English◀ ▶ ◀ ■ Country (depending on the country) The PIN input screen appears. Enter your 4 digit PIN number. ● Digital Channel: Change the country for digital channels. ● Analogue Channel: Change the country for analogue channels. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ■ Auto Tuning (depending on the country) Scans for a channel automatically and stores in the TV. N Automatically allocated programme numbers may not correspond to actual or desired programme numbers. If a channel is locked, the PIN input window appears. ● Auto Tuning Air / Cable / Satellite for LCD 570 series : Select the antenna source to memorise. Digital & Analogue / Digital / Analogue: Select the channel source to memorise. English English◀ ▶ ◀ When Antenna Source is set to Air or Cable: When selecting Cable → Digital & Analogue or Digital: Provide a value to scan for cable channels. – Search Mode (Full / Network / Quick): Scans for all channels with active broadcast stations and stores them in the TV. N If you select Quick, you can set up the Network, Network ID, Frequency, Modulation and Symbol Rate manually by pressing the button on the remote control. – Network (Auto / Manual): Selects the Network ID setting mode among Auto or Manual. – Network ID: When Network is Manual, you can set up Network ID using the numeric buttons. English English▶ ◀ ▶ – Frequency: Displays the frequency for the channel. (differs in each country) – Modulation: Displays available modulation values. – Symbol Rate: Displays available symbol rates. ● Cable Search Option (depending on the country & cable channels only) Sets additional search options such as the frequency and symbol rate for a cable network search. Start frequency / Stop frequency: Set the start or stop frequency (differs in each country). Symbol Rate: Displays available symbol rates. Modulation: Displays available modulation values. English English◀ ▶ ◀ ■ Manual Tuning Scans for a channel manually and stores in the TV. N If a channel is locked, the PIN input window appears. N According to channel source, Manual Tuning may be supported. When Antenna Source is set to Air, Cable or Satellite: ● Digital Channel Tuning: Scans for a digital channel manually and stores in the TV. Press the C A (New B ) button to search the digital channels. When D scanning has finished, a channel is updated in the channel list. – When selecting Antenna → Air: Channel, Frequency, Bandwidth – When selecting Antenna → Cable: Frequency, Modulation, Symbol Rate – When selecting Antenna → Satellite: Satellite, Channel for LCD 570 series English English▶ ◀ ▶ ● Analogue Channel Tuning : Scans for an analogue channel. Press the C A B D (New) button to search the digital channels by adjusting the Programme, Colour System, Sound System, Channel, Search. N Channel mode – P (programme mode): When tuning is complete, the broadcasting stations in your area have been assigned to position numbers from P0 to P99. You can select a channel by entering the position number in this mode. – C (aerial channel mode) / S (cable channel mode): These two modes allow you to select a channel by entering the assigned number for each aerial broadcasting station or cable channel. English English◀ ▶ ◀ When Antenna Source is set to Satellite for LCD 570 series : ● Transponder: Selects the transponder using the up/down buttons. ● Scan Mode (All Channels / Free Channels Only): Selects either free or all channels to store. ● Network Search (Disable / Enable): Enable / Disable network search using the up/down buttons. ● Signal Quality: Display the current status of broadcasting signal. N Information on a satellite and its transponder is subject to change depending on the broadcasting conditions. N When setting is completed, move to Search and press the ENTERE button. Channel scan is started. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ■ Satellite System for LCD 570 series The PIN input screen appears. Enter your 4 digit PIN number. Satellite System is available when Antenna is set to Satellite. Before running Auto Store, set Satellite System. Then channel scan is run normally. ● Satellite Selection: You can choose the satellites for this TV. N This function is available when Antenna is set to Satellite. ● LNB Power (Off / On): Enables or disables the power supply for the LNB. ● LNB Settings: Configures the outdoor equipment. Satellite: Selects the satellite for receiving digital broadcasts. Transponder: Selects a transponder from the list or adds a new transponder. DiSEqC Mode: Selects DiSEqC mode for the selected LNB. Lower LNB Oscillators: Sets the LNB oscillators to a lower frequency. English English◀ ▶ ◀ Upper LNB Oscillators: Sets the LNB oscillators to a higher frequency. Tone 22 kHz (Off / On / Auto): Selects the Tone 22 kHz depending on the LNB type. For a universal LNB it should be Auto. Signal Quality: Display the current status of broadcasting signal. ● SatCR/Unicable Settings N It is available when LNB Power is set to On. N During using this function, the sound will be mute temporarily. SatCR/Unicable Settings(On / Off): Enable or disable single cable installation support. Slot Number: Select the SatCR user slot number for this receiver. Choose it in the range of 1 to 8. English English▶ ◀ ▶ Slot Frequency: Enter the appropriate frequency to receive the signal from SatCR. N It has the entire range from 950MHz to 2150NHz. The predefined values are 1210MHz, 1420MHz, 1680MHz, 2040MHz. Detect Slot Frequency: Detect the signal frequency automatically for the selected slot number. Verify Slot Frequency: Verify that the entered frequency corresponds to the selected slot number. English English◀ ▶ ◀ ● Positioner Settings: Configures the antenna positioner. Positioner (On / Off): Enables or disables the positioned control. Positioner Type (USALS / DiSEqC 1.2): Sets the positioned type between DiSEqC 1.2 and USALS(Universal Satellite Automatic Location System). – My Longitude: Sets the longitude for my location. – My Latitude: Sets the latitude for my location. – Satellite Longitude Settings: Sets the longitude of user defined satellites. English English▶ ◀ ▶ User Mode: Sets the position of satellite antenna according to each satellite. If you store the current position of satellite antenna according to a certain satellite, when the signal of that satellite is needed, the satellite antenna can be moved to pre-populated position. – Satellite: Selects the satellite to set the position for. – Transponder: Selects a transponder from the list for signal reception. – Moving Mode: Selects the movement mode between discrete and continuous movement. – Step Size: Adjusts the step size degrees for the antenna rotation. Step Size is available when Moving Mode is set to Step. – Go to Stored Position: Rotates the antenna to the stored satellite position. English English◀ ▶ ◀ – Antenna Position: Adjusts and stores the antenna position for the selected satellite. – Store Current Position: Stores current position as the selected positioner limit. – Signal Quality: Display the current status of broadcasting signal. Installer Mode: Sets limits to the scope of movement of satellite antenna or reset the position. Generally, installation guide uses this function. – Limit Position (East / West): Selects the direction of the positioner Limit. – Antenna Position: Adjusts and stores the antenna position for the selected satellite. English English▶ ◀ ▶ – Store Current Position: Stores the current position as the selected positioner Limit. – Go to Zero: Moves the antenna to the reference position. – Reset Positioner Limit: Allows the antenna to rotate over the full arc. ● Reset All Setting (OK / Cancel): All satellite settings will be reset to the initial values. English English◀ ▶ ◀ ■ Edit Channel Number (Disable / Enable) (depending on the country) Use this to change channel number. When channel number is changed, channel information is not updated automatically. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ■ Fine Tune (analogue channels only) If the signal is weak or distorted, fine tune the channel manually. N Fine tuned channels are marked with an asterisk “*”. N To reset the fine-tuning, select Reset. English English◀ ▶ ◀ ■ Transfer Channel List (depending on the country) Imports or exports the channel map. You should connect a USB storage to use this function. N The PIN number input screen appears. Enter your 4 digit PIN number. ● Import from USB: Import channel list from USB. ● Export to USB: Export channel list to USB. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ❑ Changing the Preset Picture Mode O MENUm → Picture → Picture Mode → ENTERE ■ Picture Mode Select your preferred picture type. N When connecting a PC, you can only make changes to the Entertain and Standard. ● Dynamic: Suitable for a bright room. ● Standard: Suitable for a normal environment. ● Natural for LCD 550 series and above : Suitable for reducing eye strain. ● Movie: Suitable for watching movies in a dark room. ● Entertain: Suitable for watching movies and games. N It is only available when connecting a PC. English English◀ ▶ ◀ ❑ Adjusting Picture Settings ■ Samsung MagicAngle for LCD 450 (19”, 22”) Model O MENUm → Picture → Samsung MagicAngle → ENTERE Adjust screen viewing Angle to optimize screen quality according to your viewing position. ● Samsung MagicAngle: When viewing the screen at an angle from below or bove by setting the appropriate mode for each position you can obtain a similar picture quality as viewing the screen directly from the front. Off: Select when viewing from the front position. Lean Back Mode: Select when viewing from a slightly lower position. Standing Mode: Select when viewing from the upper position. ● Mode: Adjust screen viewing angle. N When Samsung MagicAngle is set to Lean Back Mode or Standing Mode, Gamma is not available. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ■ Backlight / Contrast / Brightness / Sharpness / Colour / Tint (G/R) Your television has several setting options for picture quality control. O MENUm → Picture → Backlight → ENTERE N NOTE ● In analogue TV, Ext., AV modes of the PAL system, the Tint (G/R) function is not available. ● When connecting a PC, you can only make changes to Backlight, Contrast, Brightness and Sharpness. ● Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external device connected to the TV. English English◀ ▶ ◀ ■ Screen Adjustment Set the various picture options such as picture size and aspect ratio. ● Picture Size: Your cable box/satellite receiver may have its own set of screen sizes as well. However, we highly recommend you use 16:9 mode most of the time. Auto Wide: Automatically adjusts the picture size to the 16:9 aspect ratio. 16:9: Sets the picture to 16:9 wide mode. Wide Zoom: Magnifies the picture size more than 4:3. N Adjusts the Position by using ▲, ▼ buttons. Zoom: Magnifies the 16:9 wide pictures vertically to fit the screen size. N Adjusts the Zoom or Position by using ▲, ▼ button. English English▶ ◀ ▶ 4:3: Sets the picture to basic (4:3) mode. N Do not watch in 4:3 format for a long time. Traces of borders displayed on the left, right and centre of the screen may cause image retention (screen burn) which are not covered by the warranty. Screen Fit: Displays the full image without any cut-off when HDMI (720p / 1080i / 1080p) or Component (1080i / 1080p) signals are inputted. Smart View1 for LCD 550 series and above : Reduces original screen by 50%. Smart View2 for LCD 550 series and above : Reduces original screen by 25%. N NOTE ● Smart View1 is enabled only in HDMI mode. ● Smart View2 is enabled only in DTV and HDMI modes. ● The picture size can vary depending on the input resolution when content is played using Videos under My Downloads. English English◀ ▶ ◀ ● Position: Adjust the picture position. It is only available in Screen Fit or Wide Zoom. ● Zoom/Position: Adjust the picture position. It is only available in Zoom. N NOTE ● After selecting Screen Fit in HDMI (1080i / 1080p) or Component (1080i / 1080p) mode, you may need to centre the picture: 1. Press the u or d button to select Position. 2. Press the ENTERE button. 3. Press the u, d, l or r button to move the picture. ● Depending on the input source, the picture size options may vary. ● If you want to reset the position you adjusted, select Reset in the Position screen. The picture will be set to its default position. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ● The available items may differ depending on the selected mode. ● When connecting a PC, only 16:9 and 4:3 modes can be adjusted. ● Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external device connected to an input on the TV. ● If you use the Screen Fit function with HDMI 720p input, 1 line will be cut at the top, bottom, left and right as in the overscan function. ● 4:3 Screen Size (16:9 / Wide Zoom / Zoom / 4:3): Available only when picture size is set to Auto Wide. You can determine the desired picture size at the 4:3 WSS (Wide Screen Service) size or the original size. Each European country requires different picture size. English English◀ ▶ ◀ ● PC Screen Adjustment N It is available in PC mode. Coarse / Fine: Removes or reduces picture noise. If the noise is not removed by Fine-tuning alone, then adjust the frequency as best as possible (Coarse) and Fine-tune again. After the noise has been reduced, readjust the picture so that it is aligned to the centre of screen. Position: Adjust the PC’s screen positioning if it does not fit the TV screen. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to adjust the Vertical-Position. Press the ◄ or ► button to adjust the Horizontal-Position. Image Reset: Resets the image to default settings. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ■ O Auto MENU Adjustment m → Picture t→ Auto Adjustment → ENTERE Adjust frequency values/positions and fine tune the settings automatically. N It is available in PC mode. N Not available when connecting with an HDMI/DVI cable. Using Your TV as a Computer (PC) Display Setting Up Your PC Software (Based on Windows XP) Depending on the version of Windows and the video card, the actual screens on your PC may differ in which case the same basic set-up information will almost always be applied. (If not, contact your computer manufacturer or Samsung Dealer.) English English◀ ▶ ◀ 1. Click on “Control Panel” on the Windows start menu. 2. Click on “Appearance and Themes” in the “Control Panel” window and a display dialog-box will appear. 3. Click on “Display” and a display dialog box will appear. 4. Navigate to the “Settings” tab on the display dialog-box. ● The correct size setting (resolution] ● If a vertical-frequency option exists on your display settings dialog box, the correct value is “60” or “60 Hz”. Otherwise, just click “OK” and exit the dialog box. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ❑ Changing the Picture Options ■ Advanced Settings O MENUm → Picture → Advanced Settings → ENTERE (available in Standard / Movie mode) You can adjust the detailed setting for the screen including colour and contrast. N When connecting a PC, you can only make changes to Gamma and White Balance. ● Black Tone (Off / Dark / Darker / Darkest): Select the black level to adjust the screen depth. U Move EEnter R Return Advanced Settings Black Tone : Off ► Dynamic Contrast : Medium Shadow Detail : 0 Gamma : 0 RGB Only Mode : Off Colour Space : Native White Balance ▼ English English◀ ▶ ◀ ● Dynamic Contrast (Off / Low / Medium / High): Adjust the screen contrast. ● Shadow Detail: Increase the brightness of dark images. ● Gamma: Adjust the primary colour intensity. ● RGB Only Mode (Off / Red / Green / Blue): Displays the Red, Green and Blue colour for making fine adjustments to the hue and saturation. ● Colour Space (Auto / Native): Adjust the range of colours available to create the image. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ● White Balance: Adjust the colour temperature for a more natural picture. R-Offset / G-Offset / B-Offset: Adjust each colour’s (red, green, blue) darkness. R-Gain / G-Gain / B-Gain: Adjust each colour’s (red, green, blue) brightness. Reset: Resets the White Balance to it’s default settings. ● Flesh Tone: Emphasize pink “Flesh Tone.” ● Edge Enhancement (Off / On): Emphasize object boundaries. ● Motion Lighting (Off / On): Reduce power consumption by brightness control adapted motion. English English◀ ▶ ◀ ■ Picture Options O MENUm → Picture → Picture Options → ENTERE N When connecting a PC, you can only make changes to the Colour Tone. ● Colour Tone (Cool / Standard / Warm1 / Warm2) N Warm1 or Warm2 will be deactivated when the picture mode is Dynamic. N Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external device connected to an input on the TV. U Move E Enter R Return Picture Options Colour Tone : Standard ► Digital Noise Filter : Auto MPEG Noise Filter : Auto HDMI Black Level : Normal Film Mode : Off English English▶ ◀ ▶ ● Digital Noise Filter (Off / Low / Medium / High / Auto / Auto Visualisation): If the broadcast signal received by your TV is weak, you can activate the Digital Noise Filter feature to reduce any static and ghosting that may appear on the screen. N When the signal is weak, try other options until the best picture is displayed. Auto Visualisation: When changing analogue channels, displays signal strength. N Only available for analogue channels. N When the INFO button is pressed, the signal strength bar is displayed. N When bar is green, you are receiving the best possible signal. ● MPEG Noise Filter (Off / Low / Medium / High / Auto): Reduces MPEG noise to provide improved picture quality. English English◀ ▶ ◀ ● HDMI Black Level (Low / Normal): Selects the black level on the screen to adjust the screen depth. N Available only in HDMI mode (RGB signals). ● Film Mode (Off / Auto1 / Auto2): Sets the TV to automatically sense and process film signals from all sources and adjust the picture for optimum quality. N Available in TV mode, AV, COMPONENT (480i / 1080i) and HDMI (1080i). N If the screen does not seem natural, change its option to Off / Auto1 / Auto2 in Film Mode. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ■ Reset Picture (OK / Cancel) Resets your current picture mode to its default settings. English English◀ ▶ ◀ ❑ Changing the Preset Sound Mode O MENUm → Sound → Sound Mode → ENTERE ■ Sound ● Standard Mode : Selects the normal sound mode. t ● Music: Emphasizes music over voices. ● Movie: Provides the best sound for movies. ● Clear Voice: Emphasizes voices over other sounds. ● Amplify: Increase the intensity of high-frequency sound to allow a better listening experience for the hearing impaired. N If Speaker Select is set to External Speaker, Sound Mode is disabled. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ❑ Sound Systems, Etc. O MENUm → Sound → Sound Effect → ENTERE ■ Sound Effect (standard sound mode only) Use the up and down arrow keys to select an option, and then press ENTERE. ● SRS TruSurround HD (Off / On) (standard sound mode only) This function provides a virtual 5.1 channel surround sound experience through a pair of speakers using HRTF (Head Related Transfer Function) technology. ● SRS TruDialog (Off / On) (standard sound mode only) This function allows you to increase the intensity of a voice over background music or sound effects so that dialog can be heard more clearly. English English◀ ▶ ◀ ● Equalizer Use Equalizer to customize sound setting for each speaker. Balance: Adjusts the balance between the right and left speaker. 100Hz / 300Hz / 1kHz / 3kHz / 10kHz (Bandwidth Adjustment): Adjusts the level of specific bandwidth frequencies. Reset: Resets the equalizer to its default settings. N If Speaker Select is set to External Speaker, Sound Mode is disabled. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ■ Broadcast Audio Options ● Audio Language (digital channels only) Change the default value for audio languages. N The available language may differ depending on the broadcast. ● Audio Format (digital channels only) When sound is emitted from both the main speaker and the audio receiver, a sound echo may occur due to the decoding speed difference between the main speaker and the audio receiver. In this case, use the TV Speaker function. N Audio Format option may differ depending on the broadcast. 5.1ch Dolby digital sound is only available when connecting an external speaker through an optical cable. English English◀ ▶ ◀ ● Audio Description (not available in all locations) (digital channels only) This function handles the Audio Stream for the AD (Audio Description) which is sent along with the Main audio from the broadcaster. N Audio Description (Off / On): Turn the audio description function on or off. N Volume: Adjust the audio description volume. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ■ Additional Setting ● DTV Audio Level (MPEG / HE-AAC): (digital channels only) This function allows you to reduce the disparity of a voice signal (which is one of the signals received during a digital TV broadcast) to a desired level. N According to the type of broadcast signal, MPEG / HE-AAC can be adjusted between -10dB and 0dB. N To increase or decrease the volume, adjust between the range 0 and -10 respectively. English English◀ ▶ ◀ ● SPDIF Output: SPDIF (Sony Philips Digital InterFace) is used to provide digital sound, reducing interference going to speakers and various digital devices such as a DVD player. Audio Format: You can select the Digital Audio output(SPDIF) format. The available Digital Audio output(SPDIF) format may differ depending on the input source. N By connecting to 5.1ch speakers in a Dolby Digital setup, maximize your interactive 3D sound experience. Audio Delay: Correct audio-video sync problems, when watching TV or video, and when listening to digital audio output using an external device such as an AV receiver (0ms ~ 250ms). English English▶ ◀ ▶ ● Dolby Digital Comp (Line / RF): This function minimizes signal disparity between a dolby digital signal and a voice signal (i.e. MPEG Audio, HE-AAC, ATV Sound). N Select Line to obtain dynamic sound, and RF to reduce the difference between loud and soft sounds at night time. Line: Set the output level for signals greater or less than -31dB (reference) to either -20dB or -31dB. RF: Set the output level for signals greater or less than -20dB (reference) to either -10dB or -20dB. English English◀ ▶ ◀ ■ Speaker Settings ● Speaker Select (External Speaker / TV Speaker) A sound echo may occur due to a difference in decoding speed between the main speaker and the audio receiver. In this case, set the TV to External Speaker. N When Speaker Select is set to External Speaker, the volume and MUTE buttons will not operate and the sound settings will be limited. N When Speaker Select is set to External Speaker. ● TV Speaker: Off, External Speaker: On N When Speaker Select is set to TV Speaker. ● TV Speaker: On, External Speaker: On N If there is no video signal, both speakers will be mute. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ● Auto Volume (Off / Normal / Night) To equalize the volume level on each channel, set to Normal. Night: This mode provides an improved sound experience compared to Normal mode, making almost no noise. It is useful at night. N To use the volume control on the source device connected to the TV as shown below, set Auto Volume to Off on the TV. Otherwise, a change to the volume control of the source device may not be applied. English English◀ ▶ ◀ ■ Reset Sound (OK / Cancel) Reset all sound settings to the factory defaults. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ❑ Selecting the Sound Mode O DUAL I-II → ENTERE When you set to Dual I-II, the current sound mode is displayed on the screen. Audio Type Dual I-II Default A2 Stereo Mono Mono Automatic change Stereo Stereo ↔ Mono Dual Dual I ↔ Dual II Dual I NICAM Stereo Mono Mono Automatic change Stereo Mono ↔ Stereo Dual Mono → Dual I  Dual II  Dual I NIf the stereo signal is weak and an automatic switching, occurs, then switch to the mono. NOnly activated in stereo sound signal. NOnly available when the Source is set to TV. English English◀ ▶ ◀ ❑ Setting the Network For LCD 550 series and above ■ Network Settings O MENUm → Network → Network Settings → ENTERE Set the network connection to use AllShare™ and perform software upgrade. ■ Network Status O MENUm → Network → Network Status → ENTERE You can check the current network and Internet status. ■ AllShare Settings O MENUm → Network → AllShare Settings → ENTERE Selects whether to use the call arrivals text message contents, and schedules set on the network. For details on set up options, refer to the “AllShare™” instructions. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ❑ Connecting to a Wired Network You can attach your TV to your LAN using cable in three ways: ● You can attach your TV to your LAN by connecting the LAN port on the back of your TV to an external modem using a LAN cable. See the diagram below. The Modem Port on the Wall External Modem (ADSL / VDSL / Cable TV) TV Rear Panel Modem Cable LAN Cable English English◀ ▶ ◀ ● You can attach your TV to your LAN by connecting the LAN port on the back of your TV to a IP Sharer which is connected to an external modem. Use LAN cable for the connection. See the diagram below. The Modem Port on the Wall External Modem (ADSL / VDSL / Cable TV) IP Sharer (having DHCP server) TV Rear Panel Modem Cable LAN Cable LAN Cable English English▶ ◀ ▶ ● Depending on how your network is configured, you may be able to attach your TV to your LAN by connecting the LAN port on the back of your TV directly to a network wall outlet using a LAN cable. See the diagram below. Note that the wall outlet is attached to a modem or router elsewhere in your house. The LAN Port on the Wall TV Rear Panel LAN Cable English English◀ ▶ ◀ ● If you have a Dynamic Network, you should use an ADSL modem or router that supports Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). Modems and routers that support DHCP automatically provide the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS values your TV needs to access the Internet so you do not have to enter them manually. Most home networks are Dynamic Networks. Some networks require a Static IP address. If your network requires a Static IP address, you must enter the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS values manually on your TV’s Cable Setup Screen when you set up the network connection. To get the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS values, contact your Internet Service Provider (ISP). If you have a Windows computer, you can also get these values through your computer. N You can use ADSL modems that support DHCP if your network requires a Static IP address. ADSL modems that support DHCP also let you use Static IP addresses. N A network speed of lower than 10 Mbps is not supported. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ■ Network Setup (Auto) Use the Automatic Network Setup when connecting your TV to a network that supports DHCP. To set up your TV’s cable network connection automatically, follow these steps: How to set up automatically 1. Go to Network Settings screen. To enter it, follow the directions of Network Settings. 2. Select the Wired. 3. The network connection screen appears, and network setting is done. U Move E Enter e Exit Network Settings Select a network connection type. Wired Wireless (general) WPS(PBC) One Foot Connection Connect to the network using a LAN cable. Please make sure that the LAN cable is connected. English English◀ ▶ ◀ N If it fails to set automatically, check the connection of LAN port. N If you cannot find network connection values or if you want to set connection manually, set it to Manual. Refer to following “How to set up manually”. a Previous L Move E Enter R Return Network Settings Wired network and Internet connection completed. IP Settings OK MAC Address 00:40:30:30:20:10 IP Address 192.168.10.21 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Gateway 192.168.10.1 DNS Server 203.248.252.2 Internet is connected successfully. If you have a problem with using Internet service, contact your Internet service provider. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ■ Network Setup (Manual) Use the Manual Network Setup when connecting your TV to a network that requires a Static IP address. Getting the Network Connection Values To get the Network connection values on most Windows computers, follow these steps: 1. Right click the Network icon on the bottom right of the screen. 2. In the pop-up menu that appears, click Status. 3. On the dialog that appears, click the Support tab. 4. On the Support Tab, click the Details button. The Network connection values are displayed. English English◀ ▶ ◀ How to set up manually To set up your TV’s cable network connection manually, follow these steps: 1. Follow Steps 1 through 2 in the “How to set up automatically” procedure. 2. Select the IP Settings on network test screen. 3. Set IP Mode to Manual. 4. Press the ▼ button on your remote to go to the first entry field. U Move E Enter R Return IP Settings IP Mode Manual ► IP Address 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 Subnet Mask 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 Gateway 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 DSN Mode Manual DNS Server 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 OK English English▶ ◀ ▶ 5. Enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS Server values. Use the number buttons on your remote to enter numbers and the arrow buttons to move from one entry field to another. 6. When done, select the OK. 7. The network connection screen appears, and network setting is done. English English◀ ▶ ◀ ❑ Connecting to a Wireless Network For LCD 550 series and above To connect your TV to your network wireless, you need a wireless router or modem and a Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter (WIS09ABGN, WIS09ABGN2, WIS10ABGN), which you connect to your TV’s back or side panel USB port. See the illustration below. LAN Cable Wireless IP sharer (Wireless router having DHCP Server) Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter TV Side Panel or The LAN Port on the Wall English English▶ ◀ ▶ Samsung’s Wireless LAN adapter is sold separately and is offered by select retailers, Ecommerce sites. Samsung’s Wireless LAN adapter supports the IEEE 802.11a/b/g and n communication protocols. Samsung recommends using IEEE 802.11n. When you play video over a network connection, the video may not be played smoothly. N NOTE ● You must use the “Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter” (WIS09ABGN, WIS09ABGN2, WIS10ABGN) to use a wireless network. ● Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter and The USB extension Cable are sold separately and are offered by select retailers and Ecommerce sites. English English◀ ▶ ◀ ● To use a wireless network, your TV must be connected to a wireless IP sharer (either a router or a modem). If the wireless IP sharer supports DHCP, your TV can use a DHCP or static IP address to connect to the wireless network. ● Select a channel for the wireless IP sharer that is not currently being used. If the channel set for the wireless IP sharer is currently being used by another device nearby, this will result in interference and communication failure. ● If you apply a security system other than the systems listed below, it will not work with the TV. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ● If HIGH PURE THROUGHPUT (Greenfield) 802.11n mode is selected and the Encryption type is set to WEP, TKIP or TKIP AES (WPS2Mixed) for your wireless router, Samsung TVs will not support a connection in compliance with new Wi-Fi certification specifications. ● If your wireless router supports WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup), you can connect to the network via PBC (Push Button Configuration) or PIN (Personal Identification Number). WPS will automatically configure the SSID and WPA key in either mode. English English◀ ▶ ◀ ● If your router, modem, or device is not certified, it may not connect to the TV via the “Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter.” ● Ensure the TV is turned off before you connect the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter. ● Connection Methods: You can setup the wireless network connection on five ways. – Auto Setup (Using the Auto Network Search function) – Manual Setup – WPS (PBC) – One Foot Connection – Ad hoc ● The Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter may not be recognized when using a connection via a USB hub or via a USB extension cable other than the cable supplied. English English▶ ◀ ▶ Notice The picture may appear corrupted or have static for some channels when the TV is connected to the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter. In such a case, establish a connection using one of the following methods or connect the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter using a USB cable in a place that is not affected by radio interference. Method 1 Connect using the USB right angle adapter To connect the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter using the USB right angle adapter, follow these steps: 1. Connect the USB right angle adapter to the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter. 2. Connect the other end of the right angle adapter to the USB (HDD) port. English English◀ ▶ ◀ Method 2 Connect via an extension cable To reconnect the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter using the extension cable, follow these steps: 1. Connect the extension cable to the USB (HDD) port. 2. Connect the extension cable and Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter. 3. Attach the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter to the back of the TV near the top, using double-sided adhesive tape. N The Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter should be installed in an interferencefree area in order to avoid interference between the adapter and tuner. or English English▶ ◀ ▶ ■ Network Setup (Auto) Most wireless networks have an optional security system that requires devices that access the network to transmit an encrypted security code called an Access or Security Key. The Security Key is based on a Pass Phrase, typically a word or a series of letters and numbers of a specified length you were asked to enter when you set up security for your wireless network. If you use this method of setting up the network connection, and have a Security Key for your wireless network, you will have to enter the Pass Phrase during the setup process. How to set up automatically 1. Go to Network Settings screen. To enter it, follow the directions of Network Settings. English English◀ ▶ ◀ 2. Select the Wireless(general). 3. The Network function searches for available wireless networks. When done, it displays a list of the available networks. 4. In the list of networks, press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a network, and then press the ENTERE button. N If the wireless router is set to Hidden (Invisible), you have to select Add Network and enter the correct network Name (SSID) and Security key to establish the connection. 5. If the Security screen pop-up appears, go to step 6. If you select the wireless router which does not have security, go to step 7. English English U Move E Enter R Return Network Settings Select a network connection type. Wired Wireless (general) WPS(PBC) One Foot Connection Set up wireless network by selecting your wireless router. You may need to enter security key depending on the setting of the wireless router.▶ ◀ ▶ 6. If the wireless router has security, enter the Security key(Security or PIN), then select Done. N When you enter the Security key(Security or PIN), use ▲/▼/◄ /► buttons on your remote to select number/ characters. N You should be able to find the Pass Phrase on one of the set up screens you used to set up your router or modem. 7. The network connection screen appears, and network setting is done. N If it fails to set Security key(Security or PIN), select Retry or IP Settings. N If you want to set connection manually, select the IP Settings. Refer to following “How to set up manually”. a Previous n Move E Enter R Return Network Settings Enter security key. 0 entered a g m s a/A b h n t c i o u F d j p v e k q w Delete f l r x Space 1 4 7 y 2 5 8 z Done 3 6 9 0 English English◀ ▶ ◀ ■ Network Setup (Manual) Use the Manual Network Setup when connecting your TV to a network that requires a Static IP address. Getting the Network Connection Values To get the Network connection values on most Windows computers, follow these steps: 1. Right click the Network icon on the bottom right of the screen. 2. In the pop-up menu that appears, click Status. 3. On the dialog that appears, click the Support tab. 4. On the Support Tab, click the Details button. The Network connection values are displayed. English English▶ ◀ ▶ How to set up manually To set up your TV’s cable network connection manually, follow these steps: 1. Follow Steps 1 through 7 in the “How to set up automatically” procedure. 2. Select the IP Settings on network test screen. 3. Set IP Mode to Manual. 4. Press the ▼ button on your remote to go to the first entry field. 5. Enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS Server values. Use the number buttons on your remote to enter numbers and the arrow buttons to move from one entry field to another. 6. When done, select the OK. 7. The network connection screen appears, and network setting is done. English English◀ ▶ ◀ ■ Network Setup (WPS(PBC)) How to set up using WPS(PBC) If your router has a WPS (PBS) button, follow these steps: 1. Go to Network Settings screen. To enter it, follow the directions of Network Settings. 2. Select the WPS(PBC). 3. Press the WPS(PBC) button on your router within 2 minutes. Your TV automatically acquires all the network setting values it needs and connects to your network. 4. The network connection screen appears, and network setting is done. U Move E Enter R Return Network Settings Select a network connection type. Wired Wireless (general) WPS(PBC) One Foot Connection Connect to the wireless router easily by pressing the WPS(PBC) button. Choose this if your wireless router supports Push button configuration(PBC). English English▶ ◀ ▶ ■ Network Setup (One Foot Connection) The One Foot Connection make you easy to connect samsung TV and samsung wireless router by placing samsung wireless router within 1foot(25cm) from samsung TV. If your wireless router does not support One Foot Connection, you must connect using one of the other methods. N You can check for equipment that supports One Foot Connection on www. samsung.com. How to set up using One Foot Connection Turn on the power of wireless router and TV. 1. Go to Network Settings screen. To enter it, follow the directions of Network Settings. English English◀ ▶ ◀ 2. Select the One Foot Connection. 3. Place the wireless router in parallel with the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter giving a gap no larger than 25cm. 4. Wait until the connection is automatically established. 5. The network connection screen appears, and network setting is done. 6. Place the wireless router in a desired location. N If the wireless router settings change or you install a new wireless router, you must perform the One Foot Connection procedure again, beginning from Step 1. U Move E Enter R Return Network Settings Select a network connection type. Wired Wireless (general) WPS(PBC) One Foot Connection Connect to wireless network automatically if your wireless router supports One Foot Connection. Select this connection type after placing the wireless router within 10 inches(25 cm) of your TV. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ■ Network Setup (Ad-Hoc) You can connect to a mobile device supporting Ad-hoc without an wireless router through the “Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter”. When connecting mobile device, you can use files on device or connect internet using AllShare or Multimedia function. How to connect to new Ad-hoc 1. Go to Network Settings screen. To enter it, follow the directions of Network Settings. 2. Select the Wireless(general). 3. When select the Ad hoc, the message "Ad hoc service supports a direct connection with Wi-Fi compatible devices like a cell phone or PC. The existing network system may have limited functionality. Do you want to change the network connection?". is displayed. English English◀ ▶ ◀ 4. Input the generated Network Name (SSID) and Security Key into the device you want to connect. N If network does not operate normally, check the Network Name (SSID) and Security key again. An incorrect Security key may cause a malfunction. N If a device is connected once, it is displayed in Network Setting list. When you connect it again, you can find it in network setting list. English English▶ ◀ ▶ If Your TV Fails to Connect to the Internet Your TV may not be able to connect to the Internet because your ISP has permanently registered the MAC address (a unique identifying number) of your PC or modem, which it then authenticates each time you connect to the Internet as a way of preventing unauthorized access. As your TV has a different MAC address, your ISP can not authenticate its MAC address, and your TV can not connect. To resolve this problem, ask your ISP about the procedures required to connect devices other than a PC (such as your TV) to the Internet. If your Internet service provider requires an ID or password to connect to the Internet, your TV may not be able to connect to the Internet. If this is the case, you must enter your ID or password when connecting to the Internet. The internet connection may fail because of a firewall problem. If this is the case, contact your Internet service provider. If you cannot connect to the Internet even after you have followed the procedures of your Internet service provider, please contact Samsung Electronics. English English◀ ▶ ◀ ❑ Setting the Time O MENUm → System → Time → ENTERE ■ Time N The current time will appear every time you press the INFO button. ● Clock: Setting the clock is for using various timer features of the TV. N If you disconnect the power cord, you have to set the clock again. Clock Mode: Set up the current time manually or automatically. – Auto: Set the current time automatically using the time from a digital channel. N The antenna must be connected in order to set the time automatically. English English▶ ◀ ▶ – Manual: Set the current time manually. N Depending on the broadcast station and signal, the auto time set up may not be correct. In this case, set the time manually. Clock Set: Set the Day, Month, Year, Hour and Minute manually. N Available only when Clock Mode is set to Manual. Time Zone (depending on the country): Select your time zone. N This function is only available when the Clock Mode is set to Auto. N When selecting Manual in Time Zone, GMT and DST will be activated. English English◀ ▶ ◀ ❑ Using the Sleep Timer O MENUm → System → Time → Sleep Timer → ENTERE ● Sleep Timert: Automatically shuts off the TV after a preset period of time. (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 and 180 minutes). N To cancel Sleep Timer, select Off. ❑ Setting the On / Off Timer O MENUm → System → Time → On Timer Off Timer → ENTERE ● On Timer 1 / On Timer 2 / On Timer 3: Three different on timer settings can be made. You must set the clock first. U Adjust❑❑❑LMove❑❑❑EEnter❑❑❑R Return On Timer 1 Setup Once Source On Time Volume Antenna Channel TV 04 00 20 ATV 3 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat English English▶ ◀ ▶ – Setup: Select Off, Once, Everyday, Mon~Fri, Mon~Sat, Sat~Sun or Manual to set at your convenience. If you select Manual, you can set up the day you want to activate the timer. N The c mark indicates the day is selected. – On Time: Set the hour, minute. – Volume: Set the desired volume level. – Source: Select TV or USB content to be played when the TV is turned on automatically. (USB can be selected only when a USB device is connected to the TV) – Antenna (when the Source is set to TV): Select ATV or DTV. – Channel (when the Source is set to TV): Select the desired channel. – Music / Photo (when the Source is set to USB): Select a folder in the USB device containing music or photo files to be played when the TV is turned on automatically. English English◀ ▶ ◀ N NOTE ● If there is no music file on the USB device or the folder containing a music file is not selected, the Timer function does not operate correctly. ● When there is only one photo file in the USB device, the Slide Show will not play. ● If a folder name is too long, the folder cannot be selected. ● Each USB you use is assigned its own folder. When using more than one of the same type of USB, make sure the folders assigned to each USB have different names. ● It is recommended that you use a USB memory stick and a multi card reader when using On Timer. ● The On Timer function may not work with USB devices with a built-in battery, MP3 players, or PMPs made by some manufacturers because these devices take a long time to be recognized. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ● Off Timer 1 / Off Timer 2 / Off Timer 3: Three different off timer settings can be made. You must set the clock first. Setup: Select Off, Once, Everyday, Mon~Fri, Mon~Sat, Sat~Sun or Manual to set at you convenience. If you select Manual, you can set up the day you want to activate the timer. N The c mark indicates the day is selected. Off Time: Set the hour, minute. LMove❑❑ U Adjust❑❑❑EEnter❑❑❑R Return Off Timer 1 Setup Once Off Time 04 00 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat English English◀ ▶ ◀ ❑ Locking Programme O MENUm → System → Security → ENTERE ■ Security N The PIN input screen appears before the setup screen. N Enter your 4-digit PIN. Change the PIN using the Change PIN option. ● Channel Lock (Off / On): Lock channels in Channel Manager, to prevent unauthorized users, such as children, from watching unsuitable programme. N Only available when the Input source is set to TV. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ● Programme Rating Lock (depending on the country): Prevent unauthorized users, such as children, from watching unsuitable programme with a userdefined 4-digit PIN code. If the selected channel is locked, the “\” symbol will be displayed. N The items of Program Rating Lock differs depending on the country. ● Change PIN: Change your personal ID number required to set up the TV. ● Adult Services (Off / On): You can adjust the Adult Service. (UK only) N The Adult Services is available for Freesat antenna only. English English◀ ▶ ◀ ❑ Picture In Picture (PIP) O MENUm → System → PIP → ENTERE ■ You can watch the TV tuner and one external video source simultaneously. PIPt PIP (Picture-in-Picture) does not function in the same mode. N NOTE ● For PIP sound, refer to the Sound Select instructions. ● If you turn the TV off while watching in PIP mode, the PIP window will disappear. ● You may notice that the picture in the PIP window becomes slightly unnatural when you use the main screen to view a game or karaoke. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ● PIP settings Main picture Sub picture Component, HDMI, PC TV ● PIP (Off / On): Activate or deactivate the PIP function. ● Channel: Select the channel for the sub-screen. ● Size (Õ / Ã): Select a size for the sub-picture. ● Position (Ã / – / — / œ): Select a position for the sub-picture. ● Sound Select (Main / Sub): You can choose the desired sound (Main / Sub) in PIP mode. English English◀ ▶ ◀ ❑ Economical Solutions O MENUm → System → Eco Solution → ENTERE ■ Eco Solution ● Energy Saving (Off / Low / Medium / High / Picture Off)t: This adjusts the brightness of the TV in order to reduce power consumption. If you select Picture Off, the screen is turned off, but the sound remains on. Press any button except volume button to turn on the screen. ● Eco Sensor (Off / On) for LCD 550 series and above : To enhance your power savings; the picture settings will automatically adapt to the light in the room. N If you adjust the Backlight, the Eco Sensor will be set to Off. Min Backlight: When Eco sensor is On, the minimum screen brightness can be adjusted manually. N If Eco Sensor is On, the display brightness may change (become slightly darker or brighter) depending on the surrounding light intensity. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ● No-Signal Power Off (Off / 15 min / 30 min / 60 min): To avoid unnecessary energy consumption, set how long you want the TV to remain on if it’s not receiving a signal. N Disabled when the PC is in power saving mode. ● Auto Power Off (Off / On): The TV will be automatically turned off when no user operation is received for 4 hours. English English◀ ▶ ◀ ❑ Other Features O MENUm → System → ENTERE ■ Language ● Menu Language: Set the menu language. ● Teletext Language(depending on the country): Set a desired language for teletext. N English is the default in cases where the selected language is unavailable in the broadcast. ● Preference (Primary Audio Language / Secondary Audio Language / Primary Subtitle Language / Secondary Subtitle Language / Primary Teletext Language / Secondary Teletext Language): Select a language, which will be the default language when a channel is selected. N Primary Teletext Language and Secondary Teletext Language may not be supported in some locations. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ■ Subtitle Use this menu to set the Subtitle mode. ● Subtitle (Off / On): Switches subtitles on or off. ● Subtitle Mode (Normal / Hearing Impaired): Sets the subtitle mode. ● Subtitle Language: Sets the subtitle language. N If the programme you are watching does not support the Hearing Impaired function, Normal automatically activates even if the Hearing Impaired mode is selected. N English is the default in cases where the selected language is unavailable in the broadcast. English English◀ ▶ ◀ ■ Digital Text (Disable / Enable) (UK only) If the programme broadcasts with digital text, this feature is enabled. N MHEG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding Experts Group) An International standard for data encoding systems used in multimedia and hypermedia. This is at a higher level than the MPEG system which includesdata-linking hypermedia such as still images, character service, animation, graphic and video files as well as multimedia data. MHEG is user runtime interaction technology and is being applied to various fields including VOD (Video-On-Demand), ITV (Interactive TV), EC (Electronic Commerce), teleeducation, tele-conferencing, digital libraries and network games. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ■ Auto Protection Time ● Auto Protection Time (Off / 2 hours / 4 hours / 8 hours / 10 hours): If the screen remains idle with a still image for a certain period of time defined by the user, the screen saver is activated to prevent the formation of ghost images on the screen. English English◀ ▶ ◀ ■ General ● Game Mode (Off / On): When connecting to a game console such as PlayStation™ or Xbox™, you can enjoy a more realistic gaming experience by selecting game mode. N NOTE ● Precautions and limitations for game mode – To disconnect the game console and connect another external device, set Game Mode to Off in the setup menu. – If you display the TV menu in Game Mode, the screen shakes slightly. ● Game Mode is not available in PC and TV mode. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ● After connecting the game console, set Game Mode to On to prevent poor picture quality. ● If Game Mode is On: – Picture Mode is set to Standard and Sound Mode is set to Movie. ● Menu Transparency (Bright / Dark): Set the Transparency of the menu. ● Boot Logo (Off / On): Display Samsung logo when the TV is turned on. ● TV name for LCD 550 series and above : Make changes the TV name. N If you select User Input, you can make TV name manually. English English◀ ▶ ◀ ■ Anynet+(HDMI-CEC) For details on set up options, refer to the “Anynet+(HDMI-CEC)” instructions. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ■ DivX® Video On Demand Shows the registration code authorized for the TV. If you connect to the DivX web site and register, you can download the VOD registration file. If you play the VOD registration using My Downloads, the registration is completed. N For more information on DivX® VOD, visit “http://vod.divx.com”. English English◀ ▶ ◀ ■ Common Interface ● CI Menu: This enables the user to select from the CAM-provided menu. Select the CI Menu based on the menu PC Card. ● Application Info: View information on the CAM inserted into the CI slot and on the “CI or CI+ CARD” which is inserted into the CAM. You can install the CAM anytime whether the TV is on or off. 1. Purchase a CI CAM module at your nearest dealer or by phone. 2. Firmly insert the “CI or CI+ CARD” into the CAM in the direction of the arrow. 3. Insert the CAM with the “CI or CI+ CARD” into the common interface slot, in the direction of the arrow so that it aligns parallel with the slot. 4. Check if you can see a picture on a scrambled signal channel. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ■ Network Remote Control for LCD 550 series and above Turn on/off or give permission to Samsung mobile phones devices to connect with and control the TV. You must have a Samsung Mobile phone/device which supports Network Remote Control. For more details, refer to each device’s manual. English English◀ ▶ ◀ ❑ Support Menu O MENUm → Support → e-Manual → ENTERE ■ e-Manual You can read the introduction and instructions about the TV features stored in your TV. N For the detailed information about e-Manual Screen, refer to “How to view the e-Manual” in User Manual. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ■ Self Diagnosis N Self Diagnosis might take few seconds, this is part of the normal operation of the TV. ● Picture Test (Yes / No): Use to check for picture problems. ● Sound Test (Yes / No): Use the built-in melody sound to check for sound problems. N If you hear no sound from the TV’s speakers, before performing the sound test, make sure Speaker Select is set to TV Speaker in the Sound menu. N The melody will be heard during the test even if Speaker Select is set to External Speaker or the sound is muted by pressing the MUTE button. English English◀ ▶ ◀ ● Signal Information: (digital channels only) HDTV channel’s reception quality is either perfect or the channels are unavailable. Adjust your antenna to increase signal strength. ● Troubleshooting: If the TV seems to have a problem, refer to this description. N If none of these troubleshooting tips apply, contact the Samsung customer service centre. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ■ Software Upgrade Software Upgrade can be performed by downloading the latest firmware from “www.samsung.com” to a USB memory device. Current Version the software already installed in the TV. N Software is represented as “Year/ Month/Day_Version”. U Move❑❑❑❑EEnter❑❑❑❑R Return Software Upgrade Current Version 2011/01/18_000001 By USB By Online By Channel Alternative Software ----/--/--_------ Standby Mode Upgrade : Off * It may differ depending on the model. English English◀ ▶ ◀ Installing the Latest Version ● By USB: Insert a USB drive containing the firmware upgrade file, downloaded from “www.samsung.com,” into the TV. Please be careful not to disconnect the power or remove the USB drive until upgrades are complete. The TV will be turned off and on automatically after completing the firmware upgrade. When software is upgraded, video and audio settings you have made will return to their default settings. We advise you to to write down your settings so that you can easily reset them after the upgrade. * It may differ depending on the model. TV Side Panel English English▶ ◀ ▶ ● By Online for LCD 550 series and above : Upgrade the software using the Internet. N First, configure your network. For detailed procedures on using the Network Setup, refer to the “Network Connection” instructions. N If the internet connection doesn’t operate properly, the connection may be broken. Please retry downloading. If the problem persists, download by USB and upgrade. ● By Channel: Upgrade the software using the broadcasting signal. N If the function is selected during the software transmission period, software will be automatically searched and downloaded. N The time required to download the software is determined by the signal status. English English◀ ▶ ◀ ● Alternative Software (backup) for LCD 450 series and above : If there is an issue with the new firmware and it is affecting operation, you can change the software to the previous version. N If the software was changed, existing software is displayed. ● Standby Mode Upgrade (Off / 1 hour later / 2 hours later/ 00:00 / 02:00 / 12:00 / 14:00) for LCD 450 series and above : A manual upgrade will be automatically performed at selected time. Since the power of the unit is turned on internally, the screen may be turned on slightly for the product. This phenomenon may continue for more than 1 hour until the software upgrade is complete. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ■ Contact Samsung View this information when your TV does not work properly or when you want to upgrade the software. You can find information regarding our call centres, and how to download products and software. ■ Contents Home You can enjoy useful and various contents. English English◀ ▶ ◀ ❑ Using the My Downloads Enjoy photos, music and/or movie files saved on a USB Mass Storage Class (MSC) device and/or your PC. 1. Press the CONTENT button to select My Downloads. 2. Press ▲/▼ button to select desired menu (Videos, Photos, Music), then press the ENTERE button. Videos Photos Music Source Watch TV * It may differ depending on the model. My Downloads English English▶ ◀ ▶ ❑ Connecting a USB Device 1. Turn on your TV. 2. Connect a USB device containing photo, music and/or movie files to the USB jack on the side of the TV. 3. When USB is connected to the TV, popup window appears. Then you can select New device connected. TV Side Panel * It may differ depending on the model. English English◀ ▶ ◀ N It might not work properly with unlicensed multimedia files. N Need-to-Know List before using My Downloads ● MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) is not supported. ● The file system supports FAT16, FAT32 and NTFS. ● Certain types of USB Digital camera and audio devices may not be compatible with this TV. ● My Downloads only supports USB Mass Storage Class (MSC) devices. MSC is a Mass Storage Class Bulk-Only Transport device. Examples of MSC are Thumb drives, Flash Card Readers and USB HDD (USB HUB are not supported). Devices should be connected directly to the TV’s USB port. ● Before connecting your device to the TV, please back up your files to prevent them from damage or loss of data. SAMSUNG is not responsible for any data file damage or data loss. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ● USB (HDD) is not supported. for LCD 400, 450 series ● Connect a USB HDD to the dedicated port, USB 1 (HDD) port. for LCD 550 series and above ● Do not disconnect the USB device while it is loading. ● The higher the resolution of the image, the longer it takes to display on the screen. ● The maximum supported JPEG resolution is 15360 x 8640 pixels. ● For unsupported or corrupted files, the “Not Supported File Format” message is displayed. ● If the files are sorted by Folder View, up to 1000 files can be displayed in each folder. English English◀ ▶ ◀ ● MP3 files with DRM that have been downloaded from a non-free site cannot be played. Digital Rights Management (DRM) is a technology that supports the creation, distribution and management of the content in an integrated and comprehensive way, including the protection of the rights and interests of the content providers, the prevention of the illegal copying of contents, as well as managing billings and settlements. ● If more than 2 PTP devices are connected, you can only use one at a time. ● If more than two MSC devices are connected, some of them may not be recognized. A USB device that requires high power (more than 500mA or 5V) may not be supported. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ● If an over-power warning message is displayed while you are connecting or using a USB device, the device may not be recognized or may malfunction. ● If the TV has been no input during time set in Auto Protection Time, the Screensaver will run. ● The power-saving mode of some external hard disk drives may be released automatically when connected to the TV. English English◀ ▶ ◀ ● If a USB extension cable is used, the USB device may not be recognized or the files on the device may not be read. ● If a USB device connected to the TV is not recognized, the list of files on the device is corrupted or a file in the list is not played, connect the USB device to the PC, format the device and check the connection. ● If a file deleted from the PC is still found when My Downloads is run, use the “Empty the Recycle Bin” function on the PC to permanently delete the file. ● My Downloads only supports sequential jpeg format. ● The scene search and thumbnail functions are not supported in the Videos. ● If the number of files and folders saved on a USB storage device is approximately over 4000, the files and folders may not appear and some folders may not be opened. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ❑ Connecting to the PC through network for LCD 550 Series and above You can play pictures, music and videos saved on your PC or on your TV through a network connection in the My Downloads mode. N If you want to use My Downloads to play files saved on your PC over your TV, you should download “AllShare PC Software” and users manual from “www.samsung.com.” 1. For more information on how to configure your network, refer to ‘Network Connection’. – You are recommended to locate both TV and PC in same subnet. The first 3 parts of the IP address of the TV and PC should be the same and only the last part (the host address) should be changed. (e.g. IP Address: 123.456.789.**) English English◀ ▶ ◀ 2. Using a LAN cable, connect between the external modem and the PC onto which the AllShare PC Software programme will be installed. – You can connect the TV to the PC directly without connecting it through a Sharer (Router). N Functions that are not supported when connecting to a PC through a network: ● The Background Music and Background Music Setting functions. ● The � (REW) or µ (FF) button while a movie is playing. N The DivX DRM, Multi-audio, embedded caption does not supported. N AllShare PC Software should be permitted by the firewall programme on your PC. English English▶ ◀ ▶ N When you use My Downloads mode through a network connection, according to functions of the provided server: ● The sorting method may vary. ● The � (REW), µ (FF) or � (Pause) buttons may not work depending on the content information. N If you experience any file stuttering issue while playing a video over a wireless network, we recommend using a wired network. English English◀ ▶ ◀ ❑ Screen Display Move to the desired file using the ◄/►/▲/▼ buttons and then press the ENTERE or � (Play) button. The file is played. My Downloads screen may differ depending on the way to enter the screen. Information: You can ascertain the selected device name, contents mode, folder/ file name, page and sorting list. Contents mode / Device name: You can select the desired Contents mode or Device name. Operation Buttons: - C Yellow ( A B EditD Mode); Selects the desired music. The check box is shown in the screen to check the music you want. It is only available in Music. - (Page); Move to next or previous page. - T Tools; Displays the option menu. - R Return; Move to the previous step. File List Section: You can confirm the files and groups that are sorted by category. Page T Tools R Return Videos 1/1 page English English▶ ◀ ▶ ■ Videos Playing Video 1. Press the ◄/►/▲/▼ button to select the desired video in the file list. 2. Press the ENTERE button or � (Play) button. – The selected file name is displayed on the top with its playing time. – If video time information is unknown, play time and progress bar are not displayed. L Jump T Tools R Return English English◀ ▶ ◀ – During video playback, you can search using ◄ and ► button. – You can use (�) (REW) and (µ) (FF) buttons during playback. N In this mode, you can enjoy movie clips contained on a Game, but you cannot play the Game itself. ● Supported Subtitle Formats Name File extension Format MPEG-4 time-based text .ttxt XML SAMI .smi HTML SubRip .srt string-based SubViewer .sub string-based Micro DVD .sub or .txt string-based English English▶ ◀ ▶ ● Supported Video Formats File Extention Container Video Codec Resolution Frame rate (fps) Bit rate (Mbps) Audio Codec *.avi *.mkv AVI MKV DivX 3.11/4. x/5.1/6.0 1920 x 1080 6 ~ 30 8 MP3 / AC3 / LPCM / ADPCM / DTS Core H.264 BP/MP/ HP 1920 x 1080 6 ~ 30 25 MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920 x 1080 6 ~ 30 8 Motion JPEG 640 x 480 6 ~ 30 8 English English◀ ▶ ◀ File Extention Container Video Codec Resolution Frame rate (fps) Bit rate (Mbps) Audio Codec *.asf ASF DivX 3.11/4. x/5.1/6.0 1920 x 1080 6 ~ 30 8 MP3 / AC3 / LPCM / ADPCM / WMA H.264 BP/MP/ HP 1920 x 1080 6 ~ 30 25 MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920 x 1080 6 ~ 30 8 Motion JPEG 640 x 480 6 ~ 30 8 *.wmv ASF Window Media Video v9 1920 x 1080 6 ~ 30 25 WMA English English▶ ◀ ▶ File Extention Container Video Codec Resolution Frame rate (fps) Bit rate (Mbps) Audio Codec *.mp4 MP4 H.264 BP/MP/ HP 1920 x 1080 6 ~ 30 25 MP3 / ADPCM / MPEG4 SP/ AAC ASP 1920 x 1080 6 ~ 30 8 *.3gp 3GPP H.264 BP/MP/ HP 1920 x 1080 6 ~ 30 25 ADPCM / AAC / MPEG4 SP/ HE-AAC ASP 1920 x 1080 6 ~ 30 8 *.vro VRO VOB MPEG2 1920 x 1080 24/25/30 30 AC3 / MPEG / LPCM MPEG1 1920 x 1080 24/25/30 30 English English◀ ▶ ◀ File Extention Container Video Codec Resolution Frame rate (fps) Bit rate (Mbps) Audio Codec *.mpg *.mpeg PS MPEG1 1920 x 1080 24/25/30 30 AC3 / MPEG / LPCM / AAC MPEG2 1920 x 1080 24/25/30 30 H.264 1920 x 1080 6 ~ 30 25 *.ts *.tp *.trp TS MPEG2 1920 x 1080 24/25/30 30 AC3 / AAC / MP3 / DD+ / HE-AAC H.264 1920 x 1080 6 ~ 30 25 VC1 1920 x 1080 6 ~ 30 25 English English▶ ◀ ▶ Other Restrictions N NOTE ● Video content will not play, or not play correctly, if there is an error in the content or the container. ● Sound or video may not work if the contents have a standard bit rate/ frame rate above the compatible Frame/sec listed in the table above. ● If the Index Table is in error, the Seek (Jump) function is not supported. ● When playing the video through network, it may not work depending on the network status. When you play video over a network connection, the video may not be played smoothly. for LCD 550 series and above ● The menu can be displayed late if the video is over 10Mbps(bit rate). ● Some USB/digital camera devices may not be compatible with the player. ● Video content can not be played, if there are many contents in one file. English English◀ ▶ ◀ Video Decoder Audio Decoder ● Supports up to H.264, Level 4.1 ● H.264 FMO / ASO / RS, VC1 SP / MP / AP L4 and AVCHD are not supported. ● MPEG4 SP, ASP: – Below 1280 x 720: 60 frame max – Above 1280 x 720: 30 frame max ● GMC is not support. ● Supports up to WMA 7, 8, 9, STD, 9 PRO ● WMA Lossless, Voice Lossless, Voice is not supported. ● WMA sampling rate 22050 Hz mono is not supported. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ■ Music Playing Music 1. Press the ◄/►/▲/▼ button to select the desired Music in the file list. 2. Press the ENTERE button or � (Play) button. – You can use � (REW) andµ(FF) buttons during playback. E Pause L Pages T Tools R Return Music English English◀ ▶ ◀ N Only displays the files with MP3 file extension. Other file extensions are not displayed, even if they are saved on the same USB device. N If the sound is abnormal when playing MP3 files, adjust the Equalizer in the Sound menu. (An over-modulated MP3 file may cause a sound problem.) Playing selected music 1. Press the C (Edit A B ModeD ) button. 2. Select the desired music. N The check box appears to the left of the selected files. 3. Press the TOOLS button and select Play Selected Contents. N You can select or deselect all music pressing the Select All / Deselect All. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ■ Photos Viewing a Photo (or Slide Show) 1. Press the ◄/►/▲/▼ button to select the desired photo in the file list. 2. Press the ENTERE button. ● When a selected photo is displayed, press the ENTERE button to start the slide show. ● During the slide show, all files in the file list will be displayed in order. N When you press the � (Play) button in the file list, slide show will be started immediately. E Pause L Previous/Next T Tools R Return Nomal English English◀ ▶ ◀ N Music files can be automatically played during the Slide Show if the Background Music is set to On. ❑ My Downloads - Additional Functions Videos/Music/Photos Play Option menu During playing a file, press the TOOLS button. Category Operation Videos Music Photos Title Search You can move the other file directly. c Time Search You can search the video using ◄ and ► button at one minute interval or entering the number directly. c Shuffle Mode You can play the music randomly. c English English▶ ◀ ▶ Category Operation Videos Music Photos Repeat Mode You can play movie and music files repeatedly. c c Picture Size You can adjust the picture size to your preference. c Picture Mode You can adjust the picture setting. c c Sound Mode You can adjust the sound setting. c c c English English◀ ▶ ◀ Category Operation Videos Music Photos Subtitle Language You can enjoy video in one of supported languages as required. The function is only enabled when stream-type files which support multiple audio formats are played. c Subtitle Setting You can play the video with Subtitles. This function only works if the subtitles are the same file name as the video. c English English▶ ◀ ▶ Category Operation Videos Music Photos Start Slide Show / Pause Slide Show You can start or pause a Slide Show. c Slide Show Speed You can select the slide show speed during the slide show. c Background Music You can on/off background music when watching a Slide Show. c English English◀ ▶ ◀ Category Operation Videos Music Photos Background Music Setting You can select background music when watching a Slide Show. c Zoom You can zoom into images in full screen mode. c Rotate You can rotate images in full screen mode. c Information You can see detailed information about the played file. c c c English English▶ ◀ ▶ Anynet+ is a function that enables you to control all connected Samsung devices that What is Anynet+?t support Anynet+ with your Samsung TV’s remote. The Anynet+ system can be used only with Samsung devices that have the Anynet+ feature. To be sure your Samsung device has this feature, check if there is an Anynet+ logo on it. N For the method of connecting external devices, refer to the supported user manual. N NOTE ● Connect the Optical cable between the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) jack on your TV and the Digital Audio Input on the Home Theatre. English English◀ ▶ ◀ ● When following the connection above, the Optical jack only outputs 2 channel audio. You will only hear sound from the Home Theatre’s Front Left and Right speakers and the subwoofer. If you want to hear 5.1 channel audio, connect the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) jack on the DVD / Satellite Box (i.e. Anynet Device 1 or 2) directly to the Amplifier or Home Theatre, not the TV. ● You can connect only one Home Theatre. ● You can connect an Anynet+ device using the HDMI cable. Some HDMI cables may not support Anynet+ functions. ● Anynet+ works when the AV device supporting Anynet+ is in the standby or on status. ● Anynet+ supports up to 12 AV devices in total. Note that you can connect up to 3 devices of the same type. English English▶ ◀ ▶ Anynet+ Menu O TOOLST → Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) → ENTERE The Anynet+ menu changes depending on the type and status of the Anynet+ devices connected to the TV. Anynet+ Menu Description View TV Changes Anynet+ mode to TV broadcast mode. Device List Shows the Anynet+ device list. (device_name) MENU Shows the connected device menus. E.g. If a DVD recorder is connected, the disc menu of the DVD recorder will appear. English English◀ ▶ ◀ Anynet+ Menu Description (device_name) TOOLS Shows the play menu of the connected device. E.g. If a DVD recorder is connected, the play menu of the DVD recorder will appear. (device_name) Title Menu Shows the title menu of the connected device. E.g. If a DVD recorder is connected, the title menu of the DVD recorder will appear. N Depending on the device, this menu may not be available. Receiver Sound is played through the receiver. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ❑ Setting Up Anynet+ O MENUm → System → Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) → ENTERE ■ Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) (Off / On): To use the Anynet+ Function, Anynet+ (HDMICEC) must be set to On. N When the Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) function is disabled, all the Anynet+ related operations are deactivated. Auto Turn Off (No / Yes): Setting an Anynet+ Device to turn off automatically when the TV is turned off. N If Auto Turn Off is set to Yes, running external devices will turn off at the same time as the TV powers off. N May not be enabled depending on the device. English English◀ ▶ ◀ ❑ Switching between Anynet+ Devices 1. Press the TOOLS button, then select Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC). 2. Anynet+ devices connected to the TV are listed in Device List. N If you cannot find a device you want, press the C A button to refresh the list. B D 3. Select a device and press the ENTERE button. You can switch to the selected device. N Only when you set Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) to On in the System menu, the Device List menu appears. ● Switching to the selected device may take up to 2 minutes. You cannot cancel the operation during the switching operation. ● If you have selected external input mode by pressing the SOURCE button, you cannot use the Anynet+ function. Make sure to switch to an Anynet+ device by using the Device List. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ❑ Listening through a Receiver You can listen to sound through a receiver (i.e Home Theatre) instead of the TV speaker. 1. Select Receiver and set to On. 2. Press the EXIT button to exit. N If your receiver supports audio only, it may not appear in the device list. N The receiver will work when you have properly connected the optical in jack of the receiver to the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) jack of the TV. N When the receiver (i.e Home Theatre) is set to On, you can hear sound output from the TV’s Optical jack. When the TV is displaying a DTV (air) signal, the TV will send out 5.1 channel sound to the receiver. When the source is a digital component such as a DVD and is connected to the TV via HDMI, only 2 channel sound will be heard from the receiver. English English◀ ▶ ◀ N NOTE ● You can only control Anynet+ devices using the TV remote control, not the buttons on the TV. ● The TV remote control may not work under certain conditions. If this occurs, reselect the Anynet+ device. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ❑ Troubleshooting for Anynet+ Problem Possible Solution Anynet+ does not work. ● Check if the device is an Anynet+ device. The Anynet+ system supports Anynet+ devices only. ● Only one receiver (home theatre) can be connected. ● Check if the Anynet+ device power cord is properly connected. ● Check the Anynet+ device’s Video/Audio/HDMI cable connections. ● Check whether Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) is set to On in the System menu. English English◀ ▶ ◀ Problem Possible Solution Anynet+ does not work. ● Check whether the TV remote control is in TV mode. ● Check whether the remote control is Anynet+ compatible. ● Anynet+ does not work in certain situations. (Searching channels, operating My Downloads or Plug & Play (initial setup), etc.) ● When connecting or removing the HDMI cable, please make sure to search devices again or turn your TV off and on again. ● Check if the Anynet+ Function of Anynet+ device is set on. English English▶ ◀ ▶ Problem Possible Solution I want to start Anynet+. ● Check if the Anynet+ device is properly connected to the TV and check if the Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) is set to On in the System menu. ● Press the TOOLS button to display the Anynet+ menu and select a menu you want. I want to exit Anynet+. ● Select View TV in the Anynet+ menu. ● Press the SOURCE button on the TV remote control and select a device other than Anynet+ devices. ● Press > CH <, CH LIST and PRE-CH to change the TV mode. (Note that the channel button operates only when a tuner-embedded Anynet+ device is not connected.) English English◀ ▶ ◀ Problem Possible Solution The message “Connecting to Anynet+ device...” appears on the screen. ● You cannot use the remote control when you are configuring Anynet+ or switching to a view mode. ● Use the remote control when the Anynet+ setting or switching to view mode is complete. The Anynet+ device does not play. ● You cannot use the play function when Plug & Play (initial setup) is in progress. English English▶ ◀ ▶ Problem Possible Solution The connected device is not displayed. ● Check whether or not the device supports Anynet+ functions. ● Check whether or not the HDMI cable is properly connected. ● Check whether Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) is set to On in the System menu. ● Search Anynet+ devices again. ● You can connect an Anynet+ device using the HDMI cable only. Some HDMI cables may not support Anynet+ functions. ● If it is terminated by an abnormal situation such as disconnecting the HDMI cable or power cord or a power failure, please repeat the device scan. English English◀ ▶ ◀ Problem Possible Solution The TV sound is not output through the receiver. ● Connect the optical cable between TV and the receiver. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ❑ About AllShare™ for LCD 550 series and above AllShare™ connects your TV and compatible Samsung mobile phones / devices through a network. In addition, you can play media contents including videos, photos and music saved on your mobile phones or the other devices (such as your PC) by controlling them on the TV via the network. N For more information, visit “www.samsung.com” or contact the Samsung call centre. Mobile devices may need additional software installation. For details, refer to each device’s user’s guide. English English◀ ▶ ◀ ❑ Setting Up AllShare™ O MENUm → Network → AllShare Settings → ENTERE ■ AllShare Settings ● Media (On / Off): Enables or disables the media function. When the media function is on, Media contents play can be controlled by mobile phones or other devices that support DLNA DMC. U Move E Enter R Return AllShare Settings Media : On ► English English▶ ◀ ▶ ■ Media Shows a list of mobile phones or connected devices which have been set up with this TV for using the Media function. N The Media function is available in all devices which support DLNA DMC. ● Allow / Deny: Allows/Blocks the devices. ●C A Delete B D: Deletes the devices from the list. N This function only deletes the name of the devices from the list. If the deleted device is turned on or tries to connect to the TV, it may appear on the list again. English English◀ ▶ ◀ Using the Media Function You can play media contents including videos, photos and music saved on your mobile phones or the other devices (such as your PC) by controlling them on the TV via the network. ● To turn off the media contents transmission from the devices, set Media to Off in the AllShare Settings. ● Contents may not be played on your TV depending on their resolution and format. ● The ENTERE and ◄ / ► buttons may not work depending on the type of media content. ● Using the devices, you can control the media playing. For details, refer to each device’s user’s guide. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ❑ Analogue Channel Teletext Feature The index page of the Teletext service gives you information on how to use the service. For Teletext information to be displayed correctly, channel reception must be stable. Otherwise, information may be missing or some pages may not be displayed. You can change Teletext pages by pressing the numeric buttons on the remote control. ● 0 (mode): Selects the Teletext mode (LIST/FLOF). If pressed during LIST mode, switches the mode to List save mode. In List save mode, you can save a Teletext page into a list using the 8(store) button. ● /(Teletext on/mix/off): Activates the Teletext mode for the current channel. Press the button twice to overlap the Teletext mode with the current broadcasting screen. Press it one more time to exit teletext. English English◀ ▶ ◀ ● 1 (sub-page): Displays the available sub-page. ● 8 (store): Stores the Teletext pages. ● 6 (index): Displays the index (contents) page at any time while you are viewing Teletext. ● 4 (size): Displays the teletext on the upper half of the screen in double-size. To move the text to the lower half of the screen, press it again. For normal display, press it once again. ● 9 (hold): Holds the display at the current page, in the case that there are several secondary pages that follow automaticially. To undo, press it again. ● 2 (page up): Displays the next Teletext page. ● 3 (page down): Displays the previous Teletext page. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ● 5 (reveal): Displays the hidden text (answers to quiz games, for example). To display the normal screen, press it again. ● 7 (cancel): Shrinks the Teletext display to overlap with the current broadcast. ● Colour buttons (red, green, yellow, blue): If the FASTEXT system is used by the broadcasting company, the different topics on a Teletext page are colourcoded and can be selected by pressing the coloured buttons. Press the colour corresponding to the topic of your choice. A new colourcoded page is displayed. Items can be selected in the same way. To display the previous or next page, press the corresponding coloured button. English English◀ ▶ ◀ The Teletext pages are organized according to six categories: Part Contents A Selected page number. B Broadcasting channel identity. C Current page number or search indications. D Date and time. E Text. F Status information. FASTEXT information. A B C D E F English English▶ ◀ ▶ ❑ Anti-theft Kensington Lock The Kensington Lock is not supplied by Samsung. It is a device used to physically fix the system when using it in a public place. The appearance and locking method may differ from the illustration depending on the manufacturer. Refer to the manual provided with the Kensington Lock for additional information on proper use. N Please find a “K” icon on the rear of the TV. A kensington slot is beside the “K” icon. N The position and color may differ depending on the model. 1 TV Rear Optional English English◀ ▶ ◀ To lock the product, follow these steps: 1. Wrap the Kensington lock cable around a large, stationary object such as desk or chair. 2. Slide the end of the cable with the lock attached through the looped end of the Kensington lock cable. 3. Insert the locking device into the Kensington slot on the product 1. 4. Lock the lock. N NOTE ● These are general instructions. For exact instructions, see the User manual supplied with the locking device. ● The locking device has to be purchased separately. ● The location of the Kensington slot may be different depending on the TV model. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ❑ Connections Common Interface Slot To watch paid channels, the “CI or CI+ CARD” must be inserted. ● If you do not insert the “CI or CI+ CARD,” some channels will display the message “Scrambled Signal”. ● The pairing information containing a telephone number, the “CI or CI+ CARD” ID, the Host ID and other information will be displayed in about 2~3 minutes. If an error message is displayed, please contact your service provider. ● When the configuration of channel information has finished, the message “Updating Completed” is displayed, indicating the channel list is updated. * It may differ depending on the model. English English◀ ▶ ◀ N NOTE ● You must obtain a “CI or CI+ CARD” from a local cable service provider. ● When removing the “CI or CI+ CARD”, carefully pull it out with your hands since dropping the “CI or CI+ CARD” may cause damage to it. ● Insert the “CI or CI+ CARD” in the direction marked on the card. ● The location of the COMMON INTERFACE slot may be different depending on the model. ● “CI or CI+ CARD” is not supported in some countries and regions; check with your authorized dealer. ● If you have any problems, please contact a service provider. ● Insert the “CI or CI+ CARD” that supports the current antenna settings. The screen will be distorted or will not be seen. English English▶ ◀ ▶ ❑ Troubleshooting If you have any questions about the TV, first refer to this list. If none of these troubleshooting tips apply, please visit “www.samsung.com”, then click on Support. Issues Solutions and Explanations Picture Quality First of all, please perform the Picture Test and confirm that your TV is properly displaying test image. (go to MENU - Support - Self Diagnosis - Picture Test) If the test image is properly displayed, the poor picture may caused by the source or signal. English English◀ ▶ ◀ Issues Solutions and Explanations The TV image does not look as good as it did in the store. ● If you have an analogue cable/set top box, upgrade to a digital set top box. Use HDMI or Component cables to deliver HD (high definition) picture quality. ● Cable/Satellite subscribers: Try HD stations from the channel line up. ● Antenna connection: Try HD stations after performing Auto tuning. N Many HD channels are up scaled from SD(Standard Definition) contents. ● Adjust the Cable/Set top box video output resolution to 1080i or 720p. ● Make sure you are watching the TV at the minimum recommended distance based on the size and definition of the signal. English English▶ ◀ ▶ Issues Solutions and Explanations The picture is distorted: macroblock error, small block, dots, pixelization ● Compression of video contents may cause picture distortion especially in fast moving pictures such as sports and action movies. ● Low signal level or bad quality can cause picture distortion. This is not a TV issue. ● Mobile phones used close to the TV (cca up to 1m) may cause noise in picture on analog and digital TV. Colour is wrong or missing. ● If you’re using a component connection, make sure the component cables are connected to the correct jacks. Incorrect or loose connections may cause colour problems or a blank screen. English English◀ ▶ ◀ Issues Solutions and Explanations There is poor colour or brightness. ● Adjust the Picture options in the TV menu. (go to Picture Mode / Colour / Brightness / Sharpness) ● Adjust Energy Saving option in the TV menu. (go to MENU - System - ECO solution - Energy Saving) ● Try resetting the picture to view the default picture settings. (go to MENU - Picture - Reset Picture) There is a dotted line on the edge of the screen. ● If the picture size is set to Screen Fit, change it to 16:9. ● Change cable/satellite box resolution. The picture is black and white. If you are using an AV composite input, connect the video cable (yellow) to the Green jack of component input 1 on the TV. English English▶ ◀ ▶ Issues Solutions and Explanations When changing channels, the picture freezes or is distorted or delayed. ● If connected with a cable box, please try to reset the cable box. Reconnect the AC cord and wait until the cable box reboots. It may take up to 20 minutes. ● Set the output resolution of the cable box to 1080i or 720p. Sound Quality First of all, please perform the Sound Test to confirm that your TV audio is properly operating. (go to MENU - Support - Self Diagnosis - Sound Test) If the audio is OK, the sound problem may caused by the source or signal. There is no sound or the sound is too low at maximum volume. ● Please check the volume of the device (Cable/Sat Box, DVD, Blu-ray etc) connected to your TV. English English◀ ▶ ◀ Issues Solutions and Explanations The picture is good but there is no sound. ● Set the Speaker Select option to TV Speaker in the sound menu. ● If you are using an external device, make sure the audio cables are connected to the correct audio input jacks on the TV. ● If you are using an external device, check the device’s audio output option (ex. you may need to change your cable box’s audio option to HDMI when you have a HDMI connected to your TV). ● If you are using a DVI to HDMI cable, a separate audio cable is required. ● Reboot the connected device by reconnecting the device’s power cable. ● If your TV has a headphone jack, make sure there is nothing plugged into it. English English▶ ◀ ▶ Issues Solutions and Explanations The speakers are making an inappropriate noise. ● Check the cable connections. Make sure a video cable is not connected to an audio input. ● For antenna or cable connections, check the signal strength. Low signal level may cause sound distortion. No Picture, No Video The TV will not turn on. ● Make sure the AC power cord is securely plugged in to the wall outlet and the TV. ● Make sure the wall outlet is working. ● Try pressing the POWER button on the TV to make sure the problem is not the remote. If the TV turns on, refer to “The remote control does not work” below. English English◀ ▶ ◀ Issues Solutions and Explanations The TV turns off automatically. ● Ensure the Sleep Timer is set to Off in the System menu. ● If your PC is connected to the TV, check your PC power settings. ● Make sure the AC power cord is plugged in securely to the wall outlet and the TV. ● When watching TV from an antenna or cable connection, the TV will turn off after 10 ~ 15 minutes if there is no signal. English English▶ ◀ ▶ Issues Solutions and Explanations There is no picture/ video. ● Check cable connections (remove and reconnect all cables connected to the TV and external devices). ● Set your external devices’ (Cable/Set top Box, DVD, Blu-ray etc) video outputs to match the connections to the TV input. For example, if an external device’s output is HDMI, it should be connected to an HDMI input on the TV. ● Make sure your connected devices are powered on. ● Be sure to select the TV’s correct source by pressing the SOURCE button on the TV remote. ● Reboot the connected device by reconnecting the device’s power cable. English English◀ ▶ ◀ Issues Solutions and Explanations RF(Cable/Antenna) Connection The TV is not receiving all channels. ● Make sure the Antenna cable is connected securely. ● Please try Plug & Play (Initial setup) to add available channels to the channel list. Go to MENU - System - Plug & Play (Initial setup) and wait for all available channels to be stored. ● Verify the Antenna is positioned correctly. The picture is distorted: macro block error small block, dots, pixelization ● Compression of video contents may cause picture distortion. especially on fast moving pictures such as sports and action movies. ● A low signal can cause picture distortion. This is not a TV issue. English English▶ ◀ ▶ Issues Solutions and Explanations PC Connection A “Mode Not Supported” message appears. ● Set your PC’s output resolution so it matches the resolutions supported by the TV. “PC” is always shown on the source list, even if a PC is not connected. ● This is normal; “PC” is always shown on the source list, regardless of whether a PC is connected. The video is OK but there is no audio. ● If you are using a HDMI connection, check the audio output setting on your PC. English English◀ ▶ ◀ Issues Solutions and Explanations Network Connection for LCD 550 series and above The wireless network connection failed. ● Samsung Wireless USB dongle is required to use a wireless network. ● Make sure the Network Connection is set to Wireless. ● Make sure the TV is connected to a wireless IP sharer (Router). Software Upgrade over the network fails. ● Try Network Settings in Network menu. ● If you have latest SW version, SW upgrade will not proceed. English English▶ ◀ ▶ Issues Solutions and Explanations Others The picture will not display in full screen. ● HD channels will have black bars on either side of the screen when displaying up scaled SD (4:3) contents. ● Black bars on the top and bottom will appear during movies that have aspect ratios different from your TV. ● Adjust the picture size options on your external device or TV to full screen. The remote control does not work. ● Replace the remote control batteries with the poles (+/–) in the right direction. ● Clean the sensor’s transmission window on the remote. ● Try pointing the remote directly at the TV from 5~6 feet away. English English◀ ▶ ◀ Issues Solutions and Explanations The cable/set top box remote control doesn’t turn the TV on or off, or adjust the volume. ● Programme the Cable/Set top box remote control to operate the TV. Refer to the Cable/Set user manual for the SAMSUNG TV code. A “Mode Not Supported” message appears. ● Check the supported resolution of the TV, and adjust the external device’s output resolution accordingly. There is a plastic smell from the TV. ● This smell is normal and will dissipate over time. The TV Signal Information is unavailable in the Self Diagnosis Test menu. ● This function is only available with digital channels from an Antenna / RF / Coax connection. English English▶ ◀ ▶ Issues Solutions and Explanations TV is tilted to the right or left side. ● Remove the stand base from the TV and reassemble it. There are difficulties assembling the stand base. ● Make sure the TV is placed on a flat surface. If you can not remove the screws from the TV, please use a magnetized screw driver. The Channel menu is grey out (unavailable). ● The Channel menu is only available when the TV source is selected. Your settings are lost after 30 minutes or every time the TV is turned off. ● If the TV is in the Store Demo mode, it will reset audio and picture settings every 30 minutes. Change the settings from Store Demo mode to Home Use mode in the Plug & Play (Initial setup) procedure. Press the SOURCE button to select TV mode, and go to MENU → System → Plug & Play (Initial setup) → ENTERE. English English◀ ▶ ◀ Issues Solutions and Explanations You have intermittent loss of audio or video. ● Check the cable connections and reconnect them. ● Loss of audio or video can be caused by using overly rigid or thick cables. Make sure the cables are flexible enough for long term use. If mounting the TV to the wall, we recommend using cables with 90 degree connectors. You see small particles when you look closely at the edge of the frame of the TV. ● This is part of the product’s design and is not a defect. The PIP menu is not available. ● PIP functionality is only available when you are using a HDMI, PC or components source. English English▶ ◀ ▶ Issues Solutions and Explanations You turned the TV off 45 minutes ago, and it turned on again. ● It is normal. The TV operates the OTA (Over The Aerial) function itself to upgrade firmware downloaded whilst your watching TV. The message “Scramble signal” or “Weak Signal/No Signal” appears. ● If you are using a CAM CARD (CI/CI+), check that it is installed into the common interface slot. ● If there is still a problem, pull the CAM CARD out of the TV and insert it into the slot again. There are recurrent picture/sound issues. ● Check and change the signal/source. A reaction may occur between the rubber cushion pads on the base stand and the top finish of some furniture. ● To prevent this, use felt pads on any surface of the TV that comes in direct contact with furniture. English English◀ ▶ ◀ ❑ Licence Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Manufactured under licence under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and the Symbol are registered trademarks. & DTS 2.0+ Digital Out and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product Includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. English English▶ ◀ ▶ DivX Certified to play DivX video up to HD 1080p, including premium content. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX ® is a digital video format created by DivX,Inc. This is an official DivX Certified device that plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified ® device must be registered in order to play DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) content. To generate the registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in the device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com with this code to complete the registration process and learn more about DivX VOD. Pat. 7,295,673;7,460,688; 7,519,274 English English◀ TheaterSound, SRS and symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. TheaterSound technology is incorporated under licence from SRS Labs, Inc. Open Source Licence Notice In the case of using open source software, Open Source Licences are available on the product menu. Open Source Licence Notice is written only English. English LCD TV user manual imagine the possibilities Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product. To receive more complete service, please register your product at www.samsung.com/global/register Model Serial No. BN68-01464G-00 Contact SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE If you have any questions or comments relating to Samsung products, please contact the SAMSUNG customer care centre. Country Customer Care Centre Web Site AUSTRIA 0810 - SAMSUNG (7267864, € 0.07/min) www.samsung.com/at BELGIUM 02 201 2418 www.samsung.com/be CZECH REPUBLIC 800 - SAMSUNG (800-726786) www.samsung.com/cz Distributor pro Českou republiku: Samsung Zrt., česká organizační složka, Oasis Florenc, Sokolovská394/17, 180 00, Praha 8 DENMARK 8 - SAMSUNG (7267864) www.samsung.com/dk EIRE 0818 717 100 www.samsung.com/ie FINLAND 30 - 6227 515 www.samsung.com/fi FRANCE 3260 'dites' SAMSUNG (€ 0,15/Min) 0825 08 65 65 (€ 0.15/Min) www.samsung.com/fr GERMANY 01805 - SAMSUNG (7267864, € 0.14/Min) www.samsung.de HUNGARY 06 - 80 - SAMSUNG (7267864) www.samsung.com/hu ITALIA 800 - SAMSUNG (7267864) www.samsung.com/it LUXEMBURG 02 261 03 710 www.samsung.com/lu NETHERLANDS 0900 - SAMSUNG (7267864, € 0.10/Min) www.samsung.com/nl NORWAY 3 - SAMSUNG (7267864) www.samsung.com/no POLAND 0 - 801 - 1SAMSUNG (172678) 022 - 607 - 93 - 33 www.samsung.com/pl PORTUGAL 808 20 - SAMSUNG (7267864) www.samsung.com/pt SLOVAKIA 0800 - SAMSUNG (7267864) www.samsung.com/sk SPAIN 902 - 1 - SAMSUNG (902 172 678) www.samsung.com/es SWEDEN 075 - SAMSUNG (726 78 64) www.samsung.com/se SWITZERLAND 0848 - SAMSUNG (7267864, CHF 0.08/min) www.samsung.com/ch U.K 0845 SAMSUNG (7267864) www.samsung.com/uk TURKEY 444 77 11 www.samsung.com/tr ESTONIA 800-7267 www.samsung.ee LATVIA 8000-7267 www.samsung.com/lv LITHUANIA 8-800-77777 www.samsung.lt KAZAHSTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com/kz_ru KYRGYZSTAN 00-800-500-55-500 - RUSSIA 8-800-555-55-55 www.samsung.ru TADJIKISTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 - UKRAINE 8-800-502-0000 www.samsung.ua UZBEKISTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com/kz_ru BN68-01464G-Cover.indd 1 2008-09-12 �� 8:57:14© 2008 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Precautions When Displaying a Still Image A still image may cause permanent damage to the TV screen. • Do not display a still image on the LCD panel for more than 2 hours as it can cause screen image retention. This image retention is also known as "screen burn". To avoid such image retention, reduce the degree of brightness and contrast of the screen when displaying a still image. • Watching the LCD TV in 4:3 format for a long period of time may leave traces of borders displayed on the left, right and center of the screen caused by the difference of light emission on the screen. Playing a DVD or a game console may cause a similar effect to the screen. Damages caused by the above effect are not covered by the Warranty. • Displaying still images from Video games and PC for longer than a certain period of time may produce partial after-images. To prevent this effect, reduce the ‘brightness’ and ‘contrast’ when displaying still images. Contact SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE If you have any questions or comments relating to Samsung products, please contact the SAMSUNG customer care centre.(See back cover for more information) BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 1 2008-09-17 �� 3:11:46Contents CONNECtING AND PREPARING YOUR tV List of Parts ........................................................ 2 Installing the Wall Mount Kit............................... 2 Viewing the Control Panel.................................. 3 Viewing the Connection Panel ........................... 4 Viewing the Remote Control............................... 7 Installing Batteries in the Remote Control.......... 8 Switching On and Off ......................................... 8 Placing Your Television in Standby Mode........... 8 Viewing the Menus............................................. 9 Using the TOOLS Button.................................... 9 Plug & Play....................................................... 10 SEttING thE ChANNELS Storing Channels Automatically ........................11 Storing Channels Manually .............................. 12 Adding / Locking Channels .............................. 13 Sorting the Stored Channels ............................ 14 Assigning Channels Names ............................. 14 Fine Tuning Channel Reception....................... 15 LNA (Low Noise Amplifier) ............................... 15 SEttING thE PICtURE Changing the Picture Standard ........................ 16 Adjusting the Custom Picture........................... 17 Configuring Detailed Settings on the Picture ... 17 Resetting the Picture Settings to the Factory Defaults ............................................................ 18 Changing the Picture Options .......................... 19 SEttING thE SOUND Sound Features................................................ 21 Selecting the Sound Mode ............................... 22 Connecting Headphones (Sold separately) ..... 22 SEttING thE tIME Setting and Displaying the Current Time.......... 23 Setting the Sleep Timer.................................... 23 Switching the Television On and Off Automatically.................................................... 24 FUNCtION DESCRIPtION Choosing Your Language................................. 24 Melody / Entertainment / Energy Saving ......... 25 Selecting the Source ........................................ 26 Editing the Input Source Names ...................... 27                                  USING thE DtV FEAtURE Previewing the DTV Menu System .................. 28 Updating the Channel List Automatically.......... 29 Updating the Channel List Manually ................ 29 Editing Your Favourite Channels...................... 30 Selecting Channel List ..................................... 32 Displaying Programme Information.................. 32 Viewing the EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) Information ........................................... 33 Using the Scheduled List ................................. 34 Setting the Default Guide ................................. 34 Viewing All Channels and Favourite Channels ..... 35 Adjusting the Menu Transparency.................... 35 Setting up the Parental Lock ............................ 36 Setting the Subtitle ........................................... 37 Setting the Subtitle Mode ................................. 37 Selecting the Audio Format .............................. 37 Selecting the Audio Description ....................... 38 Selecting the Digital Text (UK only).................. 38 Selecting the Time Zone (Spain only) .............. 39 Viewing Product Information ............................ 39 Checking the Signal Information ...................... 40 Upgrading the Software ................................... 40 Viewing Common Interface .............................. 41 Selecting the CI (Common Interface) Menu..... 41 Resetting .......................................................... 42 Selecting the Preferred Language (Subtitle, Audio or Teletext) .............................. 42 Preference........................................................ 43 SEttING thE PC Setting up Your PC Software (Based on Windows XP) .................................. 44 Display Modes.................................................. 44 Setting up the TV with your PC ........................ 45 AbOUt ANYNEt + What is Anynet + ? ............................................ 46 Connecting Anynet + Devices ........................... 46 Setting Up Anynet + .......................................... 47 Scanning and Switching between Anynet + Devices .............................................. 48 Recording......................................................... 50 Listening through a Receiver ........................... 50 Check Points before Requesting Service......... 51 RECOMMENDAtIONS FOR USE Teletext Feature ............................................... 52 Wall-Mount Adjustment .................................... 54 Using the Anti-Theft Kensington Lock .............. 55 Securing the TV to the Wall.............................. 56 Troubleshooting: Before Contacting Service Personnel ......................................................... 57 Technical and Environmental Specifications ... 58                                           English - 1 English Symbol Press Note One-Touch Button BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 1 2008-09-17 �� 3:11:46English - List of Parts Please make sure the following items are included with your LCD TV. If any items are missing, contact your dealer. Wall mount items (sold separately) allow you to mount the TV on the wall. For detailed information on installing the wall mount, see the instructions provided with the Wall Mount items. Contact a technician for assistance when installing the wall mounted bracket. Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any damage to the product or injury to yourself or others if you elect to install the TV on your own. Do not install your Wall Mount Kit while your TV is turned on. It may result in personal injury due to electric shock. Remove the stand and cover the bottom hole with a cap and fasten with two screws. ➣ Installing the Wall Mount Kit Remote Control & Batteries (AAA x 2) Power Cord Cover-Bottom Cleaning Cloth  Owner’s Instructions  Warranty card  Safety Guide  Registration Cards ➣ Warranty card / Safety Guide / Registration Cards (Not available in all locations) BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 2 2008-09-17 �� 3:11:47English - Viewing the Control Panel 1 SOURCE Toggles between all the available input sources (TV, Ext.1, Ext. 2, AV, S-Video, Component, PC, HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3, DTV). In the on-screen menu, use this button as you use the ENtER button on the remote control. 2 MENU Press to see an on-screen menu of your TV’s features. 3 Press to decrease or increase the volume. In the on-screen menu, use the buttons as you use the ◄ and ► buttons on the remote control. 4 Press to change channels. In the on-screen menu, use the buttons as you use the ▲ and ▼ buttons on the remote control. (Without the Remote Control, you can turn on the TV by using the Channel buttons.) 5 Speakers 6 (Power) Press to turn the TV on and off. Remote Control Sensor Aim the remote control towards this spot on the TV. Power Indicator Blinks and turns off when the power is on and lights up in stand-by mode. The product colour and shape may vary depending on the model. Side Panel buttons 1 2 3 4 5 6 5 BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 3 2008-09-17 �� 3:11:47English - Viewing the Connection Panel Whenever you connect an external device to your TV, make sure that power on the unit is turned off. When connecting an external device, match the colour of the connection terminal to the cable. ➣ ➣ ➣ The product colour and shape may vary depending on the model. 1 2 3 54 6 @ ! 0 Power Input 3 8 9 7 [tV Side Panel] [tV Rear Panel] 1 PC IN [PC] / [AUDIO] Connect to the video and audio output jack on your PC. 2 COMPONENt IN Connect component video cables (optional) to component connector ("PR", "PB", "Y") on the rear of your set and the other ends to corresponding component video out connectors on the DTV or DVD. If you wish to connect both the Set-Top Box and DTV (or DVD), you should connect the Set-Top Box to the DTV (or DVD) and connect the DTV (or DVD) to component connector ("PR", "PB", "Y") on your set. The PR, PB and Y connectors on your component devices (DTV or DVD) are sometimes labeled Y, B-Y and R-Y or Y, Cb and Cr. Connect RCA audio cables (optional) to "R - AUDIO - L" on the rear of your set and the other ends to corresponding audio out connectors on the DTV or DVD. - - - - - BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 4 2008-09-17 �� 3:11:48English - 3 hDMI IN 1, hDMI IN , hDMI IN Supports connections between HDMI-connection-enabled AV devices (Set-Top Boxes, DVD players) No additional Audio connection is needed for an HDMI to HDMI connection. When using an HDMI/DVI cable connection, you must use the HDMI IN 2 jack. What is HDMI? “High Definition Multimedia interface” allows the transmission of high definition digital video data and multiple channels of digital audio. The HDMI/DVI terminal supports DVI connection to an extended device with the appropriate cable (not supplied). The difference between HDMI and DVI is that the HDMI device is smaller in size, has the HDCP (High Bandwidth Digital Copy Protection) coding feature installed, and supports multi - channel digital audio. DVI IN(hDMI) [R-AUDIO-L] DVI audio outputs for external devices. Supported modes for HDMI/DVI and Component 480i 480p 576i 576p 720p 1080i 1080p HDMI/DVI 50Hz X X X O O O O HDMI/DVI 60Hz X O X X O O O Component O O O O O O O 4 AUDIO OUt [R-AUDIO-L] Connect RCA audio cables to AUDIO OUT [R-AUDIO-L] on the rear of your set and the other ends to corresponding audio in connectors on the Amplifier or DVD Home Theatre. 5 ANt IN To view television channels correctly, a signal must be received by the set from one of the following sources: An outdoor aerial / A cable television network / A satellite network 6 SERVICE Connector for SERVICE only. Connect this to the jack on the optional wall mount bracket. This will allow you to adjust the TV viewing angle using your remote control. 7 COMMON INtERFACE Slot When CI Card isn’t inserted in some channels, "Scrambled Signal" is displayed on the screen. The pairing information containing a telephone number, CI Card ID, Host ID and other information will be displayed in about 2~3 minutes. If an error message is displayed, please contact your service provider. When the channel information configuration has finished, the message "Updating Completed" is displayed, indicating that the channel list is now updated. You must obtain a CI Card from a local cable service provider. Remove the CI Card by carefully pulling it out with your hands since dropping the CI Card may cause damage to it. Insert the CI-Card in the direction marked on it. The place of the COMMON INTERFACE Slot may be different depending on its model. - - - ➣ - - - ➣ - - - - - - - ➣ ➣ ➣ BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 5 2008-09-17 �� 3:11:48English - 8 S-VIDEO or VIDEO / R-AUDIO-L Connect RCA or S-VIDEO cable to an appropriate external A/V device such as VCR, DVD or Camcorder. Connect RCA audio cables to "R-AUDIO-L" on your set and the other ends to corresponding audio out connectors on the A/V device. 9 hEADPhONES jACK Headphone may be connected to the headphone output on your set. While the head phone is connected, the sound from the built-in speakers will be disabled. 0 Kensington Lock (depending on the model) The Kensington Lock (optional) is a device used to physically fix the system when used in a public place. If you want to use a locking device, contact the dealer where you purchased the TV. The location of the kensington lock may be different depending on its model. ! DIGItAL AUDIO OUt (OPtICAL) Connect to a Digital Audio Component. When the HDMI IN jacks are connected, the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) jack on the TV outputs 2 channel audio only. If you want to hear 5.1 channel audio, connect the Optical jack on the DVD player or Cable/Satellite Box directly to an Amplifier or Home Theater, not the TV. @ EXt 1, EXt Connector Input Output Video Audio (L/R) RGB Video + Audio (L/R) EXT 1 O O O Only TV or DTV output is available. EXT 2 O O Output you can choose. -Inputs or outputs for external devices, such as VCR, DVD, video game device or video disc players. - - - - - - - ➣ BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 6 2008-09-17 �� 3:11:48English - TOOLS 1 Television Standby button 2 Selects the TV and DTV mode directly 3 Number buttons for direct channel access 4 One/Two-digit channel selection 5 +: Volume increase : Volume decrease 6 Temporary sound switch-off 7 Electronic Program Guide (EPG) display 8 Use to quickly select frequently used functions. 9 Use to see information on the current broadcast 0 Colour buttons : Use these buttons in the Channel list, etc. @ Press to select the optional display and sound modes for sports, cinema and games. # Use these buttons in the DMA, and Anynet + . (∏: This remote can be used to control recording on Samsung recorders with the Anynet + feature) $ Available source selection % Previous channel ^ P : Next channel P : Previous channel & Displays the main on-screen menu * Displays the Channel List on screen ( Returns to the previous menu ) Control the cursor in the menu a Exit the on-screen menu b Use this when connecting a SAMSUNG DMA (Digital Media Adapter) device through an HDMI interface and switching to DMA mode.(The DMA button is optional.) For more information on the operating procedures, refer to the user manual of the DMA. This button is available when “Anynet + (HDMI-CEC)" is “On” (see page 47) c Picture size selection d Digital subtitle display e Selects the HDMI mode directly. teletext Functions 2 Exit from the teletext display 7 Teletext store 8 Teletext size selection 9 Teletext reveal 0 Fastext topic selection ! Alternately select Teletext, Double, or Mix. $ Teletext mode selection (LIST/FLOF) % Teletext sub page ^ P : Teletext next page P : Teletext previous page & Teletext index ( Teletext hold a Teletext cancel ➣ The performance of the remote control may be affected by bright light. Viewing the Remote Control BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 7 2008-09-17 �� 3:11:49English - 1. Lift the cover at the back of the remote control upward as shown in the figure. . Install two AAA size batteries. Make sure to match the "+" and "–" ends of the batteries with the diagram inside the compartment. . Replace the cover. Remove the batteries and store them in a cool, dry place if you won’t be using the remote control for a long time. ➣ ➣ If the remote control doesn’t work, check the following: 1. Is the TV power on? 2. Are the plus and minus ends of the batteries reversed? 3. Are the batteries drained? 4. Is there a power outage, or is the power cord unplugged? 5. Is there a special fluorescent light or neon sign nearby? ➣ Installing batteries in the Remote Control Switching On and Off the mains lead is attached to the rear of your set. 1. Plug the mains lead into an appropriate socket. The standby indicator lights up on your set. . Press the button on your set. You also can press the POWER button or the tV/DtV button on the remote control to turn the TV on. The channel that you were watching last is reselected automatically. . Press the numeric button (0~9) or channel up/down ( / ) button on the remote control or button on your set. When you switch the set on for the very first time, you will be asked to choose language in which the menus are to be displayed. . To switch your set off, press the POWER button again. ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ Your set can be placed in standby mode in order to reduce the power consumption. the standby mode can be useful when you wish to interrupt viewing temporarily (during a meal, for example). 1. Press the POWER button on the remote control. The screen is turned off and a red standby indicator appears on your set. . To switch your set back on, simply press the POWER , numeric buttons (0~9), tV/DtV button or channel up/down ( / ) button again. Do not leave your set in standby mode for long periods of time (when you are away on holiday, for example). It is best to unplug the set from the mains and aerial. ➣ ➣ Placing Your television in Standby Mode BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 8 2008-09-17 �� 3:11:49English - 9 You can use the tOOLS button to select your frequently used functions quickly and easily. the “tools” menu change depending on which external input mode you are viewing. 1. Press the tOOLS button. The “Tools” menu will appear. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a menu. . Press the ▲/▼/◄/►/ENtER buttons to display, change, or use the selected items. For a more detailed description of each function, refer to the corresponding page. • Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC), see page 47 • Picture Mode, see page 16 • Sound Mode, see page 21 • Sleep Timer, see page 23 • SRS TS XT, see page 21 • Energy Saving, see page 26 • Dual l-ll, see page 22 • Auto Adjustment, see page 45 1. With the power on, press the MENU button. The main menu appears on the screen. The menu’ s left side has icons: Picture, Sound, Channel, Setup, Input, Digital Menu. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select one of the icons. Then press the ENtER button to access the icon’s submenu. . Press the EXIt button to exit. The on-screen menus disappear from the screen after about one minute. Viewing the Menus Using the tOOLS button Picture Mode : Standard  backlight Contrast 9 brightness Sharpness 0 Colour 0 tint G 0 R 0 Detailed Settings  Picture Options  Reset : OK  tV Move Enter Return Anynet+ (hDMI-CEC) Picture Mode : Standard Sound Mode : Custom Sleep timer : Off SRS tS Xt : Off Energy Saving : Off Dual l-ll : Mono Move Enter Exit tools BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 9 2008-09-17 �� 3:11:50English - 10 When the tV is initially powered on, several basic settings proceed automatically and subsequently. the following settings are available. Any functions related to Digital TV (DVB) will only work in countries or areas where DVB-T (MPEG2) digital terrestrial signals are broadcasted. Please confirm with your local dealer if you can receive DVB-T signals. Although this TV set follows the DVB-T specification, maintaining compatibility with the future coming DVB-T digital terrestrial broadcasts is not guaranteed. Several functions may not be available in some countries. 1. Press the POWER button on the remote control. The message "Start Plug & Play." is displayed with "OK" selected. . Select the appropriate language by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button. Press the ENtER button to confirm your choice. . Press the ◄ or ► button to select “Store Demo” or “Home Use”, then the ENtER button. We recommend setting the TV to "Home Use" mode for the best picture in your home environment. "Store Demo" mode is only intended for use in retail environments. If the unit is accidentally set to “Store Demo” mode and you want to return to “Home Use” (Standard): Press the Volume button on the TV. When the volume OSD is displayed, press and hold the MENU button on the TV for 5 seconds. . The message "Check antenna input." is displayed with "OK" selected. Press the ENtER button. Please check that the antenna cable is connected correctly. . Select the appropriate country by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button. Press the ENtER button to confirm your choice. . The message “Some DTV functions may not be available. Digital Scan?” is displayed. Press the ◄ or ► button to select “Yes” or “No”, then press the ENtER button.  Yes: First an Analogue TV search is performed and then a Digital TV ch. auto search is performed.  No: Only an Analogue TV search is performed. This function is supported for all countries except for the following countries: France, Germany, Italy, Netherlands, Spain, Switzerland, United Kingdom, Austria. . The "Auto Store" menu is displayed with the "Start" selected. Press the ENtER button. The channel search will start and end automatically. The DTV channel scan menu appears and the DTV channel is automatically updated. If the DTV channel is updated, the Source in the source list of the Input menu is automatically changed to DTV. After all the available channels are stored, the "Clock Set" menu appears. Press the ENtER button at any time to interrupt the memorization process. For detailed descriptions about DTV channel update, refer to page 29 of this manual. After all the available digital channels are stored, the screen to select a time zone is displayed depending on the country. . Press the ENtER button. Select the "Month", "Day", "Year", "Hour", or "Min" by pressing the ◄ or ► button. Set the "Month", "Day", "Year", "Hour", or "Min" by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button. You can also set the “Month”, “Day”, “Year”, “Hour” and "Min" by pressing the number buttons on the remote control. Plug & Play Plug & Play Start Plug & Play. Enter OK BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 10 2008-09-17 �� 3:11:50English - 11 9. Press the ENtER button to confirm your setting. The message “Enjoy your viewing” is displayed. When you have finished, press the ENtER button. Even if the ENtER button is not pressed, the message will automatically disappear after several seconds.  Language: Select your language.  Country: Select your country.  Auto Store: Automatically scans for and stores channels available in the local area.  Clock Set: Sets the current time for the TV clock. If you want to reset this feature... 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Setup" then press the ENtER button. . Press the ENtER button again, to select "Plug & Play". For further details on setting up options, refer to the page 10. ➣ The “Plug & Play” feature is only available in the TV mode. You can scan for the frequency ranges available to you (and availability depends on your country). Automatically allocated programme numbers may not correspond to actual or desired programme numbers. however, you can sort numbers manually and clear any channels you do not wish to watch. 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Channel", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ENtER button to select "Country". . Select the appropriate country by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button. Press the ENtER button to confirm your choice. Even though you have changed the country setting in this menu, the country setting for DTV is not changed. (Refer to page 29) . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Auto Store", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ENtER button. The TV will begin memorizing all of the available channels. Press the ENtER button at any time to interrupt the memorization process and return to the "Channel" menu. . After all the available channels are stored, the "Sort" menu appears. (refer to page 14) ➣ ➣ ➣ Storing Channels Automatically tV Setup Plug & Play  Language : English  time  Wall-Mount Adjustment  Melody : Off  Entertainment : Off  Energy Saving : Off  Move Enter Return tV Channel Country : United Kingdom  Auto Store  Manual Store  Channel Manager  Sort  Name  Fine tune  LNA : Off  Move Enter Return BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 11 2008-09-17 �� 3:11:51English - 1 Storing Channels Manually Not available in DTV or external input mode. You can store television channels, including those received via cable networks. When storing channels manually, you can choose: ♦ Whether or not to store each of the channels found. ♦ The programme number of each stored channel which you wish to identify. 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Channel", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Manual Store", then press the ENtER button. . Select the required option by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button, then press the ENtER button. . When you are satisfied with your setting, press the ENtER button. . Press the EXIt button to exit. ♦ Programme (Programme number to be assigned to a channel) − Press the ▲ or ▼ button until you find the correct number. You can also select the channel number directly by pressing the numeric buttons (0~9). ♦ Colour System: Auto/PAL/SECAM/NtSC. − Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the required colour standard. ♦ Sound System: bG/DK/I/L − Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the required sound standard. ♦ Channel (When you know the number of the channel to be stored) − Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select C (Air channel) or S (Cable channel). − Press the ► button, then press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the required number. You can also select the channel number directly by pressing the numeric buttons (0~9). If there is abnormal sound or no sound, re-select the sound standard required. ♦ Search (When you do not know the channel numbers) − Press the ▲ or ▼ button to start the search. − The tuner scans the frequency range until the first channel or the channel that you selected is received on the screen. ♦ Store (When you store the channel and associated programme number) − Set to "OK" by pressing the ENtER button. Channel mode − P (Programme mode): When completing tuning, the broadcasting stations in your area have been assigned to position numbers from P00 to P99. You can select a channel by entering the position number in this mode. − C (Air channel mode): You can select a channel by entering the assigned number to each air broadcasting station in this mode. − S (Cable channel mode): You can select a channel by entering the assigned number for each cable channel in this mode. Channel Country : United Kingdom  Auto Store  Manual Store  Channel Manager  Sort  Name  Fine tune  LNA : Off  Move Enter Return tV Manual Store Programme : P 1 Colour System : Auto  Sound System : bG  Channel : S Search : 10 Mhz Store : ? Move Enter Return tV BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 12 2008-09-17 �� 3:11:51English - 1 Not available in DTV or external input mode. Using the Channel Manager, you can conveniently lock or add channels. 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Channel", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Channel Manager", then press the ENtER button. ♦ Adding channels Using the Channel List, you can add channels. . Select "Channel List" by pressing the ENtER button. . Move to the ( ) field by pressing the ▲, ▼, ◄ or ► button, select a channel to be added, and press the ENtER button to add the channel. If you press the ENtER button again, the ( ) symbol next to the channel disappears and the channel is not added. " " is active when "Child Lock" is selected to "On". ♦ Locking channels This feature allows you to prevent unauthorized users, such as children, from watching unsuitable programmes by muting out video and audio. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Child Lock", then press the ENtER button. . Select "On" by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button, then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Channel List", then press the ENtER button. . Move to the " " field by pressing the ▲, ▼, ◄ or ► button, select a channel to be locked, and press the ENtER button. If you press the ENtER button again, the ( ) symbol next to the channel disappears and the channel lock is cancelled. A blue screen is displayed when "Child Lock" is activated. 9. Press the EXIt button to exit. Select "On" or "Off" in "Child Lock" to easily turn the channels which selected on " " to be active or inactive. You can select these options by simply pressing the Ch LISt button on the remote control. ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ Adding / Locking Channels P 1 C Channel List Move Enter Page Return Add Lock 1 / 10 Prog. 0 C-- 1 C bbC 1 C C C S S S 9 S Channel Country : United Kingdom  Auto Store  Manual Store  Channel Manager  Sort  Name  Fine tune  LNA : Off  Move Enter Return tV tV Channel Manager Channel List  Child Lock : Off  Move Enter Return BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 13 2008-09-17 �� 3:11:52English - 1 this operation allows you to change the programme numbers of the stored channels. this operation may be necessary after using the auto store. Not available in DTV or external input mode. 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Channel", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Sort", then press the ENtER button. . Select the channel number that you wish to change by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button repeatedly. Press the ENtER button. The selected channel number and name are moved to right side. . Select the number of the programme to which the channel is to be moved by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button. . Press the ENtER button. The channel is moved to its new position and all other channels are shifted accordingly. . Repeat steps to for another channel to be sorted. . Press the EXIt button to exit. ➣ ➣ ➣ Sorting the Stored Channels Assigning Channels Names Channel names will be assigned automatically when channel information is broadcast. these names can be changed, allowing you to assign new names. Not available in DTV or external input mode. 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Channel", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Name", then press the ENtER button. . If necessary, select the channel to be assigned to a new name by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button. Press the ENtER button. The selection bar is displayed around the name box. . The following characters are available: Letters of the alphabet (A~Z) / Numbers (0~9) / Special characters (+, -, *, /, space) . Repeat steps to for each channel to be assigned to a new name. . Press the EXIt button to exit. ➣ ➣ ➣ to... Select a letter, number or symbol Move on the next letter Move back the previous letter Confirm the name then... Press the ▲ or ▼ button Press the ► button Press the ◄ button Press the ENtER button Channel Country : United Kingdom  Auto Store  Manual Store  Channel Manager  Sort  Name  Fine tune  LNA : Off  tV Move Enter Return Sort Prog. Ch. Name  0 C-- ----- 1 C -----  S0 ----- S0 ----- S09 ----- S1 ----- S1 ----- S1 ----- S1 ----- 9 C1 -----  tV Move Enter Return Channel Country : United Kingdom  Auto Store  Manual Store  Channel Manager  Sort  Name  Fine tune  LNA : Off  Move Enter Return tV Name Move Enter Return Prog. Ch. Name  0 C-- ----- 1 C ----- S0 ----- S0 ----- S09 ----- S1 ----- S1 ----- S1 ----- S1 ----- 9 C1 -----  tV BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 14 2008-09-17 �� 3:11:53English - 1 Use fine tuning to manually adjust a particular channel for optimal reception. Not available in DTV or external input mode. 1. Use the number buttons to directly select the channel that you want to fine tune. . Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Channel", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Fine Tune", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ◄ or ► button to adjust the fine tuning. Press the ENtER button. . Press the EXIt button to exit. Fine tuned channels that have been saved are marked with an asterisk "*" on the right-hand side of the channel number in the channel banner. And the channel number turns red. To reset the fine-tuning, select "Reset" by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button and then press the ENtER button. ➣ ➣ ➣ Fine tuning Channel Reception Channel Country : United Kingdom  Auto Store  Manual Store  Channel Manager  Sort  Name  Fine tune  LNA : Off  tV Move Enter Return Fine tune P 1 0 Reset Adjust Save Return If the tV is operating in a weak-signal area, the LNA function can improve the reception (a low-noise preamplifier boosts the incoming signal). Not available in DTV or external input mode. 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Channel", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "LNA", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Off" or "On". Press the ENtER button. . Press the EXIt button to exit. ➣ LNA (Low Noise Amplifier) Channel Country : United Kingdom  Auto Store  Manual Store  Channel Manager  Sort  Name  Fine tune  LNA : Off  tV Move Enter Return Channel Country : United Kingdom Auto Store Manual Store Channel Manager Sort Name Fine tune LNA : Off tV Move Enter Return Off On BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 15 2008-09-17 �� 3:11:54English - 1 You can select the type of picture which best corresponds to your viewing requirements. 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ENtER button, to select "Picture". . Press the ENtER button again, to select "Mode". . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the desired picture effect. Press the ENtER button. . Press the EXIt button to exit. ♦ Dynamic: Selects the picture for high-definition in a bright room. ♦ Standard: Selects the picture for optimum display in a normal environment. ♦ Movie: Selects the picture for comfortable display in a dark room. The Picture mode must be adjusted separately for each input source. Changing the Picture Standard Picture Mode : Standard  backlight Contrast 9 brightness Sharpness 0 Colour 0 tint G 0 R 0 Detailed Settings  Picture Options  Reset : OK  tV Move Enter Return Picture Mode : Standard backlight Contrast 9 brightness Sharpness 0 Colour 0 tint G 0 R 0 Detailed Settings Picture Options Reset : OK tV Move Enter Return Dynamic Standard Movie Easy Setting 1. Press the tOOLS button on the remote control. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Picture Mode". . Press the ◄ or ► button to select the required option. . Press the EXIt or tOOLS button to exit. Anynet+ (hDMI-CEC) Picture Mode ◄ Standard ► Sound Mode : Custom Sleep timer : Off SRS tS Xt : Off Energy Saving : Off Dual l-ll : Mono tools Move Adjust Exit BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 16 2008-09-17 �� 3:11:54English - 1 Your set has several settings which allow you to control picture quality. 1. To select the desired picture effect, follow the "Changing the Picture Standard" instructions number 1 to 3. (On page 16) . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a particular item. Press the ENtER button. . Press the ◄ or ► button to decrease or increase the value of a particular item. Press the ENtER button. . Press the EXIt button to exit. ♦ backlight: Adjusts the screen brightness by adjusting the LCD backlight brightness. (0~10) ♦ Contrast: Adjusts the lightness and darkness between objects and the background. ♦ brightness: Adjusts the brightness of the whole screen. ♦ Sharpness: Adjusts the outline of objects to either sharpen them or make them more dull. ♦ Colour: Adjusts the colours, making them lighter or darker. ♦ tint: Adjusts the colour of objects, making them more red or green for a more natural look. The adjusted values are stored according to the selected Picture mode. In PC mode, you can only make changes to "Backlight", "Contrast" and "Brightness". In Analogue TV, Ext., AV, S-Video modes of the PAL system, you cannot use the "Tint" Function. You can return to the factory defaults picture settings by selecting the "Reset". (Refer to "Resetting the Picture Settings to the Factory Defaults" on page 18) The energy consumed during use can be significantly reduced if the level of brightness of the picture is reduced, and then this will reduce the overall running cost. Adjusting the Custom Picture Picture Mode : Standard  backlight Contrast 9 brightness Sharpness 0 Colour 0 tint G 0 R 0 Detailed Settings  Picture Options  Reset : OK  tV Move Enter Return ▲ backlight ▼ Move Adjust Return You can set detailed picture settings. 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ENtER button, to select "Picture". . Press the ENtER button to select “Mode”. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Standard” or “Movie”, then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Detailed Settings", then press the ENtER button. . Select the required option by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button, then press the ENtER button. . When you are satisfied with your setting, press the ENtER button. . Press the EXIt button to exit. "Detailed Settings" is available in "Standard" or "Movie" mode. In PC mode, you can only make changes to “Dynamic Contrast”, “Gamma” and “White Balance” from among the “Detailed Settings” items. ➣ ➣ Configuring Detailed Settings on the Picture Detailed Settings black Adjust : Off  Dynamic Contrast : Medium  Gamma : 0  Colour Space : Native  White balance  Flesh tone : 0  Edge Enhancement : On  Move Enter Return tV Picture Mode : Standard  backlight Contrast 9 brightness Sharpness 0 Colour 0 tint G 0 R 0 Detailed Settings  Picture Options  Reset : OK  tV Move Enter Return BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 17 2008-09-17 �� 3:11:55English - 1 ♦ black Adjust: Off/Low/Medium/high You can directly select the black level on the screen to adjust the screen depth. ♦ Dynamic Contrast: Off/Low/Medium/high You can adjust the screen contrast so that the optimal contrast is provided. ♦ Gamma: - ~ + You can adjust the Primary Colour (Red, Green, Blue) Intensity. Press the ◄ or ► button until you reach the optimal setting. ♦ Colour Space: Auto/Native/Custom Colour space is a Colour matrix composed of red, green and blue colours. Select your favourite Colour space to experience the most natural Colour. ♦ Auto: Auto Color Space automatically adjusts to the most natural color tone based on program sources. ♦ Native: Native Color Space offers deep and rich color tone. ♦ Custom: Adjusts the color range to suit your preference. Customizing the Colour Space Colour: Red/Green/blue/Yellow/Cyan/Magenta Adjusts the Colour range to suit your preference. “Colour” is available when “Colour Space” is set to “Custom”. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Red”, “Green”, “Blue”, “Yellow”, “Cyan” or “Magenta”. Press the ENtER button. Red/Green/blue: In "Colour", you can adjust the RGB values for the selected colour. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Red", "Green" or "Blue" to change it. Press the ENtER button. Press the ◄ or ► button to decrease or increase the value of a particular item. Press the ENtER button. Reset: Resets the colour space to the default values. ♦ White balance: R-Offset/G-Offset/b-Offset/R-Gain/G-Gain/b-Gain/Reset You can adjust the colour temperature for more natural picture colours. R-Offset/G-Offset/b-Offset/R-Gain/G-Gain/b-Gain: Changing the adjustment value will refresh the adjusted screen. Select the required option by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button, then press the ENtER button. Press the ◄ or ► button until you reach the optimal setting. Reset: The previously adjusted white balance will be reset to the factory defaults. ♦ Flesh tone: -1 ~ +1 You can emphasize the pink 'flesh tone' in the picture. Press the ◄ or ► button until you reach the optimal setting. Changing the adjustment value will refresh the adjusted screen. ♦ Edge Enhancement: Off/On You can emphasize object boundaries in the picture. Resetting the Picture Settings to the Factory Defaults You can return to the factory defaults picture settings. 1. To select the desired picture effect, follow the "Changing the Picture Standard" instructions number 1 to 3 on page 16. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Reset", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "OK" or "Cancel". Press the ENtER button. . Press the EXIt button to exit. The "Reset" will be set for each Picture mode. Picture Mode : Standard backlight Contrast 9 brightness Sharpness 0 Colour 0 tint G 0 R 0 Detailed Settings Picture Options Reset : OK tV Move Enter Return OK Cancel BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 18 2008-09-17 �� 3:11:55English - 19 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ENtER button, to select "Picture". . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Picture Options”, then press the ENtER button. . Select the required option by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button, then press the ENtER button. . When you are satisfied with your setting, press the ENtER button. . Press the EXIt button to exit. In PC mode, you can only make changes to the “Colour Tone” and “Size” from among the items in “Picture Options”. ♦ Colour tone: Cool/Cool1/Normal/Warm1/Warm You can select the most comfortable colour tone to your eyes. The adjusted values are stored according to the selected Picture mode. “Warm1” or “Warm2” is only activated when the picture mode is "Movie". ♦ Size: Auto Wide/1:9/Wide Zoom/Zoom/:/just Scan You can select the picture size which best corresponds to your viewing requirements. ♦ Auto Wide: Automatically adjusts the picture size to the "16:9" aspect ratio. ♦ 1:9: Adjusts the picture size to 16:9 appropriate for DVDs or wide broadcasting. ♦ Wide Zoom: Magnify the size of the picture more than 4:3. ♦ Zoom: Magnifies the 16:9 wide picture (in the vertical direction) to fit the screen size. ♦ :: This is the default setting for a video movie or normal broadcasting. ♦ just Scan: Use the function to see the full image without any cutoff when HDMI (720p/1080i/ 1080p) or Component (1080i/1080p) signals are input. "Auto Wide" function is available only in "TV", "DTV", "Ext.1", "Ext.2", "AV", and "S-Video" mode. In PC Mode, only "16:9" and "4:3" mode can be adjusted. Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external device you have connected to an input of the TV. Temporary image retention may occur when viewing a static image on the set for more than two hours. Wide Zoom: Move the screen up/down using the ▲ or ▼ button after selecting the by pressing the ► or ENtER button. Zoom: Select by pressing the ◄ or ►button. Use the ▲ or ▼button to move the picture up and down. After selecting , use the ▲ or ▼ button to magnify or reduce the picture size in the vertical direction. After selecting “just Scan” in hDMI (100i/100p) or Component (100i/100p) mode: Select by pressing the ◄ or ►button. Use the ▲, ▼, ◄ or ► button to move the picture. Reset: Press the ◄ or ► button to select “Reset”, then press the ENtER button. You can initialize the setting. O You can select these options by simply pressing the P.SIZE button on the remote control. ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ Changing the Picture Options Picture Options Colour tone : Normal  Size : Auto Wide  Screen Mode : 1:9  Digital NR : Auto  DNle : Off  hDMI black Level : Normal  blue Only Mode : Off  Move Enter Return tV Picture Mode : Standard  backlight Contrast 9 brightness Sharpness 0 Colour 0 tint G 0 R 0 Detailed Settings  Picture Options  Reset : OK  tV Move Enter Return BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 19 2008-09-17 �� 3:11:56English - 0 ♦ Screen Mode: 1:9/ Wide Zoom/Zoom/: When setting the picture size to "Auto Wide" in a 16:9 wide TV, you can determine the picture size you want to see the 4:3 WSS (Wide Screen Service) image or nothing. Each individual European country requires different picture size so this function is intended for users to select it. ♦ 1:9: Sets the picture to 16:9 wide mode ♦ Wide Zoom: Magnify the size of the picture more than 4:3. ♦ Zoom: Magnify the size of the picture vertically on screen. ♦ :: Sets the picture to 4:3 normal mode. This function is available in "Auto Wide" mode. This function is not available in "PC", "Component" or "HDMI" mode. ♦ Digital NR: Off/Low/Medium/high/Auto If the broadcast signal received by your TV is weak, you can activate the Digital Noise Reduction feature to help reduce any static and ghosting that may appear on the screen. When the signal is weak, select one of the other options until the best picture is displayed. ♦ DNIe: Off/Demo/On This TV includes the DNIe function so as to provide a high visual quality. If you set DNIe to on, you can view the screen with the DNIe feature activated. If you set the DNIe to Demo, you can view the applied DNIe and normal pictures on the screen, for demonstration purposes. Using this function, you can view the difference in the visual quality. DNIe™ (Digital Natural Image engine) This feature brings you more detailed image with 3D noise reduction, detail enhancement, contrast enhancement and white enhancement. New image compensation Algorithm gives brighter, clearer, more detailed image to you. DNIe™ technology will fit every signal into your eyes. This function is not available in "Movie" and "Standard" mode. ♦ hDMI black Level: Normal/Low You can select the black level on the screen to adjust the screen depth. This function is active only when the external input connects to HDMI(RGB signals). ♦ blue Only Mode: Off/On This function is for AV device measurement experts. This function displays the blue signal only by removing the red and green signals from the video signal so as to provide a Blue Filter effect that is used to adjust the Colour and Tint of video equipment such as DVD players, Home Theaters, etc. Using this function, you can adjust the Colour and Tint to preferred values appropriate to the signal level of each video device using the Red/Green/Blue/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow Colour Bar Patterns, without using an additional Blue Filter. “Blue Only Mode” is available when the picture mode is set to “Movie” or “Standard”. BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 20 2008-09-17 �� 3:11:56English - 1 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Sound", then press the ENtER button. . Select the required option by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button, then press the ENtER button. . When you are satisfied with your setting, press the ENtER button. . Press the EXIt button to exit. ♦ Mode: Standard/Music/Movie/Speech/Custom You can select the type of special sound effect to be used when watching a given broadcast. Easy Setting 1. Press the tOOLS button on the remote control. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Sound Mode". . Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired sound mode. . Press the EXIt or tOOLS button to exit. ♦ Equalizer: Balance/100Hz/300Hz/1kHz/3kHz/10kHz The sound settings can be adjusted to suit your personal preferences. If you make any changes to these settings, the sound mode is automatically switched to "Custom". ♦ SRS TS XT: Off/On TruSurround XT is a patented SRS technology that solves the problem of playing 5.1 multichannel content over two speakers. TruSurround delivers a compelling, virtual surround sound experience through any two-speaker playback system, including internal television speakers. It is fully compatible with all multichannel formats. Easy Setting 1. Press the tOOLS button on the remote control. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "SRS TS XT". . Press the ◄ or ► button to select the "Off" or "On". . Press the EXIt or tOOLS button to exit. truSurround Xt, SRS and Symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc.truSurround Xt technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc. ➣ Sound Features Equalizer balance 100hz 00hz 1khz khz 10khz Move Adjust Return tV R L Sound Mode : Custom  Equalizer  SRS tS Xt : Off  Auto Volume : Off  tV Speaker : On  Move Enter Return tV Anynet+ (hDMI-CEC) Picture Mode : Standard Sound Mode : Custom Sleep timer : Off SRS TS XT ◄ Off ► Energy Saving : Off Dual l-ll : Mono Move Adjust Exit tools Anynet+ (hDMI-CEC) Picture Mode : Standard Sound Mode ◄ Custom ► Sleep timer : Off SRS tS Xt : Off Energy Saving : Off Dual l-ll : Mono tools Move Adjust Exit BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 21 2008-09-17 �� 3:11:57English - You can connect a set of headphones to your set if you wish to watch a tV programme without disturbing the other people in the room. When you insert the head set jack into the corresponding port, you can operate only "Auto Volume" in Sound menu. Prolonged use of headphones at a high volume may damage your hearing. You will not receive sound from the speakers when you connect headphones to the system. The headphone volume and TV volume are adjusted differently. ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ Connecting headphones (Sold separately) TV Side Panel You can set the sound mode in the "tools" menu. When you set to "Dual I-II", the current sound mode is displayed on the screen. 1. Press the tOOLS button on the remote control. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Dual I-II". . Press the ◄ or ► button to select required option. . Press the ENtER button. Audio Type Dual 1/2 Default A2 Stereo Mono MONO Automatic Stereo STEREO ↔ MONO change Dual DUAL 1 ↔ DUAL 2 DUAL 1 NICAM Stereo Mono MONO Automatic Stereo MONO ↔ STEREO change Dual MONO ↔ DUAL 1 DUAL 2 DUAL 1 If the stereo signal is weak and an automatic switching occurs, then switch to the Mono. This function is only activated in stereo sound signal. It is deactivated in mono sound signal. This function is only available in Analogue TV mode. Selecting the Sound Mode Anynet+ (hDMI-CEC) Picture Mode : Standard Sound Mode : Custom Sleep timer : Off SRS tS Xt : Off Energy Saving : Off Dual l-ll ◄ Mono ► Move Adjust Exit tools ♦ Auto Volume: Off/On Each broadcasting station has its own signal conditions, and so it is not easy to adjust the volume every time the channel is changed. This feature lets you automatically adjust the volume of the desired channel by lowering the sound output when the modulation signal is high or by raising the sound output when the modulation signal is low. ♦ TV Speaker: Off/On If you want to hear the sound through separate speakers, cancel the internal amplifier. The +, - and MUtE buttons do not operate when the "TV Speaker" is set to "Off". When "TV Speaker" is set to "Off", the Sound menus cannot be adjusted. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the doubleD symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. ➣ ➣ BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 22 2008-09-17 �� 3:11:58English - You can select a time period of between 0 and 10 minutes after which the television automatically switches to standby mode. 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Setup", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Time", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Sleep Timer", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button repeatedly until the desired time appears (Off, 30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180). Press the ENtER button. . Press the EXIt button to exit. The TV automatically switches to standby mode when the timer reaches 0. Setting the Sleep timer tV Setup Plug & Play  Language : English  time  Wall-Mount Adjustment  Melody : Off  Entertainment : Off  Energy Saving : Off  Move Enter Return time Clock Set : 00 : 00 Sleep timer : timer 1 : timer : timer : Move Enter Return tV Off 0 0 90 10 10 10 You can set the tV’s clock so that the current time is displayed when you press the INFO button. You must also set the time if you wish to use the automatic On/Off timers. 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Setup", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Time", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ENtER button to select "Clock Set". . to... Press the... Move to "Month", "Day", "Year", "Hour" or "Minute" ◄ or ► button. Set the "Month", "Day", "Year", "Hour" or "Minute" ▲ or ▼ button. Confirm the setting ENtER button. . Press the EXIt button to exit. If you disconnect the power cord, you have to set the clock again. You can also set "Month", "Day", "Year", "Hour" and "Minute" by pressing the number buttons on the remote control. Setting and Displaying the Current time tV Setup Plug & Play  Language : English  time  Wall-Mount Adjustment  Melody : Off  Entertainment : Off  Energy Saving : Off  Move Enter Return tV Clock Set Month 01 Day p q 01 00 Year 00 hour 00 Minute Move Adjust Return Anynet+ (hDMI-CEC) Picture Mode : Standard Sound Mode : Custom Sleep Timer ◄ Off ► SRS tS Xt : Off Energy Saving : Off Dual l-ll : Mono Move Adjust Exit Easy Setting tools 1. Press the tOOLS button on the remote control. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Sleep Timer”. . Press the ◄ or ► button to select the minute. . Press the EXIt or tOOLS button to exit. BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 23 2008-09-17 �� 3:11:59English - When you start using your set for the first time, you must select the language which will be used for displaying menus and indications. 1. Press the MENU button to display the on-screen menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Setup", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Language", then press the ENtER button. . Select a particular language by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button repeatedly. Press the ENtER button. . Press the EXIt button to exit. Choosing Your Language tV Setup Plug & Play  Language : English  time  Wall-Mount Adjustment  Melody : Off  Entertainment : Off  Energy Saving : Off  Move Enter Return 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Setup", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Time", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Timer 1", "Timer 2", "Timer 3", then press the ENtER button. Three different On/Off Timer Settings can be made. You must set the clock first. . Press the ◄ or ► button to select the required item below. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to adjust to the setting satisfied. ♦ On time: Select hour, minute, and "On"/"Off". (To activate timer with the setting satisfied, set to "On".) ♦ Off time: Select hour, minute, and "On"/"Off". (To activate timer with the setting satisfied, set to "On".) ♦ Repeat: Select "Once", "Everyday", "Mon~Fri", "Mon~Sat", or "Sat~Sun". ♦ Volume: Select the desired turn on volume level. You can set the hour and minute directly by pressing the number buttons on the remote control. Auto Power Off When you set the timer On, the TV will eventually turn off, if no controls are operated for 3 hours after the TV was turned on by timer. This function is only available in timer On mode and prevents overheating, which may occur if a TV is on for too long time. ➣ Switching the television On and Off Automatically tV Setup Plug & Play  Language : English  time  Wall-Mount Adjustment  Melody : Off  Entertainment : Off  Energy Saving : Off  Move Enter Return tV timer 1 On time Repeat Once Volume 10 00 : 00 Off Off time 00 : 00 Off ► Move Adjust Return 56 BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 24 2008-09-17 �� 3:11:59English - Melody / Entertainment / Energy Saving 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Setup", then press the ENtER button. . Select the required option by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button, then press the ENtER button. . When you are satisfied with your setting, press the ENtER button. . Press the EXIt button to exit. ♦ Melody: Off/Low/Medium/high The TV power on/off melody sound can be adjusted. the Melody does not play - When no sound is output from the TV because the MUtE button has been pressed. - When no sound is output from the TV because the (Volume) button has been pressed. - When the TV is turned off by Sleep Timer function. ♦ Entertainment: Off/Sports/Cinema/Game The “Entertainment” mode enables you to select the optimal display and sound for sports, cinema and games. - Off: Switch the "Entertainment" function off. - Sports: Provides the optimal picture and sound quality for sports. You can enjoy more thrilling Colour and sound. - Cinema: Provides the optimal picture and sound quality for cinema. You can experience a richer picture and enhanced sound. - Game: Provides the optimal picture and sound quality for games. This mode accelerates the playing speed when using an external game console connected to the TV. If you set any of the three “Entertainment” modes to On, the settings will be locked and can not be adjusted. If you want to make Picture and Sound mode adjustments, the “Entertainment” mode must be turned off. The “Entertainment” settings are saved for each input source. If you set any of the three “Entertainment” modes to On, “SRS TS XT” and “Equalizer” function is not available. This function is not available in PC mode. O You can press the E.MODE button on the remote control repeatedly to change the “Entertainment” setting. ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ tV Setup Plug & Play  Language : English  time  Wall-Mount Adjustment  Melody : Off  Entertainment : Off  Energy Saving : Off  Move Enter Return BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 25 2008-09-17 �� 3:11:59English - ♦ Energy Saving: Off/Low/Medium/high/Auto This feature adjusts the screen brightness depending on the surrounding lighting conditions. - Off: Turns off the energy saving function. - Low: Sets the TV to low energy saving mode. - Medium: Sets the TV to medium energy saving mode. - high: Sets the TV to high energy saving mode. - Auto: Automatically adjusts the brightness of the TV screen in accordance with the scenes. Easy Setting 1. Press the tOOLS button on the remote control. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Energy Saving”. . Press the ◄ or ► button to select the "Off","Low", "Medium", "High" or "Auto". . Press the EXIt or tOOLS button to exit. Anynet+ (hDMI-CEC) Picture Mode : Standard Sound Mode : Custom Sleep timer : Off SRS tS Xt : Off Energy Saving ◄ Off ► Dual l-ll : Mono Move Adjust Exit tools You can select among external sources connected to your tV’s input jacks. 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Input", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ENtER button again, to select "Source List". Available signal sources: TV, Ext.1, Ext.2, AV, S-Video, Component, PC, HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3, DTV. You can choose only those external devices that are connected to the TV. . Select the required device by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button. Press the ENtER button. O Press the SOURCE button on the remote control to toggle between all the available source. TV mode can be selected by pressing the tV/DtV button, number buttons(0~9), and the P / button on the remote control. O You can also watch HDMI mode simply by pressing the hDMI button on the remote control. Selecting the Source tV Input Source List : tV  Edit Name  Anynet+(hDMI-CEC)  Move Enter Return tV Source List tV Ext.1 : ---- Ext. : ---- AV : ---- S-Video : ---- Component : ---- PC : ---- hDMI1 : ---- hDMI : ---- hDMI : ---- DtV Move Enter Return BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 26 2008-09-17 �� 3:12:00English - Name the device connected to the input jacks to make your input source selection easier. 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Input", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Edit Name", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the device that you wish to edit. Press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the required device. Press the ENtER button. . Press the EXIt button to exit. When a PC with a resolution of 1280 x 1024@60Hz is connected to the HDMI IN 2 port, you should set the "HDMI2" mode to "PC" in the "Edit Name" of the "Input" mode. ➣ Editing the Input Source Names tV Input Source List : tV  Edit Name  Anynet+(hDMI-CEC)  Move Enter Return tV Edit Name Ext.1 : ---- Ext. : ---- AV : ---- S-Video : ---- Component : ---- PC : ---- hDMI1 : ---- hDMI : ---- hDMI : ---- Move Enter Return ---- VCR DVD Cable Stb Satellite Stb PVR Stb AV Receiver Game q BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 27 2008-09-17 �� 3:12:01English - ♦ The company does not guarantee the normal operation of the DTV menu for countries other than the supported countries (France, Germany, Italy, Netherlands, Spain, Switzerland, United Kingdom, Austria) because only these country standards are supported. In addition, when the country of the broadcast stream differs from the country selected by the current user, the string appearing in the channel banner, Info, Guide, Channel Manager, etc. may not be displayed properly. ♦ Available in DTV mode. Preset to the DTV mode by using the tV/DtV button on your remote control. To help you navigate around the on-screen menu system and adjust the various settings available, refer to the following illustration. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Digital Menu", then press the ENtER button. ➣ The sub-items of the CI Menu may vary depending on the CAM model. Previewing the DtV Menu System Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Teletext Language Preference Now/Next, Full Guide Guide Now & Next Guide Full Guide Scheduled List Default Guide Digital Channel Country Auto Store Manual Store Edit Favourite Channels Channel List Setup Menu Transparency Change PIN Parental Lock Subtitle Subtitle Mode Audio Format Audio Description Digital Text Time Zone Common Interface System Product Information Signal Information Software Upgrade Reset High, Medium, Low, Opaque Off, On Normal, Hard of hearing Primary Audio Language Secondary Audio Language Primary Subtitle Language Secondary Subtitle Language Primary Teletext Language Secondary Teletext Language (Depending On the Country) Disable, Enable PCM, Dolby Digital All, Favourites, Default Audio Description Off, On Volume Application Info, CI Menu Mode : Custom  Equalizer  SRS tS Xt : Off  Auto Volume : Off  Internal Mute : Off  Reset Move Enter Return tV Digital Menu Guide Digital Channel Setup Language Move Enter Return Mode : Custom  Equalizer  SRS tS Xt : Off  Auto Volume : Off  Internal Mute : Off  Reset Move Enter Return Guide Now & Next Guide Full Guide Scheduled List  Default Guide : Full Guide  Move Enter Return DtV Move Enter Return Channel Country :United Kingdom  Auto Store  Manual Store  Edit Favourite Channels  Channel List  Move Enter Return DtV Move Enter Return Setup Menu transparency : Medium  Change PIN  Parental Lock  Subtitle : Off  Subtitle Mode  q Move Enter Return DtV Move Enter Return Language Audio Language Subtitle Language teletext Language Preference  Move Enter Return DtV BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 28 2008-09-17 �� 3:12:02English - 9 Updating the Channel List Automatically You can update the channel list when the broadcaster adds new Services or if you move the tV to a new location. 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Digital Menu", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Digital Channel", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ENtER button again, to select "Country". . Select the appropriate country by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button. Press the ENtER button to confirm your choice. Even though you have changed the country setting in this menu, the country setting for Analogue TV is not changed. (Refer to page 11) . Press the ▲ or ▼ button again, to select "Auto Store". Press the ENtER button. When it has finished, the number of scanned services will be displayed. The existing favourite channel list will not be deleted when the channel list is updated. To stop the scan before it has finished, press the ENtER button with "STOP" selected. . Press the EXIt button to exit. If the signal status is poor, the "No Service found! Check the aerial connection" message is displayed. ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ Updating the Channel List Manually You can specify the channel for a fast channel search. 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Digital Menu", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Digital Channel", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Manual Store", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the required option, then press the ENtER button. − Channel : Channel "5" to "69" in sequence are displayed (depending on the country) − Frequency : The frequency available in the Channel group is displayed. − bandwidth : The available bandwidths are 7 and 8 MHz. Press the red button to start the scan for digital services. When it has finished, channels are updated in the channel list. . When it has finished, the number of scanned services will be displayed. . Press the EXIt button to exit. ➣ ➣ Channel Country :United Kingdom  Auto Store  Manual Store  Edit Favourite Channels  Channel List  Move Enter Return DtV Mode : Custom  Equalizer  SRS tS Xt : Off  Auto Volume : Off  Internal Mute : Off  Reset Move Enter Return Auto Store Scanning for digital services... Services found: Channel: % Stop Return DtV Channel ▲ 5 ▼ Frequency bandwidth Adjust Return Manual Store Search 100 Khz M hz DtV BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 29 2008-09-17 �� 3:12:03English - 0 Editing Your Favourite Channels You can edit your favourite channels using the four colour buttons. 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Digital Menu", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Digital Channel", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Edit Favourite Channels", then press the ENtER button. . Press the red button to display all currently stored channels. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a channel you want. Press the ENtER button. A "" icon is shown next to the selected channel and the channel will be added to the favourite channel list. • To undo, press the ENtER button again. • Select All: Select all channels currently displayed. • Select None: Deselect all selected channels. • Preview: Displays (a) currently selected channel(s). The Favourite Channels settings have been completed. . Press the EXIt button to exit. ♦ Add You can use this function when one or more favourite channels have been selected. 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Digital Menu", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Digital Channel", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Edit Favourite Channels", then press the ENtER button. . Press the red button in the "Edit Favourite Channels" menu. To add more channels, refer to the step on the previous description. . If you want to check the channel to be stored, press REtURN button. Press the EXIt button to exit. • To add all channels to the favourite channel list, press the red button. • To remove all channels, press the green button. • Preview : Displays (a) currently selected channel(s). • Press the Ch LISt button to display the favourite channel manager. ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ Move Enter Return Edit Favourite Channels (no channels) Return Add Channels DtV Move Enter Return Edit Favourite Channels 5 bbC tWO Five bbC thREE 1 abc1 1 QVC 6 Select All Select None Preview Move Select Return DtV Move Enter Return Edit Favourite Channels bbC tWO ★ bbC thREE ★ 1 abc1 ★ Add Renumber Preview Delete Move Return DtV Move Enter Return Edit Favourite Channels 5 bbC tWO ★ Five bbC thREE ★ 1 abc1 ★ 1 QVC 6 Select All Select None Preview Move Select Return DtV BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 30 2008-09-17 �� 3:12:03English - 1 ♦ Renumber (depending on the country) 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Digital Menu", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Digital Channel", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Edit Favourite Channels", then press the ENtER button. . Select the required channel using the ▲ or ▼ button. . Press the green button. The space for entering the number is a blank. . Enter the new channel number. Press ENtER button to store or REtURN button to cancel. Press the ◄ button to delete an entered digit. If you enter a number already assigned to another channel, the number is assigned to the selected channel and the previous number assigned to the selected channel is assigned to the other channel. That is, the two numbers are exchanged. The Favourite Channels are automatically sorted in ascending order of channel numbers. . Press the EXIt button to exit. ♦ Preview 1. In the "Edit Favourite Channels" menu, select the channel to be previewed by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button. . Press the yellow button. The selected channel is displayed on the screen. ♦ Delete 1. In the "Edit Favourite Channels" menu, select the channel to be deleted from the favourite channels list by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button. . Press the blue button. The selected channel and number will be deleted. To add a deleted channel back in to the favourite channel list, see "Add" on page 30. ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ Move Enter Return Edit Favourite Channels bbC tWO ★ --- bbC thREE ★ 1 abc1 ★ Edit Return Confirm DtV Edit Favourite Channels bbC tWO ★ bbC thREE ★ 1 abc1 ★ Add Renumber Preview Delete Move Return DtV Edit Favourite Channels bbC tWO ★ bbC thREE ★ Add Renumber Preview Delete Move Return DtV BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 31 2008-09-17 �� 3:12:04English - Displaying Programme Information While viewing a channel, additional information about the current programme may be displayed. 1. While viewing a programme, press the INFO button. The programme information is displayed. . To exit from banner information, press the INFO button. The information is displayed: − Parental Rating − Video Type: SD, HD, Radio − Audio Type: Mono, Stereo, Dual, Dolby Digital − Existence of Teletext or DVB Subtitle − Audio Language ➣ ➣ Selecting Channel List You can exclude the channels you have chosen from the channels you have scanned.When you scan through the stored channels, those you have chosen to skip are not displayed. All channels that you do not specifically choose to skip are displayed during scanning. 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Digital Menu", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Digital Channel", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Channel List". Press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "All", "Favourites" or "Default". Press the ENtER button. . Press the yellow button to toggle between your favourite channels and all channels. Your favourite channels are only displayed if they were previously set in the "Editing Your Favourite Channels" menu (refer to page 30). . Press the red or green button to display the previous or next channel List page. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a channel to be tuned. Press the ENtER button. The channel number, name and an icon are displayed in the top left corner while changing the channel. The channel number and name are displayed if the channel is one of the all channels, and a  icon if the channel is one of the favourite channels. . Press the blue button to toggle between your "TV", "Radio", "Data/Other" and "All". 9. Press the Ch LISt button to exit from the channel List. ➣ ➣ Move Enter Return 1:0 Sat 1 Sep 1 AFDO,1:9 AFDO 1:9 No block SD Stereo Subtitle English AII Channels 1:0~1: A Contains video with AFD O; coded frame is 1:9 Exit Channel List All Channels-All bid-up.tv tCM UKtV Style Discovery Discoveryh&L 1 Cartoon Nwk boomerang ttext holidays 0 television X 0 bbC Radio 1 bbC Radio bbC Radio bbC Radio heat 91 MOjO 00 ARD-MhP-Data test Card M' v.0 1/ 6 More 1 test Card M' v.0 Vida00b Vida00b vida00b vida00b 1 Ch 1 1 QVC 1 UKtV Gold Previous Page Next/Page Favourites tV Move Watch Return It can be displayed simply by pressing the Ch LISt button. BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 32 2008-09-17 �� 3:12:04English - Viewing the EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) Information the EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) information is provided by the broadcasters. Programme entries may appear blank or out of date as a result of the information broadcast on a given channel. the display will dynamically update as soon as new information becomes available. ♦ Now & Next Guide For the six channels indicated in the left-hand column, displays the Current programme and the Next programme information. ♦ Full Guide Displays the programme information as time ordered One hour segments. two hours of programme information is displayed which may be scrolled forwards or backwards in time. 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Digital Menu", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ENtER button, to select "Guide". . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Now & Next Guide" or "Full Guide". Press the ENtER button. You can also display the guide menu simply by pressing the GUIDE button. . to... then... Watch a programme in the EPG list • Select a programme by pressing the ▲, ▼, ◄, ► button. • Press the ENtER button. If the next programme is selected, it is scheduled with the clock icon displayed. If the ENtER button is pressed again, the scheduling is cancelled with the clock icon gone. For details about scheduling programmes, refer to the next page. View programme information • Select a programme of your choice by pressing the ▲, ▼, ◄, ► button. • Press the INFO button when the programme of your choice is highlighted. Toggle between the "Now & Next Guide" or "Full Guide" • Press the red button repeatedly. Display the "Favourites" and the "All Channels" list • Press the green button repeatedly. Scrolls backwards quickly (24 hours). • Press the yellow button repeatedly. Scrolls forward quickly (24 hours). • Press the blue button repeatedly. Exit the guide • Press the EXIt button. The programme title is on the upper part of the screen center. Please click on INFO button for the detailed information. Channel Number, Running Time, Status Bar, Parental Level, Video Quality Information(HD/SD), Sound Modes, Subtitle or Teletext, Languages of Subtitle or Teletext, and brief summary of the highlighted programme are included on the detailed information. "..." will be appeared if the summary is long. Six channels are displayed. To scroll between channels, move to a channel using the ▲ or ▼ button. To display page by page, use the P or P button. ➣ ➣ ➣ All Channels Now & Next Guide 13:28 Wed 16 Feb 27 Discovery Extreme Machines: Armoured Cars Watch Full Guide Favourites Exit Now Next Full Guide 13:28 Wed 16 Feb Today 13:00 14:00 27 Discovery Extreme Machines: Armoured Cars INFO Watch Now/Next Favourites -24Hours +24Hours Exit INFO BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 33 2008-09-17 �� 3:12:05English - Setting the Default Guide You can preset the default guide style. 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Digital Menu", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ENtER button, to select "Guide". . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Default Guide", then press the ENtER button. . Select "Now/Next" or "Full Guide" using the ▲ or ▼ button, and press the ENtER button. . Press the EXIt button to exit. Using the Scheduled List If you make a scheduled viewing list of programs you may like to see, the channel will be automatically switched to the scheduled programme at the scheduled time even if you are watching another programme. 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Digital Menu", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ENtER button, to select "Guide". . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Scheduled List", then press the ENtER button. . Press the red button. The channel will be switched to the scheduled programme. . Press the ENtER button to select an item and adjust with the ▲ or ▼ button . You can also set hour and minute by pressing the number buttons on the remote control. • Channel: Set the channel. • time: Set the time. • Date: Set Year, Month and Day. • Frequency: Set the frequency. ("Once", "Daily", or "Weekly") . After setting the schedule, Press the red button. . Press the EXIt button to exit. • Save: Save the adjusted schedule. • Cancel: Cancel the adjusted schedule. • Add Programme: Add a new schedule. • Edit: Readjust the selected schedule. • Delete: Delete the selected schedule. ➣ ➣ Scheduled List (No programmes) Return Add Programme DtV Scheduled List tuesday Apr 1:0 ~ 1:00 Once 01 Raitre Move Return Add Programme Edit Delete DtV Scheduled List Channel Adjust Move Return Save Cancel time Date Frequency 0 RaiUno 1 : 0 to -- : -- tue Apr 00 Once DtV Move Enter Return Guide Now & Next Guide Full Guide Scheduled List Default Guide : Full Guide Now/Next Full Guide Move Enter Return DtV You can select these options by simply pressing the GUIDE button on the remote control. BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 34 2008-09-17 �� 3:12:05English - Viewing All Channels and Favourite Channels In the EPG menu, you can display all channels or favourite channels. 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Digital Menu", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ENtER button again, to select "Guide". . Select the your required guide ("Now & Next Guide" or "Full Guide") by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button. . Press the ENtER button. . Press the green button. All the channel lists and the Favourite Channel lists will be toggled. . Select a programme of your choice by pressing the ▲, ▼, ◄, or ► button. . Press the INFO button to display information about the highlighted programme. . When the Edit Favourite Channels list has not been set up: • "The favourites list is empty. Would you like to choose your favourites now?" message is displayed. • Select "Yes". The "Edit Favourite Channels" menu is displayed. If you select "No", all channels will remain unchanged. • To edit the favourite channels, refer to page 30 for more details. 9 . Press the EXIt button to exit. "All Channels" is the list of channels that have been scanned by the channel list update. All channels are displayed in the all channel mode. "Favourites" (favourite channels) is the list of channels that has been set in the "Edit Favourite Channels" menu (refer to page 30). ➣ ➣ Adjusting the Menu transparency You can set the Transparency of the menu. 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Digital Menu", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Setup", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Menu Transparency" then press the ENtER button. . Select the required option ("High", "Medium", "Low", or "Opaque") by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button, and press the ENtER button to change the setting. . Press the EXIt button to exit. All Channels Now & Next Guide 13:28 Wed 16 Feb 27 Discovery Extreme Machines: Armoured Cars Watch Full Guide Favourites Exit Now Next INFO the favourites list is empty. Would you like to choose your favourites now? Yes No Full Guide 13:28 Wed 16 Feb Today 27 Discovery Extreme Machines: Armoured Cars INFO Watch Now/Next Favourites -24Hours +24Hours Exit Setup Menu transparency : Medium Change PIN Parental Lock Subtitle : On Subtitle Mode q Move Enter Return high Medium Low Opaque DtV BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 35 2008-09-17 �� 3:12:06English - Setting up the Parental Lock this feature allows you to prevent unauthorized users, such as children, from watching unsuitable programmes by a -digit PIN (Personal Identification Number) code that is defined by the user. the on-screen menu will instruct you to assign a PIN code (you can change it later, if necessary). 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Digital Menu", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Setup", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Parental Lock.", then press the ENtER button. . The "Enter PIN" is displayed. . Enter your current 4-digit PIN code by using the numeric buttons (0~9). The default PIN code for a new TV set is 0000. If you enter an invalid PIN code,the "Invalid PIN code. Please try again." message is displayed. . Press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the age rating you want to lock out. Press the ENtER button. ♦ Change PIN 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Digital Menu", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Setup", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Change PIN", then press the ENtER button. The "Enter PIN" is displayed. . Enter your current 4-digit PIN code by using the numeric buttons (0~9). The “Enter New PIN” is displayed. . Enter your new PIN code by using the numeric buttons (0~9) The "Confirm New PIN" is displayed. . Re-enter your new PIN code to confirm by using the numeric buttons (0~9). The "Your PIN code has been changed successfully." message is displayed. . Press the ENtER button. . Press the EXIt button to exit. If you forget the PIN code, press the remote control buttons in the following sequence, which resets the PIN to 0-0-0-0:POWER (Off), MUtE, , , , POWER (On). ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ Move Enter Return Setup Menu transparency : Medium  Change PIN  Parental Lock  Subtitle : Off  Subtitle Mode  q Move Enter Return DtV Parental Lock Enter PIN Enter PIN Return DtV Move Enter Return Setup Menu transparency : Medium  Change PIN  Parental Lock  Subtitle : Off  Subtitle Mode  q Move Enter Return DtV Change PIN Confirm New PIN Enter PIN Return Your PIN code has been changed successfully. OK DtV Move Enter Return Parental Lock Parental Rating: No block Move Enter Return ▲ No Block 3 4 5 6 7 ▼ No block DtV BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 36 2008-09-17 �� 3:12:07English - Setting the Subtitle You can activate and deactivate the subtitles. 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Digital Menu", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Setup", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Subtitle ", then press the ENtER button. . Select "On" by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button. Press the ENtER button. . Press the EXIt button to exit. You can select these options simply by pressing the SUbt. button on the remote control. Setting the Subtitle Mode Use this menu to set the Subtitle Mode. "Normal" under the menu is the basic subtitle and "hard of hearing" is the subtitle for a hearing-impaired person. 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Digital Menu", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Setup", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Subtitle Mode", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Normal" or "Hard of hearing". Press the ENtER button. . Press the EXIt button to exit. If the programme you are watching does not support the "Hard of hearing" function, "Normal" automatically activates even though "Hard of hearing" mode is selected. ➣ Selecting the Audio Format You can only hear Dolby Digital sound through the audio receiver connected through an optical cable. You can only hear PCM sound through the main speaker. When sound is emitted from both the main speaker and the audio receiver, a sound echo may occur due to the decoding speed difference between the main speaker and the audio receiver. In this case, use the internal mute function. 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Digital Menu", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Setup", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Audio Format", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "PCM" or "Dolby Digital". Press the ENtER button. . Press the EXIt button to exit. The Audio Format appears according to the broadcasting signal. Dolby digital sound is only available when the TV is connected with an external speaker using an optical cable. ➣ Move Enter Return Setup Menu transparency : Medium Change PIN Parental Lock Subtitle : On Subtitle Mode : Normal q Move Enter Return Off On DtV Move Enter Return Setup Menu transparency : Medium Change PIN Parental Lock Subtitle : On Subtitle Mode : Normal q Move Enter Return Normal hard of hearing DtV Setup p Audio Format : PCM  Audio Description  Digital text : Enable  time Zone Common Interfece q Move Enter Return DtV BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 37 2008-09-17 �� 3:12:07English - Selecting the Digital text (UK only) If the programme is broadcast with digital text, this feature is enabled. 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Digital Menu", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Setup", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Digital Text", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Disable" or "Enable". Press the ENtER button. . Press the EXIt button to exit. MHEG(Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding Experts Group) An International standard for data encoding systems used in multimedia and hypermedia. This is at a higher level than the MPEG system which includes data-linking hypermedia such as still images, character service, animation, graphic and video files as well as multimedia data. MHEG is user runtime interaction technology and is being applied to various fields including VOD (Video-On-Demand), ITV (Interactive TV), EC (Electronic Commerce), tele-education, tele-conferencing, digital libraries and network games. ➣ Selecting the Audio Description this is an auxiliary audio function that provides an additional audio track for visually challenged persons. this function handles the Audio Stream for the AD (Audio Description), when it is sent along with the Main audio from the broadcaster. Users can turn the Audio Description On or Off and control the volume. 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Digital Menu", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Setup", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Audio Description", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "On", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Volume", then press the ENtER button. "Volume" is active when "Audio Description" is set to "On". . Press the ◄ or ► button until you reach the optimal setting. Press the ENtER button. . Press the EXIt button to exit. ➣ Setup p Audio Format : PCM Audio Description Digital text : Enable time Zone Common Interfece q Move Enter Return Disable Enable DtV DtV Setup p Audio Format : PCM  Audio Description  Digital text : Enable  time Zone Common Interfece q Move Enter Return DtV Audio Description Audio Description : On Volume 100 Move Enter Return DtV Off On Audio Description Audio Description : On Volume 100 Move Enter Return DtV BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 38 2008-09-17 �� 3:12:08English - 9 Selecting the time Zone (Spain only) Select the local time zone. 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Digital Menu", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Setup", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Time Zone", then press the ENtER button. . Select the time zone where you locate by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button. Press the ENtER button. The following options are available The Iberian Peninsula and Balearic Islands - Canary Islands . Press the EXIt button to exit. ➣ Viewing Product Information You can view your product information. For service or repair, please contact a Samsung approved dealer. 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Digital Menu", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Setup", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "System", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ENtER button again, to select "Product Information". The Product Information menu is selected. - Software Version, Firmware Version . Press the EXIt button to exit. ➣ Setup p Audio Format : PCM  Audio Description  Digital text : Enable  time Zone Common Interfece q Move Enter Return DtV time Zone Adjust Enter Return the Iberian Peninsula and balearic Islands Canary Islands DtV Product Information Software Version: t-PERLDEUC-0010 Firmware Version: t-EMMADEUb-010 Return DtV BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 39 2008-09-17 �� 3:12:08English - 0 Upgrading the Software to keep your product up-to-date with new Digital television features then software upgrades are periodically broadcast as part of the normal television signal. It will automatically detect these signals and display the software upgrade banner. You are given the option to install the upgrade. 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Digital Menu", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Setup", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "System", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Software Upgrade", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Software Information”, “Manual Upgrade” or “Standby Mode upgrade”. Press the ENtER button. ♦ Software Information Press the ENtER button, then the current software version is shown. To display the software version information, press the ENtER button again. To switch to an alternative version, press the red button. Press the blue button to reset, activate the upgrade and restart. ♦ Manual Upgrade Press the ENtER button to search for new software from the currently broadcasting channels. ♦ Standby Mode Upgrade: On / Off Press the ENtER button. To continue software upgrade with master power on, Select On by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button. 45 minutes after entering standby mode, a manual upgrade is automatically conducted. Since the power of the unit is turned on internally, the screen may be on slightly for the LCD product. This phenomenon may continue for more than 1 hour until the software upgrade is completed. . Press the EXIt button to exit. Checking the Signal Information You can get information about the signal status. 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Digital Menu", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Setup", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "System", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Signal Information", then press the ENtER button. . Press the EXIt button to exit. ➣ If the signal status is poor, the "No signal." message is displayed. Move Enter Return Signal Information Service: ? Service ID:0000 Multiplex: ? (tSID 0000, ONID 0000) Network: ? (ID 0000) bit error level: 10 Signal Strength: 0 Return DtV System Product Information  Signal Information  Software Upgrade  Reset  Move Enter Return DtV Software Upgrade Software Information  Manual Upgrade  Standby Mode upgrade : On  Move Enter Return DtV BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 40 2008-09-17 �� 3:12:08English - 1 Viewing Common Interface This contains information on CAM inserted in the CI slot and displays it. 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Digital Menu", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Setup", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Common Interface", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ENtER button to display the information for your application. . Press the EXIt button to exit. The Application Info inserting is about the CI CARD. You can install the CAM anytime whether the TV is ON or OFF. 1. Purchase the CI CAM module by visiting your nearest dealer or by phone. . Insert the CI CARD into the CAM in the direction of the arrow until it fits. . Insert the CAM with the CI CARD installed into the common interface slot. (Insert the CAM in the direction of the arrow, right up to the end so that it is parallel with the slot.) . Check if you can see a picture on a scrambled signal channel. ➣ Selecting the CI (Common Interface) Menu this enables the user to select from the CAM-provided menu. 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Digital Menu", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Setup", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Common Interface", then press the ENtER button. . Select to "CI Menu" by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button, and press the ENtER button. . Select the required option by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button, and press the ENtER button. . Press the EXIt button to exit. ➣ Select the CI Menu based on the menu PC Card. CI Menu Main menu Move Enter Exit Module information Smart card information Language Software Download Press OK to select, or Exit to quit Application Info type : CA Manufacturer : Channel Plus Info : top Up tV Return DtV BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 41 2008-09-17 �� 3:12:09English - Selecting the Preferred Language (Subtitle, Audio or teletext) You can change the default value for subtitle, audio teletext languages. Displays the language information for the incoming stream. 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Digital Menu", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Language", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Audio Language", "Subtitle Language" or "Teletext Language". Press the ENtER button. . Select a particular language by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button repeatedly. Press the ENtER button. English is the default in cases where the selected language is unavailable in the broadcast. . Press the EXIt button to exit. While viewing a programme, the subtitle can be selected While viewing a programme, audio languages can be selected. ➣ ➣ Resetting You can reset the values stored to the factory default values. The Reset operation deletes all channel information and user preferences returning all values to their default factory state. 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Digital Menu", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Setup", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "System", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Reset", then press the ENtER button. . The "Enter PIN" screen will appear. . Enter your current 4-digit PIN code by using the numeric buttons (0~9). The warning message is displayed. All values will be reset by pressing the coloured buttons (red, green, yellow, and blue) in turn. . Press the EXIt button to exit. ➣ ➣ Reset Enter PIN Enter PIN Return DtV Reset WARN ING : All channel settings and user preferences will be lost and returned to the factory defaults. It is recommended that a reset is performed only when serious problems are experienced. Return DtV Language Audio Language Subtitle Language teletext Language Preference  Move Enter Return DtV Language Audio Language Subtitle Language teletext Language Preference  Move Enter Return DtV Language Audio Language Subtitle Language teletext Language Preference  Move Enter Return DtV BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 42 2008-09-17 �� 3:12:09English - Preference this menu consists of sub-menus: Primary Audio Language, Secondary Audio Language, Primary Subtitle Language, Secondary Subtitle Language, Primary teletext Language, Secondary teletext Language. Using this feature, users can select one of the languages (English, German, Italian, Swedish, French, Welsh, Gaelic, Irish, Danish, Finnish, Spanish, Dutch). The language selected here is the default when the user selects a channel. ♦ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select required menu (Primary Audio Language, Secondary Audio Language, Primary Subtitle Language, Secondary Subtitle Language, Primary Teletext Language, Secondary Teletext Language), then press the ENtER button. The options of the selected menu are displayed. ♦ Select the appropriate language by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button. Press the ENtER button to confirm your choice. If you change the language setting, the Subtitle Language, Audio Language, and the Teletext Language of the Language menu (refer to page 42) are automatically changed to the selected language. The Subtitle Language, Audio Language, and the Teletext Language of the Language menu show a list of languages supported by the current channel and the selection is highlighted. If you change this language setting, the new selection is only valid for the current channel. The changed setting does not change the setting of the Primary Subtitle Language, Primary Audio Language, or the Primary Teletext Language of the Preference menu. ➣ ➣ Move Enter Return Language Audio Language Subtitle Language teletext Language Preference  Move Enter Return DtV BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 43 2008-09-17 �� 3:12:09English - the Windows display-settings for a typical computer are shown below. the actual screens on your PC may be different depending upon your particular version of Windows and your particular video card. Even if your actual screens look different, the same, basic set-up information will apply in almost all cases. (If not, contact your computer manufacturer or Samsung Dealer.) 1. First, click on "Control Panel" on the Windows start menu. . When the control panel window appears, click on "Appearance and Themes" and a display dialog-box will appear. . When the control panel window appears, click on "Display" and a display dialog-box will appear. . Navigate to the "Settings" tab on the display dialog-box. The correct size setting (resolution): Optimum- 1280 X 1024 If a vertical-frequency option exists on your display settings dialog box, the correct value is "60" or "60 Hz". Otherwise, just click "OK" and exit the dialog box. Setting up Your PC Software (based on Windows XP) Display Modes both screen position and size will vary depending on the type of PC monitor and its resolution. the resolutions in the table are recommended. D-Sub Input Mode Resolution horizontal Frequency (khz) Vertical Frequency (hz) Pixel Clock Frequency (Mhz) Sync Polarity (h/V) IbM 640 x 350 720 x 400 31.469 31.469 70.086 70.087 25.175 28.322 + / - - / + VESA 640 x 480 640 x 480 640 x 480 800 x 600 800 x 600 800 x 600 1024 x 768 1024 x 768 1024 x 768 1280 x 1024 1280 x 1024 31.469 37.861 37.500 37.879 48.077 46.875 48.363 56.476 60.023 63.981 79.976 59.940 72.809 75.000 60.317 72.188 75.000 60.004 70.069 75.029 60.020 75.025 25.175 31.500 31.500 40.000 50.000 49.500 65.000 75.000 78.750 108.000 135.000 - / - - / - - / - + / + + / + + / + - / - - / - + / + + / + + / + hDMI/DVI Input Mode Resolution horizontal Frequency (khz) Vertical Frequency (hz) Pixel Clock Frequency (Mhz) Sync Polarity (h/V) VESA 640 x 480 800 x 600 1024 x 768 1280 x 1024 31.469 37.879 48.363 63.981 59.940 60.317 60.004 60.020 25.175 40.000 65.000 108.000 - / - + / + - / - + / + When using an HDMI/DVI cable connection, you must use the HDMI IN 2 jack. The interlace mode is not supported. The set might operate abnormally if a non-standard video format is selected. Separate and Composite modes are supported. SOG is not supported. Too long or low quality VGA cable can cause picture noise at high resolution modes. ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 44 2008-09-17 �� 3:12:10English - Setting up the tV with your PC Preset: Press the SOURCE button to select PC mode. 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ENtER button, to select "Picture". . Select the required option by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button, then press the ENtER button. . When you are satisfied with your setting, press the ENtER button. . Press the EXIt button to exit. ♦ Auto Adjustment Auto adjustment allows the PC screen of set to self-adjust to the incoming PC video signal. The values of fine, coarse and position are adjusted automatically. Easy Setting 1. Press the tOOLS button on the remote control. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Auto Adjustment”, then press the ENtER button. ♦ Screen Adjustment: Coarse/Fine The purpose of picture quality adjustment is to remove or reduce picture noise. If the noise is not removed by Finetuning alone, then adjust the frequency as best as possible (coarse) and Fine-tune again. After the noise has been reduced, re-adjust the picture so that it is aligned on the center of screen. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Coarse" or "Fine", then press the ENtER button. Press the ◄ or ► button to adjust the screen quality. Press the ENtER button. Position Adjust the PC’s screen positioning if it does not fit the TV screen. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to adjusting the Vertical-Position. Press the ◄ or ► button to adjust the Horizontal-Position. Press the ENtER button. Image Reset You can replace all image settings with the factory default values. Screen Adjustment Coarse 0 Fine Position  Image Reset  tV Move Enter Return tV Position Move Enter Return Picture Mode : Standard  backlight Contrast 9 brightness Sharpness 0 Auto Adjustment  Screen Adjustment  Detailed Settings  Picture Options  Reset : OK  tV Move Enter Return Screen Adjustment Coarse 0 Fine Position  Image Reset  tV Move Enter Return Auto Adjustment in progress Please wait. Anynet+ (hDMI-CEC) Picture Mode : Standard Sound Mode : Custom Sleep timer : Off SRS tS Xt : Off Energy Saving : Off Auto Adjustment Move Enter Exit tools BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 45 2008-09-17 �� 3:12:11English - Connecting Anynet + Devices the Anynet+ system supports AV devices supporting Anynet+ only. Check if there is an Anynet+ mark on the AV device to be connected to the tV. to directly connect to tV Connect the [HDMI 1], [HDMI 2] or [HDMI 3] jack on the TV and the HDMI OUT jack of the corresponding Anynet+ device using the HDMI cable. to connect to home theater 1. Connect the [HDMI 1], [HDMI 2] or [HDMI 3] jack on the TV and the HDMI OUT jack of the corresponding Anynet+ device using the HDMI cable. . Connect the HDMI IN jack of the home theatre and the HDMI OUT jack of the corresponding Anynet+ device using the HDMI cable. Connect only the optical cable between [Digital Audio Out (Optical)] on your TV and Digital Audio Input on the receiver. Connect only one receiver. You can listen to 5.1 channel sound through the home theatre’s speakers. Otherwise, you can only listen to 2 channel stereo sound in other cases. Make sure to connect the Digital Audio IN (Optical) of the home theatre and the TV correctly to listen to TV sound through the home theatre. However, you cannot listen to sound from the BD recorder that is sent to the home theatre via the TV in 5.1 channel sound because the TV outputs only 2 channel stereo sound. Please see the manual for the home theatre. You can connect an Anynet+ device using the HDMI cable. Some HDMI cables may not support Anynet+ functions. Anynet+ works when the AV device supporting Anynet+ is in the Standby or On status. Anynet+ supports up to 8 AV devices in total. ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ What is Anynet + ? Anynet+ is an AV network system that enables an easy-to-use AV interface for users by controlling all connected AV devices through the Anynet+ menu when Samsung Electronics AV devices are connected. Anynet+ Device 1 Anynet+ Device Anynet+ Device tV hDMI Cable hDMI Cable hDMI Cable tV Anynet+ Device 1 Anynet+ Device Anynet+ Device hDMI Cable hDMI Cable hDMI Cable hDMI Cable home theatre Optical Cable BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 46 2008-09-17 �� 3:12:11English - Setting Up Anynet + the following settings are to use Anynet+ functions. Using the Anynet+ Function 1. Press The tOOLS button. Then Press the ENtER button to select "Anynet+(HDMI-CEC)". Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Setup", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ENtER button to select "Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "On", then press the ENtER button. The "Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)" function is enabled. If you select "Off", "Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)" is disabled. When the "Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)" function is disabled, all the Anynet+ related operations are deactivated. turning an Anynet+ Device Off Automatically when the tV is turned Off 1. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Auto Turn Off", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Yes", then press the ENtER button. The Auto turn off function is enabled. If you select "No", the Auto turn off function is cancelled. Press the EXIt button to exit. The Select Device setting of the TV remote control is to be set to TV to use the Anynet+ function. If you set "Auto Turn Off" to "Yes", connected external devices are also turned off when the TV is turned off. However, if the device is recording, it may not be turned off. ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ Setup Anynet+ (hDMI-CEC) : Off Auto turn Off : Off Searching Connections Off On Move Enter Return Setup Anynet+ (hDMI-CEC) : On Auto turn Off : Off Searching Connections No Yes Move Enter Return View tV Select Device  Record  Menu on Device  Device Operation  Receiver :Off  Setup  tV P9 Move Enter Return Anynet+ (hDMI-CEC) Picture Mode : Standard Sound Mode : Custom Sleep timer : Off SRS tS Xt : Off Energy Saving : Off Dual l-ll : Mono Move Enter Exit tools BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 47 2008-09-17 �� 3:12:12English - Scanning and Switching between Anynet + Devices 1. Press the tOOLS button. Then press the ENtER button to select "Anynet+(HDMI-CEC)". . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Select Device", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select to a particular device and press the ENtER button. It is switched to the selected device. . If you cannot find a device you want, press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Setup", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Searching Connections", then press the ENtER button. The message "Configuring Anynet+ connection..." is displayed. When searching devices completes, the connected devices are listed in the Anynet+ menu. Switching to the selected devices may take up to 2 minutes. You cannot cancel the operation during the switching operation. The time required to scan for devices is determined by the number of connected devices. When the device scan is complete, the number of found devices is not displayed. Although the TV automatically scans devices when it is turned on using the POWER button, devices connected when the TV is on or under a specific circumstance are not displayed in the device list. Therefore select "Searching Connections" menu to search devices. If you have selected external input mode by pressing the SOURCE button, you cannot use the Anynet+ function. Make sure to switch to an Anynet+ device by using the tOOLS button. ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ Move Enter Return Setup Anynet+ (hDMI-CEC) : On  Auto turn Off : Yes  Searching Connections  Move Enter Return View tV Select Device  Record  Menu on Device  Device Operation  Receiver :Off  Setup  tV P9 Move Enter Return BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 48 2008-09-17 �� 3:12:12English - 9 Anynet+ Menu the Anynet+ menu changes depending on the type and status of the Anynet+ devices connected to the tV. Anynet+ Menu Description View tV Switches from Anynet+ to TV broadcast mode. Select Device Your TV connects to the corresponding device. Record Starts a recording. (This menu works only for a device supporting recording.) Menu on Device Shows the menu of the connected device. Example. When a DVD Recorder is connected, the DVD Recorder’s title menu appears. Device Operation Shows the play control menu of the connected device. Example. When a DVD Recorder is connected, the play control menu of the DVD Recorder appears. Receiver Sound is output through the receiver. Setup You can set the environment for using Anynet+. tV Remote Control buttons Available in Anynet+ Mode Device type Operating Status Available buttons Anynet+ Device After switching to the device, when the menu of the corresponding device is displayed on the screen. Numeric buttons ▲/▼/◄/►/ENtER buttons Colour buttons EXIt button After switching to the device, while playing a file π(Backward search)/ µ(Forward search)/ ∫(Stop)/ ∂(Play) ∑(Pause) Device with built-in tuner After switching to the device, when you are watching a TV programme Pbutton Audio Device When Receiver is activated +/- button/ MUtE button The Anynet+ function only works when the remote control is set to TV. The ∫ button works only while in the recordable state. You cannot control Anynet+ devices using the buttons on the TV. You can control Anynet+ devices only using the TV remote control. The TV remote control may not work under certain conditions. In this case, re-select the Anynet+ device. The Anynet+ functions don’t operate for the products from other manufacturers. In Anynet+ mode, the colour buttons may not work properly. The π, µ operations may differ depending on the device. ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 49 2008-09-17 �� 3:12:12English - 0 Recording You can make a recording of a tV programme using a recorder. Press the ∏ button. Recording begins. (Only when the Anynet+ enabled recording device is connected.) The current TV programme is recorded in the Watching TV status. If you are watching video from another device, the video from the device is recorded. You can also record the source streams by selecting "Record" after pressing the tOOLS button. Before recording, check whether the antenna jack is properly connected to the recording device. For the antenna connection to the recording device, refer to its user manual. ➣ ➣ ➣ Listening through a Receiver You can listen to sound through a receiver instead of the tV speaker. 1. Press the tOOLS button. Then Press the ENtER button to select "Anynet+(HDMI-CEC)". Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select "Receiver", then press the ENtER button. . Press the ◄ or ► button to select to "On", then press the ENtER button. Now you can listen to sound through the receiver. . Press the EXIt button to exit. When the receiver is set to On, you can listen to the TV sound through the 2-channel receiver. If the receiver is exclusively for a home theatre only (supporting audio only), it may not appear in the device list. Only when you have connected the optical jack of the TV and the receiver properly, does Receiver work. In case of a content with copyright problem, listening through the receiver may not properly operate. If there is a power interruption to the TV when the “Receiver” is set to “On” (by disconnecting the power cord or a power failure), the “TV Speaker” may be set to “Off” when you turn the TV on again. (see page 22) ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ View tV Select Device  Record  Menu on Device  Device Operation  Receiver :Off  Setup  tV P9 Move Enter Return BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 50 2008-09-17 �� 3:12:12English - 1 Check Points before Requesting Service Symptom Solution Anynet+ does not work. ■ Check if the device is an Anynet+ device. The Anynet+ system supports Anynet+ devices only. ■ Connect only one receiver. ■ Check if the Anynet+ device power cord is properly connected. ■ Check the Anynet+ device’s Video/Audio/HDMI cable connections. ■ Check whether Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) is set to On in the Anynet+ setup menu. ■ Check whether the TV remote control is in TV mode. ■ Check whether it is Anynet+ exclusive remote control. ■ Anynet+ doesn’t work at a certain condition. (Searching channels, Plug & Play, etc.) ■ When connecting or removing the HDMI cable, please make sure to search devices again or restart your TV. ■ Check if the Anynet+ Function of Anynet+ device is set on. I want to start Anynet+. ■ Check if the Anynet+ device is properly connected to the TV and check if the Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) is set to On in the Anynet+ Setup menu. ■ Press the tV/DtV button on the TV remote control to switch to TV. Then press the tOOLS button to show the Anynet+ menu and select a menu you want. I want to exit Anynet+. ■ Select View tV in Anynet+ menu. ■ Press the SOURCE button on the TV remote control and select a device other than Anynet+ devices. ■ Press any of P / , PRE-Ch, and such to change to the TV mode. (Note that the channel button operates only when a tuner-embedded Anynet+ device is not connected.) the Configuring Anynet+ connection message appears on the screen. ■ You cannot use the remote control when you are configuring Anynet+ or switching to a view mode. ■ Use the remote control when the Anynet+ setting or switching to view mode is complete. the Anynet+ device does not play. You cannot use the play function when Plug & Play is in progress. the connected device is not displayed. ■ Check whether or not the device supports Anynet+ functions. ■ Check whether or not the HDMI cable is properly connected. ■ Check whether Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) is set to On in the Anynet+ setup menu. ■ Search Anynet+ devices again. ■ You can connect an Anynet+ device using the HDMI cable only. Some HDMI cables may not support Anynet+ functions. ■ If it is terminated by an abnormal situation such as disconnecting the HDMI cable or power cord or a power failure, please repeat the device scan. the tV programme cannot be recorded. Check whether the antenna jack on the recording device is properly connected. the tV sound is not output through the receiver. Connect the optical cable between TV and the receiver. BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 51 2008-09-17 �� 3:12:12English - Most television stations provide written information services via teletext. the index page of the teletext service gives you information on how to use the service. In addition, you can select various options to suit your requirements by using the remote control buttons. For teletext information to be displayed correctly, channel reception must be stable. Otherwise, information may be missing or some pages may not be displayed. 1. (exit) Exit from the teletext display 2 6 (index) Used to display the index (contents) page at any time while you are viewing teletext. 3 8 (store) Used to store the teletext pages. 4 4 (size) Press to display the double-size letters in the upper half of the screen. For lower half of the screen, press it again. To display normal screen, press it once again. 5 5 (reveal) Used to display the hidden text (answers to quiz games, for example). To display normal screen, press it again. 6 / (teletext on/mix) Press to activate teletext mode after selecting the channel providing the teletext service. Press it twice to overlap the teletext with the current broadcasting screen. 7 0 (mode) Press to select the teletext mode (LIST/FLOF). If you press it in the LIST mode, it switches into the List save mode. In the List save mode, you can save teletext page into list using the 8(store) button. 8 1 (sub-page) Used to display the available sub-page. 9 2 (page up) Used to display the next teletext page. 0 3 (page down) Used to display the previous teletext page. ! 9 (hold) Used to hold the display on a given page if the selected page is linked with several secondary pages which follow on automatically. To resume, press it again. @ 7 (cancel) Used to display the broadcast when searching for a page. # Colour buttons (red/green/yellow/blue) If the FASTEXT system is used by a broadcasting company, the different topics covered on a teletext page are colour-coded and can be selected by pressing the coloured buttons. Press one of them corresponding to the required. The page is displayed with other coloured information that can be selected in the same way. To display the previous or next page, press the corresponding coloured button. You can change teletext pages by pressing the numeric buttons on the remote control. teletext Feature 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ! @ # 2 BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 52 2008-09-17 �� 3:12:13English - the teletext pages are organized according to six categories: Part Contents A Selected page number. b Broadcasting station identity. C Current page number or search status. D Date and time. E Text. F Status information. FASTEXT information. Teletext information is often divided between several pages displayed in sequence, which can be accessed by: ♦ Entering the page number ♦ Selecting a title in a list ♦ Selecting a coloured heading (FASTEXT system) Press the tV/DtV button to exit from the teletext display. BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 53 2008-09-17 �� 3:12:13English - Once the auto wall mount is installed, your tV’s position can be easily adjusted. ➣ This function is optional and may not be supported. Wall-Mount Adjustment tV Rear Panel Auto Wall-Mount SERVICE Cable (Not supplied) Entering the menu 1. Press the ▲, ▼, ◄ or ► button on your remote control. The Wall Mount Adjustment screen is displayed. If the Wall Mount Adjustment screen is not displayed when clicking on a direction button while watching your TV, use the menu to display that screen. • Press the MENU butt on to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Setup”, then press the ENtER button. • Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select “Wall-Mount Adjustment”, then press the ENtER button. Remembering the Position . Adjust to the desired position using the ▲,▼,◄,► buttons. If you press an arrow button when no OSD is displayed on the TV screen, the Adjustment screen appears. Press the INFO button to reset. Press the ◄ or ► button to select “Yes”, then press the ENtER button. The position is initialized to the default setting. . Press the blue button. Press the ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a save mode from either Position 1, Position 2 or Position 3 in order to save the current position. To not save the current position, press the REtURN button. When selecting a save mode, you cannot use the Colour buttons. . Press the ENtER button to save. When Position1 is selected, the message "Current position saved as Position1" is displayed. . Press the ENtER button. The saved Position appears on the left side of the OSD. ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ tV Setup Plug & Play  Language : English  time  Wall-Mount Adjustment  Melody : Off  Entertainment : Off  Energy Saving : Off  Move Enter Return Save Select a mode to Save. Position1 Position Position Move Enter Return Wall-Mount Adjustment Adjust Save INFO Center Position 1 BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 54 2008-09-17 �� 3:12:14English - Moving to the remembered position 1. Complete Step 1 of “Entering the menu”. . Pressing a Colour (Red, Green, Yellow) button moves the auto wall mount to the saved position. You can move the wall mount to one of the 3 pre-set positions by pressing the Red (Position 1), Green (Position 2) or Yellow (Position 3) buttons. If you adjust the Position after moving to a pre-set position, the position display will disappear. For installation, refer to the Installation Manual provided with the wall mount. For product installation and the installation and moving of the wall mount, make sure to consult a specialized installation company. This installation manual is to be used when attaching the wall mount to a wall. When attaching to other building materials, please contact your nearest dealer. The auto wall mount will not work when Anynet+ is operating. 40 inch model are not compatible with the old electrically powered wall mount model (WMN5090A*). ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ Wall-Mount Adjusment Adjust Save INFO Center Position1 Position 1 Using the Anti-theft Kensington Lock The Kensington lock is a device used to physically fix the system when using it in a public place. The appearance and locking method may differ from the illustration depending on the manufacturer. Refer to the manual provided with the Kensington lock for proper use. The locking device has to be purchased separately. 1. Insert the locking device into the Kensington slot on the LCD TV (Figure 1), and turn it in the locking direction (Figure 2). . Connect the Kensington lock cable. . Fix the Kensington lock to a desk or a heavy stationary object. The location of the Kensington Lock may be different depending on its model. ➣ Cable Figure 1 Figure 2 BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 55 2008-09-17 �� 3:12:14English - Securing the tV to the Wall Caution: Pulling, pushing, or climbing on the TV may cause the TV to fall. In particular, ensure your children do not hang over or destabilize the TV; doing so may cause the TV to tip over, causing serious injuries or death. Follow all safety precautions provided on the included Safety Flyer. For added stability, install the anti-fall device for safety purposes, as follows. to avoid the tV from falling: 1. Put the screws into the clamps and firmly fasten them onto the wall. Confirm that the screws have been firmly installed onto the wall. You may need additional material such as an anchor depending on the type of wall. Since the necessary clamps, screws, and string are not supplied, please purchase these additionally. . Remove the screws from the center back of the TV, put the screws into the clamps, and then fasten the screws onto the TV again. Screws may not be supplied with the product. In this case, please purchase the screws of the following specifications. Screw Specifications - For a 17 ~ 29 Inch LCD TV: M4 X 15 - For a 32 ~ 40 Inch LCD TV: M6 X 15 . Connect the clamps fixed onto the TV and the clamps fixed onto the wall with a strong string and then tie the string tightly. Install the TV near to the wall so that it does not fall backwards. It is safe to connect the string so that the clamps fixed on the wall are equal to or lower than the clamps fixed on the TV. Untie the string before moving the TV. . Verify all connections are properly secured. Periodically check connections for any sign of fatigue for failure. If you have any doubt about the security of your connections,contact a professional installer. ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ ➣ 경고 주의 경고 주의 Wall Wall BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 56 2008-09-17 �� 3:12:14English - troubleshooting: before Contacting Service Personnel No sound or picture.  Check that the mains lead has been connected to a wall socket.  Check that you have pressed the button on your set.  Check the picture contrast and brightness settings.  Check the volume. Normal picture but no sound.  Check the volume.  Check whether the MUtE button has been pressed on the remote control.  Check if "TV Speaker" is on. Screen is black and power indicator light blinks steadily.  On your computer check; Power, Signal Cable.  The TV is using its power management system.  Move the computer’s mouse or press any key on the keyboard. No picture or black and white picture.  Adjust the colour settings.  Check that the broadcast system selected is correct. Sound and picture interference.  Try to identify the electrical appliance that is affecting the set and move it further away.  Plug your set into a different mains socket. Blurred or snowy picture, distorted sound.  Check the direction, location and connections of your aerial. This interference is often due to the use of an indoor aerial. Remote control malfunctions.  Replace the remote control batteries.  Clean the upper edge of the remote control (transmission window).  Check the battery terminals. 'Check signal cable.' message is displayed.  Check that the signal cable is firmly connected to the PC or video sources.  Check that the PC or video sources are turned on. On PC mode, 'Not Supported Mode.' message is displayed.  Check the maximum resolution and the frequency of the video adaptor.  Compare these values with the data in the Display Modes. The damaged picture appears in the corner of the screen. If "Just Scan" is selected in some external devices, the damaged picture may appear in the corner of the screen. This symptom is caused by external devices, not TV. The 'Resets all settings to the default values' message appears. This appears when you press and hold the EXIt button for a while. The product settings are reset to the factory defaults. The TFT LCD panel uses a panel consisting of sub pixels (3 932 160) which require sophisticated technology to produce. However, there may be few bright or dark pixels on the screen. These pixels will have no impact on the performance of the product. BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 57 2008-09-17 �� 3:12:14English - Technical and Environmental Specifications Design and specifications are subject to change without prior notice. This device is a Class B digital apparatus. For the power supply and Power Consumption, refer to the label attached to the product. Model Name LE0A Screen Size (Diagonal) 40 inch PC Resolution 1280 x 1024 @ 60 Hz Sound Output 10W x 2 Dimensions (WxDxh) Body With stand 971 X 87 X 628 mm 971 X 300 X 687 mm Weight With stand 21 kg Environmental Considerations Operating Temperature Operating Humidity Storage Temperature Storage Humidity 10 °C to 40 °C (50 °F to 104 °F) 10 % to 80 %, non-condensing -20 °C to 45 °C (-4 °F to 113 °F) 5 % to 95 %, non-condensing Stand Swivel (Left / Right) -20˚ ~ 20˚ BN68-01464G-Eng.indd 58 2008-09-17 �� 3:12:14 Contact SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE If you have any questions or comments relating to Samsung products, please contact the SAMSUNG customer care centre. Country Customer Care Centre Web Site AUSTRIA 0810 - SAMSUNG (7267864, € 0.07/min) www.samsung.com/at BELGIUM 02-201-24-18 www.samsung.com/be (Dutch) www.samsung.com/be_fr (French) CZECH 800 - SAMSUNG (800-726786) www.samsung.com/cz Samsung Zrt., česká organizační složka, Oasis Florenc, Sokolovská394/17, 180 00, Praha 8 DENMARK 70 70 19 70 www.samsung.com/dk FINLAND 030 - 6227 515 www.samsung.com/fi FRANCE 01 48 63 00 00 www.samsung.com/fr GERMANY 01805 - SAMSUNG (726-7864 € 0,14/Min) www.samsung.de HUNGARY 06-80-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/hu ITALIA 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/it LUXEMBURG 261 03 710 www.samsung.com/lu NETHERLANDS 0900-SAMSUNG (0900-7267864) (€ 0,10/Min) www.samsung.com/nl NORWAY 815-56 480 www.samsung.com/no POLAND 0 801 1SAMSUNG (172678) 022-607-93-33 www.samsung.com/pl PORTUGAL 80820-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/pt SLOVAKIA 0800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/sk SPAIN 902 - 1 - SAMSUNG (902 172 678) www.samsung.com/es SWEDEN 0771 726 7864 (SAMSUNG) www.samsung.com/se TURKEY 444 77 11 www.samsung.com/tr U.K 0845 SAMSUNG (7267864) www.samsung.com/uk EIRE 0818 717100 www.samsung.com/ie SWITZERLAND 0848 - SAMSUNG (7267864, CHF 0.08/min) www.samsung.com/ch www.samsung.com/ch_fr/(French) LITHUANIA 8-800-77777 www.samsung.com/lt LATVIA 8000-7267 www.samsung.com/lv ESTONIA 800-7267 www.samsung.com/ee © 2010 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. BN68-02655A-00 LED TV user manual LED TV user manual imagine the possibilities Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product. To receive more complete service, please register your product at www.samsung.com/register Model _____________Serial No. _____________ [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 1 2010-03-03 오전 2:35:452 English Figures and illustrations in this User Manual are provided for reference only and may differ from actual product appearance. Product design and specifications may be changed without notice. Digital TV notice 1. Functionalities related to Digital TV (DVB) are only available in countries/areas where DVB-T (MPEG2 and MPEG4 AVC) digital terrestrial signals are broadcasted or where you are able to access to a compatible DVB-C (MPEG2 and MPEG4 AAC) cable-TV service. Please check with your local dealer the possibility to receive DVB-T or DVB-C signal. 2. DVB-T is the DVB European consortium standard for the broadcast transmission of digital terrestrial television and DVB-C is that for the broadcast transmission of digital TV over cable. However, some differentiated features like EPG (Electric Programme Guide), VOD (Video On Demand) and so on, are not included in this specification. So, they cannot be workable at this moment. 3. Although this TV set meets the latest DVB-T and DVB-C standards, as of [August, 2008], the compatibility with future DVB-T digital terrestrial and DVB-C digital cable broadcasts cannot be guaranteed. 4. Depending on the countries/areas where this TV set is used some cable-TV providers may charge an additional fee for such a service and you may be required to agree to terms and conditions of their business. 5. Some Digital TV functions might be unavailable in some countries or regions and DVB-C might not work correctly with some cable service providers. 6. For more information, please contact your local Samsung customer care centre. ✎ The reception quality of TV may be affected due to differences in broadcasting method between the countries. Please check the TV performance in the local SAMSUNG Authorized Dealer, or the Samsung Call Centre whether it can be improved by reconfiguring TV setting or not. Still image warning Avoid displaying still images (like jpeg picture files) or still image element (like TV programme logo, panorama or 4:3 image format, stock or news bar at screen bottom etc.) on the screen. Constant displaying of still picture can cause ghosting of LED screen, which will affect image quality. To reduce risk of this effect, please follow below recommendations: • Avoid displaying the same TV channel for long periods. • Always try do display any image on full screen, use TV set picture format menu for best possible match. • Reduce brightness and contrast values to minimum required to achieve desired picture quality, exceeded values may speed up the burnout process. • Frequently use all TV features designed to reduce image retention and screen burnout, refer to proper user manual section for details. Securing the Installation Space Keep the required distances between the product and other objects (e.g. walls) to ensure proper ventilation. Failing to do so may result in fire or a problem with the product due to an increase in the internal temperature of the product. ✎ When using a stand or wall-mount, use parts provided by Samsung Electronics only. x If you use parts provided by another manufacturer, it may result in a problem with the product or an injury due to the product falling. ✎ The appearance may differ depending on the product. Installation with a stand. Installation with a wall-mount. 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment) (Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems) This marking on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB cable) should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these items from other types of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe recycling. Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal. Correct disposal of batteries in this product (Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate battery return systems) This marking on the battery, manual or packaging indicates that the batteries in this product should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. Where marked, the chemical symbols Hg, Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury, cadmium or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006/66. If batteries are not properly disposed of, these substances can cause harm to human health or the environment. To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse, please separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through your local, free battery return system. [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 2 2010-03-03 오전 2:35:463 ENGLISH English Contents Getting Started 4 4 Accessories 5 Viewing the Control Panel 6 Viewing the Remote Control 7 Connecting to an Antenna 7 Plug & Play (Initial Setup) Connections 8 8 Connecting to an AV Device 9 Connecting to an Audio Device 10 Changing the Input Source Basic Features 11 11 How to Navigate Menus 11 Using the INFO button (Now & Next guide) 11 Planning Your Viewing 13 Channel Menu 15 Picture Menu 17 Sound Menu 19 Setup Menu 21 Support Menu Advanced Features 23 23 Connecting to a PC 24 Media Play 30 Anynet+ Other Information 34 34 Analogue Channel Teletext Feature 35 Assembling the Cables 35 Installing the Wall Mount 37 Anti-theft Kensington Lock 37 Securing the TV to the wall 38 Troubleshooting 41 Specifications 42 Index Check the Symbol! tThis function can be used by pressing the TOOLS button on the remote control. TOOLS Note One-Touch Button [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 3 2010-03-03 오전 2:35:474 English Getting Started Accessories ✎Please make sure the following items are included with your LED TV. If any items are missing, contact your dealer. ✎The items’ colours and shapes may vary depending on the models. ✎Cables not included in the package contents can be purchased separately. y Remote Control & Batteries (AAA x 2) y Owner’s Instructions y Warranty Card / Safety Guide (Not available in some locations) y Cleaning Cloth y Power Cord y Blanking Bracket & Screw (X1) (26 inch model Only) y Holder-Ring (4ea) (26 inch model Only) y Holder-Wire stand (26 inch model Only) y Cable Tie y Holder-Wire (3ea) y AV Adapter y Component Adapter y SCART Adapter UE19C4000, UE22C4000 / UE22C4010 See separate guide for installing the stand. y Stand Base y Stand Body UE26C4000 See separate guide for installing the stand. s s s s s y Stand (1EA) y Guide Stand (1EA) y Screws (10EA) ✎For best cable connection to this product, be sure to use cables with a maximum thickness as below: y Maximum thickness - 0.55 inches (14mm) (A) (B) 5EA (M4 X L12) 5EA (M4 X L8) (M4 X L8) [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 4 2010-03-03 오전 2:35:495 01 Getting Started English Viewing the Control Panel ✎The product colour and shape may vary depending on the model. Remote control sensor Aim the remote control towards this spot on the TV. SOURCEE Toggles between all the available input sources. In the on-screen menu, use this button as you would use the ENTERE button on the remote control. MENU Y Displays an on-screen menu, the OSD (on screen display) of your TV’s features. Adjusts the volume. In the OSD, use the Y buttons as you would use the z ◄ and ► buttons on the remote control. Changes the channels. In the OSD, use the z buttons as you would use the ▼ and ▲ buttons on the remote control. Power Indicator Blinks and turns off when the power is on and lights up in standby mode. P (Power) Turns the TV on or off. Standby mode Do not leave your TV in standby mode for long periods of time (when you are away on a holiday, for example). A small amount of electric power is still consumed even when the power button is turned off. It is best to unplug the power cord. Speakers Remote control sensor Power Indicator [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 5 2010-03-03 오전 2:35:506 Getting Started English Installing batteries (Battery size: AAA) ✎NOTE x Use the remote control within 23 feet from the TV. x Bright light may affect the performance of the remote control. Avoid using nearby special fluorescent light or neon signs. x The colour and shape may vary depending on the model. CH LIST TOOLS POWER SOURCE PRE-CH MENU RETURN MEDIA.P A B C D EXIT INFO HDMI TTX/MIX GUIDE P.MODE AD P.SIZE SUBT. S.MODE DUAL Viewing the Remote Control ✎This is a special remote control for the visually impaired persons and has Braille points on the Power, Channel and Volume buttons. Turns the TV on and off. Selects the HDMI mode directly. Displays and selects the available video sources. (p. 10) Returns to the previous channel. Cuts off the sound temporarily. Changes channels. Displays channel lists on the screen (p. 13). Displays the EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) (p. 11). Displays information on the TV screen. Exits the menu. Have direct access to channels. Adjusts the volume. Alternately selects Teletext, Double or Mix. Opens the OSD. Quickly select frequently used functions. Displays Media Play (p. 24). Returns to the previous menu. Selects the on-screen menu items and changes the values seen on the menu. These buttons are for the Channel Manager, Media Play(USB) menu, etc. Use these buttons in Media Play(USB) and Anynet+(HDMI-CEC) modes (p. 24, 30). (�: Controls recording for Samsung recorders that have the Anynet+ feature) P.MODE: Press to select the picture mode (p. 15). S.MODE: Press to select the sound mode (p. 17). DUAL I-II: Sound effect selection (p. 19). AD: Turns the audio description on and off (p. 18). This is not available in some locations. P.SIZE: Selects the picture size (p. 16). SUBT.: Displays digital subtitles (p. 20). [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 6 2010-03-03 오전 2:35:507 01 Getting Started English Connecting to an Antenna When the TV is initially powered on, basic settings proceed automatically. ✎Preset: Connecting the mains and antenna. ✎If the size of the cable mold part was an abnormal shape, the part may not be connected to the input port properly. Plug & Play (Initial Setup) When the TV is initially powered on, a sequence of on-screen prompts will assist in configuring basic settings. Press the POWERP button. Plug & Play is available only when the Input source is set to TV. ✎To return to the previous step, press the Red button. 1 Selecting a language Press the ▲ or ▼ button, then press the ENTERE button. Select the desired OSD (On Screen Display) language. P POWER 2 Selecting Store Demo or Home Use Press the ◄ or ► button, then press the ENTERE button. y Select the Home Use mode. Store Demo Mode is for retail environments. y Return the unit’s settings from Store Demo to Home Use (standard): Press the volume button on the TV. When you see the volume OSD, press and hold MENU for 5 sec. 3 Selecting a country Press the ▲ or ▼ button, then press the ENTERE button. Select the appropriate country. If the desired country does not exist on the menu, select Others. ✎After selecting the country in the Country menu, some models may proceed with an additional option to setup the pin number. ✎When you input the PIN number, 0-0-0-0 is not available. 4 Selecting an antenna Press the ▲ or ▼ button, then press the ENTERE button. Select Air or Cable. 5 Selecting a channel Press the ▲ or ▼ button, then press the ENTERE button. Select the channel source to memorise. When setting the antenna source to Cable, a step appears allowing you to assign numerical values (channel frequencies) to the channels. For more information, refer to Channel → Auto Store (p.13). Press the ENTERE button at any time to interrupt the memorization process. 6 Setting the Clock Mode Set the Clock Mode automatically or manually. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Auto, then press the ENTERE button. 7 Time Zone Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the your time zone, then press the ENTERE button (depending on the country). 8 Viewing the HD Connection Guide. The connection method for the best HD screen quality is displayed. 9 Enjoy your TV. Press the ENTERE button. If You Want to Reset This Feature... Select Setup - Plug & Play (Initial Setup). Enter your 4 digit PIN number. The default PIN number is “0-0-0-0.” If you want to change the PIN number, use the Change PIN function. ANT OUT Power Input VHF/UHF Antenna or Cable 1_BN68-02655A-00Eng.indd 7 2010-03-04 오전 2:59:108 English Connections Connecting to an AV Device Using an HDMI or HDMI/DVI Cable: HD connection (up to 720p/1080i) Available devices: DVD, Blu-ray player, HD cable box, HD STB (Set-Top-Box) satellite receiver, cable box, satellite receiver (STB) ✎HDMI IN 1(DVI), 2, PC/DVI AUDIO IN x When using an HDMI/DVI cable connection, you must use the HDMI IN 1(DVI) jack. For the DVI cable connection, use a DVI to HDMI cable or DVI-HDMI (DVI to HDMI) adapter for video connection and the PC/DVI AUDIO IN jacks for audio. x If an external device such as a DVD / Blu-ray player / cable box / STB satellite receiver supporting a HDMI versions older than 1.3 is connected, the TV may operate abnormally (e.g. no screen display / no sound / annoying flicker / abnormal Colour). x If there is no sound after connecting an HDMI cable, check the HDMI version of the external device. If you suspect the version is older than 1.3, contact the provider of the device to confirm the HDMI version and request an upgrade. x It is recommended you purchase an HDMI-certified cable. Otherwise, the screen may appear blank or a connection error may occur. Using a Component (up to 720p/1080i) or Audio/Video (480i only) and Scart Cable Available devices: DVD, Blu-ray player, cable box, STB satellite receiver, VCR ✎In Ext. mode, DTV Out supports MPEG SD Video and Audio only. ✎To obtain the best picture quality, the Component connection is recommended over the A/V connection. ✎If the size of the cable mold part was an abnormal shape, the part may not be connected to the input port properly. PR PB Y COMPONENT OUT R G B R B G Y Y W R R W R W AUDIO OUT VIDEO OUT R-AUDIO-L AUDIO OUT R-AUDIO-L R B G R W Y R W EXT VCR Blu-ray player DVD Red Blue Green Red White Yellow Red White HDMI OUT DVI OUT AUDIO OUT R-AUDIO-L R W DVD DVD Red White [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 8 2010-03-03 오전 2:35:53English 9 02 Connections Connecting to an Audio Device Using an Optical (Digital) or Headphone Connection Available devices: digital audio system, amplifier, DVD home theatre ✎DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) x When a Digital Audio System is connected to the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) jack, decrease the volume of both the TV and the system. x 5.1 CH (channel) audio is available when the TV is connected to an external device supporting 5.1 CH. x When the receiver (home theatre) is set to on, you can hear sound output from the TV’s optical jack. When the TV is receiving a DTV signal, the TV will send 5.1 CH sound to the home theatre receiver. When the source is a digital component such as a DVD / Blu-ray player / cable box / STB (Set-Top-Box) satellite receiver and is connected to the TV via HDMI, only 2 CH audio will be heard from the home theatre receiver. If you want to hear 5.1 CH audio, connect the digital audio out jack from your DVD / Blu-ray player / cable box / STB satellite receiver directly to an amplifier or home theatre. ✎Headphones H: You can connect your headphones to the headphones output on your set. While the headphones are connected, the sound from the built-in speakers will be disabled. x Sound function may be restricted when connecting headphones to the TV. x Headphone volume and TV volume are adjusted separately. OPTICAL USB digital audio system [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 9 2010-03-03 오전 2:35:5410 English Connections Changing the Input Source Source List Use to select TV or an external input sources such as a DVD / Blu-ray player / cable box / STB satellite receiver. ■ TV / Ext. / PC / AV / Component / HDMI1/DVI / HDMI2 / USB ✎ In the Source List, connected inputs will be highlighted. ✎ Ext. and PC always stay activated. Edit Name ■ VCR / DVD / Cable STB / Satellite STB / PVR STB / AV Receiver / Game / Camcorder / PC / DVI PC / DVI Devices / TV / IPTV / Blu-ray / HD DVD / DMA: Name the device connected to the input jacks to make your input source selection easier. ✎ When connecting an HDMI/DVI cable to the HDMI IN 1(DVI) port, you should set to DVI PC or DVI Devices mode under Edit Name. CONNECTIONS COMMON INTERFACE Slot To watch paid channels, the “CI or CI+ CARD” must be inserted. y If you don’t insert the “CI or CI+ CARD,” some channels will display the message “Scrambled Signal”. y The pairing information containing a telephone number, the “CI or CI+ CARD” ID the Host ID and other information will be displayed in about 2~3 minutes. If an error message is displayed, please contact your service provider. y When the configuration of channel information has finished, the message “Updating Completed” is displayed, indicating the channel list is updated. ✎NOTE x You must obtain a “CI or CI+ CARD” from a local cable service provider. x When removing the “CI or CI+ CARD”, carefully pull it out with your hands since dropping the “CI or CI+ CARD” may cause damage to it. x Insert the “CI or CI+ CARD” in the direction marked on the card. x The location of the COMMON INTERFACE slot may be different depending on the model. x “CI or CI+ CARD” is not supported in some countries and regions; check with your authorized dealer. x If you have any problems, please contact a service provider. x Insert the “CI or CI+ CARD” that supports the current antenna settings. The screen will be distorted or will not be seen. SOURCE [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 10 2010-03-03 오전 2:35:55English 11 03 Basic Features Basic Features How to Navigate Menus Before using the TV, follow the steps below to learn how to navigate the menu and select and adjust different functions. CH LIST MUTE POWER SOURCE ON/OFF PRE-CH INTERNET MEDIA.P TOOLS RETURN MEDIA.P AD P.SIZE SUBT. A B C D DUAL EXIT INFO @ TTX/MIX MENU GUIDE 3 2 4 1 1 ENTERE / Direction button: Move the cursor and select an item. Confirm the setting. 2 RETURN button: Returns to the previous menu. 3 MENU button: Displays the main on-screen menu. 4 EXIT button: Exits the on-screen menu. How to Operate the OSD (On Screen Display) The access step may differ depending on the selected menu. 1 MENU m The main menu options appear on the screen: Picture, Sound, Channel, Setup, Input, Application, Support. 2 ▲ / ▼ Select an icon with the ▲ or ▼ button. 3 ENTERE Press ENTERE to access the sub-menu. 4 ▲ / ▼ Select the desired submenu with the ▲ or ▼ button. 5 ◄ / ► Adjust the value of an item with the ◄ or ► button. The adjustment in the OSD may differ depending on the selected menu. 6 ENTERE Press ENTERE to complete the configuration. 7 EXIT e Press EXIT. Using the INFO button (Now & Next guide) The display identifies the current channel and the status of certain audio-video settings. The Now & Next guide shows daily TV programme information for each channel according to the broadcasting time. y Scroll ◄, ► to view information for a desired programme while watching the current channel. y Scroll ▲, ▼ to view information for other channels. If you want to move to the currently selected channel, press the ENTERE button. DTV Air 15 DEF 18:00 ~ 6:00 18:11 Thu 6 Jan Life On Venus Avenue Unclassified No Detaild Information Information E Watch Planning Your Viewing Guide The EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) information is provided by broadcasters. Using programme schedules provided by broadcasters, you can specify programmes you want to watch in advance so that the channel automatically changes to the selected programme channel at the specified time. Programme entries may appear blank or out of date depending on a channel status. INFO GUIDE [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 11 2010-03-03 오전 2:35:5612 English Basic Features Using Channel View Using Scheduled View 1 Red (View Mode): View the list of programmes that are playing now or coming up. 2 Yellow (+24 Hours): Viewing the list of programmes to be broadcasted after 24 hours. 3 Blue (Ch. Mode): Select the type of channels you want to display on the Channel View window. (All, TV, Radio, Data/Other, My Channel 1~4) 4 Information: Displays details of the selected programme. 5 k (Page): Move to next or previous page. 6 ENTERE button − When selecting the current programme, you can watch the selected programme. − When selecting the future programme, you can reserve to watch the selected programme. To cancel the schedule, press the ENTERE button again and select Cancel Schedules. Channel Manager Delete or set favourites channels and use the programme guide for digital broadcasts. Select a channel in the Channels, My Channels or Scheduled screen. ■ Channels: Shows the channel list according to channel type. ■ * My Channels: Shows the group of the channel. ■ Scheduled: Shows all the currently reserved programmes. ✎Using the colour buttons with the Channel Manager x Red (Antenna): Toggle among Air or Cable. x B Green (Zoom): Enlarges or shrinks a channel number. x Yellow (Select): Select desired channels and press the Yellow button to set all the selected channels at the same time. The c mark appears to the left of the selected channels. x Blue (Sort): Change the list ordered by channel name or channel number. x k (Page): Move to next or previous page. x T (Tools): Displays the Channel Manager option menu. (The options menus may differ depending on the situation.) Channel Status Display Icons Icons Operations A An analogue channel. c A channel selected. * A channel set as a Favourite. ( A programme currently being broadcast. \ A locked channel. ) A reserved programme. DTV Air 800 five Home and Away 18:00 - 18:30 Drama Dani is devastated when scott makes clear his views on marriage... 27 28 800 24 16 6 Discovery DiscoveryH&L five price-drop.tv QVC R4DTT American Chopper Programmes resume at 06:00 Home and... No Information QVC Selection No Information Tine Team Fiv... 18:00 - 19:00 19:00 - 20:00 )Family Affairs )Dark Angel 800 ﬁve View Mode +24 Hours Ch. Mode Information k Page E Watch Guide 2:10 Tue 1 Jun Channel View - TV 1 2 3 4 5 6 Today c1 1futech 2 * 24ore.tv 15 abc1 3 BBC World 23 bid-up.tv 33 Boonerang 32 Cartoon Nwk 5 Class News 4 \ Coming Soon 27 Discovery r Air Antenna B Zoom Select Sort k Page T Tools Channels All TV Radio Data/Other Analogue DTV Air 800 five Family Affairs 18:00 - 18:30 Drama Tanya confesses all to a stunned Babs. Conrad is anxious to hear... )Family Affairs )Dark Angel 800 800 18:30 19:15 five five 800 ﬁve View Mode Information E Cancel Guide 2:10 Tue 1 Jun Scheduled View 1 4 6 Today Today 18:30 19:15 [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 12 2010-03-03 오전 2:35:58English 13 03 Basic Features ¦ Using Favourite Channels * My Channels (in Channel Manager) Shows all favourite channels. ■ Edit My Channelst: You can set the selected channels to desired my channels group. ✎The “*” symbol will be displayed and the channel will be set as a my channel. 1. Select a channel and press the TOOLS button. 2. Add or delete a channel in the my channel groups you want among 1, 2, 3 and 4. x One or more groups can be selected. 3. After you have changed the settings, the channel list for each group can be viewed in my channels. Channel List You can see all the channels searched. Channel Menu ¦ Retuning Channels Antenna (Air / Cable) Before your television can begin memorizing the available channels, you must specify the type of signal source that is connected to the TV (i.e. an Air or a Cable system). Country The PIN input screen appears. Enter your 4 digit PIN number. ■ Digital Channel: Change the country for digital channels ■ Analogue Channel: Change the country for analogue channels. Auto Store Scans for a channel automatically and stores in the TV. ✎Automatically allocated programme numbers may not correspond to actual or desired programme numbers. If a channel is locked using the Child Lock function, the PIN input window appears. ■ Antenna Source (Air / Cable): Select the antenna source to memorise. ■ Channel Source (Digital & Analogue / Digital / Analogue): Select the channel source to memorise. When selecting Cable → Digital & Analogue or Digital: Provide a value to scan for cable channels. Search Mode (Full / Network / Quick): Scans for all channels with active broadcast stations and stores them in the TV. ✎ If you select Quick, you can set up the Network, Network ID, Frequency, Modulation and Symbol Rate manually by pressing the button on the remote control. Network (Auto / Manual): Selects the Network ID setting mode among Auto or Manual. Network ID: When Network is Manual, you can set up Network ID using the numeric buttons. Frequency: Displays the frequency for the channel. (differs in each country) Modulation: Displays available modulation values. Symbol Rate: Displays available symbol rates. Manual Store Scans for a channel manually and stores in the TV. ✎If a channel is locked using the Child Lock function, the PIN input window appears. ■ Digital Channel: When scanning has finished, channels are updated in the channel list. ✎ When selecting Antenna → Air: Channel, Frequency, Bandwidth ✎ When selecting Antenna → Cable: Frequency, Modulation, Symbol Rate ■ Analogue Channel (Programme, Colour System, Sound System, Channel, Search): If there is abnormal sound or no sound, reselect the sound standard required. CH LIST c1 1futech 2 * 24ore.tv 15 abc1 3 BBC World 23 bid-up.tv 33 Boonerang 32 Cartoon Nwk 5 Class News 4 \ Coming Soon 27 Discovery r Air Antenna B Zoom Select Sort k Page T Tools Channels Edit My Channels Lock Timer Viewing Edit Channel Number Delete Select All d All TV Radio Data/Other Analogue [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 13 2010-03-03 오전 2:35:5814 English Basic Features ✎Channel mode x P (programme mode): When tuning is complete, the broadcasting stations in your area have been assigned to position numbers from P0 to P99. You can select a channel by entering the position number in this mode. x C (aerial channel mode) / S (cable channel mode): These two modes allow you to select a channel by entering the assigned number for each aerial broadcasting station or cable channel. ¦ Editing Channels Channel Manager Option Menu (in Channel Manager) 1. Select a channel and press the TOOLS button. 2. Edit the channel name or number using the Edit Channel Name or Edit Channel Number menu. ■ Edit Channel Name (analogue channels only): Assign your own channel name. ■ Edit Channel Number (digital channels only): Edit the number by pressing the number buttons desired. ¦ Other Features Cable Search Option (depending on the country) Sets additional search options such as the frequency and symbol rate for a cable network search. ■ Freq.Start / Freq.Stop: Set the start or stop frequency (differs in each country) ■ Symbol Rate: Displays available symbol rates. ■ Modulation: Displays available modulation values. Channel Manager Channel Manager Option Menu Set each channel using the Channel Manager menu options (Lock / Unlock, Timer Viewing, Sort, Delete, Select All / Deselect All). Option menu items may differ depending on the channel status. 1. Select a channel and press the TOOLS button. 2. Select a function and change its settings. ■ Lock / Unlock: Lock a channel so that the channel cannot be selected and viewed. ✎NOTE x This function is available only when the Child Lock is set to On. x The PIN input screen appears. Enter your 4-digit PIN, the default of which is “0-0-0-0”. Change the PIN using the Change PIN option. ■ Timer Viewing: You can set a desired channel to be displayed automatically at the reserved time. Set the current time first to use this function. ✎ When a digital channel is selected, press the ► button to view the digital Programme. ■ Sort: (analogue channels only): This operation allows you to change the programme numbers of the stored channels. This operation may be necessary after using the auto store. ■ Delete: You can delete a channel to display the channels you want. ■ Select All / Deselect All: Select all the channels or deselect all the selected channels in the channel manager. Channel List Transfer The PIN input screen appears. Enter your 4 digit PIN number. Imports or exports the channel map. You should connect a USB storage to use this function. ■ Import from USB: Import channel list from USB. ■ Export to USB: Export channel list to USB. this function is available when USB is connected. Scheduled (in Channel Manager) You can view, modify or delete a show you have reserved to watch. ■ Change Info: Change a show you have reserved to watch. ■ Cancel Schedules: Cancel a show you have reserved to watch. ■ Information: Display a show you have reserved to watch. (You can also change the reservation information.) ■ Select All / Deselect All: Select or deselect all reserved programmes. Fine Tune (analogue channels only) If the signal is weak or distorted, fine tune the channel manually. ✎Fine tuned channels are marked with an asterisk “*”. ✎To reset the fine-tuning, select Reset. [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 14 2010-03-03 오전 2:35:59English 15 03 Basic Features Picture Menu ¦ Changing the Preset Picture Mode Mode Select your preferred picture type. ■ Dynamic: Suitable for a bright room. ■ Standard: Suitable for a normal environment. ■ Movie: Suitable for watching movies in a dark room. ¦ Adjusting Picture Settings Backlight / Contrast / Brightness / Sharpness / Colour / Tint (G/R) Your television has several setting options for picture quality control. ✎NOTE x In analogue TV, Ext., AV modes of the PAL system, the Tint (G/R) function is not available. x In PC mode, you can only make changes to Backlight, Contrast and Brightness. x Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external device connected to the TV. ¦ Economical Solutions Eco Solution ■ Energy Saving (Off / Low / Medium / High / Picture Off / Auto)t: This adjusts the brightness of the TV in order to reduce power consumption. If you select Picture Off, the screen is turned off, but the sound remains on. Press any button except volume button to turn on the screen. ■ No-Signal Power Off (Off / 15 min / 30 min / 60 min): To avoid unnecessary energy consumption, set how long you want the TV to remain on if it's not receiving a signal. ✎ Disabled when the PC is in power saving mode. ¦ Changing the Picture Options Advanced Settings (available in Standard / Movie mode) You can adjust the detailed setting for the screen including colour and contrast. ✎In PC mode, you can only make changes to Dynamic Contrast, Gamma and White Balance. ■ Black Tone (Off / Dark / Darker / Darkest): Select the black level to adjust the screen depth. ■ Dynamic Contrast (Off / Low / Medium / High): Adjust the screen contrast. ■ Shadow Detail (-2~+2): Increase the brightness of dark images. ■ Gamma: Adjust the primary colour intensity. ■ RGB Only Mode (Off / Red / Green / Blue): You can adjust Colour or Tint (G/R) of Red, Green or Blue for the picture from an external device (DVD player, home theatre, etc.). ■ Colour Space (Auto / Native): Adjust the range of colours available to create the image. ■ White Balance: Adjust the colour temperature for a more natural picture. R-Offset / G-Offset / B-Offset: Adjust each colour’s (red, green, blue) darkness. R-Gain / G-Gain / B-Gain: Adjust each colour’s (red, green, blue) brightness. Reset: Resets the White Balance to it’s default settings. ■ Flesh Tone: Emphasize pink “Flesh Tone.” ■ Edge Enhancement (Off / On): Emphasize object boundaries. P.MODE Advanced Settings Black Tone : Off ► Dynamic Contrast : Medium Shadow Detail : -2 Gamma : 0 RGB Only Mode : Off Colour Space : Native White Balance ▼ U Move E Enter R Return [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 15 2010-03-03 오전 2:35:5916 English Basic Features Picture Options ✎In PC mode, you can only make changes to the Colour Tone, Size and Auto Protection Time. ■ Colour Tone (Cool / Normal / Warm1 / Warm2) ✎ Warm1 or Warm2 will be deactivated when the picture mode is Dynamic. ✎ Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external device connected to an input on the TV. ■ Size: Your cable box/satellite receiver may have its own set of screen sizes as well. However, we highly recommend you use 16:9 mode most of the time. Auto Wide: Automatically adjusts the picture size to the 16:9 aspect ratio. 16:9 : Adjusts the picture size to 16:9 for DVDs or wide broadcasting. Wide Zoom: Magnifies the picture size more than 4:3. ✎ Adjusts the Position by using ▲, ▼ buttons. Zoom: Magnifies the 16:9 wide pictures vertically to fit the screen size. ✎ Adjusts the Position or Size by using ▲, ▼ button. 4:3 : The default setting for a movie or normal broadcasting. ✎ Do not watch in 4:3 format for a long time. Traces of borders displayed on the left, right and centre of the screen may cause image retention(screen burn) which are not covered by the warranty. Screen Fit: Displays the full image without any cut-off when HDMI (720p / 1080i / 1080p) or Component (1080i / 1080p) signals are inputted. ✎NOTE x Depending on the input source, the picture size options may vary. x The available items may differ depending on the selected mode. x In PC mode, only 16:9 and 4:3 modes can be adjusted. x Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external device connected to an input on the TV. x After selecting Screen Fit in HDMI (1080i / 1080p) or Component (1080i / 1080p) mode: Adjusts the Position or Size by using ▲, ▼, ◄, ► button. x If you use the Screen Fit function with HDMI 720p input, 1 line will be cut at the top, bottom, left and right as in the overscan function. ■ Screen Mode (16:9 / Wide Zoom / Zoom / 4:3): Available only when picture size is set to Auto Wide. You can determine the desired picture size at the 4:3 WSS (Wide Screen Service) size or the original size. Each European country requires different picture size. ✎ Not available in PC, Component or HDMI mode. ■ Digital Noise Filter (Off / Low / Medium / High / Auto / Auto Visualisation): When the broadcast signal is weak, some static and ghosting may appear. Select one of the options until the best picture is displayed. Auto Visualisation: When changing analogue channels, displays the intensity of the current signal and defines the screen noise filter. ✎ Only available for analogue channels. ■ MPEG Noise Filter (Off / Low / Medium / High / Auto): Reduces MPEG noise to provide improved picture quality. ■ HDMI Black Level (Normal / Low): Selects the black level on the screen to adjust the screen depth. ✎ Available only in HDMI mode (RGB signals). ■ Film Mode (Off / Auto1 / Auto2): Sets the TV to automatically sense and process film signals from all sources and adjust the picture for optimum quality. ✎ Available in TV, AV, COMPONENT (480i / 1080i) and HDMI (480i / 1080i). ■ Auto Protection Time (2 hours / 4 hours / 8 hours / 10 hours / Off): If the screen remains idle with a still image for a certain period of time defined by the user, the screen saver is activated to prevent the formation of ghost images on the screen. P.SIZE Picture Options Colour Tone : Normal ► Size : Auto Wide Screen Mode : 16:9 Digital Noise Filter : Auto MPEG Noise Filter : Auto HDMI Black Level : Normal Film Mode : Off ▼ U Move E Enter R Return [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 16 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:00English 17 03 Basic Features Picture Reset (OK / Cancel) Resets your current picture mode to its default settings. ¦ Setting up the TV with Your PC Set the input source to PC. Adjust frequency values/positions and fine tune the settings Auto Adjustmentt automatically. ✎Not available when connecting with an HDMI/DVI cable. Screen ■ Coarse / Fine: Removes or reduces picture noise. If the noise is not removed by Fine-tuning alone, then adjust the frequency as best as possible (Coarse) and Finetune again. After the noise has been reduced, readjust the picture so that it is aligned to the centre of screen. ■ Position: Adjust the PC screen position with direction button (▲ / ▼ / ◄ / ►). ■ Image Reset: Resets the image to default settings. Using Your TV as a Computer (PC) Display Setting Up Your PC Software (Based on Windows XP) Depending on the version of Windows and the video card, the actual screens on your PC may differ in which case the same basic set-up information will almost always be applied. (If not, contact your computer manufacturer or Samsung Dealer.) 1. Click on “Control Panel” on the Windows start menu. 2. Click on “Appearance and Themes” in the “Control Panel” window and a display dialog-box will appear. 3. Click on “Display” and a display dialog box will appear. 4. Navigate to the “Settings” tab on the display dialog-box. y The correct size setting (resolution) [Optimum: 1360 x 768 pixels] y If a vertical-frequency option exists on your display settings dialog box, the correct value is “60” or “60 Hz”. Otherwise, just click “OK” and exit the dialog box. Sound Menu ¦ Changing the Preset Sound Mode Mode ■ Standard: Selects the normal sound mode. ■ Music: Emphasizes music over voices. ■ Movie: Provides the best sound for movies. ■ Clear Voice: Emphasizes voices over other sounds. ■ Amplify: Increase the intensity of high-frequency sound to allow a better listening experience for the hearing impaired. ¦ Adjusting Sound Settings Equalizer Adjusts the sound mode (standard sound mode only). ■ Balance L/R: Adjusts the balance between the right and left speaker. ■ 100Hz / 300Hz / 1kHz / 3kHz / 10kHz (Bandwidth Adjustment): Adjusts the level of specific bandwidth frequencies. ■ Reset: Resets the equalizer to its default settings. ¦ Sound Systems, Etc. Virtual Surround (Off / On) (standard sound mode only) This function provides a virtual 5.1 channel surround sound experience through a pair of speakers or headphones using HRTF (Head Related Transfer Function) technology. Dialog Clarity (Off / On) (standard sound mode only) This function allows you to increase the intensity of a voice over background music or sound effects so that dialog can be heard more clearly. S.MODE [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 17 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:0018 English Basic Features Audio Language (digital channels only) Change the default value for audio languages. ✎The available language may differ depending on the broadcast. Audio Format (digital channels only) When sound is emitted from both the main speaker and the audio receiver, a sound echo may occur due to the decoding speed difference between the main speaker and the audio receiver. In this case, use the TV Speaker function. ✎Audio Format option may differ depending on the broadcast. 5.1ch Dolby digital sound is only available when connecting an external speaker through an optical cable. Audio Description (not available in all locations) (digital channels only) This function handles the Audio Stream for the AD (Audio Description) which is sent along with the Main audio from the broadcaster. ■ Audio Description (Off / On): Turn the audio description function on or off. ■ Volume: Adjust the audio description volume. Auto Volume (Off / Normal / Night) To equalize the volume level on each channel, set to Normal. ■ Night: This mode provides an improved sound experience compared to Normal mode, making almost no noise. It is useful at night. Speaker Select (External Speaker / TV Speaker) A sound echo may occur due to a difference in decoding speed between the main speaker and the audio receiver. In this case, set the TV to External Speaker. ✎When Speaker Select is set to External Speaker, the volume and MUTE buttons will not operate and the sound settings will be limited. ✎When Speaker Select is set to External Speaker x TV Speaker: Off, External Speaker: On ✎When Speaker Select is set to TV Speaker x TV Speaker: On, External Speaker: On ✎If there is no video signal, both speakers will be mute. Additional Setting (digital channels only) ■ DTV Audio Level (MPEG / HE-AAC): This function allows you to reduce the disparity of a voice signal (which is one of the signals received during a digital TV broadcast) to a desired level. ✎ According to the type of broadcast signal, MPEG / HE-AAC can be adjusted between -10dB and 0dB. ✎ To increase or decrease the volume, adjust between the range 0 and -10 respectively. ■ SPDIF Output: SPDIF (Sony Philips Digital InterFace) is used to provide digital sound, reducing interference going to speakers and various digital devices such as a DVD player. Audio Format: During the reception of a digital TV broadcast, you can select the Digital Audio output (SPDIF) format from the options PCM or Dolby Digital. ✎ By connecting to 5.1ch speakers in a Dolby Digital setup, maximize your interactive 3D sound experience. Audio Delay: Correct audio-video sync problems, when watching TV or video, and when listening to digital audio output using an external device such as an AV receiver (0ms ~ 250ms). ■ Dolby Digital Comp (Line / RF): This function minimizes signal disparity between a dolby digital signal and a voice signal (i.e. MPEG Audio, HE-AAC, ATV Sound). ✎ Select Line to obtain dynamic sound, and RF to reduce the difference between loud and soft sounds at night time. Line: Set the output level for signals greater or less than -31dB (reference) to either -20dB or -31dB. RF: Set the output level for signals greater or less than -20dB (reference) to either -10dB or -20dB. AD [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 18 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:00English 19 03 Basic Features Sound Reset (OK / Cancel) Reset all sound settings to the factory defaults. ¦ Selecting the Sound Mode When you set to Dual f-g, the current sound mode is displayed on the screen. Audio Type Dual f-g Default A2 Stereo Mono Mono Automatic Stereo Stereo  Mono change Dual Dual f  Dual g Dual f NICAM Stereo Mono Mono Automatic Stereo Mono  Stereo change Dual Mono  Dual f  Dual g  Dual f ✎If the stereo signal is weak and an automatic switching occurs, then switch to the mono. ✎Only activated in stereo sound signal. ✎Only available when the Input source is set to TV. Setup Menu ¦ Setting the Time Time ■ Clock: Setting the clock is for using various timer features of the TV. O The current time will appear every time you press the INFO button. ✎ If you disconnect the power cord, you have to set the clock again. Clock Mode (Auto / Manual) ✎ Depending on the broadcast station and signal, the auto time set up may not be correct. In this case, set the time manually. ✎ The antenna must be connected in order to set the time automatically. Clock Set: Set the Day, Month, Year, Hour and Minute manually. ✎ Available only when Clock Mode is set to Manual. Time Zone (depending on the country): Select your time zone. ✎ When Country is set to Others, you can use this function. ✎ This function is only available when the Clock Mode is set to Auto. ¦ Using the Sleep Timer ■ Sleep Timert: Automatically shuts off the TV after a preset period of time. (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 and 180 minutes). ✎ To cancel Sleep Timer, select Off. ¦ Setting the On / Off Timer ■ Timer 1 / Timer 2 / Timer 3: Three different on / off timer settings can be made. You must set the clock first. On Time / Off Time: Set the hour, minute, and activate / inactivate. (To activate timer with the setting you’ve chosen, set to Activate.) Volume: Set the desired volume level. Source: Select TV or USB content to be played when the TV is turned on automatically. (USB can be selected only when a USB device is connected to the TV) Antenna (when the Source is set to TV): Select ATV or DTV. Channel (when the Source is set to TV): Select the desired channel. Contents (when the Source is set to USB): Select a folder in the USB device containing music or photo files to be played when the TV is turned on automatically. ✎ NOTE x If there is no music file on the USB device or the folder containing a music file is not selected, the Timer function does not operate correctly. x When there is only one photo file in the USB device, the Slide Show will not play. x If a folder name is too long, the folder cannot be selected. x Each USB you use is assigned its own folder. When using more than one of the same type of USB, make sure the folders assigned to each USB have different names. DUAL 10 TV ATV 1 00 00 ▲ ▼ 00 00 Timer 1 On Time Off Time Volume Inactivate Inactivate Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Once Source Antenna Channel Repeat L Move U Adjust E Enter R Return [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 19 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:0120 English Basic Features Repeat: Select Once, Everyday, Mon~Fri, Mon~Sat, Sat~Sun or Manual to set at you convenience. If you select Manual, you can set up the day you want to activate the timer. ✎ The c mark indicates the day is selected. ✎Auto Power Off (available only when the TV is turned on by Timer): The TV will be automatically turned off after 3 hours of being left idle to prevent overheating. ¦ Locking Programmes Security ✎The PIN input screen appears before the setup screen. ✎Enter your 4-digit PIN, the default of which is “0-0-0-0”. Change the PIN using the Change PIN option. ■ Child Lock (Off / On): Lock channels in Channel Manager, to prevent unauthorized users, such as children, from watching unsuitable programme. ✎ Available only when the Input source is set to TV. ■ Parental Lock (depending on the country): Prevent unauthorized users, such as children, from watching unsuitable programme with a user-defined 4-digit PIN code. If the selected channel is locked, the “\” symbol will be displayed. Allow All: Unlock All TV ratings (Not supported in France). ✎ When Parental Lock is set to 18, the PIN input screen appears before changing the channels (France only). ✎ You can block TV programs by set up rating in Parental Lock as the I (children), T (All public), SC (Unclassified) and X (X rated). When Parental Lock is set to X, the PIN input screen always before changing the channels (Spain only). ■ Change PIN: Change your personal ID number required to set up the TV. ✎ If you forget the PIN code, press the remote control buttons in the following sequence, which resets the PIN to “0-0-0-0”: POWER (off) → MUTE → 8 → 2 → 4 → POWER (on). ¦ Other Features Language ■ Menu Language: Set the menu language. ■ Teletext Language: Set a desired language for teletext. ✎ English is the default in cases where the selected language is unavailable in the broadcast. ■ Preference (Primary Audio Language / Secondary Audio Language / Primary Subtitle Language / Secondary Subtitle Language / Primary Teletext Language / Secondary Teletext Language): Select a language, which will be the default language when a channel is selected. Subtitle Use this menu to set the Subtitle mode. ■ Subtitle (Off / On): Switches subtitles on or off. ■ Mode (Normal / Hearing Impaired): Sets the subtitle mode. ■ Subtitle Language: Sets the subtitle language. ✎ If the programme you are watching does not support the Hearing Impaired function, Normal automatically activates even if the Hearing Impaired mode is selected. ✎ English is the default in cases where the selected language is unavailable in the broadcast. Digital Text (Disable / Enable) (UK only) If the programme broadcasts with digital text, this feature is enabled. Auto Run Data Service Sets whether or not to automatically run data service. Auto Run Data Service automatically runs data service without user intervention. ✎If any other secondary function is under way, Auto Run Data Service may not work. General ■ Game Mode (Off / On): When connecting to a game console such as PlayStation™ or Xbox™, you can enjoy a more realistic gaming experience by selecting game mode. SUBT. [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 20 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:01English 21 03 Basic Features ✎NOTE x Precautions and limitations for game mode − To disconnect the game console and connect another external device, set Game Mode to Off in the setup menu. − If you display the TV menu in Game Mode, the screen shakes slightly. x Game Mode is not available when the input source is set to TV or PC. x After connecting the game console, set Game Mode to On. Unfortunately, you may notice reduced picture quality. x If Game Mode is On: − Picture mode is set to Standard and Sound mode is set to Movie. − Equalizer is not available. ■ Menu Transparency (Bright / Dark): Se t the Transparency of the menu. ■ Melody (Off / Low / Medium / High): Set so that a melody plays when the TV is turned on or off. Common Interface ■ CI Menu: This enables the user to select from the CAMprovided menu. Select the CI Menu based on the menu PC Card. ■ Application Info: View information on the CAM inserted into the CI slot and on the “CI or CI+ CARD” which is inserted into the CAM. You can install the CAM anytime whether the TV is on or off. 1. Purchase a CI CAM module at your nearest dealer or by phone. 2. Firmly insert the “CI or CI+ CARD” into the CAM in the direction of the arrow. 3. Insert the CAM with the “CI or CI+ CARD” into the common interface slot, in the direction of the arrow so that it aligns parallel with the slot. 4. Check if you can see a picture on a scrambled signal channel. ¦ Picture In Picture (PIP) You can watch the TV tuner and one external video source PIPt simultaneously. PIP (Picture-in-Picture) does not function in the same mode. ✎NOTE x For PIP sound, refer to the Sound Select instructions. x If you turn the TV off while watching in PIP mode, the PIP window will disappear. x You may notice that the picture in the PIP window becomes slightly unnatural when you use the main screen to view a game or karaoke. x PIP settings Main picture Sub picture Component, HDMI1/DVI, HDMI2, PC TV ■ PIP (Off / On): Activate or deactivate the PIP function. ■ Channel: Select the channel for the sub-screen. ■ Size (Õ/Ã): Select a size for the sub-picture. ■ Position (Ã/–/—/œ): Select a position for the sub-picture. ■ Sound Select (Main / Sub): You can choose the desired sound (Main / Sub) in PIP mode. Support Menu Self Diagnosis ✎Self Diagnostic might take few seconds, this is part of the normal operation of the TV ■ Picture Test (Yes / No): Use to check for picture problems. ■ Sound Test (Yes / No): Use the built-in melody sound to check for sound problems. ✎ If you hear no sound from the TV’s speakers, before performing the sound test, make sure Speaker Select is set to TV Speaker in the Sound menu. ✎ The melody will be heard during the test even if Speaker Select is set to External Speaker or the sound is muted by pressing the MUTE button. ■ Signal Information: (digital channels only) HDTV channel’s reception quality is either perfect or the channels are unavailable. Adjust your antenna to increase signal strength. ■ Troubleshooting: If the TV seems to have a problem, refer to this description. ✎ If none of these troubleshooting tips apply, contact the Samsung customer service centre. [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 21 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:0222 English Basic Features Software Upgrade Software Upgrade can be performed via a broadcasting signal or downloading the latest firmware from “www. samsung.com,” to a USB memory device. Current Version the software already installed in the TV. ✎Software is represented as “Year/Month/Day_Version”. Installing the Latest Version ■ By USB: Insert a USB drive containing the firmware upgrade file, downloaded from “www.samsung.com,” into the TV. Please be careful not to disconnect the power or remove the USB drive until upgrades are complete. The TV will be turned off and on automatically after completing the firmware upgrade. When software is upgraded, video and audio settings you have made will return to their default settings. We advise you to to write down your settings so that you can easily reset them after the upgrade. ■ By Channel: Upgrade the software using the broadcasting signal. ✎ If the function is selected during the software transmission period, software will be automatically searched and downloaded. ✎ The time required to download the software is determined by the signal status. ■ Standby Mode Upgrade: A manual upgrade will be automatically performed at selected time. Since the power of the unit is turned on internally, the screen may be turned on slightly for the LED product. This phenomenon may continue for more than 1 hour until the software upgrade is complete. ■ Alternative Software (backup): If there is an issue with the new firmware and it is affecting operation, you can change the software to the previous version. ✎ If the software was changed, existing software is displayed. HD Connection Guide Refer to this information when connecting external devices to the TV. Contact Samsung View this information when your TV does not work properly or when you want to upgrade the software. You can find information regarding our call centres, and how to download products and software. Software Upgrade By USB ► By Channel Standby Mode Upgrade : Off Alternative Software 2010/01/15_00000 U Move E Enter R Return Current Version 2010/01/18_000001 USB USB Drive TV Rear Panel [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 22 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:02English 23 04 Advanced Features Advanced Features Connecting to a PC Using an HDMI/DVI Cable or a D-sub Cable AUDIO OUT DVI OUT AUDIO OUT PC OUT Display Modes (D-Sub and HDMI/DVI Input) Optimal resolution is 1360 x 768 @ 60 Hz. Mode Resolution Horizontal Frequency (KHz) Vertical Frequency (Hz) Pixel Clock Frequency (MHz) Sync Polarity (H / V) IBM 640 x 350 720 x 400 31.469 31.469 70.086 70.087 25.175 28.322 +/- -/+ MAC 640 x 480 832 x 624 35.000 49.726 66.667 74.551 30.240 57.284 -/- -/- VESA CVT 720 x 576 1280 x 720 35.910 56.456 59.950 74.777 32.750 95.750 -/+ -/+ VESA DMT 640 x 480 640 x 480 640 x 480 800 x 600 800 x 600 800 x 600 1024 x 768 1024 x 768 1024 x 768 1280 x 720 1360 x 768 31.469 37.500 37.861 37.879 46.875 48.077 48.363 56.476 60.023 45.000 47.712 59.940 75.000 72.809 60.317 75.000 72.188 60.004 70.069 75.029 60.000 60.015 25.175 31.500 31.500 40.000 49.500 50.000 65.000 75.000 78.750 74.250 85.500 -/- -/- -/- +/+ +/+ +/+ -/- -/- +/+ +/+ +/+ VESA GTF 1280 x 720 52.500 70.000 89.040 -/+ ✎NOTE x For HDMI/DVI cable connection, you must use the HDMI IN 1(DVI) jack. x The interlace mode is not supported. x The set might operate abnormally if a non-standard video format is selected. x Separate and Composite modes are supported. SOG(Sync On Green) is not supported. [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 23 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:0324 English Advanced Features Media Play ¦ Connecting a USB Device 1. Turn on your TV. 2. Connect a USB device containing photo, music and/or movie fi les to the USB (HDD) 3. When USB is connected to the TV, popup window appears. Then you can select Media Play . ✎ It might not work properly with unlicenced multimedia files. ✎ Need-to-Know List before using Media Play (USB) x MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) is not supported. x The file system supports FAT16, FAT32 and NTFS. x Certain types of USB Digital camera and audio devices may not be compatible with this TV. x Media Play only supports USB Mass Storage Class (MSC) devices. MSC is a Mass Storage Class Bulk-Only Transport device. Examples of MSC are Thumb drives, Flash Card Readers and USB HDD (USB HUB are not supported). Devices should be connected directly to the TV’s USB port. x Before connecting your device to the TV, please back up your files to prevent them from damage or loss of data. SAMSUNG is not responsible for any data file damage or data loss. x Connect a USB HDD to the dedicated port, USB (HDD) port. x Do not disconnect the USB device while it is loading. x The higher the resolution of the image, the longer it takes to display on the screen. x The maximum supported JPEG resolution is 15360X8640 pixels. x For unsupported or corrupted files, the “Not Supported File Format” message is displayed. x If the files are sorted by Basic View, up to 1000 files can be displayed in each folder. x MP3 files with DRM that have been downloaded from a non-free site cannot be played. Digital Rights Management (DRM) is a technology that supports the creation of content, the distribution and management of the content in an integrated and comprehensive way, including the protection of the rights and interests of the content providers, the prevention of the illegal copying of contents, as well as managing billings and settlements. x If more than 2 PTP devices are connected, you can only use one at a time. x If more than two MSC devices are connected, some of them may not be recognized. A USB device that requires high power (more than 500mA or 5V) may not be supported. x If an over-power warning message is displayed while you are connecting or using a USB device, the device may not be recognized or may malfunction. x If the TV has been no input during time set in Auto Protection Time , the Screensaver will run. x The power-saving mode of some external hard disk drives may be released automatically when connected to the TV. x If a USB extension cable is used, the USB device may not be recognized or the files on the device may not be read. x If a USB device connected to the TV is not recognized, the list of files on the device is corrupted or a file in the list is not played, connect the USB device to the PC, format the device and check the connection. x If a file deleted from the PC is still found when Media Play is run, use the “Empty the Recycle Bin” function on the PC to permanently delete the file. USB Drive TV Rear Panel USB MEDIA.P Enjoy photos, music and/or movie fi les saved on a USB Mass Storage Class (MSC) device. SUM Change Device View Devices E Enter R Return MediaPlay Videos [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 24 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:04English 25 04 Advanced Features ¦ Screen Display Move to the file you desired using the up/down/right/left buttons and then press the ENTERE or � (Play) button. The file is played. ✎Supports the View Devices and Home in Media Play homepage. Videos Playing Video 1. Press the ◄ or ► button to select Videos, then press the ENTERE button in the Media Play menu. 2. Press the ◄/►/▲/▼ button to select the desired file in the file list. 3. Press the ENTERE button or � (Play) button. − The selected file is displayed on the top with its playing time. − If video time information is unknown, play time and progress bar are not displayed. − During playing the video, you can search using the ◄ and ► button. ✎In this mode, you can enjoy movie clips contained on a Game, but you cannot play the Game itself. y Supported Subtitle Formats Name File extension Format MPEG-4 time-based text .ttxt XML SAMI .smi HTML SubRip .srt string-based SubViewer .sub string-based Micro DVD .sub or .txt string-based Information: You can ascertain the selected file name and the number of files and page. Sort List Section: Displays sorting standard. ✎ Sorting standard is different depending on the contents. Operation Buttons Red (Change Device): Selects a connected device. B Green (Preference): Sets the file preference. (not supported in Basic view) Yellow (Select): Selects multiple files from file list. Selected files are marked with a symbol. Blue (Sorting): Selects the sort list. TTools: Displays the option menu. ✎ Using the � (REW) or µ (FF) button, file list can move to next or previous page. Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 /Movie 01.avi 1/1 Movie 01.avi SUM Movie 03.avi Movie 05.avi Movie 07.avi Movie 09.avi Movie 02.avi Movie 04.avi Movie 06.avi Movie 08.avi Movie 10.avi Select Sorting T Tools Videos Page Change Device Movie 01.avi 00:04:03 / 00:07:38 1/1 SUM E Pause L Jump T Tools R Return File List Section: You can confirm the files and groups that is sorted by each category. [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 25 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:0526 English Advanced Features y Supported Video Formats File Extension Container Video Codec Resolution Frame rate (fps) Bit rate (Mbps) Audio Codec *.avi *.mkv AVI MKV Divx 3.11 / 4.x / 5.1 / 6.0 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 8 MP3 / AC3 / LPCM / ADPCM / DTS Core XviD 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 8 H.264 BP / MP / HP 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 25 MPEG4 SP / ASP 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 8 *.asf ASF Divx 3.11 / 4.x / 5.1 / 6.0 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 8 MP3 / AC3 / LPCM / ADPCM / WMA XviD 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 8 H.264 BP / MP / HP 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 25 MPEG4 SP / ASP 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 8 *.wmv ASF Window Media Video v9 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 25 WMA *.mp4 MP4 H.264 BP / MP / HP 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 25 MPEG4 SP / ASP 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 8 MP3 / ADPCM / AAC XVID 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 8 *.3gp 3GPP H.264 BP / MP / HP 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 25 ADPCM / AAC / HE-AAC MPEG4 SP / ASP 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 8 *.vro VRO VOB MPEG1 1920x1080 24 / 25 / 30 30 AC3 / MPEG / LPCM MPEG2 1920x1080 24 / 25 / 30 30 *.mpg *.mpeg PS MPEG1 1920x1080 24 / 25 / 30 30 MPEG2 1920x1080 24 / 25 / 30 30 AC3 / MPEG / LPCM / AAC H.264 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 25 *.ts *.tp *.trp TS MPEG2 1920x1080 24 / 25 / 30 30 AC3 / AAC / MP3 / DD+ / HE-AAC H.264 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 25 VC1 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 25 Other Restrictions ✎ NOTE x If there are problems with the contents of a codec, the codec will not be supported. x If the information for a Container is incorrect and the file is in error, the Container will not be able to play correctly. x Sound or video may not work if the contents have a standard bitrate/frame rate above the compatible Frame/sec listed in the table above. x If the Index Table is in error, the Seek (Jump) function is not supported. Video Decoder Audio Decoder • Supports up to H.264, Level 4.1 • H.264 FMO / ASO / RS, VC1 SP / MP / AP L4 and AVCHD are not supported. • GMC is not supported. • H.263 is not supported. • Supports up to WMA 7, 8, 9, STD • WMA 9 PRO does not support 2 channel excess multi channel or lossless audio. • WMA sampling rate 22050Hz mono is not supported. [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 26 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:06English 27 04 Advanced Features Playing movie file continuously (Resume Play) If you exit the playing Videos function, it can be played later from the point where it was stopped. 1. Select the movie file you want to play continuously by pressing the ◄ or ► button to select it from the file list section. 2. Press the � (Play) / ENTERE button. 3. Select Play Continuously (Resume Play) by pressing the Blue button. The Movie will begin to play from where it was stopped. ✎ The Blue button is available when resuming play. ✎ If the Cont. movie play help function is set to On in the Settings menu, a pop-up message will appear when you resume play a movie file. Music Playing Music 1. Press the ◄ or ► button to select Music, then press the ENTERE button in the Media Play menu. 2. Press the ◄/►/▲/▼ button to select the desired file in the file list. 3. Press the ENTERE button or � (Play) button. − During playing the music, you can search using the ◄ and ► button. − � (REW) and µ (FF) buttons do not function during play. ✎Only displays the files with MP3 and PCM file extension. Other file extensions are not displayed, even if they are saved on the same USB device. ✎If the sound is strange when playing MP3 files, adjust the Equalizer in the Sound menu. (An over-modulated MP3 file may cause a sound problem.) Photos Viewing a Photo (or Slide Show) 1. Press the ◄ or ► button to select Photos, then press the ENTERE button in the Media Play menu. 2. Press the ◄/►/▲/▼ button to select the desired file in the file list. 3. Press the ENTERE button or � (Play) button. − While a photo list is displayed, press the � (Play) / ENTERE button on the remote control to start slide show. − All files in the file list section will be displayed in the slide show. − During the slide show, files are displayed in order from currently being shown. ✎Music files can be automatically played during the Slide Show if the Background Music is set to On. ✎The BGM Mode cannot be changed until the BGM has finished loading. Movie 01.avi 00:04:03 / 00:07:38 1/1 SUM Play continuously E Pause L Jump T Tools R Return Resumes playing from the last viewed scene. Play continuously 3/15 I Love you Jhon Music 1 No Singer Music 2 No Singer Music 3 No Singer Music 4 No Singer Music 5 No Singer I Love You Jhon 1st Album Pop 2010 4.2MB 01:10 / 04:02 SUM E Pause L Jump T Tools R Return Playlist Image1024.jpg 1024x768 2010/2/1 3/15 SUM E Pause L Previous/Next T Tools R Return Normal [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 27 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:0828 English Advanced Features ¦ Playing the Multiple Files Playing the selected video/music/photo files 1. Press the Yellow button in the file list to select the desired file. 2. Repeat the above operation to select multiple files. ✎ NOTE x The c mark appears to the left of the selected files. x To cancel a selection, press the Yellow button again. x To deselect all selected files, press the TOOLS button and select Deselect All. 3. Press the TOOLS button and select Play Selected Contents. Playing the video/music/photo file group 1. While a file list is displayed, move to the any file in desired group. 2. Press the TOOLS button and select Play Current Group. ¦ Media Play Additional Function Sorting the file list Press the Blue button in the file list to sort the files. Category Operations Videos Music Photos Basic View It shows whole folder. You can view the photo by selecting the folder. > > > Title It sorts and displays the file title in Symbol/Number/Alphabet/Special order. > > > Preference It sorts and displays the file by preference. You can change the file preference in the file list section using the Green button. > > > Latest Date It sorts and shows files by latest date. > > Earliest Date It sorts and shows files by earliest date. > > Artist It sorts the music file by artist in alphabetical. > Album It sorts the music file by album in alphabetical order. > Genre It sorts music files by the genre. > Mood It sorts music files by the mood. You can change the music mood information. > Monthly It sorts and shows photo files by month. It sorts only by month (from January to December) regardless of year. > Anynet+ /Movie 01.avi 1/1 SUM Movie 01.avi Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Movie 03.avi Movie 05.avi Movie 07.avi Movie 09.avi Movie 02.avi Movie 04.avi Movie 06.avi Movie 08.avi Movie 10.avi Change Device Select Sorting T Tools Videos 2 files selected Page [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 28 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:09English 29 04 Advanced Features Videos/Music/Photos Play Option menu During playing a file, press the TOOLS button. Category Operations Videos Music Photos Title You can move the other file directly. > Repeat Mode You can play movie and music files repeatedly. > > Picture Size You can adjust the picture size for preference. > Picture Setting You can adjust the picture setting (p. 15, 16, 17). > > Sound Setting You can adjust the sound setting (p. 17, 18, 19). > > > Subtitle Setting You can play the video file with Subtitle. This function only works if the subtitles are the same file name as the video file. > Stop Slide Show / Start Slide Show You can start or stop a slide show. > Slide Show Speed You can select the slide show speed during the slide show. > Background Music You can set and select background music when watching a slide show. > Zoom You can zoom into images in full screen mode. > Rotate You can rotate images in full screen mode. > Information You can see detailed information about the played file. > > > Settings Using the Setup Menu ■ Cont. movie play help (Resume Play) (On / Off): Select to display the help pop-up message for continuous movie playback. ■ Get the DivX® VOD registration code: Shows the registration code authorized for the TV. If you connect to the DivX web site and register the registration code with a personal account, you can download VOD registration file. If you play the VOD registration using Media Play, the registration is completed. ✎ For more information on DivX® VOD, visit “www.DivX.com.” ■ Get the DivX® VOD deactivation code: When DivX® VOD is not registered, the registration deactivation code is displayed. If you execute this function when DivX® VOD is registered, the current DivX® VOD registration is deactivated. ■ Information: Select to view information about the connected device. [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 29 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:1030 English Advanced Features Anynet+ Anynet+ is a function that enables you to control all connected Samsung devices that support Anynet+ with your Samsung What is Anynet+?t TV’s remote. The Anynet+ system can be used only with Samsung devices that have the Anynet+ feature. To be sure your Samsung device has this feature, check if there is an Anynet+ logo on it. To connect to Home Theatre 1. Connect the HDMI IN (1(DVI) or 2) jack on the TV and the HDMI OUT jack of the corresponding Anynet+ device using an HDMI cable. 2. Connect the HDMI IN jack of the home theatre and the HDMI OUT jack of the corresponding Anynet+ device using an HDMI cable. ✎NOTE x Connect the Optical cable between the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) jack on your TV and the Digital Audio Input on the Home Theatre. x When following the connection above, the Optical jack only outputs 2 channel audio. You will only hear sound from the Home Theatre’s Front, Left and Right speakers and the subwoofer. If you want to hear 5.1 channel audio, connect the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) jack on the DVD / Satellite Box (i.e. Anynet Device 1 or 2) directly to the Amplifier or Home Theatre, not the TV. x Connect only one Home Theatre. x You can connect an Anynet+ device using the HDMI cable. Some HDMI cables may not support Anynet+ functions. x Anynet+ works when the AV device supporting Anynet+ is in the standby or on status. x Anynet+ supports up to 12 AV devices in total. Note that you can connect up to 3 devices of the same type. TV Rear Panel Home Theatre Anynet+ Device 1 Anynet+ Device 2 HDMI Cable HDMI Cable HDMI Cable Optical Cable [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 30 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:10English 31 04 Advanced Features Anynet+ Menu The Anynet+ menu changes depending on the type and status of the Anynet+ devices connected to the TV. Anynet+ Menu Description View TV Changes Anynet+ mode to TV broadcast mode. Device List Shows the Anynet+ device list. (device_name) MENU Shows the connected device menus. E.g. If a DVD recorder is connected, the disc menu of the DVD recorder will appear. (device_name) INFO Shows the play menu of the connected device. E.g. If a DVD recorder is connected, the play menu of the DVD recorder will appear. Recording: (*recorder) Starts recording immediately using the recorder. (This is only available for devices that support the recording function.) Stop Recording: (*recorder) Stops recording. Receiver Sound is played through the receiver. If more than one recording device is connected, they are displayed as (*recorder) and if only one recording device is connected, it will be represented as (*device_name). ¦ Setting Up Anynet+ ■ Setup Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) (Off / On): To use the Anynet+ Function, Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) must be set to On. ✎ When the Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) function is disabled, all the Anynet+ related operations are deactivated. Auto Turn Off (No / Yes): Setting an Anynet+ Device to turn off automatically when the TV is turned off. ✎ The active source on the TV must be set to TV to use the Anynet+ function. ✎ Even if an external device is still recording, it may turn off. ¦ Switching between Anynet+ Devices 1. Anynet+ devices connected to the TV are listed. ✎ If you cannot find a device you want, press the Red button to refresh the list. 2. Select a device and press the ENTERE button. You can switch to the selected device. ✎ Only when you set Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) to On in the Application menu, the Device List menu appears. x Switching to the selected device may take up to 2 minutes. You cannot cancel the operation during the switching operation. x If you have selected external input mode by pressing the SOURCE button, you cannot use the Anynet+ function. Make sure to switch to an Anynet+ device by using the Device List. [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 31 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:1032 English Advanced Features ¦ Recording You can make a recording of a TV Programme using a Samsung recorder. 1. Select Recording. ✎ When there are more than two recording devices x When multiple recording devices are connected, the recording devices are listed. Select one recording device in the Device List. ✎ When the recording device is not displayed, select Device List and press the Red button to search devices. 2. Press the EXIT button to exit. ✎ You can record the source streams by selecting Recording: (device_name). ✎ Pressing the � (REC) button will record whatever you are currently watching. If you are watching video from another device, the video from the device is recorded. ✎ Before recording, check whether the antenna jack is properly connected to the recording device. To properly connect an antenna to a recording device, refer to the recording device’s users manual. ¦ Listening through a Receiver You can listen to sound through a receiver (i.e Home Theatre) instead of the TV Speaker. 1. Select Receiver and set to On. 2. Press the EXIT button to exit. ✎ If your receiver supports audio only, it may not appear in the device list. ✎ The receiver will work when you have properly connected the optical in jack of the receiver to the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) jack of the TV. ✎ When the receiver (i.e Home Theatre) is set to On, you can hear sound output from the TV’s Optical jack. When the TV is displaying a DTV (aerial) signal, the TV will send out 5.1 channel sound to the receiver. When the source is a digital component such as a DVD and is connected to the TV via HDMI, only 2 channel sound will be heard from the receiver. ✎NOTE x You can only control Anynet+ devices using the TV remote control, not the buttons on the TV. x The TV remote control may not work under certain conditions. If this occurs, reselect the Anynet+ device. x The Anynet+ functions do not operate with other manufacturers’ products. [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 32 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:11English 33 05 Other Information ¦ Troubleshooting for Anynet+ Problem Possible Solution Anynet+ does not work. • Check if the device is an Anynet+ device. The Anynet+ system supports Anynet+ devices only. • Connect only one receiver (home theatre). • Check if the Anynet+ device power cord is properly connected. • Check the Anynet+ device’s Video/Audio/HDMI cable connections. • Check whether Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) is set to On in the Anynet+ setup menu. • Check whether the TV remote control is in TV mode. • Check whether it is Anynet+ exclusive remote control. • Anynet+ doesn’t work in certain situations. (Searching channels, operating Media Play (USB) or Plug & Play (Initial setup), etc.) • When connecting or removing the HDMI cable, please make sure to search devices again or turn your TV off and on again. • Check if the Anynet+ Function of Anynet+ device is set on. I want to start Anynet+. • Check if the Anynet+ device is properly connected to the TV and check if the Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) is set to On in the Anynet+ Setup menu. • Press the TOOLS button to display the Anynet+ menu and select a menu you want. I want to exit Anynet+. • Select View TV in the Anynet+ menu. • Press the SOURCE button on the TV remote control and select a device other than Anynet+ devices. • Press P >/< and PRE-CH to change the TV mode. (Note that the channel button operates only when a tuner-embedded Anynet+ device is not connected.) The message “Connecting to Anynet+ device...” appears on the screen. • You cannot use the remote control when you are configuring Anynet+ or switching to a view mode. • Use the remote control when the Anynet+ setting or switching to view mode is complete. The Anynet+ device does not play. • You cannot use the play function when Plug & Play (Initial setup) is in progress. The connected device is not displayed. • Check whether or not the device supports Anynet+ functions. • Check whether or not the HDMI cable is properly connected. • Check whether Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) is set to On in the Anynet+ setup menu. • Search Anynet+ devices again. • You can connect an Anynet+ device using the HDMI cable only. Some HDMI cables may not support Anynet+ functions. • If it is terminated by an abnormal situation such as disconnecting the HDMI cable or power cord or a power failure, please repeat the device scan. The TV Programme cannot be recorded. • Check whether the antenna jack on the recording device is properly connected. The TV sound is not output through the receiver. • Connect the optical cable between TV and the receiver. [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 33 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:1134 English Other Information Analogue Channel Teletext Feature The index page of the Teletext service gives you information on how to use the service. For Teletext information to be displayed correctly, channel reception must be stable. Otherwise, information may be missing or some pages may not be displayed. ✎You can change Teletext pages by pressing the numeric buttons on the remote control. 1 / (Teletext on/mix): Activates the Teletext mode for the current channel. Press it twice to overlap the Teletext display onto the current broadcasting screen. 2 8 (store): Stores the Teletext pages. 3 4 (size): Displays the teletext on the upper half of the screen in double-size. To move the text to the lower half of the screen, press it again. For normal display, press it once again. 4 9 (hold): Holds the display at the current page, in the case that there are several secondary pages that follow automaticially. To undo, press it again. 5 Colour buttons (red, green, yellow, blue): If the FASTEXT system is used by the broadcasting company, the different topics on a Teletext page are colour-coded and can be selected by pressing the coloured buttons. Press the colour corresponding to the topic of your choice. A new colourcoded page is displayed. Items can be selected in the same way. To display the previous or next page, press the corresponding coloured button. 6 0 (mode): Selects the Teletext mode (LIST/ FLOF). If pressed during LIST mode, switches the mode to List save mode. In List save mode, you can save a Teletext page into a list using the 8(store) button. 7 1 (sub-page): Displays the available sub-page. 2 (page up): Displays the next Teletext page. 8 3 (page down): Displays the previous Teletext page. 9 6 (index): Displays the index (contents) page at any time while you are viewing Teletext. 0 5 (reveal): Displays the hidden text (answers to quiz games, for example). To display the normal screen, press it again. ! 7 (cancel): Shrinks the Teletext display to overlap with the current broadcast. @ Typical Teletext page Part Contents A Selected page number. B Broadcasting channel identity. C Current page number or search indications. D Date and time. E Text. F Status information. FASTEXT information. MUTE MENU CH LIST PRE-CH A B C D TTX/MIX SOURCE RETURN EXIT TOOLS INFO 1 3 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 ! @ 0 Other Information [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 34 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:11English 35 05 Other Information Assembling the Cables Stand Type Enclose the cables in the Cable Tie so that the cables are not visible through the transparent stand. 1 2 3 1 2 3 Wall-Mount Type ✎Do not pull the cables too hard when arranging them. This may cause damage to the product’s connection terminals. Installing the Wall Mount Assembling the Blanking Bracket When installing the TV onto a wall, attach the Blanking Bracket as shown. Blanking Bracket [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 35 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:1336 English Other Information Preparing before installing Wall-Mount To install a wall-mount, use the Holder-Ring 1. Case A. Installing the SAMSUNG Wall-Mount Case B. Installing another company’s Wall-Mount 1 1 Installing the Wall Mount Kit The wall mount kit (sold separately) allows you to mount the TV on the wall. For detailed information on installing the wall mount, see the instructions provided with the wall mount. Contact a technician for assistance when installing the wall mount bracket. Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any damage to the product or injury to yourself or others if you elect to install the TV on your own. Wall Mount Kit Specifications (VESA) ✎The wall mount kit is not supplied, but sold separately. Install your wall mount on a solid wall perpendicular to the floor. When attaching to other building materials, please contact your nearest dealer. If installed on a ceiling or slanted wall, it may fall and result in severe personal injury. ✎NOTE x Standard dimensions for wall mount kits are shown in the table below. x When purchasing our wall mount kit, a detailed installation manual and all parts necessary for assembly are provided. x Do not use screws that do not comply with the VESA standard screw specifications. x Do not use screws that are longer than the standard dimension or do not comply with the VESA standard screw specifications. Screws that are too long may cause damage to the inside of the TV set. x For wall mounts that do not comply with the VESA standard screw specifications, the length of the screws may differ depending on the wall mount specifications. x Do not fasten the screws that are too strongly; this may damage the product or cause the product to fall, leading to personal injury. Samsung is not liable for these kinds of accidents. x Samsung is not liable for product damage or personal injury when a non-VESA or non-specified wall mount is used or the consumer fails to follow the product installation instructions. x Do not mount the TV at more than a 15 degree tilt. Product Family inches VESA Spec. (A * B) Standard Screw Quantity LED-TV [Ultra-Slim] 19~22 75 X 75 M4 4 23~29 200 X 100 M8 32~37 200 X 200 40~55 400 X 400 56~65 600 X 400 Do not install your Wall Mount Kit while your TV is turned on. It may result in personal injury due to electric shock. [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 36 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:15English 37 05 Other Information 1 2 3 Anti-theft Kensington Lock The Kensington Lock is not supplied by Samsung. It is a device used to physically fix the system when using it in a public place. The appearance and locking method may differ from the illustration depending on the manufacturer. Refer to the manual provided with the Kensington Lock for additional information on proper use. ✎Please find a “K” icon on the rear of the TV. A kensington slot is beside the “K” icon. 1. Insert the locking device into the Kensington slot 1 on the LED TV and turn it as shown 2. 2. Connect the Kensington Lock cable 3. 3. Fix the Kensington Lock to a desk or a heavy stationary object. ✎The locking device has to be purchased separately. ✎The location of the Kensington slot may be different depending on the TV model. Securing the TV to the wall Caution: Pulling, pushing, or climbing on the TV may cause the TV to fall. In particular, ensure your children do not hang over or destabilize the TV; doing so may cause the TV to tip over, causing serious injuries or death. Follow all safety precautions provided on the included Safety Flyer. For added stability, install the anti-fall device for safety purposes, as follows. ¦ To Avoid the TV from Falling 1. Put the screws into the clamps and firmly fasten them onto the wall. Confirm that the screws have been firmly installed onto the wall. ✎ You may need additional material such as an anchor depending on the type of wall. ✎ Since the necessary clamps, screws, and string are not supplied, please purchase these additionally. 2. Remove the scres from the back centre of the TV, put the screws into the clamps, and then fasten the screws onto the TV again. ✎ Screws may not be supplied with the product. In this case, please purchase the screws of the following specifications. x For a 19 ~ 22 inch : M4 x For a 23 ~ 65 inch : M8 3. Connect the clamps fixed onto the TV and the clamps fixed onto the wall with a strong cable and then tie the string tightly. ✎ NOTE x Install the TV near to the wall so that it does not fall backwards. x It is safe to connect the string so that the clamps fixed on the wall are equal to or lower than the clamps fixed on the TV. x Untie the string before moving the TV. 4. Verify all connections are properly secured. Periodically check connections for any sign of fatigue for failure. If you have any doubt about the security of your connections, contact a professional installer TV Rear Wall [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 37 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:1638 English Other Information Troubleshooting If you have any questions about the TV, first refer to this list. If none of these troubleshooting tips apply, please visit “www. samsung.com,” then click on Support, or contact the call centre listed on the back-cover of this manual. Issues Solutions and Explanations Picture Quality First of all, please perform the Picture Test and confirm that your TV is properly displaying test image. (go to MENU - Support - Self Diagnosis - Picture Test) (p. 21) If the test image is properly displayed, the poor picture may caused by the source or signal. The TV image does not look as good as it did in the store. • If you have an analogue cable/set top box, upgrade to a digital set top box. Use HDMI or Component cables to deliver HD (high definition) picture quality. • Cable/Satellite subscribers: Try HD stations from the channel line up. • Antenna connection: Try HD stations after performing Auto programme. ✎ Many HD channels are upscaled from SD(Standard Definition) contents. • Adjust the Cable/Set top box video output resolution to 1080i or 720p. • Make sure you are watching the TV at the minimum recommended distance based on the size and definition of the signal. The picture is distorted: macroblock error, small block, dots, pixelization • Compression of video contents may cause picture distortion especially in fast moving pictures such as sports and action movies. • Low signal level or bad quality can cause picture distortion. This is not a TV issue. Colour is wrong or missing. • If you’re using a component connection, make sure the component cables are connected to the correct jacks. Incorrect or loose connections may cause colour problems or a blank screen. There is poor colour or brightness. • Adjust the Picture options in the TV menu. (go to Picture mode / Colour / Brightness / Sharpness) (p. 15) • Adjust Energy Saving option in the TV menu. (go to MENU - Picture - Eco Solution - Energy Saving) (p. 15) • Try resetting the picture to view the default picture settings. (go to MENU - Picture - Picture Reset) (p. 17) There is a dotted line on the edge of the screen. • If the picture size is set to Screen Fit, change it to 16:9 (p. 16). • Change cable/set top box resolution. The picture is black and white. • If you are using an AV composite input, connect the video cable (yellow) to the Green jack of component input 1 on the TV. When changing channels, the picture freezes or is distorted or delayed. • If connected with a cable box, please try to reset the cable box. Reconnect the AC cord and wait until the cable box reboots. It may take up to 20 minutes. • Set the output resolution of the cable box to 1080i or 720p. Sound Quality First of all, please perform the Sound Test to confirm that your TV audio is properly operating. (go to MENU - Support - Self Diagnosis - Sound Test) (p. 21) If the audio is OK, the sound problem may caused by the source or signal. There is no sound or the sound is too low at maximum volume. • Please check the volume the of external device connected to your TV. The picture is good but there is no sound. • Set the Speaker Select option to TV Speaker in the sound menu. (p. 18) • If you are using an external device, make sure the audio cables are connected to the correct audio input jacks on the TV. • If you are using an external device, check the device’s audio output option (ex. you may need to change your cable box’s audio option to HDMI when you have a HDMI connected to your TV). • If you are using a DVI to HDMI cable, a separate audio cable is required. • If your TV has a headphone jack, make sure there is nothing plugged into it. The speakers are making an inappropriate noise. • Check the cable connections. Make sure a video cable is not connected to an audio input. • For antenna or cable connections, check the signal strength. Low signal level may cause sound distortion. [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 38 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:16English 39 05 Other Information Issues Solutions and Explanations No Picture, No Video The TV won’t turn on. • Make sure the AC power cord is securely plugged in to the wall outlet and the TV. • Make sure the wall outlet is working. • Try pressing the POWER button on the TV to make sure the problem is not the remote. If the TV turns on, refer to “The remote control does not work” below. The TV turns off automatically. • Ensure the Sleep Timer is set to Off in the Setup menu. (p. 19) • If your PC is connected to the TV, check your PC power settings. • Make sure the AC power cord is plugged in securely to the wall outlet and the TV. • When watching TV from an antenna or cable connection, the TV will turn off after 10 ~ 15 minutes if there is no signal. There is no picture/Video. • Check cable connections (remove and reconnect all cables connected to the TV and external devices). • Set your external devices’ (Cable/Set top Box, DVD, Blu-ray etc) video outputs to match the connections to the TV input. For example, if an external device’s output is HDMI, it should be connected to an HDMI input on the TV. • Make sure your connected devices are powered on. • Be sure to select the TV’s correct source by pressing the SOURCE button on the TV remote. RF(Cable/Antenna) Connection The TV is not receiving all channels. • Make sure the Antenna cable is connected securely. • Please try Plug & Play (Initial setup) to add available channels to the channel list. Go to MENU - Setup - Plug & Play (Initial setup) and wait for all available channels to be stored. (p. 7) • Verify the Antenna is positioned correctly. The picture is distorted: macroblock error small block, dots, pixelization • Compression of video contents may cause picture distortion, especially with fast moving pictures such as sports and action movies. • A low signal can cause picture distortion. This is not a TV issue. PC Connection A “Mode Not Supported” message appears. • Set your PC’s output resolution and frequency so they match the resolutions supported by the TV. (p. 23) “PC” is always shown on the source list, even if a PC is not connected. • This is normal; “PC” is always shown on the source list, regardless of whether a PC is connected. The video is OK but there is no audio. • If you are using a HDMI connection, check the audio output setting on your PC. Others The picture won’t display in full screen. • HD channels will have black bars on either side of the screen when displaying upscaled SD (4:3) contents. • Black bars on the top and bottom will appear during movies that have aspect ratios different from your TV. • Adjust the picture size options on your external device or TV to full screen. The remote control does not work. • Replace the remote control batteries with the poles (+/–) in the right direction. • Clean the sensor’s transmission window on the remote. • Try pointing the remote directly at the TV from 5~6 feet away. The cable/set top box remote control doesn’t turn the TV on or off, or adjust the volume. • Programme the Cable/Set top box remote control to operate the TV. Refer to the Cable/Set user manual for the SAMSUNG TV code. A “Mode Not Supported” message appears. • Check the supported resolution of the TV, and adjust the external device’s output resolution accordingly. Refer to the resolution settings on page 23 of this manual. There is a plastic smell from the TV. • This smell is normal and will dissipate over time. The TV Signal Information is unavailable in the Self Diagnostic Test menu. • This function is only available with digital channels from an Antenna / RF/Coax connection. (p. 21) The TV is tilted to the side. • Remove the base stand from the TV and reassemble it. The channel menu is greyed out. (unavailable) • The Channel menu is only available when the TV source is selected. [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 39 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:1740 English Other Information Issues Solutions and Explanations Your settings are lost after 30 minutes or every time the TV is turned off. • If the TV is in the Store Demo mode, it will reset audio and picture settings every 30 minutes. Change the settings from Store Demo mode to Home Use mode in the Plug & Play (Initial setup) procedure. Press the SOURCE button to select TV mode, and go to MENU → Setup → Plug & Play (Initial setup) → ENTERE. (p. 7) You have intermittent loss of audio or video. • Check the cable connections and reconnect them. • Loss of audio or video can be caused by using overly rigid or thick cables. Make sure the cables are flexible enough for long term use. If mounting the TV to the wall, we recommend using cables with 90 degree connectors. You see small particles when you look closely at the edge of the frame of the TV. • This is part of the product’s design and is not a defect. The PIP menu is not available. • PIP functionality is only available when you are using a HDMI, PC or components source. (p. 21) The message “Scramble signal” or “Weak Signal/No Signal” appears. • If you are using a CAM CARD (CI/CI+), check that it is installed into the common interface slot. • If there is still a problem, pull the CAM CARD out of the TV and insert it into the slot again. You turned the TV off 45 minutes ago, and it turned on again. • It is normal. The TV operates the OTA (Over The Aerial) function itself to upgrade firmware downloaded whilst your watching TV. There are recurrent picture/sound issues. • Check and change the signal/source. A reaction may occur between the rubber cushion pads on the base stand and the top finish of some furniture. • To prevent this, use felt pads on any surface of the TV that comes in direct contact with furniture. ✎This TFT LED panel uses a panel consisting of sub pixels which require sophisticated technology to produce. However, there may be a few bright or dark pixels on the screen. These pixels will have no impact on the performance of the product. ¦ Licence Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Manufactured under licence under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and the Symbol are registered trademarks. & DTS 2.0+ Digital Out and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product Includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. DivX Certified to play DivX video up to HD 1080p, including premium content. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX,Inc. This is an official DivX Certified device that plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play DivX Video-onDemand (VOD) content. To generate the registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in the device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com with this code to complete the registration process and learn more about DivX VOD. Pat. 7,295,673; 7,460,688; 7,519,274 Open Source Licence Notice In the case of using open source software, Open Source Licences are available on the product menu. [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 40 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:17English 41 05 Other Information Specifications Panel native 1360 x 768 @ 60 Hz Environmental Considerations Operating Temperature Operating Humidity Storage Temperature Storage Humidity 10°C to 40°C (50°F to 104°F) 10% to 80%, non-condensing -20°C to 45°C (-4°F to 113°F) 5% to 95%, non-condensing TV System Analogue: B/G, D/K, L, I (Depending on your country selection) Digital: DVB-T/DVB-C Colour/Video System Analogue: PAL, SECAM, NTSC-4.43, NTSC-3.58, PAL60 Digital: MPEG-2 MP@ML, MPEG-4, H.264/AVC MP@L3, MP@L4.0, HP@L4.0 Sound System BG. OK NICAM. MPEGl HDMI IN 1 ~ 2 Video: 1080 24p, 1080p, 1080i, 720p 576p, 576i, 480p, 480i Audio: 2Ch Linear PCM 32/44.1/48kHz, 16/20/24bits. Analogue audio input (HDMI IN1 only) PC input (HDMI IN1 only) Stand Swivel (Left / Right) 0 Model Name UE19C4000 UE22C4000 / UE22C4010 UE26C4000 Screen Size 19 inches 22 inches 26 inches Sound (Output) 3W x 2 3W x 2 5W x 2 Dimensions (WxDxH) Body With stand 477.6 x 29.9 x 320.6 mm 477.6 x 189.6 x 374.1mm 545.2 x 29.9 x 359.0 mm 545.2 x 189.5 x 411.1 mm 652.8 x 29.9 x 422.8 mm 652.8 x 212.0 x 479.8 mm Weight Without Stand With Stand 3.6 kg 3.9 kg 3.7 kg 4.1 kg 5.5 kg 6.2 kg ✎Design and specifications are subject to change without prior notice. ✎For information about power supply, and more about power consumption, refer to the label attached to the product. [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 41 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:1742 English Other Information Index A Amplify 17 Antenna 13 Anynet+ 30 Auto Adjustment 17 Auto Volume 18 B Background Music 29 Balance L/R 17 Basic View 28 Batteries 6 Black Tone 15 Blanking Bracket 35 Brightness 15 C Cable Tie 4, 35 Change PIN 20 Channel Manager 12 Channel Menu 13 Clock 19 Colour Tone 16 Component 8 Connecting to a PC 23 Connecting to an Audio Device 9 D DIGITAL AUDIO OUT 9, 30 DivX® VOD 29 D-sub 23 Dynamic 15 Dynamic Contrast 15 E Edit Name 10 Editing Channels 14 Energy Saving 15 EPG (Electronic Programme Guide)11 Equalizer 17 External Speaker 18 F Favourites Channel 13 Film Mode 16 Fine Tune 14 Flesh Tone 15 Frequency 13 H HDMI 8, 30 Headphones 9 Home Theatre 9, 30 I Installation Space 2 L Language 20 Licence 40 Lock 14 M Media Play 24 Melody 21 Menu Transparency 21 Music 27 N Navigate 11 Now & Next guide 11 O Optimal resolution 23 P Photos 27 Picture Size 16, 29 PIP (Picture in Picture) 21 Plug & Play 7 Power Indicator 5 R Receiver 32 Recording 32 Remote Control 6 Repeat Mode 29 RGB Only Mode 15 Rotate 29 S Select All 14 Self Diagnosis 21 Sharpness 15 Signal Information 21 Sleep Timer 19 Slide Show 27 Software Upgrade 22 Source List 10 Speaker Select 18 Specifications 41 Standby mode 5 Subtitle 20 Symbol 3 T Timer 19 Title 28 Tools 3 Troubleshooting 38 TV Speaker 18 U USB Drive 22, 24 Using Channel View 12 Using Scheduled View 12 Using the Favourite Channels 13 V VCR 8 Video Formats 26 Videos 25 Virtual Surround 17 Volume 5 W Wall Mount 35 Warm 16 White Balance 15 [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 42 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:18This page is intentionally left blank. [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 43 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:182 Français Les figures et illustrations contenues dans ce mode d’emploi sont fournies pour référence uniquement. Elles peuvent différer de l’aspect réel du produit. La conception et les spécifications du produit sont susceptibles d’être modifiées sans préavis. Avis concernant le téléviseur numérique 1. Les fonctions relatives à la télévision numérique (DVB) ne sont disponibles que dans les pays ou régions où des signaux terrestres numériques de type DVB-T (MPEG2 et MPEG4 AVC) sont diffusés ou dans lesquels vous avez accès à un service de télévision par câble compatible DVB-C (MPEG2 et MPEG4 AAC). Consultez votre distributeur local pour connaître les possibilités en matière de réception des signaux DVB-T ou DVB-C. 2. DVB-T est la norme du consortium européen DVB pour la diffusion de signaux terrestres de télévision numérique. La norme DVB-C est, quant à elle, prévue pour la diffusion des signaux de télévision numérique par câble. Certaines fonctions particulières, telles que le guide électronique des programmes (Electric Program Guide - EPG) ou encore la vidéo à la demande (Video On Demand - VOD), ne sont toutefois pas incluses dans cette spécification. Dès lors, elles ne seront pas traitées pour l’instant. 3. Bien que ce téléviseur soit conforme aux dernières normes DVB-T et DVB-C (août 2008), il n’est pas garanti qu’il soit compatible avec les futures diffusions de signaux numériques terrestres DVB-T et par câble DVB-C. 4. En fonction du pays ou de la région où vous vous trouvez, certains opérateurs de télévision par câble peuvent facturer des frais supplémentaires pour un tel service. Il se peut également que vous deviez accepter les termes et conditions de ces sociétés. 5. Il se peut que certaines fonctions de TV numérique ne soient pas disponibles dans certains pays ou certaines régions et que la réception des signaux DVB-C ne soit pas correcte avec tous les opérateurs. 6. Pour plus d’informations, contactez votre service client Samsung. ✎ Les différentes méthodes de diffusion adoptées en fonction des pays peuvent affecter la qualité de réception du téléviseur. Vérifiez le fonctionnement du téléviseur chez votre revendeur agréé SAMSUNG ou contactez le centre d’appel de Samsung pour savoir s’il est possible d’en améliorer les performances en reconfigurant les réglages. Avertissement d’image fixe Evitez d’afficher sur l’écran des images fixes (telles que des photos au format JPEG) ou des éléments d’images fixes (tels que des logos de programmes TV, un format d’image 4:3 ou panoramique, des bandeaux d’actualités ou d’informations boursières au bas de l’écran, etc.). L’affichage permanent d’images fixes risque, en effet, d’entraîner l’apparition d’images fantôme à l’écran, ce qui peut se traduire par une dégradation de la qualité d’image. Pour atténuer les risques, suivez scrupuleusement les recommandations suivantes: • Evitez d’afficher le même canal de télévision pendant de longues périodes. • Essayez toujours d’afficher l’image en plein écran ; pour obtenir une correspondance optimale, utilisez le menu de format d’image du téléviseur. • Réduisez les valeurs de luminosité et de contraste sur le minimum requis pour obtenir la qualité d’image souhaitée. L’utilisation de valeurs trop élevées risque d’accélérer le processus de brûlure. • Utilisez fréquemment toutes les fonctions du téléviseur conçues pour réduire le phénomène de rémanence et la brûlure d’écran. Pour plus d’informations à ce sujet, consultez la section appropriée du mode d’emploi. Sécurisation de l’espace d’installation Maintenez les distances requises entre le produit et les autres objets (par exemple, les murs) afin de garantir une ventilation adaptée. Le non-respect de ces distances peut provoquer un incendie ou un problème au produit en raison d’une augmentation de la température interne de celui-ci. ✎ Lors de l’utilisation d’un pied ou d’un support mural, utilisez uniquement les pièces fournies par Samsung Electronics. x L’utilisation de pièces fournies par un autre fabricant peut occasionner un problème au niveau du produit ou la chute de celui-ci, ce qui pourrait vous blesser. ✎ L’aspect peut varier en fonction du produit. Installation avec un pied. Installation avec un support de montage mural. 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm Les bons gestes de mise au rebut de ce produit (Déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques) (Applicable dans les pays de l’Union Européenne et dans d’autres pays européens pratiquant le tri sélectif) Ce symbole sur le produit, ses accessoires ou sa documentation indique que ni le produit, ni ses accessoires électroniques usagés (chargeur, casque audio, câble USB, etc.) ne peuvent être jetés avec les autres déchets ménagers. La mise au rebut incontrôlée des déchets présentant des risques environnementaux et de santé publique, veuillez séparer vos produits et accessoires usagés des autres déchets. Vous favoriserez ainsi le recyclage de la matière qui les compose dans le cadre d’un développement durable. Les particuliers sont invités à contacter le magasin leur ayant vendu le produit ou à se renseigner auprès des autorités locales pour connaître les procédures et les points de collecte de ces produits en vue de leur recyclage. Les entreprises et professionnels sont invités à contacter leurs fournisseurs et à consulter les conditions de leur contrat de vente. Ce produit et ses accessoires ne peuvent être jetés avec les autres déchets professionnels et commerciaux. Elimination des batteries de ce produit (Applicable aux pays de l’Union européenne et aux autres pays européens dans lesquels des systèmes de collecte sélective sont mis en place.) Le symbole sur la batterie, le manuel ou l’emballage indique que les batteries de ce produit ne doivent pas être éliminées en fin de vie avec les autres déchets ménagers. L’indication éventuelle des symboles chimiques Hg, Cd ou Pb signifie que la batterie contient des quantités de mercure, de cadmium ou de plomb supérieures aux niveaux de référence stipulés dans la directive CE 2006/66. Si les batteries ne sont pas correctement éliminées, ces substances peuvent porter préjudice à la santé humaine ou à l’environnement. Afin de protéger les ressources naturelles et d’encourager la réutilisation du matériel, veillez à séparer les batteries des autres types de déchets et à les recycler via votre système local de collecte gratuite des batteries. [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 2 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:183 FRANÇAIS Français Contenu Mise en route 4 4 Accessoires 5 Présentation du panneau de configuration 6 Présentation de la télécommande 7 Raccordement à une antenne 7 Plug & Play (configuration initiale) Connexions 8 8 Connexion à un périphérique AV 9 Connexion à un système audio 10 Changement de la source d’entrée Fonctions de base 11 11 Navigation dans les menus 11 Utilisation du bouton INFO (Guide Now & Next) 11 Planification des émissions à regarder 13 Menu Canal 15 Menu Image 17 Menu Son 19 Menu Configuration 21 Menu Assistance Fonctions avancées 23 23 Connexion à un ordinateur 24 Media Play 30 Anynet+ Informations supplémentaires 34 34 Fonction Télétexte de chaîne analogique 35 Assemblage des câbles 35 Installation du support mural 37 Verrou antivol Kensington 37 Fixation du téléviseur au mur 38 Dépannage 41 Caractéristiques techniques 42 Index Vérifiez la présence du symbole! tCette fonction peut être utilisée lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS de la télécommande. Remarque Bouton tactile TOOLS [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 3 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:194 Français Mise en route Accessoires ✎Vérifiez que les éléments suivants sont fournis avec votre téléviseur à LED. S’il manque des éléments, contactez votre revendeur. ✎Les couleurs et les formes des éléments peuvent varier en fonction des modèles. ✎Les câbles qui ne se trouvent pas dans le contenu de l’emballage peuvent être achetés séparément y Télécommande et piles (AAA x 2) y Manuel d’utilisation y Carte de garantie / Manuel de sécurité (non disponible dans certains pays) y Chiffon de nettoyage y Cordon d’alimentation y Cache et vis (X1) (Uniquement modèle en 26 pouces) y Anneau de support (4EA) (Uniquement modèle en 26 pouces) y Support du serre-câble (Uniquement modèle en 26 pouces) y Attache de câble y Serre-câble (3EA) y Type composant y Type AV y Type SCART UE19C4000, UE22C4000 / UE22C4010 Pour installer le pied, consultez le guide approprié. y Base du support y Corps du support UE26C4000 Pour installer le pied, consultez le guide approprié. s s s s s (A) (B) 5EA (M4 X L12) 5EA (M4 X L8) y Pied (1EA) y Support de guidage (1EA) y Vis (10EA) ✎Pour obtenir la meilleure connexion câblée possible vers cet appareil, utilisez des câbles de l’épaisseur maximale indiquée ci-dessous. y Epaisseur maximale : 0,55 pouces (14 mm) (M4 X L8) [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 4 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:215 01 Mise en route Français Présentation du panneau de configuration ✎La couleur et la forme du produit peuvent varier en fonction du modèle. Capteur de la télécommande Dirigez la télécommande vers ce point du téléviseur. SOURCEE Bascule entre toutes les sources d’entrée disponibles. Dans le menu du téléviseur, ce bouton a la même fonction que le bouton ENTERE de la télécommande. YMENU Affiche un menu à l’écran (OSD) reprenant les fonctions de votre téléviseur. Règle le volume. Dans l’affichage à l’écran, utilisez les boutons Y de la même façon z que les boutons ◄ et ► de la télécommande. Permet de modifier les chaînes. Dans l’affichage à l’écran, utilisez les boutons z de la même façon que les boutons ▼ et ▲ de la télécommande. Témoin d’alimentation Clignote, puis s’arrête lorsque le téléviseur est allumé. S’allume en mode Veille. P (Alimentation) Permet d’allumer et d’éteindre le téléviseur. Mode Veille Ne laissez pas le téléviseur en mode Veille pendant de longues périodes (lorsque vous partez en vacances, par exemple). Même s’il est en veille, l’appareil consomme toujours une petite quantité d’énergie. Il est préférable de débrancher le cordon d’alimentation. Haut-parleurs Capteur de la télécommande Témoin d’alimentation [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 5 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:226 Mise en route Français Présentation de la télécommande ✎Ceci est une télécommande spéciale destinée aux malvoyants. Elle dispose de points Braille sur les boutons Power, Channel et Volume. Installation des piles (type de pile : AAA) ✎REMARQUE x Utilisez la télécommande à une distance maximale de 7 mètres du téléviseur. x Une lumière intense peut affecter le bon fonctionnement de la télécommande. Avoid use when nearby fluorescent lights or neon signs. x La couleur et la forme peuvent varier en fonction du modèle. CH LIST TOOLS POWER SOURCE PRE-CH MENU RETURN MEDIA.P A B C D EXIT INFO HDMI TTX/MIX GUIDE P.MODE AD P.SIZE SUBT. S.MODE DUAL Permet d’allumer et d’éteindre le téléviseur. Permet de sélectionner directement le mode HDMI. Permet d’afficher et de sélectionner les sources vidéo disponibles (p. 10). Permet de revenir à la chaîne précédente. Permet d’arrêter temporairement le son. Permet de changer de chaîne. Permet d’afficher les listes de chaînes à l’écran (p. 13). Permet d’afficher le Guide des programmes électronique (EPG) (p. 11). Permet d’afficher des informations à l’écran. Permet de quitter le menu. Press to directly access to channels. Règle le volume. Permet de choisir Teletext, Double ou Mix. Permet d’ouvrir l’affichage à l’écran. Permet d’afficher Media Play (USB) (p. 24). Permet de sélectionner rapidement les fonctions fréquemment utilisées. Permet de revenir au menu précédent. Permettent de sélectionner les éléments des menus à l’écran et de modifier les valeurs des menus. Ces boutons sont utilisés dans les menus Gestion chaînes, Media Play (USB), etc. Utilisez ces boutons avec les modes Media Play (USB) et Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) (p. 24, 30). (� : permet de contrôler les enregistreurs Samsung disposant de la fonction Anynet+) P.MODE: permet de sélectionner le mode Image (p.15). S.MODE: permet de sélectionner le mode Son (p.17). DUAL f-g: sélection d’effets sonores (p. 19). AD: permet d’activer ou de désactiver la description audio (p. 18). Cette fonction n’est pas disponible pour tous les pays. P.SIZE: permet de sélectionner la taille de l’image (p. 16). SUBT.: permet d’afficher des sous-titres numériques (p. 20). [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 6 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:227 01 Mise en route Français Raccordement à une antenne Lorsque vous allumez le téléviseur pour la première fois, des réglages de base s’effectuent de manière automatique. ✎Préréglage: connexion du câble d’alimentation et de l’antenne. ✎Si la taille de la partie moulée du câble est anormale, il se peut que l’élément ne soit pas connecté correctement au port d’entrée. Plug & Play (configuration initiale) Lorsque le téléviseur est allumé pour la première fois, plusieurs invites s’affichent pour vous aider à configurer les réglages de base. Appuyez sur le bouton POWERP. Plug & Play est disponible uniquement si la source Entrée est définie sur TV. ✎Pour revenir à l’étape précédente, appuyez sur le bouton rouge. 1 Choix d’une langue Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼, puis sur ENTERE. Sélectionnez la langue de votre choix pour le menu à l’écran. P POWER 2 Sélection de Enr. démo ou de Util. domicile Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ►, puis sur ENTERE. y Sélectionnez le mode Util. domicile. Le mode Enr. démo est prévu pour un usage en magasin. y Rétablissez les paramètres du téléviseur de Enr. démo sur Util. domicile (standard): appuyez sur le bouton Volume du téléviseur. Lorsque l’affichage écran du volume apparaît, appuyez pendant 5 secondes sur MENU. 3 Sélection d’un pays Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼, puis sur ENTERE. Sélectionnez le pays de votre choix. Si le pays ne figure pas dans le menu, sélectionnez Autre. ✎Après la sélection du pays dans le menu Pays, certains modèles peuvent demander, en plus, le code PIN. ✎Lors de l’entrée du code PIN, 0-0-0-0 n’est pas disponible. 4 Sélection d’une antenne Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼, puis sur ENTERE. Sélectionnez Hertzien ou Câble. 5 Sélection d’une chaîne Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼, puis sur ENTERE. Sélectionnez la source des chaînes à mémoriser. Lors du réglage de la source d’antenne sur Câble, une fenêtre s’affiche pour vous permettre d’attribuer des valeurs numériques (fréquences) aux chaînes. Pour plus d’informations, reportez-vous à Canal → Mémorisation Auto (p.13). ✎Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE à tout moment pour interrompre la mémorisation. 6 Réglage du Mode Horloge Réglez le Mode Horloge automatiquement ou manuellement. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Auto., puis sur ENTERE. 7 Fuseau horaire Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner votre fuseau horaire, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. (en fonction du pays) 8 Affichage du Guide de connexion HD La méthode de connexion assurant la meilleure qualité d’image en HD s’affiche à l’écran. 9 Profitez de votre téléviseur. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Si vous souhaitez réinitialiser cette fonction... Sélectionnez Configuration - Plug & Play (Configuration initiale). Entrez votre code PIN à quatre chiffres. Le code PIN par défaut est “0-0-0- 0”. Si vous souhaitez modifier le code PIN, utilisez la fonction Modifier PIN. ANT OUT Antenne VHF/UHF ou Câble Entrée de l’alimentation [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 7 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:238 Français Connexions Connexion à un périphérique AV Utilisation d’un câble HDMI ou HDMI/DVI : connexion HD (jusqu’à 720p/1080i) Périphériques disponibles : DVD, Lecteur Blu-ray, décodeur câble HD, récepteur satellite HD (boîtier décodeur), décodeur câble, récepteur satellite (boîtier externe) ✎HDMI IN 1(DVI), 2, PC/DVI AUDIO IN x Lorsque vous utilisez une connexion avec câble HDMI/DVI, vous devez utiliser la borne HDMI IN 1(DVI). Dans le cas d’une connexion avec câble DVI, utilisez un câble DVI vers HDMI ou un adaptateur DVI-HDMI (DVI vers HDMI) pour la connexion vidéo et les prises PC/DVI AUDIO IN pour le son. x Si vous connectez un périphérique externe, tel qu’un lecteur DVD, un lecteur Blu-ray, un décodeur câble, un récepteur satellite (boîtier externe) prenant en charge une version HDMI antérieure à 1.3, il se peut que le téléviseur ne fonctionne pas correctement (par exemple : absence d’image, absence de son, scintillement, couleurs anormales). x Si aucun son n’est émis après la connexion d’un câble HDMI, vérifiez la version HDMI du dispositif externe. Si vous pensez qu’il utilise peut-être une version HDMI antérieure à 1,3, contactez le fabricant pour en avoir la confirmation et demander une mise à niveau. x Il vous est recommandé d’acheter un câble certifié HDMI. Sinon, il se peut que qu’un écran vierge apparaisse ou qu’une erreur de connexion se produise. Utilisation d’un câble Composant (jusqu’à 720p/1080i) ou Audio/Vidéo (480i uniquement) et d’un câble Scart Périphériques disponibles : DVD, lecteur Blu-ray, décodeur câble, récepteur satellite (boîtier externe), magnétoscope ✎En mode Ext., la sortie DTV prend uniquement en charge les signaux audio et vidéo MPEG SD. ✎Pour obtenir une qualité d’image optimale, il est préférable d’opter pour la connexion Composante (plutôt que la connexion A/V). ✎Si la taille de la partie moulée du câble est anormale, il se peut que l’élément ne soit pas connecté correctement au port d’entrée. HDMI OUT DVI OUT AUDIO OUT R-AUDIO-L R W DVD DVD Rouge Blanc PR PB Y COMPONENT OUT R G B R B G Y Y W R R W R W AUDIO OUT VIDEO OUT R-AUDIO-L AUDIO OUT R-AUDIO-L R B G R W Y R W EXT Magnétoscope DVD Rouge Bleu Vert Rouge Blanc Jaune Rouge Blanc Lecteur Blu-ray [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 8 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:24Français 9 02 Connexions Connexion à un système audio Utilisation d’une connexion Optique (Numérique) ou d’une sortie casque Périphériques disponibles : système audio numérique, amplificateur, Home cinéma ✎DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) x Lorsqu’un système audio numérique est relié à la prise DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL), baissez le volume du téléviseur et du système. x Le mode audio 5.1 est disponible uniquement si le téléviseur est relié à un dispositif externe prenant en charge ce mode. x Lorsque le récepteur (un amplificateur ou un système home cinéma DVD) est activé, vous pouvez écouter le son sortant de la prise optique du téléviseur. Lorsque le téléviseur reçoit un signal DTV, il envoie un son en mode 5.1 à l’amplificateur ou au système home cinéma DVD. Lorsque la source est un composant numérique, tel qu’un lecteur DVD, un lecteur Blu-ray, un décodeur câble ou un récepteur satellite (boîtier externe) relié au téléviseur via une connexion HDMI, l’amplificateur ou le système home cinéma DVD n’émet le son que sur 2 canaux. Pour obtenir un son en mode 5.1, reliez la prise de sortie audio numérique du lecteur DVD, du lecteur Blu-ray, du décodeur câble ou du récepteur satellite (boîtier externe) directement à un amplificateur ou un système home cinéma. ✎Casques H : Vous pouvez brancher votre casque à la prise casque du téléviseur. Lorsque le casque est branché, les enceintes intégrées n’émettent plus de son. x La fonction Son peut être limitée lorsque des écouteurs sont connectés au téléviseur. x Le volume des écouteurs et celui du téléviseur sont réglés séparément. OPTICAL USB système audio numérique [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 9 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:2510 Français Connexions Changement de la source d’entrée Liste Source Permet de sélectionner le téléviseur ou d’autres sources d’entrée externes, telles que des lecteurs DVD/Blu-ray, des décodeurs câble ou des récepteurs satellite (boîtiers décodeurs), connectées au téléviseur. ■ TV / Ext. / PC / AV / Composant / HDMI1/DVI / HDMI2 / USB ✎ Les entrées connectées sont mises en surbrillance dans la Liste Source. ✎ Les options Ext. et PC sont toujours activées. Modif. Nom ■ Magnétoscope / DVD / Décodeur Câble / Décodeur satellite / Décodeur PVR / Récepteur AV / Jeux / Caméscope / PC / DVI PC / Périph. DVI / TV / IPTV / Blu-ray / HD DVD / DMA: Nommez le périphérique connecté aux prises d’entrée pour faciliter la sélection de la source d’entrée. ✎ Lorsque vous connectez un câble HDMI/DVI au port HDMI IN 1(DVI), vous devez régler le port en mode DVI PC ou Périph. DVI sous Modif. Nom. Emplacement COMMON INTERFACE pour les connexions Pour regarder les chaînes payantes, la carte d’interface commune (CI(CI+) CARD) doit être insérée. y Si vous ne l’insérez pas, certaines chaînes afficheront le message “Signal brouillé”. y Les informations de pairage contenant un numéro de téléphone, l’ID de la carte d’interface commune (CI(CI+) CARD), l’ID de l’hôte et d’autres informations s’afficheront dans 2 ou 3 minutes. Si un message d’erreur s’affiche, contactez votre fournisseur d’accès. y Lorsque la configuration des informations sur les canaux est terminée, le message “Mise à jour terminée” s’affiche, indiquant que la liste des chaînes est mise à jour. ✎REMARQUE x Vous devez vous procurer une carte d’interface commune (CI(CI+) CARD) auprès d’un fournisseur local de diffusion par câble. x Lorsque vous sortez la carte d’interface commune (CI(CI+) CARD), tirez-la délicatement. Une chute pourrait en effet l’endommager. x Insérez la carte d’interface commune (CI(CI+) CARD) dans le sens indiqué sur celle-ci. x L’emplacement de la fente COMMON INTERFACE peut varier en fonction du modèle. x La carte d’interface commune (CI(CI+) CARD) n’est pas prise en charge dans certains pays et certaines régions ; vérifiez auprès de votre revendeur agréé. x Si vous rencontrez des problèmes, contactez le fournisseur d’accès. x Insérez la carte d’interface commune (CI(CI+ CARD), qui prend en charge les paramètres actuels de l’antenne. L’image sera déformée, voire invisible. SOURCE [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 10 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:26Français 11 03 Fonctions de base Fonctions de base Navigation dans les menus Avant d’utiliser le téléviseur, procédez comme suit pour apprendre à naviguer dans le menu afin de sélectionner et de régler les différentes fonctions. CH LIST MUTE POWER SOURCE ON/OFF PRE-CH INTERNET MEDIA.P TOOLS RETURN MEDIA.P AD P.SIZE SUBT. A B C D DUAL EXIT INFO @ TTX/MIX MENU GUIDE 3 2 4 1 1 ENTERE / Bouton de direction: déplacez le curseur pour sélectionner un élément. Confirmez le réglage. 2 Bouton RETURN: Permet de revenir au menu précédent. 3 Bouton MENU: permet d’afficher le menu principal à l’écran. 4 Bouton EXIT: permet de quitter le menu affiché à l’écran. Maniement de l’affichage à l’écran (OSD) La méthode d’accès peut varier en fonction du menu sélectionné. 1 MENU m Les options du menu principal apparaissent à l’écran : Image, Son, Canal, Configuration, Entrée, Application, Assistance. 2 ▲ / ▼ Sélectionnez une icône à l’aide du bouton ▲ ou ▼. 3 ENTERE Appuyez sur ENTERE pour accéder au sous-menu. 4 ▲ / ▼ Sélectionnez le sous-menu de votre choix à l’aide du bouton ▲ ou ▼. 5 ◄ / ► Réglez la valeur d’un élément à l’aide du bouton ◄ ou ►. Les informations de réglage affichées à l’écran peuvent varier en fonction du menu sélectionné. 6 ENTERE Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE pour terminer la configuration. 7 EXIT e Appuyez sur EXIT. Utilisation du bouton INFO (Guide Now & Next) L’affichage identifie la chaîne en cours et l’état de certains paramètres audio et vidéo. Le Guide Now & Next affiche des informations quotidiennes sur les programmes de télévision en fonction de l’heure de diffusion. y Faites défiler à l’aide des boutons ◄, ► pour afficher des informations sur le programme de votre choix, tout en regardant la chaîne actuelle. y Faites défiler à l’aide des boutons ▲, ▼ pour afficher des informations sur d’autres chaînes. Pour accéder à la chaîne actuellement sélectionnée, appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. DTV Air 15 DEF Life On Venus Avenue 18:00 ~ 6:00 Unclassified No Detaild Information E Planification des émissions à regarder Guide Les informations du Guide électronique des programmes (EPG) sont fournies par les diffuseurs. Les programmes planifiés fournis par les diffuseurs vous permettent de planifier les émissions que vous souhaitez regarder, de telle sorte que le téléviseur change automatiquement de chaîne à l’heure indiquée. Des entrées de programmes peuvent être vides ou ne pas être à jour en raison de l’état d’une chaîne. INFO GUIDE 18:11 Jeu 6 Jan Regarder Information [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 11 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:2712 Français Fonctions de base Utilisation de la Vue chaînes Utilisation de l’option Diffusion programmée 1 Rouge (Mode aff.): affiche la liste des programmes en cours de diffusion ou à venir. 2 Yellow (+24 hours): affiche la liste des programmes qui seront diffusés dans plus de 24 heures. 3 Blue (Ch. Mode):permet de sélectionner le type des chaînes à afficher dans la fenêtre Vue chaînes. (Tous, TV, Radio, Donn/autre, Ma chaîne 1~4) 4 Information: affiche des détails sur le programme sélectionné. 5 k (Page): passe à la page précédente ou suivante. 6 Bouton ENTERE. – Si vous sélectionnez le programme en cours, vous pouvez le regarder. – Si vous sélectionnez un programme à venir, vous pouvez le réserver. Pour annuler la programmation, appuyez de nouveau sur ENTERE et sélectionnez Annuler progr.. Gestion chaînes Supprimez ou définissez des chaînes favorites et utilisez le guide des programmes pour les émissions numériques. Sélectionnez une chaîne dans l’écran Chaînes, Mes chaînes ou Programmé. ■ Chaînes: affiche la liste des chaînes selon le type de chaîne. ■ *Mes chaînes: affiche le groupe du canal. ■ Programmé: affiche tous les programmes réservés actuellement. ✎Utilisation des boutons de couleur avec la fonction Gestion chaînes x Rouge (Antenne): permet de basculer entre Hertzien et Câble. x B Vert (Zoom) : agrandit ou réduit un numéro de chaîne. x Jaune (Sélectionner): sélectionnez les chaînes voulues, puis appuyez sur le bouton jaune pour traiter toutes les chaînes sélectionnées en même temps. La marque c s’affiche à gauche des chaînes sélectionnées. x Bleu (Tri des canaux): change l’ordre des chaînes classées par nom ou par numéro. x k (Page): passe à la page précédente ou suivante. x T (Outils): affiche le menu d’options Gestion chaînes. (Les menus options peuvent varier en fonction de la situation.) Icônes d’état des chaînes Icônes Opérations A Chaîne analogique. c Chaîne sélectionnée. \ Chaîne définie comme favorite. ( Programme en cours de diffusion. \ Chaîne verrouillée. ) Programme réservé. Guide 2:10 Mar 1 Jui Vue chaînes - Tous DTV Air 800 five Home and Away 18:00 - 18:30 Drama Dani is devastated when scott makes clear his views on marriage... American Chopper Programmes resume at 06:00 Home and... No Information QVC Selection No Information Tine Team Fiv... 18:00 - 19:00 19:00 - 20:00 )Family Affairs )Dark Angel 800 ﬁve Mode aff. +24 heures Mode CH Information k Page E Regarder 1 2 3 4 5 6 Guide 2:10 Mar 1 Jui Diffusion programmée u 27 Discovery 28 DiscoveryH&L 800 five 24 price-drop.tv 16 QVC d 6 R4DTT Aujourd’hui DTV Air 800 five Family Affairs 18:00 - 18:30 Drama Tanya confesses all to a stunned Babs. Conrad is anxious to hear... )Family Affairs )Dark Angel 800 800 five five 800 ﬁve Mode aff. Information E Annuler Guide 2:10 Mar 1 Jui Diffusion programmée 1 4 6 18:30 Aujourd’hui 19:15 Aujourd’hui c1 1futech 2 * 24ore.tv 15 abc1 3 BBC World 23 bid-up.tv 33 Boonerang 32 Cartoon Nwk 5 Class News 4 \ Coming Soon 27 Discovery r Air Antenne B Zoom Sélectionner Tri des canaux k Page TOutils Chaînes Tous TV Radio Donn/autre Analogique 18:00 - 19:00 19:00 - 20:00 [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 12 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:29Français 13 03 Fonctions de base ¦ Utilisation des chaînes favorites * Mes chaînes (dans Gestion chaînes) Affiche toutes les chaînes favorites. ■ Modifier mes chaînest: vous pouvez définir les chaînes sélectionnées dans le groupe Mes chaînes souhaité. ✎Le symbole “*” s’affiche et la chaîne est définie en tant que Ma chaîne. 1. Sélectionnez une chaîne et appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS. 2. Ajoutez ou supprimez une chaîne dans les groupes Ma chaîne de votre choix : 1, 2, 3 ou 4. x Vous pouvez sélectionner un ou plusieurs groupes. 3. Après avoir modifié les réglages, vous pouvez afficher la liste des chaînes de chaque groupe dans Mes chaînes. Liste des chaînes Vous pouvez afficher toutes les chaînes recherchées. Menu Canal ¦ Nouvelle syntonisation des chaînes Antenne (Hertzien / Câble) Avant que votre téléviseur ne puisse commencer à mémoriser les chaînes disponibles, vous devez spécifier le type de la source du signal reliée au téléviseur (c’est-à-dire : soit une antenne, soit le câble). Pays L’écran de saisie du code PIN apparaît. Entrez votre code PIN à quatre chiffres. ■ Chaîne numérique: permet de changer de pays pour les chaînes numériques. ■ Chaîne analogique: permet de changer de pays pour les chaînes analogiques. Mémorisation Auto Recherche automatiquement une chaîne et la mémorise dans le téléviseur. ✎Il est possible que les numéros de programme attribués automatiquement ne correspondent pas aux numéros de programme souhaités ou réels. Si une chaîne est verrouillée par la fonction Verrouillage Parental, la fenêtre de saisie du code PIN s’affiche. ■ Antennes (Hertzien / Câble): sélectionnez la source d’antenne à mémoriser. ■ Source des chaînes (Numér. et Anal. / Numérique / Analogique): Sélectionnez la source des chaînes à mémoriser. Lors de la sélection de Câble → Numér. et Anal. ou Numérique : fournissez une valeur à rechercher pour les chaînes câblées. Mode de rech. (Complet / Réseau / Rapide): recherche toutes les chaînes avec des stations de diffusion actives et les enregistre dans la mémoire du téléviseur. ✎ Si vous sélectionnez Rapide, vous pouvez définir Réseau , ID réseau , Fréquence , Modulation et Taux de symbole manuellement en appuyant sur le bouton de la télécommande. Réseau (Auto. / Manuel): sélectionnez le mode de réglage ID réseau Auto ou Manuel. ID réseau: si Réseau est défini sur Manuel, vous pouvez configurer un ID réseau à l’aide des boutons numériques. Fréquence: affiche la fréquence correspondant à la chaîne (varie d’un pays à l’autre) Modulation: affiche les valeurs de modulation disponibles. Taux de symbole: affiche les taux de symboles disponibles. Mémorisation Manuelle Recherche manuellement une chaîne et la mémorise dans le téléviseur. ✎Si une chaîne est verrouillée par la fonction Verrouillage Parental, la fenêtre de saisie du code PIN s’affiche. ■ Chaîne numérique: Au terme de la recherche, les chaînes de la liste sont mises à jour. ✎ Lors de la sélection de Antenne → Hertzien : Chaîne, Fréquence, Bande passante ✎ Lors de la sélection de Antenne → Câble : Fréquence, Modulation, Taux de symbole ■ Chaîne analogique (Programme, Système de Couleur, Système Sonore, Canal, Rechercher): si aucun son ne sort ou si le son produit est anormal, sélectionnez de nouveau la norme son requise. CH LIST c1 1futech 2 * 24ore.tv 15 abc1 3 BBC World 23 bid-up.tv 33 Boonerang 32 Cartoon Nwk 5 Class News 4 \ Coming Soon 27 Discovery r Air Antenne B Zoom Sélectionner Tri des canaux k Page TOutils Chaînes Modifier mes chaînes Verrouil. Rappel progr. Modif. num. chaîne Supprimer Sélectionner tout ▼ Tous TV Radio Donn/autre Analogique [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 13 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:3014 Français Fonctions de base ✎Mode Canal x P (Mode Programme) : à la fin du réglage, des numéros de position compris entre P0 et P99 sont attribués aux stations de radiodiffusion de votre région. Dans ce mode, vous pouvez sélectionner un chaîne en saisissant son numéro de position. x C (antenne) / S (câble) : ces deux modes vous permettent de sélectionner une chaîne en entrant le numéro affecté à chaque station de radiodiffusion (antenne) ou canal (câble). Edition des chaînes Menu d’options Gestion chaînes (dans Gestion chaînes) 1. Sélectionnez une chaîne et appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS. 2. Modifiez le nom ou le numéro de la chaîne à l’aide du menu Modifi. nom de chaîne ou Modif. num. chaîne. ■ Modifi. nom de chaîne (chaînes analogiques uniquement): attribuez votre propre nom à la chaîne. ■ Modif. num. chaîne (chaînes numériques uniquement): Modifiez le numéro en appuyez sur les boutons du numéro souhaité. ¦ Autres fonctionnalités Option de rech. de câble (en fonction du pays) Définit des options de recherche supplémentaires, telles que la fréquence et le taux de symbole pour une recherche sur un réseau câblé. ■ Fréq. début / Fréq. fin: définit la fréquence de début ou de fin (différente dans chaque pays). ■ Taux de symbole: affiche les taux de symboles disponibles. ■ Modulation: affiche les valeurs de modulation disponibles. Gestion chaînes Menu d’options Gestion chaînes Définissez chaque chaîne à l’aide des options du menu Gestion chaînes (Verrouil. / Déverr., Rappel progr., Tri des canaux, Supprimer, Sélectionner tout / Désélectionner tout). Les options de menu peuvent varier selon l’état de la chaîne. 1. Sélectionnez une chaîne et appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS. 2. Sélectionnez une fonction et modifiez ses réglages. ■ Lock / Unlock: verrouillez une chaîne afin qu’elle ne puisse pas être sélectionnée ni visualisée. ✎REMARQUE x Cette fonction n’est disponible que si l’option Verrouillage Parental est définie sur Activé x L’écran de saisie du code PIN apparaît. Entrez votre code PIN à quatre chiffres. Le code PIN par défaut est “ 0-0-0-0 ”. Modifiez le code PIN à l’aide de l’option Modifier PIN. ■ Rappel progr.: vous pouvez programmer l’affichage automatique d’une chaîne déterminée à l’heure prévue. Avant d’utiliser cette fonction, vous devez régler l’heure. ✎ Lorsqu’une chaîne numérique est sélectionnée, appuyez sur le bouton ► pour afficher le programme numérique. ■ Tri des canaux: (analogue channels only): cette opération vous permet de changer les numéros de programme des chaînes mémorisées. Cela peut s’avérer nécessaire après avoir utilisé la mémorisation automatique. ■ Supprimer: Vous pouvez supprimer une chaîne afin d’afficher les chaînes de votre choix. ■ Sélectionner tout / Désélectionner tout: permet de sélectionner toutes les chaînes ou de désélectionner celles sélectionnées dans le gestionnaire de chaînes. Transfert liste chaînes L’écran de saisie du code PIN apparaît. Entrez votre code PIN à quatre chiffres. Importe ou exporte la carte des chaînes. Vous devez connecter un périphérique de stockage USB pour utiliser cette fonction. ■ Importer depuis le périphérique USB: permet d’importer une liste de chaînes depuis un périphérique USB. ■ Exporter vers le périphérique USB: permet d’exporter une liste de chaînes vers un périphérique USB. Cette fonction est disponible lorsqu’un périphérique USB est connecté. Programmé (dans Gestion chaînes) Vous pouvez voir, modifier ou supprimer une émission que vous avez réservée. ■ Infos modif. : modifiez une émission que vous avez réservée. ■ Annuler progr.: annulez une émission que vous avez réservée. ■ Information: permet d’afficher les informations relatives à une émission que vous avez réservée (et d’en modifier les informations de réservation). ■ Sélectionner tout / Désélectionner tout: permet de sélectionner ou de désélectionner tous les programmes réservés. Réglage fin (chaînes analogiques uniquement) Si le signal est faible ou déformé, vous pouvez effectuer manuellement un réglage fin du canal. ✎Les chaînes finement réglées sont marquées par un astérisque “*”. ✎Pour réinitialiser le réglage précis, sélectionnez Réinit.. [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 14 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:31Français 15 03 Fonctions de base Menu Image ¦ Changement du mode Image prédéfinie Mode Sélectionnez le type d’image que vous préférez. ■ Dynamique : adapté à un environnement lumineux. ■ Standard : adapté à un environnement normal. ■ Cinéma: convient au visionnage de films dans une pièce sombre. ¦ Réglage des paramètres de l’image Rétroéclairage / Contraste / Luminosité / Netteté / Couleur / Teinte (V/R) Votre téléviseur dispose de plusieurs options de réglage pour le contrôle de la qualité d’image. ✎REMARQUE x Dans les modes TV , Ext. , AV du système PAL, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser la fonction Teinte (V/R). x En mode PC, vous ne pouvez modifier que les options Rétroéclairage, Contraste et Luminosité. x Les paramètres peuvent être réglés et mémorisés pour chaque dispositif externe connecté au téléviseur. ¦ Solutions économiques Solution Eco ■ Mode éco. (Arrêt / Bas / Moyen / Elevé / Image désactivée / Auto.)t: Cette fonction permet de régler la luminosité du téléviseur afin de réduire la consommation. Si vous sélectionnez Image désactivée, l’écran est éteint, mais le son reste activé. Appuyez de nouveau sur n’importe quel bouton pour rallumer l’écran. ■ Veille si aucun signal (Arrêt / 15 min / 30 min / 60 min) : Pour éviter toute consommation d’énergie inutile, définissez la durée d’activation du téléviseur lorsqu’il ne reçoit pas de signal. ✎ Il est désactivé lorsque le PC est en mode d’économie d’énergie. ¦ Modification des options d’image Paramètres avancés (Disponible en mode Standard / Cinéma) Vous pouvez régler les paramètres avancés de votre écran, notamment la couleur et le contraste. ✎En mode PC, vous ne pouvez modifier que les options Contraste Dynamique, Gamma et Balance blancs. ■ Nuance de noir (Arrêt / Sombre / Plus sombre / Le plus sombre) : sélectionnez le niveau de noir afin de régler la profondeur d’écran. ■ Contraste Dynamique (Arrêt / Bas / Moyen / Elevé) : permet de régler le contraste de l’écran. ■ Réglage Luminosité (-2~+2): permet d’augmenter la luminosité des images sombres. ■ Gamma : permet de régler l’intensité des couleurs primaires. ■ RVB uniquement (Arrêt / Rouge / Vert / Bleu) : vous pouvez régler la Couleur ou la Teinte (V/R) du Rouge, Vert ou Bleu pour l’image d’un dispositif externe (lecteur DVD, système home cinéma, etc.). ■ Espace de couleur (Auto. / Natif) : permet de régler la gamme des couleurs disponibles pour créer l’image. ■ Balance blancs : permet de régler la température des couleurs pour que l’image soit plus naturelle. Aj. Rouge / Aj. Vert / Aj. Bleu: permet de régler la profondeur de chaque couleur (rouge, vert, bleu). Régl. Rouge / Régl. vert / Régl. bleu: permet de régler la luminosité de chaque couleur (rouge, vert, bleu). Réinit.: rétablit les paramètres Balance blancs par défaut. ■ Carnation : Accentue la rougeur de la carnation. ■ Netteté des contours (Arrêt / Activé): fait ressortir les contours des objets. P.MODE Paramètres avancés Nuance de noir : Arrêt ► Contraste Dynamique : Moyen Réglage Luminosité : -2 Gamma : 0 RVB uniquement : Arrêt Espace de couleur : Natif Balance blancs ▼ U Déplacer E Entrer R Retour [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 15 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:3116 Français Fonctions de base Options d’image ✎En mode PC, vous pouvez uniquement apporter des modifications aux options Nuance Coul., Taille et Temps protection auto. ■ Nuance Coul. (Froide / Normal / Chaude1 / Chaude2) ✎ Les optionsChaude1 ou Chaude2 sont désactivées avec le mode d’image Dynamique. ✎ Les paramètres peuvent être réglés et mémorisés pour chaque dispositif externe connecté à une entrée du téléviseur. ■ Taille: il se peut que votre décodeur câble / récepteur satellite dispose de son propre jeu de tailles d’écran. Il est toutefois vivement conseillé d’utiliser le mode 16:9. 16:9 Auto: Règle automatiquement la taille de l’image au format 16:9. 16:9 : règle la taille de l’image sur 16:9 de façon appropriée pour les DVD ou la diffusion au format cinémascope. Zoom large: Agrandit l’image à une taille supérieure à 4:3. ✎ Réglez la Position à l’aide des boutons ▲ et ▼. Zoom: Agrandit les images en 16:9 dans le sens vertical pour l’adapter à la taille de l’écran. ✎ réglez la Position ou la Taille à l’aide des boutons ▲, ▼. 4:3 : Paramètre par défaut pour un film cinéma ou la diffusion normale. ✎ Ne regardez pas un film au format 4:3 pendant une période prolongée. Les traces de bordures situées sur la gauche, sur la droite et au centre de l’écran peuvent donner lieu au phénomène de rémanence (brûlure d’écran) non couvert par la garantie. Adapter à l’écran: Affiche l’intégralité de l’image sans coupure lors de l’entrée de signaux HDMI (720p / 1080i / 1080p) ou Composant (1080i / 1080p). ✎REMARQUE x Les options de taille de l’image peuvent varier en fonction de la source d’entrée. x Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction du mode sélectionné. x En mode PC, seuls les modes 16:9 et 4:3 peuvent être réglés. x Les paramètres peuvent être réglés et mémorisés pour chaque dispositif externe connecté à une entrée du téléviseur. x Après avoir sélectionné l’option Adapter à écran en mode HDMI (1080i / 1080p) ou Composant (1080i / 1080p): réglez la Position ou la Taille à l’aide des boutons ▲, ▼, ◄, ►. x Si vous utilisez la fonction Adapter à écran avec l’entrée HDMI 720p, une ligne sera coupée en haut, en bas, à gauche et à droite, comme c’est le cas avec la fonction Overscan. ■ Mode écran (16:9 / Zoom large / Zoom / 4:3): disponible uniquement lorsque la taille d’image est définie sur 16:9 Auto. Vous pouvez déterminer la taille d’image souhaitée sur 4:3 WSS (Wide Screen Service) ou sur la taille d’origine. Chaque pays européen requiert une taille d’image différente. ✎ Non disponible en mode PC, Composant et HDMI. ■ Filtre Bruit num. (Arrêt / Bas / Moyen / Elevé / Auto. / Visualisation Auto.): lorsque le signal de diffusion est faible, des bruits parasites ou une impression fantôme peuvent apparaître. Sélectionnez l’une des options jusqu’à l’obtention d’une image de qualité optimale. Visualisation Auto. : permet, lors de la modification de chaînes analogiques, d’afficher l’intensité du signal en cours et de définir le filtre de bruit de l’écran. ✎ Disponible uniquement pour les chaînes analogiques. ■ Filtre Bruit MPEG (Arrêt / Bas / Moyen / Elevé / Auto.): réduit le bruit MPEG afin d’offrir une meilleure qualité d’image. ■ Niv. noir HDMI (Normal / Bas): permet de choisir le niveau de noir pour régler la profondeur de l’écran. ✎ Disponible uniquement en mode HDMI (signaux RVB). ■ Mode Film (Arrêt / Auto.1 / Auto.2): règle le téléviseur de sorte qu’il détecte et traite automatiquement les signaux de cinéma en provenance de toutes les sources et adapte l’image afin d’obtenir une qualité optimale. ✎ Disponible en modes TV, AV, COMPOSANT (480i / 1080i) et HDMI (480i / 1080i). ■ Temps protection auto (2 heures / 4 heures / 8 heures / 10 heures / Arrêt): Si l’écran est inutilisé et affiche une image fixe pendant un certain temps défini par l’utilisateur, l’économiseur d’écran est activé de manière à prévenir la formation d’images parasites sur l’écran. P.SIZE Options d’image Nuance Coul. : Normal ► Taille : 16/9 auto Mode écran : 16:9 Filtre Bruit num. : Auto. Filtre Bruit MPEG : Auto. Niv. noir HDMI : Normal Mode Film : Arrêt ▼ U Déplacer E Entrer R Retour [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 16 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:32Français 17 03 Fonctions de base Réinitialisation de l’image (OK / Annuler) Rétablit les paramètres par défaut du mode d’image actuel. ¦ Configuration du téléviseur avec le PC Réglez le mode d’entrée sur PC. Cette option permet de régler les positions/valeurs de fréquence et Réglage automatiquet d’affiner automatiquement les paramètres. ✎Non disponible en cas de connexion à l’aide d’un câble HDMI/DVI. Ecran ■ Régl. Base / Regl. Préc : élimine ou réduit les parasites visuels. Si vous ne pouvez pas éliminer ces parasites au moyen d’un réglage précis uniquement, réglez la fréquence (Régl. Base) au mieux, puis effectuez de nouveau un réglage précis. Une fois les parasites réduits, effectuez un nouveau réglage de l’image pour l’aligner au centre de l’écran. ■ Position : réglez la position de l’écran du PC à l’aide des boutons directionnels (▲ / ▼ / ◄ / ►). ■ Réinitialiser Image : Rétablit les valeurs par défaut de l’image. Utilisation de votre téléviseur comme écran d’ordinateur (PC) Configuration de votre logiciel PC (instructions basées sur Windows XP) En fonction de la version de Windows et de la carte vidéo, il se peut que les écrans de votre PC présentent un aspect différent. Dans ce cas, les mêmes informations de paramétrage de base seront presque toujours d’application. (Dans le cas contraire, contactez le fabricant de votre ordinateur ou votre revendeur Samsung). 1. Cliquez sur “Panneau de configuration” dans le menu Démarrer de Windows. 2. Cliquez sur “Apparence et thèmes” dans le “Panneau de configuration” et une boîte de dialogue apparaît. 3. Cliquez sur “Affichage” et une boîte de dialogue apparaît. 4. Naviguez vers l’onglet “Paramètres” dans la boîte de dialogue. y Réglage correct de la taille (résolution) [Optimal : 1920 x 1080 pixels] y S’il existe une option de fréquence verticale dans votre boîte de dialogue des paramètres d’affichage, la valeur correcte est “60” ou “60 Hz”. Sinon, cliquez sur “OK” et quittez la boîte de dialogue. Menu Son ¦ Changement du mode Son prédéfini Mode ■ Standard : sélectionne le mode son normal. ■ Musique : accentue la musique par rapport aux voix. ■ Cinéma: offre le meilleur son pour les films. ■ Voix claire : accentue les voix par rapport aux autres sons. ■ Amplifier : augmente l’intensité du son aigu pour garantir une meilleure écoute aux personnes malentendantes. ¦ Réglage des paramètres sonores Egaliseur Cette fonction permet de régler le mode de son (mode de son standard uniquement). ■ Balance G/D: règle la balance entre les haut-parleurs droit et gauche. ■ 100Hz / 300Hz / 1kHz / 3kHz / 10kHz (Réglage de la bande passante) : permet de régler le niveau de fréquence de la bande passante. ■ Réinit.: rétablit les paramètres par défaut de l’égaliseur. ¦ Systèmes sonores, etc. Virtual Surround (Arrêt / Activé) (mode de son standard uniquement) Cette fonction garantit un son surround virtuel 5.1 canaux par le biais de deux haut-parleurs ou d’un casque grâce à la technologie HRTF (Head Related Transfer Function - Fonction de transfert asservie aux mouvements de la tête). Clarté Dialogues (Arrêt / Activé) (mode de son standard uniquement) Cette fonction permet d’accentuer l’intensité d’une voix par rapport au fond musical ou aux effets sonores, de manière à rendre les dialogues plus clairs. S.MODE [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 17 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:3218 Français Fonctions de base Langue audio (chaînes numériques uniquement) Permet de modifier la valeur par défaut des langues audio. ✎La langue disponible peut varier en fonction de l’émission. Format Audio (chaînes numériques uniquement) Lorsque le son est émis à la fois par le haut-parleur principal et le récepteur audio, un effet d’écho peut se produire en raison de la différence de vitesse de décodage entre le haut-parleur principal et le récepteur audio. Dans ce cas, utilisez la fonction Haut-parleur TV. ✎Format Audio peut varier en fonction de la diffusion. Le son Dolby Digital 5.1 est disponible uniquement en cas de connexion d’un haut parleur externe au moyen d’un câble optique. Description audio (non disponible dans tous les pays) (chaînes numériques uniquement) Cette fonction traite le flux audio relatif à la Description audio AD qui est envoyé avec le son principal par le radiodiffuseur. ■ Description audio (Arrêt / Activé): active ou désactive la fonction de description audio. ■ Volume : permet de régler le volume de description audio. Volume auto (Arrêt / Normal / Nuit) Pour équilibrer le niveau de volume sur chaque canal, définissez cette option sur Normal. ■ Nuit : ce mode propose un meilleur son que celui du mode Normal, ne faisant presque aucun bruit. Il s’avère particulièrement utile pendant la nuit. Sélection Haut-parleur (Ht-parl ext / Haut-parleur TV) Un effet d’écho peut se produire en raison de la différence de vitesse de décodage entre le haut-parleur principal et le récepteur audio. Dans ce cas, réglez le téléviseur sur Ht-parl ext. ✎Lorsque Sélection Haut-parleur est défini sur Ht-parl ext, les boutons MUTE et du volume ne fonctionnent pas et les paramètres sonores sont limités. ✎Lorsque Sélection Haut-parleur est défini sur Ht-parl ext. x Haut-parleur TV: Arrêt, Ht-parl ext : Activé ✎Lorsque Sélection Haut-parleur est défini sur Haut-parleur TV. x Haut-parleur TV: Activé, Ht-parl ext : Activé ✎En l’absence de signal vidéo, les deux haut-parleurs sont coupés. Paramètre supp. (chaînes numériques uniquement) ■ Niveau Audio DTV (MPEG / HE-AAC): cette fonction vous permet de réduire la disparité d’un signal vocal (à savoir l’un des signaux reçus lors d’une émission de télévision numérique) sur le niveau souhaité. ✎ En fonction du type de signal de radiodiffusion, les options MPEG / HE-AAC peuvent être réglées sur une valeur comprise entre -10 dB et 0 dB. ✎ Pour augmenter ou diminuer le volume, réglez ces valeurs entre 0 et -10, respectivement. ■ Sortie SPDIF: SPDIF (Sony Philips Digital InterFace) permet d’offrir un son numérique et de réduire ainsi les interférences vers les haut-parleurs et divers périphériques numériques tels qu’un lecteur DVD. Format Audio : Lors de la réception d’un programme TV numérique, vous pouvez sélectionner le format de sortie audio numérique (SPDIF) à partir des options PCM ou Dolby Digital. ✎ La connexion de haut-parleurs 5.1 canaux dans un environnement Dolby Digital vous permet d’optimiser votre environnement sonore 3D interactif. Retard Audio : cette option permet de corriger le décalage audio/vidéo lorsque vous regardez la télévision ou une vidéo et diffusez la sortie audio numérique sur un dispositif externe tel qu’un récepteur AV. ■ Comp Dolby Digital (Line / RF): cette fonction réduit la disparité entre un signal Dolby Digital et un signal vocal (à savoir, Audio MPEG, HE-AAC, Son ATV). ✎ Sélectionnez Line pour obtenir un son dynamique et RF pour réduire la différence entre les sons forts et faibles pendant la nuit. Line : permet de définir le niveau de sortie des signaux supérieurs ou inférieurs à -31 dB (référence) sur -20 dB ou -31 dB. RF : permet de définir le niveau de sortie des signaux supérieurs ou inférieurs à -20 dB (référence) sur -10 dB ou -20 dB. AD [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 18 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:33Français 19 03 Fonctions de base Réinitialisation du son (OK / Annuler) Cette fonction permet de rétablir tous les paramètres sonores par défaut. ¦ Sélection du mode Son Lorsque vous définissez Dual f-g, le mode Son actuel est affiché à l’écran. Type d’audio Daul f-g Par défaut Stéréo A2 Mono Mono Changement Stéréo Stéréo  Mono automatique Dual Daul f  Daul g Daul f NICAM stéréo Mono Mono Changement Stéréo Mono  Stéréo automatique Dual Mono  Daul f  Daul g  Daul f ✎Si le signal stéréo est faible et qu’une commutation automatique se produit, passez alors en Mono. ✎Cette fonction n’est activée qu’avec un signal sonore stéréo. ✎Disponible uniquement lorsque la source Entrée est définie sur TV. Menu Configuration ¦ Réglage de l’heure Heure ■ Horloge : le réglage de l’heure est nécessaire pour utiliser différentes fonctions de minuterie du téléviseur. O L’heure actuelle s’affiche à chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le bouton INFO. ✎ Si vous débranchez le cordon d’alimentation, vous devez régler de nouveau l’horloge. Mode Horloge (Auto. / Manuel) ✎ En fonction du signal et de la station de diffusion, il se peut que la configuration automatique de l’heure soit incorrecte. Dans ce cas, réglez l’heure manuellement. ✎ L’antenne doit être connectée pour permettre le réglage automatique de l’heure. Réglage Horloge: Définissez manuellement les paramètres Jour, Mois, Année, Heure et Minute. ✎ Disponible uniquement lorsque l’option Mode Horloge est définie sur Manuel. Fuseau Horaire (en fonction du pays): Sélectionnez votre fuseau horaire. ✎ Cette fonction est disponible lorsque l’option Pays est définie sur Autres. ✎ Cette fonction n’est disponible que si l’option Mode Horloge est définie sur Auto. ¦ Utilisation de la veille ■ Veillet: éteint automatiquement le téléviseur après une période déterminée (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 ou 180 minutes). ✎ Pour annuler la fonction Veille, sélectionnez Arrêt. ¦ Réglage de la minuterie de mise en marche / arrêt ■ Minuteur 1 / Minuteur 2 / Minuteur 3 : vous pouvez définir trois réglages de mise en marche/arrêt différents. Vous devez, au préalable, régler l’horloge. Période d’activation / Période de désactivation: sélectionnez l’heure, les minutes et l’action Activer/Désactiver. (Pour activer le minuteur selon les réglages définis, choisissez Activer.) Volume : permet de sélectionner le volume désiré. Source: sélectionnez le contenu TV ou USB à lire lors de la mise sous tension automatique du téléviseur. (L’option USB peut uniquement être sélectionnée lorsqu’un périphérique USB est connecté au téléviseur.) Antenne (lorsque Source est réglé sur TV): sélectionnez ATV ou DTV. Canal (lorsque Source est réglé sur TV): sélectionnez la chaîne de votre choix. Contenu (lorsque Source est réglé sur USB) : permet de sélectionner un dossier du périphérique USB contenant les fichiers de musique ou les images devant être lus lorsque le téléviseur s’allume automatiquement. ✎ REMARQUE x Si le périphérique USB ne contient aucun fichier audio ou si le dossier contenant un fichier audio n’est pas sélectionné, la fonction de veille ne fonctionne pas correctement. x Si le périphérique USB ne contient qu’un seul fichier photo, la fonction de diaporama ne démarre pas. x Les dossiers dont le nom est trop long ne peuvent pas être sélectionnés. x Chaque périphérique USB utilisé se voit attribuer son propre dossier. Si vous utilisez plusieurs périphériques USB du même type, assurez-vous que les dossiers affectés à chacun d’eux portent des noms différents. DUAL 10 TV ATV 1 00 00 ▲ ▼ 00 00 Minuteur 1 Période d’activation Période de désactivation Volume Désactiver Désactiver Dim Lun Mar Mer Jeu Ven Sam Une fois Source Antenne Canal Répétition L Déplacer U Régler E Entrer R Retour [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 19 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:3420 Français Fonctions de base Répétition: Sélectionnez Une fois, Quotid., Lun~Ven, Lun~Sam, Sam~Dim ou Manuel. Si vous sélectionnez Manuel, vous pouvez choisir le jour d’activation de la minuterie. ✎ La marque c indique le jour sélectionné. ✎Mise hors tension auto. (disponible uniquement lorsque le téléviseur est allumé par le minuteur) : le téléviseur est mis hors tension automatiquement après trois heures d’inactivité pour éviter toute surchauffe. ¦ Verrouillage des programmes Sécurité ✎L’écran de saisie du code PIN s’affiche avant l’écran de configuration. ✎Entrez votre code PIN à quatre chiffres. Le code PIN par défaut est “ 0-0-0-0 “. Modifiez le code PIN à l’aide de l’option Modifier PIN. ■ Verrouillage Parental (Arrêt / Activé): Vous pouvez verrouiller des chaînes dans la fonction Gestion chaînes afin d’empêcher certains utilisateurs, tels que des enfants, de regarder des émissions qui ne leur sont pas destinées. ✎ Disponible uniquement lorsque la source Entrée est définie sur TV. ■ Verrouillage parental (en fonction du pays): Cette fonction permet d’empêcher certains utilisateurs, tels que des enfants, de regarder des émissions qui ne leur sont pas destinées, à l’aide d’un code PIN à 4 chiffres défini par l’utilisateur. Si la chaîne sélectionnée est verrouillée, le symbole “\” apparaît. Autor.tout: déverrouille toutes les évaluations TV (fonction non prise en charge en France). ✎ Lorsque la fonction Verrouillage parental est définie sur 18, l’écran de saisie du code PIN s’affiche avant chaque changement de chaîne (France uniquement). ✎ Vous pouvez bloquer certaines émissions TV en fonction des évaluations sous Verrouillage parental: (enfants), T (tout public), SC (non classé) et X (classé X). Lorsque la fonction Verrouillage parental est définie sur X, l’écran de saisie du code PIN s’affiche toujours avant chaque changement de chaîne (Espagne uniquement). ■ Modifier PIN : permet de modifier le code personnel demandé pour pouvoir configurer le téléviseur. ✎ Si vous avez oublié ce code, appuyez sur les boutons de la télécommande dans l’ordre suivant, ce qui remet le code à 0-0-0-0 : POWER (Arrêt) → MUTE → 8 → 2 → 4 → POWER (Activé). ¦ Autres fonctionnalités Langue ■ Langue des menus: définissez la langue des menus. ■ Langue du télétexte: sélectionnez la langue de votre choix pour le télétexte. ✎ L’anglais est utilisé par défaut si la langue sélectionnée n’est pas diffusée. ■ Préférence (Langue Audio principale / Langue Audio secondaire / Langue princ. sous-titres / Langue sec. sous-titres / Langue Télétexte principale / Langue Télétexte secondaire): sélectionnez la langue qui sera utilisée par défaut lors de la sélection d’une chaîne. Sous-titres Utilisez ce menu pour définir le mode Sous-titres. ■ Sous-titres (Arrêt / Activé): active ou désactive les sous-titres. ■ Mode (Normal / Malentendant): configure le mode des sous-titres. ■ Langue des sous-titres: définit la langue des sous-titres. ✎ Si le programme visionné ne prend pas en charge la fonction Malentendant, le mode Normal est automatiquement activé, même si le mode Malentendant est sélectionné. ✎ L’anglais est utilisé par défaut si la langue sélectionnée n’est pas diffusée. Texte numérique (Désactiver / Activer) (Royaume-Uni uniquement) Si le programme diffuse du texte numérique, cette fonction est activée. Service données auto (Arrêt / Activé) Indique s’il convient ou non d’exécuter automatiquement le service de données. Service données auto exécute automatiquement le service de données sans intervention de l’utilisateur. ✎Si une autre fonction secondaire est en cours, Service données auto risque de ne pas fonctionner. Général ■ Mode Jeu (Arrêt / Activé): En reliant le téléviseur à une console de jeu telle que PlayStation™ ou Xbox™, vous pouvez profiter d’une expérience de jeu plus réaliste en sélectionnant le mode de jeu. SUBT. [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 20 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:34Français 21 03 Fonctions de base ✎REMARQUE x Précautions et limitations pour le mode de jeu. – Pour déconnecter la console de jeux et connecter un autre périphérique externe, définissez Mode Jeu sur Arrêt dans le menu de configuration. – Si vous affichez le menu du téléviseur en Mode Jeu, l’écran tremble légèrement. x L’option Mode Jeu est disponible lorsque la source d’entrée est réglée sur TV ou PC. x Après avoir connecté la console de jeu, définissez Mode Jeu sur Activé. Malheureusement, il se peut que la qualité d’image soit moins bonne. x Si le Mode Jeu est défini sur Activé: – Le mode Image est défini sur Standard et le mode Son est défini sur Cinéma. – L’Egaliseur n’est pas disponible. ■ Transparence menu (Lumineux / Sombre): permet de définir la transparence du menu. ■ Mélodie (Arrêt / Bas / Moyen / Elevé): cette option permet de définir la lecture d’une mélodie lors de la mise en marche ou l’arrêt du téléviseur. Interface commune ■ CI Menu: permet à l’utilisateur d’opérer une sélection dans le menu du module CAM. Sélectionnez le CI Menu en fonction du menu Carte PC. ■ Infos sur l’application: affiche des informations sur le module CAM inséré dans l’emplacement CI et sur la “CARTE CI ou CI+” insérée dans le module CAM. Vous pouvez installer le module CAM, que le téléviseur soit allumé ou éteint. 1. Vous pouvez acheter un module CI CAM chez le revendeur le plus proche ou le commander par téléphone. 2. Insérez fermement la “CARTE CI ou CI+” dans le module CAM en suivant le sens de la flèche. 3. Insérez le module CAM avec la “CARTE CI ou CI+” dans la fente de l’interface commune (dans le sens de la flèche), de telle sorte qu’il soit aligné parallèlement à la fente. 4. Vérifiez si une image est visible sur une chaîne à signal brouillé. ¦ Image dans l’image (PIP) Vous pouvez regarder simultanément le tuner TV et une source PIP t vidéo externe. PIP (Picture-in-Picture) ne fonctionne pas dans le même mode. ✎REMARQUE x Pour le son PIP, reportez-vous à Sélection du son. x Si vous éteignez le téléviseur alors que le mode PIP est activé, la fenêtre PIP disparaît. x Il est possible que l’image affichée dans la fenêtre PIP semble légèrement moins naturelle lorsque vous utilisez l’écran principal pour un jeu ou un karaoké. x Réglages PIP Image principale Image secondaire Composant, HDMI1/DVI, HDMI2, HDMI3, HDMI4, PC TV ■ PIP (Arrêt / Activé): active ou désactive la fonction PIP. ■ Canal: permet de choisir la chaîne affichée dans l’écran secondaire. ■ Taille (Õ/Ã): permet de sélectionner une taille pour l’image secondaire. ■ Position (Ã/–/—/œ): permet de sélectionner une position pour l’image secondaire. ■ Sélection du son (Principal / Secondaire): vous pouvez sélectionner le mode audio de votre choix (Principal / Secondaire) en mode PIP. Menu Assistance Diagnostic automatique ✎Le diagnostic automatique peut prendre quelques minutes ; ce phénomène est normal. ■ Test de l’image (Oui / Non): utilisez cette option pour rechercher d’éventuels problèmes d’image. ■ Test du son (Oui / Non): utilisez la mélodie intégrée pour rechercher d’éventuels problèmes sonores. ✎ Si les haut-parleurs du téléviseur restent muets, avant d’effectuer le test du son, vérifiez que l’option Sélection Haut-parleur est réglée sur Haut-parleur TV dans le menu Son. ✎ La mélodie est diffusée pendant le test, même si l’option Sélection Haut-parleur est réglée sur Ht-parl ext ou si le son a été désactivé en appuyant sur le bouton MUTE. ■ Informations de signal (chaînes numériques uniquement) : la qualité de réception des chaînes HDTV est parfaite ou les chaînes sont indisponibles. Réglez votre antenne afin d’augmenter l’intensité du signal. ■ Résolution des problèmes: consultez cette description s’il vous semble que le téléviseur rencontre un problème. ✎ Si aucun des conseils de dépannage ne s’applique au problème rencontré, contactez le service clientèle de Samsung. [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 21 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:3522 Français Fonctions de base Mise à niveau du logiciel Mise à niveau du logiciel peut être effectuée via un signal diffusé ou en téléchargeant le dernier micrologiciel depuis le site “www. samsung.com” vers une unité de stockage USB. Version actuelle le logiciel déjà installé sur le téléviseur. ✎Le numéro de version est affiché au format suivant : “année/ mois/jour_version”. Installation de la dernière version ■ USB : insérez dans le téléviseur un lecteur USB contenant la mise à niveau du micrologiciel, téléchargée depuis le site “www.samsung. com”. Veillez à ne pas couper l’alimentation ni retirer le lecteur USB pendant l’application des mises à niveau. Une fois la mise à niveau du microprogramme terminée, le téléviseur se met automatiquement hors tension, puis se rallume. Lorsque la mise à niveau du logiciel est terminée, les paramètres vidéo et audio par défaut sont réinitialisés. Nous vous recommandons de noter vos réglages pour les rétablir facilement après la mise à niveau. ■ Canal: met à niveau le logiciel en utilisant le signal de radiodiffusion. ✎ Si la fonction est sélectionnée pendant la période de transmission du logiciel, ce dernier est automatiquement recherché et téléchargé. ✎ Le temps nécessaire au téléchargement du logiciel dépend de l’état du signal. ■ Mise à niveau en mode veille : une mise à niveau manuelle est automatiquement effectuée à l’heure indiquée. Etant donné que la mise sous tension s’effectue de façon interne, il se peut que l’écran LED s’allume légèrement. Le phénomène peut se poursuivre pendant plus d’une heure jusqu’à ce que la mise à jour du logiciel soit terminée. ■ Autre logiciel (sauvegarde): En cas problème avec le nouveau microprogramme (si, par exemple, le téléviseur ne fonctionne plus correctement), vous pouvez revenir à la version précédente. ✎ Si le logiciel a été modifié, la version existante s’affiche. Guide de connexion HD Consultez ces informations lors de la connexion de périphériques externes au téléviseur. Contacter Samsung Consultez ces informations si le téléviseur ne fonctionne pas correctement ou si vous voulez mettre à niveau le logiciel. Vous pouvez trouver des informations concernant nos centres d’appel et la manière de télécharger des produits et logiciels. USB Lecteur USB Panneau arrière du téléviseur Mise à niveau du logiciel USB ► Canal Mise à niveau en mode veille : Arrêt Autre logiciel 2010/01/15_00000 U Déplacer E Entrer R Retour Version actuelle 2010/01/18_000001 [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 22 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:35Français 23 04 Fonctions avancées Fonctions avancées Connexion à un ordinateur Utilisation d’un câble HDMI/DVI / D-Sub Modes d’affichage (Entrées D-Sub et HDMI/DVI) La résolution optimale est de 1920 X 1080 à 60 Hz. Mode Résolution Fréquence horizontale (KHz) Fréquence verticale (Hz) Fréquence d’horloge pixels (MHz) Polarité de synchronisation (H / V) IBM 640 x 350 720 x 400 31.469 31.469 70.086 70.087 25.175 28.322 +/- -/+ MAC 640 x 480 832 x 624 35.000 49.726 66.667 74.551 30.240 57.284 -/- -/- VESA CVT 720 x 576 1280 x 720 35.910 56.456 59.950 74.777 32.750 95.750 -/+ -/+ VESA DMT 640 x 480 640 x 480 640 x 480 800 x 600 800 x 600 800 x 600 1024 x 768 1024 x 768 1024 x 768 1280 x 720 1360 x 768 31.469 37.500 37.861 37.879 46.875 48.077 48.363 56.476 60.023 45.000 47.712 59.940 75.000 72.809 60.317 75.000 72.188 60.004 70.069 75.029 60.000 60.015 25.175 31.500 31.500 40.000 49.500 50.000 65.000 75.000 78.750 74.250 85.500 -/- -/- -/- +/+ +/+ +/+ -/- -/- +/+ +/+ +/+ VESA GTF 1280 x 720 52.500 70.000 89.040 -/+ ✎REMARQUE x Dans le cas d’une connexion avec câble HDMI/DVI, vous devez utiliser la prise HDMI IN 1(DVI). x Le mode entrelacé n’est pas pris en charge. x Le téléviseur peut fonctionner de façon anormale si le format vidéo sélectionné n’est pas standard. x Les modes Séparé et Composite sont pris en charge. Le mode SOG (Sync On Green) n’est pas pris en charge. AUDIO OUT DVI OUT AUDIO OUT PC OUT [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 23 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:3724 Français Fonctions avancées Media Play ¦ Connexion d’un périphérique USB 1. Allumez votre téléviseur. 2. Connectez un périphérique USB contenant des photos, des fi chiers musicaux et/ou des fi lms au port USB (HDD) sur le côté du téléviseur. 3. Lorsqu’un périphérique USB est connecté au téléviseur, une fenêtre contextuelle s’ouvre. Vous pouvez alors sélectionner Media Play. ✎Il se peut que le fonctionnement ne soit pas correct avec des fichiers multimédias sans licence. ✎Liste des choses à connaître avant d’utiliser Media Play (USB) x Le protocole MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) n’est pas pris en charge. x Le système de fichiers prend en charge les formats FAT16, FAT32 et NTFS. x Il est possible que certains types d’appareils photo numériques et de périphériques audio USB ne soient pas compatibles avec ce téléviseur. x Media Play ne prend en charge que les périphériques de stockage de masse USB de la catégorie MSC. Cette dernière est dédiée aux périphériques de transport de masse uniquement. Il s’agit notamment des clés USB, lecteurs de cartes Flash et disques durs USB (les concentrateurs USB ne sont pas pris en charge). Les périphériques doivent être connectés directement au port USB du téléviseur. x Avant de connecter l’appareil au téléviseur, sauvegardez vos fichiers afin d’éviter qu’ils ne soient endommagés ou que des données ne soient perdues. SAMSUNG ne saurait, en aucun cas, être tenue responsable de la perte de données ou de l’endommagement d’un fichier de données. x Connectez un disque dur USB au port dédié, le port USB (HDD). x Ne déconnectez pas le périphérique USB en cours de chargement. x Plus la résolution de l’image est élevée, plus le temps d’affichage à l’écran sera long. x La résolution JPEG maximale prise en charge est de 15 360 x 8 640 pixels. x Pour les fichiers non pris en charge ou endommagés, le message “Format de fichier inconnu” s’affiche. x Si le critère de tri est défini sur Aff. de base, il est possible d’afficher jusqu’à 1 000 fichiers dans chaque dossier. x Les fichiers MP3 avec gestion des droits numériques (DRM) téléchargés à partir d’un site payant ne peuvent pas être lus. La technologie de gestion des droits numériques (DRM) prend en charge la création de contenu, la distribution et la gestion du contenu de manière intégrée et complète (par exemple, la protection des droits et des intérêts des fournisseurs de contenu, la prévention de la copie illégale du contenu), ainsi que la gestion de la facturation et des règlements. x Si plusieurs périphériques PTP sont connectés, vous ne pouvez en utiliser qu’un à la fois. x Si plusieurs périphériques MSC sont connectés, il se peut que certains d’entre eux ne soient pas reconnus. Un périphérique USB nécessitant beaucoup de puissance (plus de 500 mA ou 5 V) ne sera peut-être pas pris en charge. x Si un message d’avertissement de surcharge s’affiche lorsque vous connectez ou utilisez un périphérique USB, il se peut que le périphérique ne soit pas reconnu ou qu’il fonctionne mal. x Si aucune entrée n’a été reçue au cours de la période définie dans le paramètre Temps protection auto, l’économiseur d’écran s’active. x Le mode d’économie d’énergie de certains disques durs externes peut être désactivé automatiquement lors d’une connexion au téléviseur. x Si un câble d’extension USB est utilisé, il se peut que le périphérique USB ne soit pas reconnu ou que les fichiers qui y sont stockés ne soient pas lus. x Si un périphérique USB connecté au téléviseur n’est pas reconnu, si la liste des fichiers qui y sont stockés est corrompue ou si un fichier de la liste est illisible, connectez le périphérique en question à l’ordinateur, formatez le périphérique et vérifiez la connexion. x Si un fichier supprimé depuis le PC apparaît encore lors de l’exécution de Media Play, utilisez la fonction “Vider la Corbeille” du PC pour supprimer définitivement ce fichier. Vous pouvez lire les photos, la musique et/ou les fi lms enregistrés sur un périphérique USB de type MSC et/ou sur votre ordinateur. SUM Changer périph. Affi cher périph. E Entrer R Retour MediaPlay Vidéos MEDIA.P USB Lecteur USB Panneau arrière du téléviseur [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 24 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:38Français 25 04 Fonctions avancées ¦ Affichage Accédez au fichier de votre choix à l’aide des boutons haut/bas/droite/gauche et appuyez ensuite sur le bouton ENTERE ou � (Lecture). La lecture du fichier commence. ✎Prise en charge de Afficher périph. et Accueil dans la page d’accueil Media Play. Vidéos Lecture de vidéo 1. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour sélectionner Vidéos, puis appuyez sur ENTERE dans le menu Media Play. 2. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄/►/▲/▼ pour sélectionner le fichier de votre choix dans la liste des fichiers. 3. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE ou � (Lecture). – Le fichier sélectionné s’affiche en haut de l’écran, avec le temps de lecture. – Si les informations sur la durée de la vidéo sont inconnues, la durée de lecture et la barre de progression ne s’affichent pas. – Pendant la lecture de la vidéo, vous pouvez effectuer une recherche à l’aide des boutons ◄ et ►. ✎Ce mode vous permet d’écouter la bande son d’un jeu vidéo, mais pas de jouer au jeu proprement dit. y Formats de sous-titres pris en charge Nom Extension de fichier Format MPEG-4 time-based text .ttxt XML SAMI .smi HTML SubRip .srt chaînes SubViewer .sub chaînes Micro DVD .sub ou .txt chaînes Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 /Movie 01.avi 1/1 Movie 01.avi SUM Movie 03.avi Movie 05.avi Movie 07.avi Movie 09.avi Movie 02.avi Movie 04.avi Movie 06.avi Movie 08.avi Movie 10.avi Sélectionner Tri T Outils Information: Vous pouvez vérifier le nom du fichier sélectionné, le nombre de fichiers, ainsi que la page. Section Liste de tri: Affiche l’ordre de tri standard. ✎ Cet ordre de tri varie en fonction du contenu. Boutons de fonctionnement Rouge (Changer périph.): permet de sélectionner un appareil connecté. B Vert (Préférence): définit la préférence du fichier (N’est pas pris en charge dans l’affichage de base.) Jaune (Sélectionner): permet de sélectionner plusieurs fichiers dans la liste. Les fichiers sélectionnés sont marqués d’un symbole. Bleu (Tri): permet de sélectionner la liste de tri. TOutils: affiche le menu d’options. ✎ Le bouton � (REW) ou µ (FF) permet d’accéder à la page suivante ou précédente de la liste des fichiers. Section Liste des fichiers: Vous pouvez vérifier les fichiers et groupes classés par catégorie. Vidéos Page Changer périph. Movie 01.avi 00:04:03 / 00:07:38 1/1 SUM E Pause L Passer T Outils R Retour [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 25 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:4026 Français Fonctions avancées y Formats vidéo pris en charge Extension de fichier Conteneur Codec vidéo Résolution Fréquence d’images (i/s) Débit binaire (Mbps) Codec audio *.avi *.mkv AVI MKV Divx 3.11 / 4.x / 5.1 / 6.0 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 8 MP3 / AC3 / LPCM / ADPCM / DTS Core XviD 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 8 H.264 BP / MP / HP 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 25 MPEG4 SP / ASP 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 8 *.asf ASF Divx 3.11 / 4.x / 5.1 / 6.0 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 8 MP3 / AC3 / LPCM / ADPCM / WMA XviD 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 8 H.264 BP / MP / HP 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 25 MPEG4 SP / ASP 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 8 *.wmv ASF Window Media Video v9 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 25 WMA *.mp4 MP4 H.264 BP / MP / HP 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 25 MPEG4 SP / ASP 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 8 MP3 / ADPCM / AAC XVID 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 8 *.3gp 3GPP H.264 BP / MP / HP 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 25 ADPCM / AAC / HE-AAC MPEG4 SP / ASP 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 8 *.vro VRO VOB MPEG1 1920x1080 24 / 25 / 30 30 AC3 / MPEG / LPCM MPEG2 1920x1080 24 / 25 / 30 30 *.mpg *.mpeg PS MPEG1 1920x1080 24 / 25 / 30 30 MPEG2 1920x1080 24 / 25 / 30 30 AC3 / MPEG / LPCM / AAC H.264 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 25 *.ts *.tp *.trp TS MPEG2 1920x1080 24 / 25 / 30 30 AC3 / AAC / MP3 / DD+ / HE-AAC H.264 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 25 VC1 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 25 Autres restrictions ✎ REMARQUE x Si le contenu d’un codec présente un problème, ce dernier ne sera pas pris en charge. x Si les informations concernant un conteneur sont incorrectes et que le fichier présente une erreur, le conteneur ne pourra pas effectuer une lecture correcte. x Le son ou la vidéo peuvent ne pas fonctionner si le contenu a un débit binaire/une fréquence d’images standard supérieur aux taux d’images par seconde repris dans le tableau ci-dessus. x Si une erreur survient dans la table d’index, la fonction de recherche (passer) n’est pas prise en charge. Décodeur vidéo Décodeur audio • Prise en charge jusqu’à la norme H.264, Level 4.1 • Les normes H.264 FMO / ASO / RS, VC1 SP / MP / AP L4 et AVCHD ne sont pas prises en charge. • GMC n’est pas pris en charge. • H.263 n’est pas pris en charge. • Prend en charge jusqu’à WMA 7, 8, 9, STD • WMA 9 PRO ne prend pas en charge l’audio deux canaux, multicanaux ou sans perte. • Le taux d’échantillonnage WMA 22 050 Hz mono n’est pas pris en charge. [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 26 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:40Français 27 04 Fonctions avancées Lecture d’un fichier vidéo en continu (Reprendre la lecture) Si vous quittez la fonction de lecture de vidéos, il est possible de reprendre la lecture ultérieurement, au point où vous l’avez arrêtée. 1. Pour sélectionner le fichier film que vous souhaitez lire en continu, appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► dans la section Liste de fichiers. 2. Appuyez sur le bouton � (Lecture) / ENTERE. 3. Sélectionnez Lecture en continu (Reprendre la lecture) en appuyant sur le bouton bleu. Le film reprend à l’endroit précis où vous aviez arrêté la lecture. ✎ Le bouton bleu est disponible lorsque vous relancez la lecture. ✎ Si la fonction Aide lecture continue a été réglée sur Activé dans le menu Paramètres, un message s’affiche lorsque vous reprenez la lecture d’un fichier vidéo. Musique Lecture de musique 1. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour sélectionner Musique, puis appuyez sur ENTERE dans le menu Media Play. 2. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄/►/▲/▼ pour sélectionner le fichier de votre choix dans la liste des fichiers. 3. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE ou � (Lecture). – Pendant la lecture de la Musique, vous pouvez effectuer une recherche à l’aide des boutons ◄ et ►. – Les boutons � (Retour arrière) et µ (Avance rapide) ne fonctionnent pas durant la lecture. ✎Seuls les fichiers portant les extensions MP3 et PCM sont affichés. Les fichiers portant d’autres extensions ne s’affichent pas, même s’ils sont enregistrés sur le même périphérique USB. ✎Si le son est déformé lors de la lecture de fichiers MP3, réglez l’option Egaliseur dans le menu Son. (Un fichier MP3 surmodulé peut être à l’origine d’un problème sonore.) Photos Visualisation d’une photo (ou d’un diaporama) 1. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄ ou ► pour sélectionner Photos, puis appuyez sur ENTERE dans le menu Media Play. 2. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄/►/▲/▼ pour sélectionner le fichier de votre choix dans la liste des fichiers. 3. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE ou � (Lecture). – Lorsqu’une liste de photos est affichée, appuyez sur le bouton � (Lecture) / ENTERE de la télécommande pour lancer le diaporama. – Tous les fichiers de la section Liste des fichiers sont alors affichés dans le diaporama. – Pendant le diaporama, les fichiers apparaissent dans l’ordre, à partir de celui en cours d’affichage. ✎Des fichiers musicaux peuvent être lus automatiquement pendant le diaporama, si l’option Fond musical est définie sur Activé. ✎Il n’est pas possible de changer le Mode Musicale tant que le chargement de BGM n’est pas terminé. Image1024.jpg 1024x768 2010/2/1 3/15 SUM E Pause L Précédent/Suivant T Outils R Retour Normal 3/15 I Love you Jhon Music 1 No Singer Music 2 No Singer Music 3 No Singer Music 4 No Singer Music 5 No Singer I Love You Jhon 1st Album Pop 2010 4.2MB 01:10 / 04:02 SUM E Pause L Passer T Outils R Retour Liste lect Movie 01.avi 00:04:03 / 00:07:38 1/1 SUM Lecture en continu E Pause L Passer T Outils R Retour Reprend la lecture à partir de la dernière scène visualisée. Lecture en continu [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 27 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:4228 Français Fonctions avancées ¦ Lecture de plusieurs fichiers Lecture des fichiers vidéo/audio/photos sélectionnés 1. Appuyez sur le bouton jaune dans la liste des fichiers pour sélectionner le fichier de votre choix. 2. Répétez l’opération ci-dessus pour sélectionner plusieurs fichiers. ✎ REMARQUE x La marque c s’affiche à gauche des fichiers sélectionnés. x Pour annuler votre sélection, appuyez de nouveau sur le bouton jaune. x Pour désélectionner tous les fichiers, appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS et sélectionnez Désélectionner tout. 3. Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS et sélectionnez ensuite Lire contenu sélectionné. Lecture du groupe de fichiers vidéo/audio/photos 1. Lorsqu’une liste de fichiers est affichée, vous pouvez accéder à n’importe quel fichier dans le groupe de votre choix. 2. Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS et sélectionnez ensuite Lire gp act.. ¦ Fonctions supplémentaires de Media Play Tri de la liste des fichiers Appuyez sur le bouton bleu dans la liste de fichiers pour trier les fichiers. Catégorie Opérations Vidéos Musique Photos Aff. de base Affiche le dossier complet. Pour regarder les photos, sélectionnez le dossier. > > > Titre Les titres des fichiers sont triés et affichés par symbole/numéro/ordre alphabétique/ordre spécial. > > > Préférence Les fichiers sont triés et affichés par préférence. Les préférences d’un fichier peuvent être modifiées dans la section Liste de fichiers à l’aide du bouton vert. > > > Date pl. réc. Trie et affiche les fichiers selon la date la plus récente. > > Date pl. anc. Trie et affiche les fichiers selon la date la plus ancienne. > > Artiste Les fichiers musicaux sont triés par artiste dans l’ordre alphabétique. > Album Trie les fichiers musicaux par album et par ordre alphabétique. > Genre Trie les fichiers musicaux par genre. > Humeur Trie les fichiers musicaux par ambiance. Vous pouvez modifier les informations d’ambiance de la musique. > Mensuel Trie et affiche les photos par mois. Le tri s’effectue uniquement sur la base du mois (de janvier à décembre), quelle que soit l’année. > /Movie 01.avi 1/1 SUM Movie 01.avi Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Movie 03.avi Movie 05.avi Movie 07.avi Movie 09.avi Movie 02.avi Movie 04.avi Movie 06.avi Movie 08.avi Movie 10.avi Changer périph. Sélectionner Tri T Outils Vidéos Fichiers 2 sél Page [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 28 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:44Français 29 04 Fonctions avancées Menu des options de lecture de vidéos/musique/photos Pendant la lecture d’un fichier, appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS. Catégorie Opérations Vidéos Musique Photos Titre Vous pouvez déplacer directement l’autre fichier. > Mode Répétition Vous pouvez lire des fichiers musicaux et vidéo en boucle. > > Format de l’image Vous pouvez régler le format de l’image suivant vos préférences. > Réglage de l’image Vous pouvez régler les paramètres d’image. (p. 15, 16, 17). > > Réglage du son Vous pouvez régler les paramètres sonores. (p. 17, 18, 19). > > > Param. de sous-titre Vous pouvez visionner la vidéo avec des sous-titres. Cette fonction ne fonctionne que si les sous-titres possèdent le même nom de fichier que le fichier vidéo. > Arrêter le diaporama / Lancer le diaporama Vous pouvez lancer ou arrêter un diaporama. > Vit. diaporama Vous pouvez sélectionner la vitesse du diaporama pendant sa diffusion. > Fond musical Vous pouvez définir et sélectionner le fond musical d’un diaporama. > Zoom Vous pouvez zoomer sur les images lorsque vous êtes en mode Plein écran. > Pivoter Vous pouvez faire pivoter les images lorsque vous êtes en mode Plein écran. > Information Vous pouvez afficher des informations détaillées sur le fichier lu. > > > Paramètres Utilisation du menu Configuration ■ Aide lecture continue (Reprise de la lecture) (Activé / Arrêt): sélectionnez cette option pour afficher le message d’aide relatif à la lecture continue des films. ■ Obtenir code d’enr. de DivX® VOD: affiche le code d’enregistrement autorisé pour le téléviseur. Connectez-vous au site Web DivX et entrez le code d’enregistrement avec un compte personnel pour pouvoir télécharger le fichier d’enregistrement VOD (vidéo à la demande). Si vous lisez l’enregistrement VOD à l’aide de Media Play, l’enregistrement est terminé. ✎ Pour plus d’informations sur la VOD DivX®, visitez le site Web “www.DivX.com”. ■ Obtenir code de désact. de DivX® VOD: si DivX® VOD n’est pas enregistré, le code de désactivation de l’enregistrement s’affiche. Si vous exécutez cette fonction alors que DivX® VOD est enregistré, l’enregistrement DivX® VOD en cours est désactivé. ■ Information: permet d’afficher les informations relatives au périphérique connecté. [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 29 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:4530 Français Fonctions avancées Anynet+ Anynet+ est une fonction qui vous permet de contrôler tous les appareils Samsung connectés compatibles Anynet+ à l’aide de votre Qu’est-ce qu’Anynet+?t télécommande Samsung. Le système Anynet+ peut être utilisé uniquement avec les appareils Samsung disposant de la fonction Anynet+. Pour être sûr que votre appareil Samsung dispose de cette fonction, vérifiez qu’il comporte le logo Anynet+. Connexion à un système home cinéma 1. A l’aide d’un câble HDMI, reliez la prise HDMI IN (1(DVI) ou 2) du téléviseur à la prise HDMI OUT du périphérique Anynet+ correspondant. 2. A l’aide d’un câble HDMI, reliez la prise HDMI IN du système home cinéma à la prise HDMI OUT de l’appareil Anynet+ correspondant. ✎REMARQUE x Connectez le câble optique entre la prise DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) de votre téléviseur et l’entrée audio numérique de votre système home cinéma. x En suivant les instructions de connexion ci-dessus, la prise Optique diffuse uniquement du son sur 2 canaux. Vous n’entendrez du son qu’au niveau des haut-parleurs avant, gauche et droit et du caisson de basses de votre système home cinéma. Pour écouter du contenu audio 5.1, branchez la prise DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) du lecteur DVD ou du décodeur satellite (c’est-à-dire, le périphérique Anynet 1 ou 2) directement sur l’amplificateur ou sur le système home cinéma, et non sur le téléviseur. x Ne connectez qu’un seul système home cinéma. x Vous pouvez connecter un appareil Anynet+ à l’aide du câble HDMI. Il se peut que certains câbles HDMI ne prennent pas en charge les fonctions Anynet+. x Anynet+ fonctionne lorsque l’appareil AV compatible est en veille ou en marche. x Le système Anynet+ prend en charge jusqu’à 12 appareils AV. Vous pouvez connecter jusqu’à 3 appareils du même type. Panneau arrière du téléviseur Périphériques Anynet+ 1 Périphériques Anynet+2 Home cinéma Câble HDMI Câble HDMI Câble HDMI Câble optique [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 30 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:45Français 31 04 Fonctions avancées Menu Anynet+ Le menu Anynet+ varie selon le type et l’état des appareils Anynet+ connectés au téléviseur. Menu Anynet+ Description Voir télévision Fait basculer le mode Anynet+ en mode de diffusion TV. Liste d’appareils Affiche la liste des appareils Anynet+. (nom_appareil) MENU Affiche les menus de l’appareil connecté. Par exemple, si un graveur DVD est connecté, son menu de disque s’affiche. (nom_appareil) INFO Affiche le menu de lecture de l’appareil connecté. Par exemple, si un graveur DVD est connecté, son menu de lecture s’affiche. Enregistrement: (*enregistreur) Lance immédiatement l’enregistrement à l’aide de l’enregistreur. (Cette fonction n’est disponible que pour les appareils prenant en charge la fonction d’enregistrement.) Arrêter Enr.: (*enregistreur) Arrête l’enregistrement. Récepteur Le son est diffusé par l’intermédiaire du récepteur. Si plusieurs enregistreurs sont connectés, ils s’affichent sous la forme (*enregistreur) ; si un seul enregistreur est connecté, il s’affiche sous la forme (*nom_appareil). ¦ Configuration d’Anynet+ ■ Configuration Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) (Arrêt / Activé ): pour utiliser la fonction Anynet+, l’option Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) doit être définie sur Activé. ✎ Lorsque la fonction Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) est désactivée, toutes les activités qui y sont associées sont indisponibles. Arrêt automatique (Non / Oui): configuration de l’arrêt automatique d’un appareil Anynet+ lorsque le téléviseur est mis hors tension. ✎ La source active sur le téléviseur doit être définie sur TV pour pouvoir utiliser la fonction Anynet+. ✎ Même si un appareil externe est en train d’enregistrer, il se peut qu’il s’éteigne. ¦ Basculement entre des appareils Anynet+ 1. La liste des appareils Anynet+ connectés au téléviseur s’affiche. ✎ Si le périphérique désiré est introuvable, appuyez sur le bouton rouge pour actualiser la liste. 2. Sélectionnez un périphérique et appuyez sur ENTERE. Vous pouvez basculer vers l’appareil sélectionné. ✎ Le menu Liste d’appareils s’affiche uniquement si Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) est défini sur Activé dans le menu Application. x Le basculement vers l’appareil sélectionné peut prendre 2 minutes. Il est impossible d’annuler l’opération de basculement. x Si vous avez choisi un mode d’entrée externe en appuyant sur le bouton SOURCE, il est impossible d’utiliser la fonction Anynet+. Veillez à basculer vers un appareil Anynet+ à l’aide de la Liste d’appareils. [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 31 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:4632 Français Fonctions avancées ¦ Enregistrement Vous pouvez enregistrer un programme télévisé à l’aide d’un enregistreur Samsung. 1. Sélectionnez Enregistrement. ✎ S’il existe plusieurs enregistreurs x Si plusieurs enregistreurs sont connectés, la liste de ces appareils s’affiche. Sélectionnez un enregistreur dans la Liste d’appareils. ✎ Si l’enregistreur ne s’affiche pas, sélectionnez Liste d’appareils, puis appuyez sur le bouton rouge pour rechercher des appareils. 2. Appuyez sur le bouton EXIT pour quitter le menu. ✎ Vous pouvez effectuer un enregistrement en sélectionnant Enregistrement: (nom_appareil). ✎ En appuyant sur le bouton � (REC) vous enregistrez ce que vous regardez. Si vous regardez une vidéo provenant d’un autre appareil, cette vidéo est enregistrée. ✎ Avant d’enregistrer, vérifiez la connexion de la prise d’antenne à l’enregistreur. Pour connecter correctement une antenne à un enregistreur, reportez-vous à la documentation de ce dernier. ¦ Ecoute via un récepteur Vous pouvez diffuser du son via un récepteur (c’est-à-dire un système home cinéma) au lieu du Haut-parleur TV. 1. Sélectionnez Récepteur et définissez l’option sur Activé. 2. Appuyez sur le bouton EXIT pour quitter le menu. ✎ Si votre récepteur ne prend en charge que l’audio, il se peut qu’il ne figure pas dans la liste d’appareils. ✎ Le récepteur fonctionnera lorsque vous aurez correctement raccordé la prise d’entrée optique du récepteur à la prise DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) du téléviseur. ✎ Lorsque le récepteur (système home cinéma) est activé, vous pouvez écouter le son sortant de la prise optique du téléviseur. Lorsque le téléviseur affiche un signal DTV (antenne), il envoie un son 5.1 canaux au récepteur. Lorsque la source est un composant numérique (un lecteur DVD, par exemple) connecté au téléviseur via HDMI, seul un son 2 canaux est diffusé par le récepteur. ✎REMARQUE x Vous pouvez commander n’importe quel appareil Anynet+ à l’aide de la télécommande, et non des boutons du téléviseur. x Il se peut que la télécommande du téléviseur ne fonctionne pas dans certaines situations. Dans ce cas, sélectionnez de nouveau le périphérique Anynet+. x Les fonctions Anynet+ ne sont pas opérationnelles sur les produits d’autres fabricants. [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 32 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:46Français 33 04 Fonctions avancées ¦ Résolution des problèmes Anynet+ Problème Solution possible Anynet+ ne fonctionne pas. • Vérifiez si l’appareil est compatible Anynet+. Le système Anynet+ ne prend en charge que les appareils compatibles Anynet+. • Ne connectez qu’un seul récepteur (home cinéma). • Vérifiez que le cordon d’alimentation de l’appareil Anynet+ est bien connecté. • Vérifiez la connexion des câbles vidéo/audio/HDMI du périphérique Anynet+. • Vérifiez que l’option Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) est définie sur Activé dans le menu de configuration d’Anynet+. • Vérifiez si la télécommande du téléviseur est en mode TV. • Vérifiez qu’il s’agit d’une télécommande exclusive Anynet+. • Anynet+ ne fonctionne pas dans toutes les conditions. (Recherche de chaînes, fonctionnement de Media Play (USB) ou Plug & Play (Configuration initiale), etc.) • Lorsque vous branchez ou retirez le câble HDMI, veillez à relancer une recherche d’appareils ou à éteindre et rallumer votre téléviseur. • Vérifiez que la fonction Anynet+ de l’appareil Anynet+ est activée. Je veux démarrer Anynet+. • Assurez-vous que le périphérique Anynet+ est bien connecté au téléviseur et que la fonction Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) est définie sur Activé dans le menu de configuration d’Anynet+. • Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour afficher le menu Anynet+ et sélectionnez le menu de votre choix. Je veux quitter Anynet+. • Sélectionnez Voir télévision dans le menu Anynet+. • Appuyez sur le bouton SOURCE de la télécommande et choisissez un périphérique non compatible Anynet+. • Appuyez sur P >/< et PRE-CH pour modifier le mode TV. (Remarque : le bouton de chaîne ne fonctionne que si aucun appareil Anynet+ à tuner incorporé n’est pas connecté.) Le message “Connexion à Anynet+...” apparaît à l’écran. • Il est impossible d’utiliser la télécommande lorsque vous configurez Anynet+ ou basculez vers un mode d’affichage. • La télécommande n’est utilisable qu’au terme de la configuration d’Anynet+ ou du passage vers un mode d’affichage. La lecture ne démarre pas sur l’appareil Anynet+. • Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser la fonction de lecture lorsque Plug & Play (configuration initiale) est en cours. Le périphérique connecté ne s’affiche pas. • Vérifiez si l’appareil est ou non compatible avec les fonctions Anynet+. • Vérifiez que le câble HDMI est bien connecté. • Vérifiez que l’option Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) est définie sur Activé dans le menu de configuration d’Anynet+. • Lancez une nouvelle recherche d’appareils Anynet+. • Vous pouvez uniquement connecter un appareil Anynet+ à l’aide du câble HDMI. Il se peut que certains câbles HDMI ne prennent pas en charge les fonctions Anynet+. • En cas d’arrêt anormal résultant d’une déconnexion du câble HDMI ou du câble d’alimentation, ou encore d’une panne de courant, effectuez une nouvelle recherche d’appareils. Le programme TV ne s’enregistre pas. • Vérifiez que la fiche d’antenne est correctement branchée sur l’enregistreur. Le son du téléviseur n’est pas diffusé par le récepteur. • Reliez le téléviseur au récepteur à l’aide du câble optique. [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 33 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:4634 Français Informations supplémentaires Fonction Télétexte de chaîne analogique La page d’index du télétexte contient des instructions sur l’utilisation du service. Pour que les informations du télétexte s’affichent correctement, la réception des chaînes doit être stable. Autrement, des informations pourraient manquer ou certaines pages ne pas s’afficher. ✎Vous pouvez changer de page de télétexte en appuyant sur les boutons numériques de la télécommande. 1 / (Télétexte activé/mix): active le mode télétexte pour la chaîne choisie. Appuyez deux fois sur cette touche pour superposer l’affichage télétexte sur l’émission en cours de diffusion. 2 8 (mémoriser): permet de mémoriser les pages télétexte. 3 4 (taille): permet d’afficher la moitié supérieure de l’écran en caractères deux fois plus grands. Pour afficher le texte dans la moitié inférieure de l’écran, appuyez une nouvelle fois sur ce bouton. Pour rétablir l’affichage normal, appuyez dessus une fois de plus. 4 9 (stop): arrête l’affichage sur la page en cours, au cas où plusieurs pages supplémentaires suivraient automatiquement. Pour annuler, appuyez de nouveau sur cette touche. 5 Boutons de couleur (rouge, vert, jaune, bleu) : si la société de radiodiffusion utilise le système FASTEXT, les différents sujets traités dans la page télétexte disposent d’un code couleur et peuvent être sélectionnés à l’aide des boutons de couleur de la télécommande. Appuyez sur la couleur correspondant au sujet de votre choix. Une nouvelle page avec code couleur est affichée. les éléments peuvent être sélectionnés de la même manière. Pour afficher la page précédente ou la page suivante, appuyez sur le bouton de couleur correspondant. 6 0 (mode): permet de sélectionner le mode Télétexte (LIST/FLOF). Si vous appuyez sur ce bouton alors que le mode LIST est sélectionné, il passe en mode d’enregistrement de liste. Dans ce mode, vous pouvez enregistrer une page télétexte dans une liste à l’aide du bouton 8(mémoriser). 7 1 (page secondaire): permet d’afficher une page secondaire. 2 (page suivante): page suivante du télétexte. 8 3 (page précédente): page précédente du télétexte. 9 6 (index): permet d’afficher la page d’index du télétexte (sommaire). 0 5 (afficher): affiche le texte masqué (les réponses à un questionnaire, par exemple). Appuyez à nouveau sur ce bouton pour rétablir le mode d’affichage normal. ! 7 (annuler): réduit l’écran télétexte pour le superposer à l’émission en cours. @ Page télétexte type Catégorie Contenu A Numéro de la page sélectionnée. B Identité de la chaîne émettrice. C Numéro de la page actuelle ou indications de recherche. D Date et heure E Texte. F Informations sur l’état. Informations FASTEXT. MUTE MENU CH LIST PRE-CH A B C D TTX/MIX SOURCE RETURN EXIT TOOLS INFO 1 3 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 ! @ 0 [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 34 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:47Français 35 05 Informations supplémentaires Assemblage des câbles Type support Insérez les câbles dans l’attache de câble, de telle sorte qu’ils ne soient pas visibles à travers le pied transparent. 1 2 3 1 2 3 Type montage mural ✎Ne tirez pas trop sur les câbles lorsque vous les manipulez. Les bornes de connexion du produit risqueraient d’être endommagées. Installation du support mural Assemblage du cache Si vous fixez le téléviseur à un mur, attachez le cache de la manière indiquée sur le dessin. Cache [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 35 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:4936 Français Informations supplémentaires Préparation avant l’installation d’un dispositif de fixation murale Pour installer un support mural, utilisez l’anneau de support 1. Cas A. Installation du dispositif de fixation murale SAMSUNG Cas B. Installation du support mural d’un autre fabricant 1 1 Installation du kit de montage mural Le kit de montage mural (vendu séparément) permet de fixer le téléviseur au mur. Pour plus d’informations sur l’installation du support mural, reportez-vous aux instructions fournies avec le support mural. Faites appel à un technicien pour installer la fixation murale. Samsung Electronics ne saurait être tenu pour responsable d’un endommagement du produit ou d’une blessure si vous choisissez d’effectuer vous-même l’installation murale. Caractéristiques du kit de fixation murale (VESA) ✎Le kit de fixation murale n’est pas inclus, mais vendu séparément. Installez votre fixation murale sur un mur solide perpendiculaire au sol. Si vous souhaitez la fixer sur d’autres matériaux de construction, veuillez prendre contact avec votre revendeur le plus proche. Si vous l’installez au plafond ou sur un mur non droit, la fixation risque de tomber et de provoquer de graves blessures. ✎REMARQUE x Les dimensions standard pour tous les kits de fixation murale sont indiquées dans le tableau ci-dessous. x Le kit de fixation murale s’accompagne d’un manuel d’installation détaillé et de toutes les pièces nécessaires au montage. x N’utilisez pas de vis non conformes aux spécifications des vis VESA standard. x N’utilisez pas de vis plus longues que la dimension standard ou non conformes aux caractéristiques des vis VESA standard. Des vis trop longues pourraient endommager l’intérieur du téléviseur. x Pour les fixations murales non conformes aux caractéristiques des vis VESA standard, la longueur des vis peut varier, selon les caractéristiques de la fixation murale. x Ne serrez pas trop les vis : cela pourrait endommager le produit ou provoquer sa chute, entraînant des blessures corporelles. Samsung ne peut être tenue responsable de ce type d’accident. x Samsung ne peut être tenue responsable de tout dommage au produit ou toute blessure corporelle dans le cas de l’utilisation d’une fixation murale non-VESA ou non spécifiée, ou si l’utilisateur ne suit pas les instructions d’installation du produit. x N’inclinez pas le téléviseur de plus de 15 degrés. Famille de produits pouces Spéc. VESA (A * B) Vis standard Quantité TV-LED [Ultraplat] 19~22 75 X 75 M4 4 23~29 200 X 100 M8 32~37 200 X 200 40~55 400 X 400 56~65 600 X 400 N’installez pas votre kit de fixation murale lorsque le téléviseur est allumé. Vous risqueriez de vous électrocuter. [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 36 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:51Français 37 05 Informations supplémentaires Verrou antivol Kensington Le verrou antivol Kensington n’est pas fourni par Samsung. L’antivol Kensington est un dispositif utilisé pour fixer physiquement le système lorsqu’il est utilisé dans un endroit public. L’aspect du verrou et la méthode de verrouillage peuvent différer de l’illustration en fonction du fabricant. Consultez le manuel fourni avec le verrou Kensington pour obtenir des instructions d’utilisation supplémentaires. ✎Une icône "K” est présente à l’arrière du téléviseur. Un verrou Kensington se trouve à côté de l’icône “K”. 1. Insérez le dispositif de verrouillage dans la fente Kensington du téléviseur LED 1 puis tournez-le dans le sens de verrouillage 2. 2. Branchez le câble du verrou Kensington 3. 3. Fixez le verrou Kensington à un bureau ou à tout autre objet lourd inamovible. ✎Le dispositif de verrouillage est vendu séparément. ✎L’emplacement du verrou Kensington peut varier en fonction du modèle. Fixation du téléviseur au mur Attention: si vous tirez ou poussez le téléviseur ou si vous grimpez dessus, il risque de tomber. Veillez notamment à ce que vos enfants ne se suspendent pas au téléviseur, ni ne le déséquilibrent, car cela pourrait le faire basculer et occasionner des blessures graves, voire entraîner la mort. Respectez toutes les précautions de sécurité indiquées dans la brochure relative à la sécurité. Pour une stabilité et une sécurité accrue, installez le dispositif antichute comme indiqué ci-après. ¦ Pour éviter toute chute du téléviseur 1. Placez les vis dans les colliers et fixez-les fermement au mur. Assurez-vous que les vis ont été fermement fixées au mur. ✎ En fonction du type de mur, il est possible que vous ayez besoin de matériel supplémentaire, tel que des chevilles. ✎ Les colliers, vis et chaînettes n’étant pas fournis, vous devez les acheter séparément. 2. Retirez les vis situées sur la partie centrale arrière du téléviseur, placez-les dans les colliers, puis fixez-les à nouveau sur le téléviseur. ✎ Il se peut que les vis ne soient pas fournies avec le produit. Dans ce cas, achetez des vis présentant les caractéristiques suivantes. x Pour un téléviseur de 19 à 22 pouces : M4 x Pour un téléviseur de 23 à 65 pouces : M8 3. Reliez les colliers fixés au téléviseur et ceux fixés sur le mur à l’aide de chaînettes, puis attachez-les fermement. ✎ REMARQUE x Placez le téléviseur à proximité du mur afin qu’il ne bascule pas vers l’arrière. x Il est recommandé de placer la chaînette de façon à ce que les colliers fixés au mur soient placés à la même hauteur ou plus bas que ceux fixés au téléviseur. x Détachez la chaînette avant de déplacer le téléviseur. 4. Vérifiez que toutes les connexions sont fixées correctement. Vérifiez régulièrement que les connexions ne présentent aucun signe d’usure. Si vous avez un doute quant à la sécurité des connexions, contactez un installateur professionnel. Mur 1 2 3 Arrière du téléviseur [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 37 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:5238 Français Informations supplémentaires Dépannage Si vous avez des questions sur le téléviseur, commencez par consulter la liste ci-dessous. Si aucune de ces solutions de dépannage ne s’applique à votre problème, rendez-vous sur le site «www.samsung.com», puis cliquez sur Assistance ou contactez le centre d’appels dont les coordonnées figurent sur la dernière page de ce manuel. Problèmes Solutions et explications Qualité de l’image Exécutez tout d’abord le Test de l’image pour vérifier que votre téléviseur affiche correctement l’image de test. (Accédez à MENU - Assistance - Diagnostic automatique - Test de l’image) (p. 21) Si l’image de test s’affiche correctement, sa qualité médiocre peut être due à la source ou au signal. La qualité de l’image affichée par le téléviseur n’est pas aussi bonne que dans le magasin. • Si vous possédez un décodeur câble/boîtier décodeur analogique, passez à un décodeur numérique. Utilisez des câbles HDMI ou Composant pour fournir une qualité d’image HD (haute définition). • Abonnés câble/satellite : essayez les chaînes HD dans la liste des canaux. • Connexion de l’antenne : essayez les chaînes HD après avoir effectué une mémorisation automatique. ✎ De nombreuses chaînes HD sont mises à niveau par rapport à du contenu SD (définition standard). • Réglez la résolution de sortie vidéo du décodeur câble/boîtier décodeur sur 1080i ou 720p. • Veillez à respecter la distance minimale recommandée entre vous et le téléviseur (distance basée sur la taille et la définition du signal). L’image est déformée: macrobloc, petit bloc, points, pixellisation • La compression de contenu vidéo peut engendrer une déformation de l’image, en particulier pour les mouvements rapides comme le sport et les films d’action. • Un niveau de signal faible ou de mauvaise qualité peut déformer l’image. Il ne s’agit pas d’un problème lié au téléviseur. Couleur incorrecte ou manquante. • Si vous utilisez une connexion Composant, vérifiez que les câbles sont connectés aux prises adéquates. Des raccordements desserrés ou incorrects peuvent engendrer des problèmes au niveau de la couleur ou un écran vide. La couleur ou la luminosité est de mauvaise qualité. • Réglez les options Image dans le menu du téléviseur (sélectionnez Mode Image / Couleur / Luminosité / Netteté) (p. 15) • Réglez l’option Mode éco. dans le menu du téléviseur (Accédez à MENU - Image - Solution Eco - Mode éco.) (p. 15) • Essayez de réinitialiser l’image pour en afficher les paramètres par défaut (Accédez à MENU - Image - Réinitialisation de l’image) (p. 17) Il y a une ligne pointillée sur les bords de l’écran. • Si la taille de l’image est réglée sur Adapter à écran, remplacez cette valeur par 16:9 (p. 16). • Changez la résolution du décodeur câble/boîtier décodeur. L’image est en noir et blanc. • Si vous utilisez une entrée composite AV, connectez le câble vidéo (jaune) au connecteur vert de l’entrée composant 1 du téléviseur. Lors d’un changement de chaîne, l’image se bloque, est déformée ou s’affiche avec un léger décalage. • En cas de raccordement à un décodeur câble, essayez de réinitialiser ce dernier. Rebranchez le cordon d’alimentation secteur et patientez jusqu’au redémarrage du décodeur câble. Cette opération peut prendre jusqu’à 20 minutes. • Réglez la résolution de sortie du décodeur câble sur 1080i ou 720p. Qualité sonore Exécutez tout d’abord le Test du son pour vérifier que le système audio de votre téléviseur fonctionne correctement. (Accédez à MENU - Assistance - Diagnostic automatique - Test du son) (p. 21) Si le système audio fonctionne correctement, le problème lié au son peut provenir de la source ou du signal. Il n’y a aucun son ou celui-ci est trop faible au volume maximum. • Vérifiez le volume de l’appareil externe connecté à votre téléviseur. La qualité d’image est bonne, mais aucun son n’est émis. • Réglez l’option Sélection Haut-parleur sur Haut-parleur TV dans le menu Son. (p. 18) • Si vous utilisez un appareil externe, assurez-vous que les câbles audio sont raccordés aux prises d’entrée audio appropriées du téléviseur. • Si vous utilisez un périphérique externe, vérifiez l’option de sortie audio du périphérique. (Par exemple, il se peut que vous deviez remplacer l’option audio de votre décodeur câble par HDMI si vous utilisez la connexion HDMI.) • Si vous utilisez un câble DVI-HDMI, un câble audio distinct est requis. • Si votre téléviseur est équipé d’une prise casque, assurez-vous que rien n’y est connecté. Les haut-parleurs émettent un son inhabituel. • Vérifiez les connexions des câbles. Vérifiez qu’aucun câble vidéo n’est raccordé à une entrée audio. • Pour les connexions de télédistribution (câble) ou antenne, vérifiez l’intensité du signal. Un niveau de signal faible peut provoquer une distorsion sonore. [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 38 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:53Français 39 05 Informations supplémentaires Problèmes Solutions et explications Aucune image, aucune vidéo La télévision ne s’allume pas. • Vérifiez que le cordon d’alimentation secteur est branché correctement sur la prise murale et sur le téléviseur. • Vérifiez que la prise murale est opérationnelle. • Essayez d’appuyer sur le bouton POWER du téléviseur pour vérifier que la télécommande fonctionne correctement. Si le téléviseur s’allume, reportez-vous au problème “La télécommande ne fonctionne pas” ci-après. Le téléviseur s’éteint automatiquement. • Vérifiez que la fonction Veille est définie sur Arrêt dans le menu Configuration (p. 19). • Si votre PC est connecté au téléviseur, vérifiez les paramètres d’alimentation de votre PC. • Vérifiez que le cordon d’alimentation secteur est branché correctement sur la prise murale et sur le téléviseur. • Lorsque vous regardez la télévision sur une connexion de télédistribution (câble) ou antenne, le téléviseur s’éteint après 10 à 15 minutes en l’absence de signal. Une image/vidéo est affichée. • Vérifiez le raccordement des câbles (retirez tous les câbles connectés au téléviseur et aux appareils externes, puis rebranchez-les). • Réglez les sorties vidéo de vos périphériques externes (décodeur câble/boîtier décodeur, DVD, Blu-ray, etc.) pour faire correspondre les connexions à l’entrée du téléviseur. Par exemple, si la sortie d’un disque dur externe est une sortie HDMI, elle doit être reliée à une entrée HDMI du téléviseur. • Vérifiez que les appareils connectés sont sous tension. • Veillez à sélectionner la source appropriée du téléviseur en appuyant sur le bouton SOURCE de la télécommande. Connexion RF (câble/antenne) Le téléviseur ne reçoit pas toutes les chaînes. • Vérifiez que le câble de l’antenne est raccordé correctement. • Essayez la fonction Plug & Play (configuration initiale) pour ajouter des chaînes disponibles à la liste. Choisissez MENU - Configuration - Plug & Play (Configuration initiale) et attendez que toutes les chaînes disponibles soient mémorisées (p. 7). • Vérifiez que l’antenne est positionnée correctement. L’image est déformée : macrobloc, petit bloc, points, pixellisation • La compression de contenu vidéo peut provoquer une déformation de l’image, en particulier pour les mouvements rapides comme le sport et les films d’action. • Un niveau de signal faible peut déformer l’image. Il ne s’agit pas d’un problème lié au téléviseur. Connexion PC Le message “Mode non pris en charge” est affiché. • Réglez la fréquence et la résolution de sortie de votre PC pour qu’elles correspondent aux résolutions prises en charge par le téléviseur (p. 23). “PC” apparaît toujours dans la liste des sources, même si aucun PC n’est connecté. • C’est normal ; “PC” apparaît toujours dans la liste des sources, même si aucun PC n’est connecté. La qualité de la vidéo est bonne, mais aucun son n’est émis. • Si vous utilisez une connexion HDMI, vérifiez le paramètre de sortie audio sur votre PC. Autres L’image ne s’affiche pas en mode plein écran. • Des barres noires s’affichent de chaque côté des chaînes HD lors de l’affichage de contenu SD (4:3) mis à niveau. • Des barres noires s’affichent en haut et en bas des films dont le format d’image est différent de celui de votre téléviseur. • Définissez les options de taille de l’image de votre appareil externe ou téléviseur sur Plein écran. La télécommande ne fonctionne pas. • Vérifiez que la polarité (+/–) des piles de la télécommande est dans la bonne direction. • Nettoyez la lentille de la télécommande. • Essayez de diriger directement la télécommande vers le téléviseur à une distance de 1,5 à 1,8 m. La télécommande du décodeur câble/boîtier décodeur ne fonctionne pas. • Programmez la télécommande du décodeur câble/boîtier décodeur de telle sorte qu’elle puisse commander le téléviseur. Consultez le mode d’emploi du décodeur câble/boîtier décodeur pour obtenir le code du téléviseur SAMSUNG. Le message “Mode non pris en charge” est affiché. • Vérifiez la résolution prise en charge du téléviseur et réglez la résolution de sortie du périphérique externe en conséquence. Reportez-vous aux paramètres de résolution indiqués à la page 23 de ce manuel. Une odeur de plastique se dégage du téléviseur. • Cette odeur est normale et s’atténuera avec le temps. L’option Informations de signal du téléviseur n’est pas disponible dans le menu de test du diagnostic automatique. • Cette fonction n’est disponible qu’avec des chaînes numériques avec connexion d’antenne (RF/ coaxial) (p. 21). Le téléviseur penche sur le côté. • Retirez le support de base du téléviseur et réassemblez-le. Le menu des chaînes est grisé (indisponible). • Le menu Canal n’est disponible que si la source TV est sélectionnée. [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 39 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:5340 Français Informations supplémentaires Problèmes Solutions et explications Vos paramètres sont perdus après 30 minutes ou à chaque mise hors tension du téléviseur. • Si le téléviseur est en mode Enr. démo, les paramètres audio et vidéo sont réinitialisés toutes les 30 minutes. Remplacez le mode Enr. démo par le mode Util. domicile dans la procédure Plug & Play (configuration initiale). Appuyez sur le bouton SOURCE pour sélectionner le mode TV et accédez à MENU → Configuration → Plug & Play (Configuration initiale) → ENTERE (p. 7). Perte intermittente du signal audio ou vidéo. • Vérifiez le raccordement des câbles ; rebranchez-les au besoin. • Une perte de l’image ou du son peut être provoquée par l’utilisation de câbles trop rigides ou épais. Veillez à ce que les câbles soient suffisamment souples pour une utilisation à long terme. En cas d’installation du téléviseur en position murale, nous vous recommandons d’utiliser des câbles avec des connecteurs de 90 degrés. Des petites particules sont visibles lorsque vous observez de près le bord du cadre du téléviseur. • Elles font partie de la conception du produit et ne constituent pas un défaut. Le menu PIP n’est pas disponible. • La fonctionnalité PIP n’est disponible que lorsque vous utilisez une source HDMI, PC ou Composant (p. 21). Message “Scramble signal” ou “Weak Signal/ No Signal”. • Si vous utilisez une CARTE CAM (CI/CI+), vérifiez qu’elle est installée dans la fente de l’interface commune. • Si le problème persiste, retirez la CARTE CAM du téléviseur et réintroduisez-la dans la fente. Le téléviseur s’est rallumé 45 minutes après sa mise hors tension. • Cela est tout à fait normal. Le téléviseur exécute, en effet, la fonction de liaison radio (OTA) pour mettre à niveau le microprogramme téléchargé au cours de son utilisation. Problèmes récurrents liés à l’image/au son. • Vérifiez et modifiez le signal/la source. Il peut y avoir une réaction entre les coussinets en caoutchouc situés sur le support de base et la finition de certains meubles. • Pour éviter que cela ne se produise, utilisez des coussinets de feutre sur toute surface du téléviseur en contact direct avec un meuble. ✎Ce téléviseur LED TFT est équipé d’un écran constitué de sous-pixels dont la fabrication nécessite une technologie sophistiquée. Il se peut toutefois que quelques points clairs ou sombres apparaissent à l’écran. Ils n’ont aucune incidence sur la performance du produit. ¦ Licence Fabriqué sous licence de Dolby Laboratories. Dolby et le symbole du double D sont des marques déposées de Dolby Laboratories. Manufactured under licence under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and the Symbol are registered trademarks. & DTS 2.0+ Digital Out and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product Includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. DivX Certified to play DivX video up to HD 1080p, including premium content. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX,Inc. This is an official DivX Certified device that plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video.ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ONDEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) content. To generate the registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in the device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com with this code to complete the registration process and learn more about DivX VOD. Pat. 7,295,673; 7,460,688; 7,519,274 [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 40 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:54Français 41 05 Informations supplémentaires Caractéristiques techniques Résolution native du panneau 1360 x 768 à 60 Hz Considérations environnementales Température de fonctionnement Humidité en fonctionnement Température de stockage Humidité sur le lieu de stockage de 10 °C à 40 °C (de 50°F à 104°F) de 10% à 80%, sans condensation de -20 °C à 45 °C (de -4°F à 113°F) de 5% à 95%, sans condensation Système TV Analogique: B/G, D/K, L, I (en fonction de votre pays) Numérique: DVB-T/DVB-C Système de couleur/vidéo Analogique: PAL, SECAM, NTSC-4.43, NTSC-3.58, PAL60 Numérique: MPEG-2 MP@ML, MPEG-4, H.264/AVC MP@L3, MP@L4.0, HP@L4.0 Système Sonore BG. OK NICAM. MPEGl HDMI IN 1 ~ 2 Vidéo: 1080 24p, 1080p, 1080i, 720p 576p, 576i, 480p, 480i Audio: 2Ch Linear PCM 32/44.1/48kHz, 16/20/24bits. Entrée audio analogique (HDMI IN1 uniquement) Entrée PC (HDMI IN1 uniquement) Support pivotant (gauche/droite) 0˚ Nom du modèle UE19C4000 UE22C4000 / UE22C4010 UE26C4000 Taille de l’écran 19 pouces 22 pouces 26 pouces Son (Sortie) 3W x 2 3W x 2 5W x 2 Dimensions (L x P x H) Corps Avec socle 477,6 x 29,9 x 320,6 mm 477,6 x 189,6 x 374,1mm 545,2 x 29,9 x 359,0 mm 545,2 x 189,5 x 411,1 mm 652,8 x 29,9 x 422,8 mm 652,8 x 212,0 x 479,8 mm Poids Sans socle Avec socle 3,6 kg 3,9 kg 3,7 kg 4,1 kg 5,5 kg 6,2 kg ✎La conception et les spécifications peuvent être modifiées sans préavis. ✎Pour plus d’informations sur les caractéristiques d’alimentation et de consommation électrique, reportez-vous à l’étiquette fixée au produit. [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 41 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:5442 Français Informations supplémentaires Index A Aff. de base 28 Amplifier 17 Antenne 13 Anynet+ 30 B Balance blancs 15 Balance G/D 17 C Cable Tie 4, 34 Cache 34 Carnation 16 Casques 9 Chaude 16 Composant 8 Connexion à un appareil audio 9 Connexion à un PC 23 Contraste Dynam. 15 D Dépannage 37 Diagnostic automatique 22 Diaporama 27 Diffusion programmée 12 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT 9, 30 DivX® VOD 29 D-Sub 23 Dynamique 15 E Edit Name (Modif. Nom) 10 Edition des chaînes 14 Egaliseur 17 Enregistrement 31 EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) 11 Espace d’installation 2 F Favorite Channel 13 Fond musical 29 Format de l’image 16, 29 Formats vidéo 26 Fréquence 13 G Gestion chaînes 12 Guide Now & Next 11 H Haut-parleur externe 18 Haut-parleur TV 18 HDMI 8, 30 Home cinéma 9, 30 Horloge 19 I Informations de signal 22 L Langue 20 Lecteur USB 22, 24 Licence 39 Liste des sources 10 Luminosité 15 M Magnétoscope 8 Media Play 24 Mélodie 21 Menu des chaînes 12 Minuterie 19 Mise à niveau logicielle 22 Mode éco. 15 Mode Film 16 Mode Répétition 29 Mode Veille 5 Modifier un code PIN 20 Musique 27 N Navigation 11 Netteté 15 Nuance Coul. 16 Nuance de noir 15 O Outils 3 P Réglage fin 14 Photo 27 Piles 6 PIP (Image dans l’image) 21 Pivoter 29 Plug & Play 7 R Récepteur 32 Réglage automatique 17 Résolution optimale 23 RVB uniquement 15 S Sélection Haut-parleur 18 Sélectionner tout 14 Sous-titres 20 Spécifications 40 Support mural 34 Symboles 3 T Télécommande 6 Témoin d’alimentation 5 Titre 28 Transparence du menu 21 U Utilisation des chaines favorites 13 V Veille 19 Verrouil. 14 Vidéos 25 Virtual Surround 17 Volume 5 Volume auto 18 Vue chaînes 11 [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 42 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:55This page is intentionally left blank. [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 43 2010-03-03 오전 2:36:552 Español Las figuras y las ilustraciones de este Manual del usuario se proporcionan como referencia solamente y pueden ser diferentes del aspecto real del producto. El diseño y las especificaciones del producto están sujetos a cambios sin previo aviso. Nota sobre la TV digital 1. Las funciones relacionadas con la TV digital (DVB) sólo están disponibles en países o regiones donde se emitan señales terrestres digitales DVB-T (MPEG2 y MPEG4 AVC) o donde se tenga acceso a servicios de televisión por cable compatibles con DVB-C (MPEG2 y MPEG4 AAC). Póngase en contacto con su distribuidor para conocer si puede recibir señales DVB-T o DVB-C. 2. DVB-T es una norma del consorcio europeo para la transmisión de la televisión digital terrestre y DVB-C lo es para la transmisión de la televisión digital por cable. Sin embargo, en esta especificación no se incluyen algunas funciones diferenciadas, como EPG (Guía electrónica de programas), VOD (Vídeo a la carta) y otras. Por ello, en estos momentos aún no están disponibles. 3. Este equipo de televisión cumple las más actuales normas de DVB-T y DVB-C, de [agosto de 2008], pero no se garantiza la compatibilidad con futuras emisiones de televisión digital terrestre DVB-T y por cable DVB-C. 4. Según los países o regiones donde se utilice este equipo de TV, algunos proveedores de la televisión por cable pueden cobrar un pago adicional por este servicio y pueden exigir al usuario su aceptación de los términos y condiciones de su empresa. 5. Algunas funciones de televisión digital pueden no estar disponibles en algunos países o regiones y DVB-C puede no funcionar correctamente con algunos proveedores del servicio de cable. 6. Para obtener más información, póngase en contacto con su centro de atención al cliente de Samsung. ✎ La calidad de la recepción de la televisión puede resultar afectada por las diferencias de los métodos de transmisión entre los países. Compruebe el funcionamiento del televisor en un distribuidor local de SAMSUNG autorizado o el centro de llamadas de Samsung tanto si se puede mejorar volviendo a configurar el TV como si no. Advertencia sobre las imágenes fijas Evite mostrar en la pantalla imágenes fijas (como archivos de imágenes jpeg) o elementos con imágenes fijas (como logotipos de los programas de televisión o con formato de imagen 4:3, barras de cotizaciones o de noticias en la parte inferior de la pantalla, etc).Una visualización continuada de una imagen fija puede crear imágenes fantasmas en la pantalla LED, lo que afectará a la calidad de la imagen. Para reducir este riesgo, siga estas recomendaciones: • Evite mostrar el mismo canal de televisión durante largos periodos de tiempo. • Intente ver siempre las imágenes en pantalla completa, utilice el menú del formato de imagen del televisor para obtener la mejor coincidencia. • Reduzca los valores del brillo y el contraste al mínimo necesario para conseguir la calidad de imagen deseada, ya que los valores superiores pueden acelerar la velocidad del proceso de quemado. • Utilice con frecuencia todas las funciones del televisor diseñadas para reducir la retención de la imagen y el desgaste de la pantalla; consulte el apartado adecuado del manual del usuario para obtener más información. Seguridad en el espacio de instalación Mantenga la distancia requerida entre el producto y otros objetos (por ejemplo, paredes) para asegurar la ventilación adecuada. En caso contrario, se podría producir un incendio por un incremento de la temperatura interna del producto. ✎ Cuando utilice un soporte o un montaje mural, use sólo las piezas proporcionadas por Samsung Electronics. x Si utiliza piezas proporcionadas por otros fabricantes, podría tener problemas con el producto o éste se podría caer con el riesgo de causar lesiones personales. ✎ El aspecto puede variar según el producto. Instalación con un soporte Instalación con un montaje mural 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm Eliminación correcta de este producto (Residuos de aparatos eléctricos y electrónicos) (Aplicable en la Unión Europea y en países europeos con sistemas de recogida selectiva de residuos) La presencia de este símbolo en el producto, accesorios o material informativo que lo acompañan, indica que al finalizar su vida útil ni el producto ni sus accesorios electrónicos (como el cargador, cascos, cable USB) deberán eliminarse junto con otros residuos domésticos. Para evitar los posibles daños al medio ambiente o a la salud humana que representa la eliminación incontrolada de residuos, separe estos productos de otros tipos de residuos y recíclelos correctamente. De esta forma se promueve la reutilización sostenible de recursos materiales. Los usuarios particulares pueden contactar con el establecimiento donde adquirieron el producto o con las autoridades locales pertinentes para informarse sobre cómo y dónde pueden llevarlo para que sea sometido a un reciclaje ecológico y seguro. Los usuarios comerciales pueden contactar con su proveedor y consultar las condiciones del contrato de compra. Este producto y sus accesorios electrónicos no deben eliminarse junto a otros residuos comerciales. Eliminación correcta de las baterías de este producto (Aplicable en la Unión Europea y en otros países europeos con sistemas de recogida selectiva de baterías.) La presencia de esta marca en las baterías, el manual o el paquete del producto indica que cuando haya finalizado la vida útil de las baterías no deberán eliminarse junto con otros residuos domésticos. Los símbolos químicos Hg, Cd o Pb, si aparecen, indican que la batería contiene mercurio, cadmio o plomo en niveles superiores a los valores de referencia admitidos por la Directiva 2006/66 de la Unión Europea. Si las baterías no se desechan convenientemente, estas sustancias podrían provocar lesiones personales o dañar el medioambiente. Para proteger los recursos naturales y promover el reciclaje, separe las baterías de los demás residuos y recíclelas mediante el sistema de recogida gratuito de su localidad. 3_BN68-02655A-00Spa.indd 2 2010-03-04 오후 7:54:503 ESPAÑOL Español Contenido Introducción 4 4 Accesorios 5 Aspecto general del panel de control 6 Aspecto general del mando a distancia 7 Conexión de una antena 7 Plug & Play (configuración inicial) Conexiones 8 8 Conexión a un dispositivo AV 9 Conexión a un dispositivo de audio 10 Cambio de la fuente de entrada Funciones básicas 11 11 Cómo desplazarse por los menús 11 Uso del botón INFO (Guía actual y próxima) 11 Planificación de la televisión 13 Menú de canales 15 Menú de la imagen 17 Menú del sonido 19 Menú de configuración 21 Menú de asistencia técnica Funciones avanzadas 23 23 Conexión a un PC 24 Media Play 30 Anynet+ Información adicional 34 34 Función de teletexto de los canales analógicos 35 Montaje de los cables 35 Instalación del montaje mural 37 Bloqueo antirrobo Kensington 37 Fijación del televisor a la pared 38 Solución de problemas 41 Especificaciones 42 Índice ¡Compruebe este símbolo! tEsta función se puede utilizar pulsando el botón TOOLS del mando a distancia. Nota Botón de una pulsación TOOLS 3_BN68-02655A-00Spa.indd 3 2010-03-04 오후 7:54:514 Español Introducción Accesorios ✎Asegúrese de que los siguientes elementos se incluyan con el TV LED. Si falta alguno, póngase en contacto con su distribuidor. ✎El color y la forma de los componentes pueden variar según los modelos. ✎Los cables no incluidos en el paquete se pueden adquirir por separado. y Mando a distancia y 2 pilas AAA y Manual del usuario y Tarjeta de garantía/Guía de seguridad (no disponible en algunos lugares) y Paño de limpieza y Cable de alimentación y Soporte de protección y tornillo (x1) (sólo modelo de 26 pulgadas) y Soporte anilla (4 unid.) (sólo modelo de 26 pulgadas) y Sujetacables (sólo modelo de 26 pulgadas) y Sujetacables y Soporte de cables (3 unid.) y Adaptador de componentes y Adaptador del TV y Adaptador SCART UE19C4000, UE22C4000 / UE22C4010 Consulte la guía para instalar el soporte. y Base del soporte y Cuerpo del soporte UE26C4000 Consulte la guía para instalar el soporte. s s s s s (A) (B) 5 unid. (M4 X L12) 5 unid.(M4 X L8) y Soporte (1 unidad) y Soporte de la guía (1 unidad) y Tornillos (10 unid.) ✎Para conseguir la mejor conexión por cable con este producto, utilice cables con el grosor máximo que se explica a continuación: y Grosor máximo: 0,55 pulgadas (14 mm) (M4 x L8) 3_BN68-02655A-00Spa.indd 4 2010-03-04 오후 7:54:535 01 Introducción Español Aspecto general del panel de control ✎El color y la forma del producto pueden variar según el modelo. Sensor del mando a distancia El mando a distancia debe dirigirse hacia este punto del televisor. SOURCEE Cambia entre todas las fuentes de entrada disponibles. En el menú en pantalla, utilice este botón como lo haría con el botón ENTERE del mando a distancia. YMENU Muestra un menú en pantalla, la OSD (on screen display) de las funciones del TV. Ajusta el volumen. En la OSD, utilice los botones Y de igual modo que los botones ◄ z y ► del mando a distancia. Cambian los canales. En la OSD, utilice los botones z de igual modo que los botones ▼ y ▲ del mando a distancia. Indicador de encendido Parpadea y se apaga cuando se enciende el aparato y se ilumina en el modo en espera. P (Encendido) Enciende o apaga el televisor. Modo de espera No deje el televisor en modo de espera durante períodos largos de tiempo (cuando esté de vacaciones, por ejemplo). Aunque esté apagado continúa consumiendo una pequeña cantidad de energía. Se recomienda desenchufar el cable de alimentación. Altavoces Sensor del mando a distancia Indicador de encendido 3_BN68-02655A-00Spa.indd 5 2010-03-04 오후 7:54:546 Introducción Español Aspecto general del mando a distancia ✎Este mando a distancia es especial para personas con discapacidades visuales y presenta puntos Braille en los botones de encendido, de canales y del volumen. Instalación de las pilas (tamaño de las pilas: AAA) ✎NOTA x Utilice el mando a distancia a menos de 7 metros (23 pies) del televisor. x Una luz muy brillante puede afectar al funcionamiento del mando a distancia. No lo utilice cerca de luces fluorescentes o de neón. x El color y la forma pueden variar según el modelo. CH LIST TOOLS POWER SOURCE PRE-CH MENU RETURN MEDIA.P A B C D EXIT INFO HDMI TTX/MIX GUIDE P.MODE AD P.SIZE SUBT. S.MODE DUAL Enciende y apaga el televisor. Selecciona directamente el modo HDMI. Muestra y selecciona las fuentes de vídeo disponibles (pág. 10). Vuelve al canal anterior. Corta temporalmente el sonido. Cambia los canales. Muestra las listas de canales en la pantalla (pág. 13). Muestra la información de la Guía electrónica de programas (EPG) (pág. 11). Muestra información en la pantalla del televisor. Sale del menú. Pulse para acceder directamente a los canales. Ajusta el volumen. Seleccione alternativamente Teletext, Double o Mix. Abre la pantalla OSD. Muestra Media Play (USB) (pág. 24). Seleccionar rápidamente las funciones que se usan con mayor frecuencia. Vuelve al menú anterior. Selecciona los elementos del menú en pantalla y cambia los valores que aparecen en el menú. Utilice estos botones en los menús Admin. de canales, Media Play (USB), etc. Utilice estos botones en los modos Media Play (USB) y Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) (pág. 24, 30). (�: Controla la grabación de las grabadoras de Samsung con la función Anynet+) P.MODE: Se pulsa para seleccionar el modo de la imagen (pág. 15). S.MODE: Se pulsa para seleccionar el modo del sonido (pág. 17). DUAL f-g: Selección de efectos de sonido (pág. 19). AD: Enciende y apaga la descripción de audio (pág. 18). Esta función no está disponible en algunos lugares. P.SIZE: Selecciona el tamaño de imagen (pág. 16). SUBT.: Muestra subtítulos digitales (pág. 20). 3_BN68-02655A-00Spa.indd 6 2010-03-04 오후 7:54:547 01 Introducción Español Conexión de una antena Cuando el televisor se enciende por primera vez, los parámetros básicos se inician de forma automática. ✎Preparación: Conexión del cable de alimentación y la antena. ✎Si el tamaño de la moldura del cable tiene una forma anormal, no se podrá conectar adecuadamente al puerto de entrada. Plug & Play (configuración inicial) Cuando el televisor se enciende por primera vez, una secuencia de indicaciones en pantalla permite configurar los parámetros básicos. Pulse el botón POWERP. Plug & Play sólo está disponible cuando la fuente Entrada está configurada como TV. ✎Para volver al paso anterior, pulse el botón rojo. 1 Selección de un idioma Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ y a continuación pulse el botón ENTERE. Seleccione el idioma deseado para la OSD (On Screen Display). P POWER 2 Selección de Demo tienda o Uso doméstico Pulse los botones ◄ o ► y a continuación pulse el botón ENTERE. y Seleccione el modo Uso doméstico. El modo Demo tienda se utiliza en los entornos comerciales. y Recupere la configuración de la unidad desde Demo tienda a Uso doméstico (estándar): Pulse el botón del volumen del televisor. Cuando vea la OSD del volumen mantenga pulsado el botón MENU durante 5 segundos. 3 Selección de un país Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ y a continuación pulse el botón ENTERE. Seleccione el país que desee. Si no existe el país que desea en el menú, seleccione Otros. ✎Después de seleccionar el país en el menú País algunos modelos pueden presentar una opción adicional para configurar el código PIN. ✎Para introducir el código PIN, 0-0-0-0 no está disponible. 4 Selección de una antena Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ y a continuación pulse el botón ENTERE. Permite seleccionar Aérea o Cable. 5 Selección de un canal Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ y a continuación pulse el botón ENTERE. Seleccione la fuente del canal que desea memorizar. Al configurar la fuente de la antena en Cable, se muestra un paso que le permite asignar valores numéricos (frecuencias de los canales) a los canales. Para obtener más información, consulte Canal → Almacenamiento automático (pág. 13). ✎Pulse el botón ENTERE en cualquier momento para interrumpir el proceso de memorización. 6 Configuración del Modo de reloj Configure el Modo de reloj automática o manualmente. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Automático, y a continuación pulse el botón ENTERE. 7 Zona horaria Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar la zona horaria y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. (según el país) 8 Visualización de la Guía de conexión HD. Se muestra el modo de conexión para obtener una mejor calidad de pantalla HD. 9 Disfrute de su televisor. Pulse el botón ENTERE. Si desea reiniciar esta función... Seleccione Configuración - Plug & Play (configuración inicial). Escriba su código PIN de 4 dígitos. El número PIN predeterminado es “0-0-0- 0”. Si desea cambiar el número PIN, utilice la función Cambiar PIN. ANT OUT Antena VHF/UHF o Cable Entrada de alimentación 3_BN68-02655A-00Spa.indd 7 2010-03-05 오전 12:12:248 Español Conexiones Conexión a un dispositivo AV Uso de un cable HDMI o HDMI/DVI: Conexión HD (hasta 720p/1080i) Dispositivos disponibles: DVD, reproductor Blu-ray, receptor por cable HD, receptor por satélite HD STB (decodificador), decodificador, receptor por satélite (STB) ✎HDMI IN 1(DVI), 2, PC/DVI AUDIO IN x Cuando se usa una conexión de cable HDMI/DVI, se debe conectar en el terminal HDMI IN 1(DVI). Para la conexión del cable DVI, use un cable de DVI a HDMI o un adaptador de DVI-HDMI (DVI a HDMI) para la conexión del vídeo y los terminales PC/DVI AUDIO IN para el audio. x Si se conecta un dispositivo externo como un reproductor DVD/Blu-ray/decodificador/receptor por satélite STB que admita versiones HDMI anteriores a 1,3, el televisor quizás no funcione normalmente (por ejemplo, no se muestre la pantalla/no haya sonido/parpadeos molestos/colores anormales). x Si tras conectar un cable HMDI no hay sonido, compruebe la versión HDMI del dispositivo externo. Si sospecha que es una versión anterior a 1,3, póngase en contacto con el proveedor del dispositivo para confirmar la versión de HDMI y solicitar una actualización. x Es aconsejable adquirir un cable certificado HDMI. De lo contrario, la pantalla puede aparecer vacía o producirse un error de conexión. Uso de un cable de componentes (hasta 720p/1080i) o audio/vídeo (sólo 480i) y un cable euroconector (Scart) Dispositivos disponibles: Reproductor VCR, DVD, Blu-ray, decodificador, receptor por satélite STB ✎En el modo Ext., la salida DTV sólo admite vídeo y audio MPEG SD. ✎Para obtener la mejor calidad de imagen, se recomienda la conexión de componentes antes que la conexión A/V. ✎Si el tamaño de la moldura del cable tiene una forma anormal, no se podrá conectar adecuadamente al puerto de entrada. HDMI OUT DVI OUT AUDIO OUT R-AUDIO-L R W DVD DVD Rojo Blanco PR PB Y COMPONENT OUT R G B R B G Y Y W R R W R W AUDIO OUT VIDEO OUT R-AUDIO-L AUDIO OUT R-AUDIO-L R B G R W Y R W EXT VCR DVD Rojo Azul Verde Rojo Blanco Amarillo Rojo Blanco Reproductor Blu-ray 3_BN68-02655A-00Spa.indd 8 2010-03-05 오전 12:12:26Español 9 02 Conexiones Conexión a un dispositivo de audio Uso de una conexión de cable óptico (digital) o de auriculares Dispositivos disponibles: sistema de audio digital, amplificador, sistema Home Theater ✎DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) x Cuando un sistema de audio digital se conecta al terminal DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL), se reduce el volumen del televisor y del sistema. x El audio de 5.1 canales está disponible cuando el televisor se conecta a un dispositivo externo que admite audio de 5.1 canales. x Cuando el receptor (amplificador o sistema Home Theater DVD) está encendido, se puede oír la salida de sonido del terminal óptico del televisor. Cuando el televisor recibe una señal DTV, envía el sonido de 5.1 canales al amplificador o sistema Home Theater DVD. Cuando la fuente es un componente digital, como un reproductor DVD/Blu-Ray/receptor de cable o satélite (decodificador), y está conectada al televisor a través de HDMI, sólo se oye el sonido de 2 canales del amplificador o del sistema Home Theater DVD. Si desea oír el audio de 5.1 canales, conecte el terminal de la salida de audio digital del reproductor DVD/Blu-ray/decodificador/receptor por satélite STB directamente al amplificador o al sistema Home Theater. ✎Auriculares H: Puede conectar los auriculares a la salida de auriculares del equipo. Cuando están conectados los auriculares, el sonido de los altavoces integrados se desconecta. x El uso de la función de sonido puede estar restringido cuando se conectan auriculares al televisor. x El volumen de los auriculares y el del televisor se ajustan por separado. OPTICAL USB sistema de audio digital 3_BN68-02655A-00Spa.indd 9 2010-03-04 오후 7:54:5710 Español Conexiones Cambio de la fuente de entrada Fuentes Se utiliza para seleccionar TV u otras fuentes de entrada externas como reproductores de DVD/Blu-ray/receptores de televisión por cable/ satélite (decodificador). ■ TV / Ext. / PC / AV / Componente / HDMI1/DVI / HDMI2 / USB ✎ En Fuentes, se resaltan las entradas conectadas. ✎ Ext. y PC siempre permanecen activados. Editar nombre ■ Vídeo / DVD / Cable STB / Satélite STB / PVR STB / Receptor AV / Juego / Filmadora / PC / DVI PC / Dispositivos DVI / TV / IPTV / Blu-ray / HD DVD / DMA: Dé un nombre al dispositivo conectado en las tomas de entrada; de esta manera será más fácil seleccionar el dispositivo de entrada. ✎ Cuando se conecta un cable HDMI/DVI al puerto HDMI IN 1(DVI), se debe configurar el puerto en el modo DVI PC o Dispositivos DVI en Editar Nombre. RANURA DE LAS CONEXIONES COMMON INTERFACE Para ver canales de pago se debe insertar una “TARJETA CI o CI+”. y Si no se inserta una “TARJETA CI o CI+” algunos canales mostrarán el mensaje de “Señal codificada”. y En 2 o 3 minutos aparecerá en la pantalla la información del enlace que contiene un número telefónico, un identificador de “TARJETA CI o CI+”, un identificador del sistema y demás información. Si aparece un mensaje de error, póngase en contacto con su proveedor de servicios. y Si ha terminado la configuración de la información del canal, aparecerá el mensaje “Actualización completa”, indicando que la lista de canales ya se ha actualizado. ✎NOTA x Debe obtener una “TARJETA CI o CI+” en un proveedor local de servicios. x Para retirar la “TARJETA CI o CI+”, extráigala cuidadosamente con las manos, puesto que si cae al suelo se puede dañar. x Inserte la “TARJETA CI o CI+” en la dirección marcada sobre ella. x La ubicación de la ranura COMMON INTERFACE puede variar según los modelos. x La “TARJETA CI o CI+” no se admite en algunos países o zonas; consulte a su distribuidor local. x Si tiene cualquier problema, póngase en contacto con un proveedor del servicio. x Inserte la “TARJETA CI o CI+” que admita la configuración de la antena actual. La pantalla no se verá, o bien se verá distorsionada. SOURCE 3_BN68-02655A-00Spa.indd 10 2010-03-04 오후 7:54:58Español 11 03 Funciones básicas Funciones básicas Cómo desplazarse por los menús Antes de usar el televisor, siga los pasos siguientes para conocer cómo explorar el menú y seleccionar y ajustar las diversas funciones. CH LIST MUTE POWER SOURCE ON/OFF PRE-CH INTERNET MEDIA.P TOOLS RETURN MEDIA.P AD P.SIZE SUBT. A B C D DUAL EXIT INFO @ TTX/MIX MENU GUIDE 3 2 4 1 1 ENTERE / Botón direccionales: Mueva el cursor y seleccione una opción. Confirme la configuración. 2 Botón RETURN: Vuelve al menú anterior. 3 Botón MENU: Muestra el menú principal en pantalla. 4 Botón EXIT: Sale del menú en pantalla. Funcionamiento de la OSD (presentación en pantalla) El procedimiento de acceso puede variar según el menú seleccionado. 1 MENU m Las opciones del menú principal se muestran en la pantalla: Imagen, Sonido, Canal, Configuración, Entrada, Aplicación, Asistencia técnica. 2 ▲ / ▼ Seleccione un icono con los botones ▲ o ▼. 3 ENTERE Pulse ENTERE para acceder al menú secundario. 4 ▲ / ▼ Seleccione un menú secundario con los botones ▲ o ▼. 5 ◄ / ► Ajuste el valor de un elemento con los botones ◄ o ►. El ajuste de la visualización en pantalla puede variar según el menú seleccionado. 6 ENTERE Pulse el botón ENTERE para completar la configuración. 7 EXIT e Pulse EXIT Uso del botón INFO (Guía actual y próxima) La pantalla identifica el canal actual y el estado de algunos ajustes de audio-vídeo. La Guía actual y próxima muestra la información de la programación diaria de cada canal de televisión de acuerdo con la hora de emisión. y Desplácese con ◄, ► para ver la información de un programa mientras ve un canal. y Desplácese con ▲, ▼ para ver la información de otros canales. Si desea ir al canal actualmente seleccionado, pulse el botón ENTERE. DTV Air 15 DEF Life On Venus Avenue 18:00 ~ 6:00 Unclassified No Detaild Information E Planificación de la televisión Guía La información de la Guía electrónica de programas (EPG) la proporcionan las emisoras. Mediante la planificación de la programación proporcionada por las emisoras, se puede especificar por adelantado el programa que se desea ver de modo que a la hora especificada el televisor cambie automáticamente al canal del programa seleccionado. Las entradas de los programas pueden aparecer vacías o desfasadas según el estado del canal. INFO GUIDE 18:11 Jue 6 Ene Ver Información 3_BN68-02655A-00Spa.indd 11 2010-03-04 오후 7:54:5912 Español Uso de la vista del canal Uso de la vista planificada 1 Rojo (Modo Vista): Ver la lista de programas que se están emitiendo o se van a emitir. 2 Amarillo (+24 horas): Ver la lista de los programas que se van a emitir al cabo de 24 horas. 3 Blue (Modo can): Seleccione el tipo de canales que desee ver en la ventana Vista can.. (Todos, TV, Radio, Datos/Otr, Mi canal 1~4) 4 Información: Muestra detalles del programa seleccionado. 5 k (Página): Vaya a la página siguiente o anterior. 6 Botón ENTERE. – Cuando se selecciona el programa actual, se puede ver el programa seleccionado. – Cuando se selecciona un programa futuro, se puede reservar el programa seleccionado. Para cancelar una programación, vuelva a pulsar el botón ENTERE y seleccione Canc. programac.. Admin. de canales Borrar o establecer los canales favoritos y usar la guía de programas de las emisiones digitales. Seleccione un canal en las pantallas Canales, Mis canales o Programado. ■ Canales: Muestra la lista de canales según el tipo de canal. ■ *Mis canales: Muestra el grupo del canal. ■ Programado: Muestra todos los programas reservados actualmente. ✎Uso de los botones de colores con el Admin. de canales. x Rojo (Antena): Elija entre Aérea o Cable. x B Verde (Zoom): Aumenta o disminuye el número del canal. x Amarillo (Seleccionar): Seleccione los canales que desee y pulse el botón amarillo para configurar todos los canales seleccionados al mismo tiempo. La marca c aparece a la izquierda de los canales seleccionados. x Azul (Ordenar): Ordene la lista por nombre o por número de canal. x k (Página): Vaya a la página siguiente o anterior. x T (Herramientas): Muestra el menú de opciones Admin. de canales. (Los menús de las opciones pueden cambiar, dependiendo de la situación.) Iconos de la pantalla de estado del canal Iconos Función A Canal analógico. c Canal seleccionado. \ Canal configurado como favorito. ( Programa que se está emitiendo. \ Canal bloqueado. ) Programa reservado. DTV Air 800 five Home and Away 18:00 - 18:30 Drama Dani is devastated when scott makes clear his views on marriage... American Chopper Programmes resume at 06:00 Home and... No Information QVC Selection No Information Tine Team Fiv... 18:00 - 19:00 19:00 - 20:00 )Family Affairs )Dark Angel 800 ﬁve Modo Vista +24 horas Modo can Información k Página E Ver Guía 2:10 Mar 1 Jun Vista can. - Todos 1 2 3 4 5 6 u 27 Discovery 28 DiscoveryH&L 800 five 24 price-drop.tv 16 QVC d 6 R4DTT Hoy DTV Air 800 five Family Affairs 18:00 - 18:30 Drama Tanya confesses all to a stunned Babs. Conrad is anxious to hear... )Family Affairs )Dark Angel 800 800 five five 800 ﬁve Modo Vista Información E Cancelar Guía 2:10 Mar 1 Jun Vista programada 1 4 6 18:30 Hoy 19:15 Hoy c 1 1futech 2 * 24ore.tv 15 abc1 3 BBC World 23 bid-up.tv 33 Boonerang 32 Cartoon Nwk 5 Class News 4 \ Coming Soon 27 Discovery r Aérea Antena B Zoom Seleccionar Ordenar k Página THerramientas Canales Todos TV Radio Datos/Otr Analógico 3_BN68-02655A-00Spa.indd 12 2010-03-04 오후 7:55:01Español 13 03 Funciones básicas ¦ Uso de los canales favoritos * Mis canales (en Admin. de canales) Muestra todos los canales favoritos. ■ Editar Mis canalest: Puede establecer los canales seleccionados en el grupo de Mis canales. ✎Se mostrará el símbolo “*” y el canal se configurará como favorito. 1. Seleccione un canal y pulse el botón TOOLS. 2. Añada o borre un canal del grupo de canales que desee entre 1, 2, 3 y 4. x Es posible seleccionar uno o más grupos. 3. Después de cambiar la configuración, la lista de canales de cada grupo se puede ver en Mis canales. Lista de canales Puede ver todos los canales encontrados. Menú de canales ¦ Sintonización de los canales Antena (Aérea / Cable) Antes de empezar a memorizar los canales disponibles, debe indicar el tipo de origen de la señal conectada al TV (es decir, aérea o sistema de cable). País Aparece la pantalla para la introducción del número PIN. Escriba su código PIN de 4 dígitos. ■ Canal digital: Cambie el país de los canales digitales. ■ Canal analógico: Cambie el país de los canales analógicos. Almacenamiento automático Busca un canal automáticamente y lo guarda en el televisor. ✎Puede que los números de programa asignados automáticamente no correspondan a los números de programa reales o deseados. Si el canal está bloqueado con la función Bloqueo niños aparece la ventana para la introducción del código PIN. ■ Tipo de antena (Aérea / Cable): Seleccione el tipo de antena que desee memorizar. ■ Tipo de canal (Digital y Analógico / Digital / Analógico): Seleccione la fuente del canal que desea memorizar. Cuando seleccione Cable → Digital y Analógico o Digital: Proporcione un valor para explorar los canales de cable. Modo búsqueda (Completa / Red / Rápida): Busca todos los canales de las emisoras activas y los guarda en el televisor. ✎ Si se establece Rápida, se puede configurar manualmente Red, ID de red, Frecuencia, Modulación, Velocidad símbolos pulsando el botón del mando a distancia. Red (Automático / Manual): Selecciona el modo de configuración de ID de red entre Automático o Manual. ID de red: Cuando Red) está establecido en Manual, se puede configurar ID de red con los botones numéricos. Frecuencia: Muestra la frecuencia del canal. (es diferente en cada país) Modulación: Muestra los valores de modulación disponibles. Velocidad símbolos: Muestra las velocidades de símbolo disponibles. Almacenamiento manual Busca un canal manualmente y lo guarda en el televisor. ✎Si el canal está bloqueado con la función Bloqueo niños aparece la ventana para la introducción del código PIN. ■ Canal digital: Una vez finalizada la búsqueda, la lista de canales se actualiza automáticamente. ✎ Al seleccionar Antena → Aérea: Canal, Frecuencia, Ancho de banda ✎ Al seleccionar Antena → Cable: Frecuencia, Modulación, Velocidad símbolos ■ Canal analógico (Programa, Sistema de color, Sistema de sonido, Canal, Buscar): Si se produce un sonido anormal o no se produce sonido, vuelva a seleccionar el estándar de sonido adecuado. CH LIST c 1 1futech 2 * 24ore.tv 15 abc1 3 BBC World 23 bid-up.tv 33 Boonerang 32 Cartoon Nwk 5 Class News 4 \ Coming Soon 27 Discovery r Aérea Antena B Zoom Seleccionar Ordenar k Página THerramientas Canales Editar Mis canales Bloquear Vis. temporiz. Editar número canal Borrar Seleccionar todo ▼ Todos TV Radio Datos/Otr Analógico 3_BN68-02655A-00Spa.indd 13 2010-03-04 오후 7:55:0214 Español Funciones básicas ✎Modo de canal x P (modo de programa): Al finalizar la sintonización, las estaciones de emisión de su zona se habrán asignado a los números de posición comprendidos entre P0 y P99. Puede seleccionar un canal introduciendo el número de posición en este modo. x C (modo de canal aéreo) / S (modo de canal por cable): Estos dos modos permiten seleccionar un canal introduciendo el número asignado a cada emisora aérea o por cable. ¦ Edición de canales Menú de opciones del administrador de canales (en Admin. de canales) 1. Seleccione un canal y pulse el botón TOOLS. 2. Edite el nombre o el número del canal mediante los menús Modificac. nombre canal o Editar número canal. ■ Modificac. nombre canal (sólo canales analógicos): Asigne un nombre de canal personal. ■ Editar número canal (sólo canales digitales): Edite el número pulsando los botones numéricos. ¦ Otras funciones Opción búsqueda de cable (según el país) Establece opciones adicionales de búsqueda, como la frecuencia y la velocidad de símbolos para la búsqueda de red por cable. ■ Frecuencia inicio / Frecuencia parada: Configure la frecuencia de inicio o de parada (es diferente en cada país) ■ Velocidad símbolos: Muestra las velocidades de símbolo disponibles. ■ Modulación: Muestra los valores de modulación disponibles. Admin. de canales Menú de opciones del administrador de canales Establezca cada canal mediante las opciones del menú Admin. de canales (Bloquear / Desbloquear, Vis. temporiz., Ordenar, Borrar, Seleccionar todos / Deseleccionar todo). Los elementos del menú de opciones pueden variar según el estado del canal. 1. Seleccione un canal y pulse el botón TOOLS. 2. Seleccione una función y cambie la configuración. ■ Bloquear / Desbloquear: Se puede bloquear un canal para que no se pueda seleccionar ni visualizar. ✎NOTA x Esta función sólo está disponible si el Bloqueo niños está configurado como Activado. x Aparece la pantalla para la introducción del número PIN. Escriba un número de 4 dígitos, el predeterminado es “0- 0-0-0”. Cambie el PIN mediante la opción Cambiar PIN. ■ Vis. temporiz.: Se puede establecer que el canal que se desee se muestre automáticamente a una hora establecida. Para utilizar esta función, en primer lugar configure la hora actual. ✎ Cuando se ha seleccionado un canal digital, pulse el botón ► para ver el programa digital. ■ Ordenar (sólo canales analógicos): Esta operación permite cambiar los números de programa de los canales memorizados. Puede que sea necesario realizarla después de la memorización automática. ■ Borrar: Puede suprimir un canal para que se muestren los canales que desee. ■ Seleccionar todos / Deseleccionar todo: Seleccione o deseleccione todos los canales seleccionados en el administrador de canales. Transfer. lista canales Aparece la pantalla para la introducción del número PIN. Escriba su código PIN de 4 dígitos. Importa o exporta la asignación del canal. Para utilizar esta función se debe conectar un dispositivo USB. ■ Importar de USB: Importar la lista de canales del USB. ■ Exportar a USB: Exportar lista de canales a USB. Esta función está disponible cuando USB está conectado. Programado (en Admin. de canales) Puede ver, modificar o borrar un programa que haya reservado para ver. ■ Cambiar información: Cambie un programa que haya reservado para ver. ■ Canc. programac.: Cancele un programa que haya reservado para ver. ■ Información: Muestre un programa que haya reservado para ver. (También puede cambiar la información de la reserva.) ■ Seleccionar todos / Deseleccionar todo: Seleccione o deseleccione todos los programas reservados. Sintonización fina (sólo canales analógicos) Si la señal es débil o está distorsionada, realice manualmente la sintonización fina del canal. ✎Los canales bien sintonizados están marcados con un asterisco “*”. ✎Para reiniciar la sintonía fina, seleccione Restab.. 3_BN68-02655A-00Spa.indd 14 2010-03-04 오후 7:55:02Español 15 03 Funciones básicas Menú de la imagen ¦ Cambio del modo de imagen preseleccionado Modo Seleccione el tipo de imagen preferido. ■ Dinámico: Adecuado para un entorno iluminado. ■ Estándar: Adecuado para un entorno normal. ■ Película: Adecuado para ver películas en un entorno oscuro. ¦ Ajuste de la configuración de la imagen Luz de fondo / Contraste / Brillo / Nitidez / Color / Matiz (V/R) El televisor tiene diferentes opciones de configuración para controlar la calidad de la imagen. ✎NOTA x En los modos analógicos TV, Ext., AV del sistema PAL, no se puede usar la función Matiz (V/R). x En el modo PC, sólo se pueden realizar cambios en las opciones Luz de fondo, Contraste y Brillo. x La configuración de cada dispositivo externo conectado al televisor se puede ajustar y guardar. ¦ Soluciones económicas Solución económica ■ Ahorro energía (Desactivado / Bajo / Medio/ Alto / Imagen desact. / Automático)t: De este modo se ajusta el brillo del televisor, lo cual reduce el consumo de energía. Si se selecciona Imagen desact., la pantalla se apaga, pero se oye el sonido. Pulse cualquier botón, excepto el del volumen, para encender la pantalla. ■ Espera sin señal (Desactivado / 15 min / 30 min / 60 min): Para evitar un consumo de energía innecesario, establezca cuánto tiempo desea que el televisor permanezca encendido si no recibe ninguna señal. ✎ Deshabilitado cuando el PC está en el modo de ahorro de energía. ¦ Cambio de las opciones de la imagen Configuración avanzada (disponible en los modos Estándar / Película) Se puede ajustar detalladamente la configuración de la pantalla, incluidos el color y el contraste. ✎En el modo PC, sólo se pueden cambiar Contraste dinámico, Gamma y Balance de blanco. ■ Tono del negro (Desactivado / Oscuro / Más oscuro / El más oscuro): Seleccione el nivel de negro para ajustar la profundidad de la pantalla. ■ Contraste dinámico (Desactivado / Bajo / Medio / Alto): Ajuste el contraste de la pantalla. ■ Detalle de sombras (-2~+2): Aumente el brillo de las imágenes oscuras. ■ Gamma: Ajuste la intensidad del color primario. ■ Sólo modo RGB (Desactivado / Rojo / Verde / Azul): Se puede ajustar Color o Matiz (V/R) del Rojo, Verde o Azul de la imagen de un dispositivo externo (reproductor DVD, sistema Home Theatre, etc.). ■ Gama de colores (Automático / Original): Ajuste la gama de colores disponibles para crear la imagen. ■ Balance de blanco: Ajuste la temperatura del color para obtener una imagen más natural. Rojo - / Verde - / Azul -: Ajuste la intensidad de cada color (rojo, verde, azul). Rojo + / Verde + / Azul +: Ajuste el brillo de cada color (rojo, verde, azul). Restab.: Restablece los valores predeterminados de Balance de blanco. ■ Tono de piel: Mejore el tono rosado de la piel. ■ Mejora del borde (Desactivado / Activado): Mejora los bordes del objeto. P.MODE Configuración avanzada Tono del negro : Desactivado ► Contraste dinámico : Medio Detalle de sombra : -2 Gamma : 0 Sólo modo RGB : Desactivado Gama de colores : Original Balance de blanco ▼ U Mover E Entrar R Volver 3_BN68-02655A-00Spa.indd 15 2010-03-04 오후 7:55:0316 Español Funciones básicas Opciones de imagen ✎En el modo PC sólo se pueden cambiar Tono color, Tamaño y Tiempo protec. autom. ■ Tono color (Frío / Normal / Cálido1 / Cálido2) ✎ Cálido1 o Cálido2 se desactivan cuando el modo de imagen es Dinámico. ✎ La configuración de cada dispositivo externo conectado a una entrada del televisor se puede ajustar y guardar. ■ Tamaño: Es posible que el receptor de satélite o cable tenga también su propia gama de tamaños de pantalla. Sin embargo, es muy aconsejable utilizar el modo 16:9 la mayoría de las veces. Ancho automático: Ajusta automáticamente el tamaño de la imagen a la relación de aspecto de la pantalla 16:9. 16:9: Ajusta el tamaño de la imagen a 16:9, para ver los DVD o las emisiones en formato ancho. Zoom ancho: Aumenta el tamaño de la imagen más que 4:3. ✎ Ajusta la Posición mediante los botones ▲, ▼. Zoom: Amplía la imagen ancha de 16:9 en sentido vertical para que la imagen ocupe el tamaño de la pantalla. ✎ Ajuste Posición o Tamaño mediante los botones ▲, ▼. 4:3: Configuración predeterminada para una película o una emisión normal. ✎ No vea la televisión en formato 4:3 durante largos periodos de tiempo. Los rastros de bordes a la izquierda, derecha o centro de la pantalla pueden provocar un desgaste de la pantalla por la retención de la imagen que no está cubierto por la garantía. Ajuste pantalla: Muestra la imagen completa sin cortes cuando la entrada de la señal es HDMI (720p / 1080i / 1080p) o Componente (1080i / 1080p). ✎NOTA x Según la fuente de entrada, las opciones de tamaño de la imagen pueden variar. x Los elementos disponibles pueden diferir según el modelo seleccionado. x En el modo PC sólo se pueden ajustar los modos 16:9 y 4:3. x La configuración de cada dispositivo externo conectado a una entrada del televisor se puede ajustar y guardar. x Después de seleccionar Ajuste pantalla en los modos HDMI (1080i / 1080p) o Componente (1080i / 1080p): Ajuste Posición o Tamaño mediante los botones ▲, ▼, ◄, ►. x Si se usa la función Ajuste pantalla con la entrada HDMI 720p, en los laterales superior, inferior, derecho e izquierdo de la pantalla se cortará 1 línea como en la función de sobreexploración. ■ Modo Pantalla (16:9 / Zoom ancho / Zoom / 4:3): Sólo disponible cuando la imagen está configurada como Ancho automático. Se puede determinar el tamaño de imagen deseado en el tamaño de imagen panorámica 4:3 WSS o el original. Cada país europeo requiere un tamaño de imagen diferente. ✎ No disponible en los modos PC, Componente o HDMI. ■ Filtro ruido digital (Desactivado / Bajo / Medio / Alto / Automático / Autovisualización): Cuando la señal de emisión es débil pueden aparecer imágenes fantasmas o estáticas. Seleccione una de estas opciones hasta que vea la imagen de mejor calidad. Autovisualización: Cuando se cambian los canales analógicos, muestra la intensidad de la señal actual y define el filtro del ruido de la pantalla. ✎ Sólo disponible en los canales analógicos. ■ Filtro ruido MPEG (Desactivado / Bajo / Medio / Alto / Automático): Reduce el ruido MPEG para proporcionar una mejor calidad de imagen. ■ N.neg HDMI (Normal / Bajo): Selecciona el nivel de negro en la pantalla para ajustar la profundidad de ésta. ✎ Disponible sólo en el modo HDMI (señales RGB). ■ Modo película (Apagado/Auto1/Auto2) : Configura el televisor para detectar automáticamente y procesar las señales de las películas procedentes de todas las fuentes y ajustar la imagen para conseguir una calidad óptima. ✎ Disponible en TV, AV, COMPONENT (480i / 1080i) y HDMI(480i / 1080i). ■ Tpo. protección auto. (2 horas/4 horas/8 horas/10 horas/ Apagado) : Si la pantalla sigue inactiva con una imagen fija durante un cierto tiempo definido por el usuario, el salvapantallas se activa para impedir la formación de imágenes superpuestas en la pantalla. P.SIZE Opciones de imagen Tono color : Normal ► Tamaño : Ancho automático Modo Pantalla : 16:9 Filtro ruido digital : Auto Filtro ruido MPEG : Auto N.neg HDMI : Normal Modo de película : Desactivado ▼ U Mover E Entrar R Volver 3_BN68-02655A-00Spa.indd 16 2010-03-04 오후 7:55:03Español 17 03 Funciones básicas Reinicio de la imagen (Aceptar / Cancelar) Restablece la configuración predeterminada del modo de la imagen actual. ¦ Ajuste del televisor con el ordenador Defina la fuente de entrada al PC. Ajuste automáticamente los valores y las posiciones de la frecuencia Ajuste automáticot y afine la configuración. ✎No disponible en las conexiones a través del cable HDMI/DVI. Pantalla ■ Grueso / Fino: Elimina o reduce el ruido de la imagen. Si el ruido no desaparece sólo con la sintonización fina, realice los ajustes de frecuencia hasta el máximo (Grueso) y vuelva a realizar la sintonización fina. Después de reducir el ruido, vuelva a ajustar la imagen para que quede alineada en el centro de la pantalla. ■ Posición: Ajuste la posición de la pantalla del PC con los botones direccionales (▲ / ▼ / ◄ / ►). ■ Restablecer imagen: Restablece la configuración predeterminada de la imagen. Uso del televisor como una pantalla de ordenador (PC) Configuración del software del PC (basado en Windows XP) Según la versión de Windows y la tarjeta de vídeo, las pantallas reales del PC pueden ser diferentes, en cuyo caso se aplicará casi siempre la misma información de configuración básica. (En caso contrario, póngase en contacto con el fabricante del ordenador o con el distribuidor de Samsung.) 1. Haga clic en “Panel de control” en el menú de inicio de Windows. 2. Haga clic en “Apariencia y temas” en la ventana “Panel de control” y aparecerá un cuadro de diálogo. 3. Haga clic en “Pantalla” y aparecerá una cuadro de diálogo sobre la pantalla. 4. Seleccione la ficha “Configuración” en el cuadro de diálogo. y Configuración correcta del tamaño (resolución) [Óptima: 1920 x 1080 píxeles] y Si existe una opción de frecuencia vertical en el cuadro de diálogo de configuración de la pantalla, el valor correcto es “60” o “60 Hz”. Si no, haga clic en “Aceptar” y salga del cuadro de diálogo. Menú del sonido ¦ Cambio del modo de sonido preseleccionado Modo ■ Estándar: Selecciona el modo de sonido normal. ■ Música: Refuerza la música por encima de las voces. ■ Película: Ofrece el mejor sonido para películas. ■ Voz clara: Realza las voces respecto de los sonidos. ■ Amplificar: Aumenta la intensidad del sonido de alta frecuencia para permitir una mejor audición a las personas con problemas de audición. ¦ Ajuste de la configuración del sonido Ecualizador Ajuste el modo de sonido (sólo modo de sonido normal). ■ Balance I/D: Ajusta el balance entre los altavoces izquierdo y derecho. ■ 100Hz / 300Hz / 1kHz / 3kHz / 10kHz (ajuste de ancho de banda): Ajusta el nivel de frecuencias específicas de ancho de banda. ■ Restab.: Restablece la configuración del ecualizador. ¦ Sistemas de sonido, etc. Virtual Surround (Desactivado / Activado) (sólo modo de sonido estándar) Esta función proporciona una sensación de sonido surround virtual de 5.1 canales a través del par de altavoces o de los auriculares mediante la tecnología HRTF (función de transferencia relativa a la cabeza). Claridad diálogo (Desactivado / Activado) (sólo modo de sonido estándar) Esta función permite aumentar la intensidad de las voces por encima de la música de fondo o los efectos de sonido a fin de que el diálogo se pueda oír más claramente. S.MODE 3_BN68-02655A-00Spa.indd 17 2010-03-04 오후 7:55:0418 Español Funciones básicas Idioma de audio (sólo canales digitales) Cambie los valores predeterminados para los idiomas del audio. ✎El idioma disponible puede variar según la emisión. Formato audio (sólo canales digitales) Cuando el sonido se emite desde un altavoz principal y un receptor de audio, se puede originar un sonido de eco debido a las diferencias en la velocidad de decodificación entre el altavoz principal y el receptor de audio. En tales casos, use la función Altavoz de TV. ✎La opción Formato audio puede variar según la emisora. El sonido Dolby Digital de 5.1 canales sólo está disponible cuando se conecta un altavoz externo mediante un cable óptico. Descripción de audio (no está disponible en todas las localidades) (sólo canales digitales) Esta función maneja el flujo de audio de AD (Descripción de audio) cuando se envía desde el emisor con el audio principal. ■ Descripción de audio (Desactivado / Activado): Activa y desactiva la función de descripción de audio. ■ Volumen: Ajuste el volumen de la descripción del audio. Volumen automático (Desactivado / Normal / Nocturno) Para equilibrar el nivel del volumen de cada canal, se ha de configurar como Normal. ■ Nocturno: Este modo proporciona una sensación de sonido mejorada en comparación al modo Normal, ya que casi no se produce ruido. Es útil por la noche. Seleccionar altavoz (Altavoz externo / Altavoz de TV) Debido a las diferencias en la velocidad de decodificación entre el altavoz principal y el receptor de audio se puede originar un eco. En tales casos, establezca TV como Altavoz externo. ✎Cuando Seleccionar altavoz está establecido como Altavoz externo, los botones de volumen y MUTE no funcionan y se limita la configuración del sonido. ✎Compruebe si Seleccionar altavoz está establecido como Altavoz externo x Altavoz de TV: Desactivado, Altavoz externo: Activado ✎Compruebe si Seleccionar altavoz está establecido como Altavoz de TV x Altavoz de TV: Activado, Altavoz externo: Activado ✎Si no hay señal de vídeo, ambos altavoces se silencian. Configuración adicional (sólo canales digitales) ■ Nivel de audio DTV (MPEG/HE-AAC): Esta función permite reducir la disparidad de una señal de voz (que es una de las señales recibidas durante las emisiones de TV digital) al nivel deseado. ✎ Según el tipo de señal de emisión, MPEG / HE-AAC se pueden ajustar entre -10dB y 0dB. ✎ Para subir o bajar el volumen, ajuste entre un rango de 0 y -10 respectivamente. ■ Salida SPDIF: SPDIF (Interfaz digital de Sony Philips) se utiliza para proporcionar sonido digital, reduciendo las interferencias entre los altavoces y los distintos dispositivos digitales, como un reproductor DVD. Formato audio: Durante la recepción de una emisión de TV digital se puede seleccionar el formato de salida de audio digital (SPDIF) entre las opciones PCM o Dolby Digital. ✎ Si se conectan altavoces de 5.1 canales en una configuración Doby Digital, se mejora la sensación de sonido 3D interactivo. Retardo de audio: Corrija los problemas de sincronización entre audio y vídeo, cuando vea la televisión o un vídeo, y cuando escuche un salida de audio digital mediante un dispositivo externo, como un receptor AV (0ms ~ 250ms). ■ Comp Dolby Digital (Line / RF): Este función minimiza la disparidad de señal entre una señal Doby Digital y una de voz (por ejemplo, audio MPEG, HE-AAC, sonido ATV). ✎ Seleccione Line para obtener un sonido dinámico y RF para reducir la diferencia entre los sonidos fuertes y suaves durante la noche. Line: Establezca el nivel de salida de las señales superiores o inferiores a -31dB (referencia) en -20dB o -31dB. RF: Establezca el nivel de salida de las señales superiores o inferiores a -20dB (referencia) en -10dB o -20dB. AD 3_BN68-02655A-00Spa.indd 18 2010-03-04 오후 7:55:04Español 19 03 Funciones básicas Reinicio del sonido (Aceptar / Cancelar) Restablezca todas las configuraciones de sonido predeterminadas de fábrica. ¦ Selección del modo de sonido Cuando se configura Dual f-g, el modo de sonido actual se muestra en la pantalla. Tipo de audio Daul f-g Predeterminado A2 estéreo Mono Mono Cambio Estéreo Estéreo  Mono automático Dual Daul f  Daul g Daul f NICAM Estéreo Mono Mono Cambio Estéreo Mono  Estéreo automático Dual Mono  Daul f  Daul g  Daul f ✎Si la señal de estéreo es débil y el modo cambia de forma automática, cambie a mono. ✎Sólo se activa en la señal de sonido estéreo. ✎Sólo disponible cuando la fuente de Entrada se configura como TV. Menú de configuración ¦ Configuración de la hora Tiempo ■ Reloj: La configuración del reloj se utiliza en diferentes funciones del temporizador del televisor. O La hora actual aparecerá siempre que se pulse el botón INFO. ✎ Si desconecta el cable de alimentación, debe configurar el reloj de nuevo. Modo de reloj (Automático / Manual) ✎ Según la emisora y la señal, la hora automática no se puede ajustar correctamente. En este caso, ajuste la hora manualmente. ✎ La antena debe estar conectada para poder ajustar la hora automáticamente. Ajustar hora: Establezca Día, Mes, Año, Hora y Minuto manualmente. ✎ Sólo disponible si Modo de reloj está configurado como Manual. Zona horaria (según el país): Seleccione la zona horaria. ✎ Cuando País está configurado como Otros, se puede utilizar esta función. ✎ Esta función sólo está disponible si el Modo Reloj está configurado como Automático. ¦ Uso del temporizador de desconexión ■ Temp. de desc.t: Apaga automáticamente el televisor tras un periodo de tiempo establecido. (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 y 180 minutos). ✎ Para cancelar Temp. de desc. seleccione Desactivado. ¦ Activación y desactivación del temporizador ■ Temporizador 1 / Temporizador 2 / Temporizador 3: La activación y desactivación del temporizador se puede configurar de tres maneras. Debe ajustar el reloj en primer lugar. Hora encendido / Hora apagado: Puede configurar la hora y los minutos y activar o desactivar el temporizador. (Para activar el temporizador con la configuración elegida, establézcalo en Activar.) Volumen: Configure el nivel de volumen deseado. Fuente: Seleccione el contenido TV o USB que se ha de reproducir cuando el televisor se encienda automáticamente. (USB se puede seleccionar sólo cuando el dispositivo USB está conectado al televisor) Antena (cuando Fuente está configurado como TV): Seleccione ATV o DTV. Canal (cuando Fuente está configurado como TV) Permite seleccionar el canal deseado. Contenido (cuando Fuente está configurado como USB.): Seleccione una carpeta en el dispositivo USB que contenga archivos de música o de fotos que se han de reproducir cuando el televisor se encienda automáticamente. ✎ NOTA x Si no hay archivos de música en el dispositivo USB o no se ha seleccionado la carpeta que contenga los archivos de música, el temporizador no funciona correctamente. x Si sólo hay un archivo de fotos en el dispositivo USB, la presentación no se reproducirá. x Si el nombre de la carpeta es demasiado largo, ésta no se seleccionará. x Cada USB que se utiliza está asignado a su propia carpeta. Cuando se utiliza más de un mismo tipo de USB, asegúrese de que la carpeta asignada a cada dispositivo USB tenga un nombre diferente. DUAL 10 TV ATV 1 00 00 ▲ ▼ 00 00 Temporizador 1 Hora encendido Hora apagado Volumen Desactivar Desactivar Dom Lun Mar Mié Jue Vie Sáb Una vez Fuente Antena Canal Repetir L Mover U Ajustar E Entrar R Regresar 3_BN68-02655A-00Spa.indd 19 2010-03-04 오후 7:55:0520 Español Funciones básicas Repetir: Seleccione Una vez, Todos, Lun~Vie, Lun~Sáb, Sáb~Dom o Manual para configurarlo como más le convenga. Si selecciona Manual, puede configurar el día en que desee activar el temporizador. ✎ La marca c indica que se ha seleccionado el día. ✎Apagado automático (sólo disponible cuando el televisor se ha encendido con el temporizador): El televisor se apagará automáticamente 3 horas después de que se haya dejado inactivo para prevenir un sobrecalentamiento. ¦ Programas de bloqueo Seguridad ✎La pantalla de la entrada del PIN aparece antes que la pantalla de configuración. ✎Escriba un número de 4 dígitos, el predeterminado es “0-0-0-0”. Cambie el PIN mediante la opción Cambiar PIN. ■ Bloqueo niños (Desactivado / Activado): Bloquee los canales en el Admin. de canales para impedir que los usuarios no autorizados, como los niños, accedan a programas inadecuados para ellos. ✎ Sólo disponible cuando la fuente de Entrada se configura como TV. ■ Bloqueo paterno (según el país): Impida que los usuarios no autorizados, como los niños, accedan a programas inadecuados para ellos con un código PIN de 4 dígitos establecido por el usuario. Si el canal seleccionado está bloqueado, se muestra el símbolo “\”. Perm. todo: Desbloquea todas las clasificaciones de TV. ✎ Cuando Bloqueo paterno está establecido en 18, la pantalla para introducir el PIN aparece antes de cambiar los canales (sólo Francia). ✎ Se pueden bloquear los programas de TV estableciendo la clasificación Bloqueo paterno como I (niños), T (todo los públicos), SC (sin clasificar) y X (clasificada X). Bloqueo paterno está establecido en X, la pantalla para introducir el PIN aparece siempre antes de cambiar los canales (sólo España). ■ Cambiar PIN: Cambie su número ID personal necesario para configurar el televisor. ✎ Si ha olvidado el código PIN, pulse los botones del mando a distancia en la siguiente secuencia para reiniciar el PIN a “0-0-0-0”: POWER (apagar) → MUTE → 8 → 2 → 4 → POWER (encender). ¦ Otras funciones Idioma ■ Idioma del menú: Ajuste el idioma de los menús. ■ Idioma del teletexto: Establezca el idioma que desee para el teletexto. ✎ El inglés es el idioma predeterminado cuando en una emisión no está disponible la selección de idiomas. ■ Preferencia (Idioma principal audio / Idioma secundario audio / Idioma princ. subtítulos / Idioma sec. subtítulos / Idioma principal del teletexto / Idioma secundario del teletexto): Seleccione un idioma, que será el predeterminado cuando se seleccione un canal. Subtítulos Use este menú para configurar el modo de Subtítulos. ■ Subtítulos (Desactivado / Activado): Activa o desactiva los subtítulos. ■ Modo (Normal / Disc. Auditivos): Ajusta el modo de la función de subtítulos. ■ Idioma de subtítulos: Establece el idioma de los subtítulos. ✎ Si el programa que se está viendo no admite la opción Disc. Auditivos, automáticamente se activa Normal aunque se seleccione Disc. Auditivos. ✎ El inglés es el idioma predeterminado cuando en una emisión no está disponible la selección de idiomas. Texto digital (Inhabilitar / Habilitar) (sólo Reino Unido) Si el programa se emite con texto digital, esta opción está activada. Ej. aut. serv. datos (Desactivado / Activado) Establece si se ha de ejecutar, o no, automáticamente el servicio de datos. Ej. aut. serv. datos ejecuta automáticamente el servicio de datos sin intervención del usuario. ✎Si hay otra función secundaria en ejecución, Ej. aut. serv. datos tal vez no funcione. General ■ Modo Juego (Desactivado / Activado): Cuando se conecta una videoconsola como PlayStation™ o Xbox™, se puede experimentar una sensación más realista al seleccionar el modo de juegos. SUBT. 3_BN68-02655A-00Spa.indd 20 2010-03-04 오후 7:55:05Español 21 03 Funciones básicas ✎NOTA x Precauciones y limitaciones del modo de juego. – Si desea desconectarse de la consola de videojuegos y conectarse a otro dispositivo externo, ajuste la opción Modo Juego como Desactivado en el menú de configuración. – Si visualiza el menú de TV en el Modo Juego, la pantalla tiembla ligeramente. x Modo Juego no está disponible cuando la fuente de entrada está en el modo TV o PC. x Tras conectar la consola de videojuegos, configure Modo Juego como Activado. Desgraciadamente, puede que advierta una reducción en la calidad de la imagen. x Si Modo Juego se configura como Activado: – El modo Imagen se configura como Estándar y el de Sonido como Película. – Ecualizador no está disponible. ■ Transpar. de menú (Brillo / Oscuro): Establezca la transparencia del menú. ■ Melodía (Desactivado / Bajo / Medio / Alto): Establezca que una melodía se oiga cuando el televisor se encienda o se apague. Interfaz común ■ Menú CI: Permite al usuario realizar selecciones en el menú CAM proporcionado. Seleccione el menú CI según el menú de la tarjeta PC. ■ Info. sobre la aplicación: Vea la información sobre el CAM insertado en la ranura CI y sobre la “TARJETA CI o CI+” insertada en el CAM. La instalación del CAM puede efectuarse con el televisor encendido o apagado. 1. Puede adquirir el módulo del CAM de CI por teléfono o en el distribuidor más cercano a su domicilio. 2. Inserte firmemente la “TARJETA CI o CI+” en el CAM en la dirección de la flecha. 3. Inserte el CAM con la “TARJETA CI o CI+” en la ranura de la interfaz común en la dirección de la flecha de modo que quede paralela a la ranura. 4. Compruebe si se ven imágenes en un canal de señal codificada. ¦ Imagen sobre imagen (PIP) Puede ver simultáneamente el sintonizador de televisión y otra PIPt fuente de vídeo externa. PIP, imagen sobre imagen, no se admite en el mismo modo. ✎NOTA x Para obtener información sobre el sonido de PIP, consulte las instrucciones de Selección de sonido. x Si apaga el televisor mientras mira la televisión en el modo PIP, la ventana PIP desaparecerá. x Puede notar que la imagen de la ventana PIP llega a ser ligeramente artificial cuando utiliza la pantalla principal para visualizar juegos o karaoke. x Configuración de PIP Imagen principal Imagen secundaria Componente, HDMI1/DVI, HDMI2, HDMI3, HDMI4, PC TV ■ PIP (Desactivado / Activado): Active o desactive la función PIP. ■ Canal: Seleccione el canal de la pantalla secundaria. ■ Tamaño (Õ/Ã): Seleccione un tamaño para la imagen secundaria. ■ Posición (Ã/–/—/œ): Seleccione una posición para la imagen secundaria. ■ Selección de sonido (Principal / Secundario): Puede elegir el sonido que desee (Principal / Secundario) en el modo PIP. Menú de asistencia técnica Autodiagnóstico ✎El autodiagnóstico puede tardar unos segundos; es parte del funcionamiento normal del televisor. ■ Prueba de imagen (Sí / No): Se utiliza para comprobar si hay problemas en la imagen. ■ Prueba de sonido (Sí / No): Utilice el sonido de la melodía incorporada para comprobar si hay problemas con el sonido. ✎ Si no oye sonido en los altavoces del televisor, antes de realizar la prueba de sonido, asegúrese de que Seleccionar altavoz esté configurado como Altavoz de TV en el menú Sonido. ✎ La melodía se oirá durante la prueba aunque Seleccionar altavoz esté establecido como Altavoz externo o se haya silenciado el sonido con el botón MUTE. ■ Editar número canal (sólo canales digitales): La calidad de la recepción del canal HDTV es perfecta o los canales no están disponibles. Ajuste la antena para aumentar la intensidad de la señal. ■ Solución de problemas: Si parece que hay problemas en el televisor, consulte este apartado. ✎ Si no se puede aplicar ninguno de los consejos para solucionar los errores, póngase en contacto con el centro de atención al cliente de Samsung. 3_BN68-02655A-00Spa.indd 21 2010-03-04 오후 7:55:0522 Español Funciones básicas Actualización del software Actualización del software se puede realizar a través de una señal de emisión o descargando el último firmware desde samsung.com en un dispositivo de memoria USB. Versión actual es el software ya instalado en el televisor. ✎El software se representa como “Año/Mes/Día_Versión”. Instalación de la versión más actual ■ Por USB: Inserte la unidad USB que contenga el archivo de la actualización del firmware descargado desde “www. samsung.com” en el televisor. No desconecte la alimentación ni extraiga la unidad USB antes de finalizar las actualizaciones. El televisor se apagará y se encenderá automáticamente después de completar la actualización del firmware. Cuando se actualiza el software, la configuración del vídeo y del audio que se haya efectuado vuelve a la configuración predeterminada. Le aconsejamos que anote la configuración para recuperarla fácilmente después de la actualización. ■ Por canal: Actualice el software a través de una señal de emisión. ✎ Si selecciona esta función durante la fase de transmisión del software, éste se busca automáticamente y se descarga. ✎ El tiempo necesario para la descarga del software lo determina el estado de la señal. ■ Modo suspensión: A la hora seleccionada se ejecuta automáticamente una actualización manual. Dado que la alimentación de la unidad está activada internamente, es posible que la pantalla LED del producto se encienda ligeramente. Este fenómeno puede durar más de 1 hora mientras la actualización del software se completa. ■ Software alternativo (copia de seguridad): Si hay problemas con el nuevo firmware que afecta al funcionamiento, puede cambiar el software a la versión anterior. ✎ Si se ha cambiado el software, se muestra el software existente. Guía de conexión HD Consulte esta información cuando conecte dispositivos externos al televisor. Contacto con Samsung Consulte esta información si el televisor no funciona adecuadamente o si desea actualizar el software. Puede buscar información relacionada con nuestros centros de llamadas, para descargar los productos y el software. Actualización del software Por USB ► Por canal Modo suspensión : Desactivado Software alternativo 2010/01/15_00000 U Mover E Entrar R Volver Versión actual 2010/01/18_000001 USB Unidad USB Panel posterior del TV 3_BN68-02655A-00Spa.indd 22 2010-03-04 오후 7:55:06Español 23 04 Funciones avanzadas Funciones avanzadas Conexión a un PC Uso de cables HDMI/DVI o D-sub Modos de visualización (entradas D-Sub y HDMI/DVI) La resolución óptima es 1360 x 768 @ 60 Hz. Modo Resolución Frecuencia horizontal (kHz) Frecuencia vertical (Hz) Frecuencia de reloj de píxeles (MHz) Polaridad de sincronización (H/V) IBM 640 x 350 720 x 400 31.469 31.469 70.086 70.087 25.175 28.322 +/- -/+ MAC 640 x 480 832 x 624 35.000 49.726 66.667 74.551 30.240 57.284 -/- -/- VESA CVT 720 x 576 1280 x 720 35.910 56.456 59.950 74.777 32.750 95.750 -/+ -/+ VESA DMT 640 x 480 640 x 480 640 x 480 800 x 600 800 x 600 800 x 600 1024 x 768 1024 x 768 1024 x 768 1280 x 720 1360 x 768 31.469 37.500 37.861 37.879 46.875 48.077 48.363 56.476 60.023 45.000 47.712 59.940 75.000 72.809 60.317 75.000 72.188 60.004 70.069 75.029 60.000 60.015 25.175 31.500 31.500 40.000 49.500 50.000 65.000 75.000 78.750 74.250 85.500 -/- -/- -/- +/+ +/+ +/+ -/- -/- +/+ +/+ +/+ VESA GTF 1280 x 720 52.500 70.000 89.040 -/+ ✎NOTA x En una conexión de cable HDMI/DVI, se debe utilizar el terminal HDMI IN 1(DVI). x No se admite el modo entrelazado. x El aparato puede funcionar incorrectamente si se selecciona un formato de vídeo que no sea estándar. x Los modos Independiente y Compuesto no se admiten. SOG (Sincronización en verde) no se admite. AUDIO OUT DVI OUT AUDIO OUT PC OUT 3_BN68-02655A-00Spa.indd 23 2010-03-04 오후 7:55:0724 Español Funciones avanzadas Media Play ¦ Conexión de un dispositivo USB 1. Encienda el televisor. 2. Conecte un dispositivo USB que contenga archivos de fotos, música o películas al terminal USB (HDD) que se encuentra en el lateral del televisor. 3. Cuando el USB está conectado al televisor, aparece una ventana emergente. A continuación puede seleccionar Media Play. ✎Puede que no funcione correctamente con archivos multimedia sin licencia. ✎Lista de lo que debe saber antes de utilizar Media Play (USB) x MTP (Protocolo de transferencia de recursos) no se admite. x El sistema de archivos admite FAT16, FAT32 y NTFS. x Ciertos tipos de cámara digital USB y dispositivos de audio quizás no sean compatibles con este televisor. x Media Play sólo admite dispositivos USB de clase de almacenamiento masivo (MSC). MSC es un dispositivo de clase de almacenamiento masivo sólo de transporte de gran capacidad. Ejemplos de MSC son las unidades de almacenamiento en miniatura, los lectores de tarjetas Flash y las unidades de disco duro de USB (no se admiten concentradores de USB). Los dispositivos se deben conectar directamente al puerto USB del televisor. x Antes de conectar el dispositivo al televisor, haga una copia de seguridad de sus archivos para evitar daños o pérdidas de datos. SAMSUNG no se hace responsable por cualquier daño en los archivos o pérdida de datos. x Conecte un disco duro de USB al puerto reservado, el puerto USB (HDD). x No desconecte el dispositivo USB mientras se esté cargando. x Cuanto mayor sea la resolución de la imagen, más tiempo tardará en visualizarse en la pantalla. x La resolución JPEG máxima admitida es 15360 x 8640 píxeles. x Con archivos dañados o que no se admiten, se muestra el mensaje “Formato de archivo no admitido”. x Si los archivos están ordenados por la vista básica, se pueden mostrar hasta 1000 archivos en cada carpeta. x Los archivos MP3 con DRM descargados desde un sitio de pago no se pueden reproducir. La tecnología Gestión de derechos digitales (DRM) admite la creación de contenidos, la distribución y gestión de éstos de modo integrado y general, incluida la protección de los derechos e intereses de los proveedores de los contenidos, la prevención de copias ilegales de los contenidos, así como la gestión de cobros y acuerdos. x Si hay más de 2 dispositivos PTP conectados, sólo se puede utilizar uno al mismo tiempo. x Si se ha conectado más dos dispositivos MSC, alguno de ellos puede que no se reconozca. Un dispositivo que exija mucha energía (más de 500mA o 5 V), quizás no se admita. x Si se muestra un mensaje de advertencia de sobrealimentación al conectar o usar un dispositivo USB, es posible que el dispositivo no se reconozca o que funcione incorrectamente. x Si el televisor no recibe señal de entrada durante el tiempo establecido en Tiempo protec. autom., se iniciará el salvapantallas. x El modo de ahorro de energía de algunas unidades de disco duro externas se puede desactivar automáticamente cuando éstas se conectan al televisor. x Si se utiliza un cable de extensión USB, es posible que el dispositivo USB no se reconozca o que los archivos del dispositivo no se puedan leer. x Si no se reconoce un dispositivo USB conectado al televisor, la lista de archivos del dispositivo está dañada o un archivo de la lista no se reproduce, conecte el dispositivo USB al ordenador, formatee el dispositivo y compruebe la conexión. x Si un archivo borrado del PC aún se encuentra cuando se ejecuta el reproductor multimedia, utilice la función “Vaciar la papelera de reciclaje” del PC para borrar permanentemente el archivo. Disfrute de archivos de fotos, música y películas almacenados en un dispositivo de clase de almacenamiento masivo (MSC) USB o en su PC. SUM Cambiar disp. Ver dispositivos E Entrar R Volver MediaPlay Vídeos USB Unidad USB Panel posterior del TV MEDIA.P 3_BN68-02655A-00Spa.indd 24 2010-03-04 오후 7:55:08Español 25 04 Funciones avanzadas ¦ Pantalla de visualización Vaya al archivo que desee mediante los botones arriba/abajo/derecha/izquierda y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE o � (reproducir). El archivo se reproduce. ✎Admite Ver dispositivos y Inicio en la página de inicio de Media Play. Vídeos Reproducción de vídeo 1. Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar Vídeos y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE en el menú Media Play. 2. Pulse los botones ◄/►/▲/▼ para seleccionar el archivo que desee en la lista de archivos. 3. Pulse los botones ENTERE o � (reproducir). – El archivo seleccionado se visualiza en la parte superior con su tiempo de reproducción. – Si se desconoce la información de la hora del vídeo, no se muestran ni el tiempo de reproducción ni la barra de progreso. – Durante la reproducción de vídeo, se puede realizar búsquedas con los botones ◄ y ►. ✎En este modo, se pueden ver clips de películas contenidos en un juego, pero no se puede reproducir éste. y Formatos de subtítulo admitidos Nombre Extensión del archivo Formato Texto basado en tiempo MPEG-4 .ttxt XML SAMI .smi HTML SubRip .srt basado en cadenas SubViewer .sub basado en cadenas Micro DVD .sub o .txt basado en cadenas Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 /Movie 01.avi 1/1 Movie 01.avi SUM Movie 03.avi Movie 05.avi Movie 07.avi Movie 09.avi Movie 02.avi Movie 04.avi Movie 06.avi Movie 08.avi Movie 10.avi Seleccionar Clasif. T Herramientas Información: Puede confirmar el nombre del archivo seleccionado y el número de archivos y páginas. Sección de la lista de clasificación: Muestra la norma de clasificación. ✎ La norma de clasificación es diferente según los contenidos. Funcionamiento de los botones Rojo (Cambiar disp.): Selecciona un dispositivo conectado. B Verde (Preferencia): Establece la preferencia del archivo (no se admite en la vista básica) Amarillo (Seleccionar): Selecciona varios archivos de la lista de archivos. Los archivos seleccionados se marcan con un símbolo. Azul ( Clasif. ): Selecciona la lista de clasificación. THerramientas : Muestra el menú de opciones. ✎ Gracias a los botones � (FF) o µ (REW), la lista de archivos se puede mover a la página siguiente o anterior. Sección de la lista de archivos: Puede confirmar los archivos y grupos que se han ordenado por cada categoría. Vídeos Página Cambiar disp. Movie 01.avi 00:04:03 / 00:07:38 1/1 SUM E Pausa L Saltar T Herramientas R Volver 3_BN68-02655A-00Spa.indd 25 2010-03-04 오후 7:55:1026 Español Funciones avanzadas y Formatos de vídeo admitidos Extensión del archivo Contenedor Códec de vídeo Resolución Velocidad de transferencia (fps) Velocidad en bits (Mbps) Códec de audio *.avi *.mkv AVI MKV Divx 3.11 / 4.x / 5.1 / 6.0 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 8 MP3 / AC3 / LPCM / ADPCM / DTS Core XviD 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 8 H.264 BP / MP / HP 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 25 MPEG4 SP / ASP 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 8 *.asf ASF Divx 3.11 / 4.x / 5.1 / 6.0 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 8 MP3 / AC3 / LPCM / ADPCM / WMA XviD 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 8 H.264 BP / MP / HP 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 25 MPEG4 SP / ASP 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 8 *.wmv ASF Window Media Video v9 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 25 WMA *.mp4 MP4 H.264 BP / MP / HP 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 25 MPEG4 SP / ASP 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 8 MP3 / ADPCM / AAC XVID 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 8 *.3gp 3GPP H.264 BP / MP / HP 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 25 ADPCM / AAC / HE-AAC MPEG4 SP / ASP 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 8 *.vro VRO VOB MPEG1 1920x1080 24 / 25 / 30 30 AC3 / MPEG / LPCM MPEG2 1920x1080 24 / 25 / 30 30 *.mpg *.mpeg PS MPEG1 1920x1080 24 / 25 / 30 30 AC3 / MPEG / LPCM / AAC MPEG2 1920x1080 24 / 25 / 30 30 H.264 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 25 *.ts *.tp *.trp TS MPEG2 1920x1080 24 / 25 / 30 30 AC3 / AAC / MP3 / DD+ / HE-AAC H.264 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 25 VC1 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 25 Otras restricciones ✎ NOTA x Si hay problemas con el contenido de un códec, éste no será compatible. x Si la información de un contenedor es incorrecta y el archivo presenta errores, no se podrá reproducir correctamente el contenedor. x El sonido y el vídeo pueden no funcionar si el contenido tiene una velocidad de bits y de transferencia superior a la de marco/ segundo relacionada en la tabla anterior. x Si hay un error en la tabla de índice, la función de búsqueda (omitir) no se admite. Decodificador de vídeo Decodificador de audio • Admite hasta H.264, nivel 4.1 • H.264 FMO/ASO/RS, VC1 SP/MP/AP L4 y AVCHD no se admiten. • GMC no se admite. • H.263 no se admite. • Admite hasta WMA 7, 8, 9, STD • WMA 9 PRO no admite multicanal superior a 2 canales o audio sin pérdida. • La frecuencia de muestreo de WMA de 22050 Hz mono no se admite. 3_BN68-02655A-00Spa.indd 26 2010-03-04 오후 7:55:10Español 27 04 Funciones avanzadas Continuación de la reproducción de un archivo de película (reanudar reproducción) Si sale de la función de reproducción de vídeos, se puede reproducir posteriormente desde el punto en que se detuvo. 1. Seleccione el archivo de película que desee seguir reproduciendo pulsando los botones ◄ o ► en la sección de la lista de archivos. 2. Pulse el botón � (Reproducir) / ENTERE. 3. Seleccione Contin. (reanudar reproducción) con el botón azul. La película se reproducirá desde el punto en que se detuvo. ✎ El botón azul está disponible al reanudar la reproducción. ✎ Si la función Recordar contin. pelíc. está configurada como Activado en el menú Config. aparecerá un mensaje emergente cuando se reanude la reproducción de un archivo de película. Música Reproducción de música 1. Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar Música y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE en el menú Media Play. 2. Pulse los botones ◄/►/▲/▼ para seleccionar el archivo que desee en la lista de archivos. 3. Pulse los botones ENTERE o � (reproducir). – Durante la reproducción de música, se puede realizar búsquedas con los botones ◄ y ►. – Los botones � (REW) y µ (FF) no funcionan durante la reproducción. ✎Sólo se muestran los archivos con la extensión MP3 y PCM. Los archivos con otras extensiones no se muestran, aunque se hayan guardado en el mismo dispositivo USB. ✎Si, al reproducir archivos MP3, el sonido no se oye correctamente, ajuste Ecualizador en el menú Sonido. (Un archivo MP3 demasiado modulado puede ocasionar problemas de sonido.) Fotos Visualización de una foto (o una presentación) 1. Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar Fotos y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE en el menú Media Play. 2. Pulse los botones ◄/►/▲/▼ para seleccionar el archivo que desee en la lista de archivos. 3. Pulse los botones ENTERE o � (reproducir). – Mientras se muestra una lista de fotos, pulse los botones � (reproducir) / ENTERE del mando a distancia para iniciar la presentación. – En la presentación se usan todos los archivos de la sección de la lista de archivos. – Durante la presentación, los archivos se muestran en orden a partir del archivo que se muestra en este momento. ✎Los archivos de música se pueden reproducir automáticamente durante la presentación si Música de fondo está configurado como Activado. ✎El Modo BGM no se puede cambiar mientras no haya finalizado la carga de BGM. Image1024.jpg 1024x768 2010/2/1 3/15 SUM E Pausa L Anterior/Siguiente T Herramientas R Volver Normal 3/15 I Love you Jhon Music 1 No Singer Music 2 No Singer Music 3 No Singer Music 4 No Singer Music 5 No Singer I Love You Jhon 1st Album Pop 2010 4.2MB 01:10 / 04:02 SUM E Pausa L Saltar T Herramientas R Volver Lis. rep. Movie 01.avi 00:04:03 / 00:07:38 1/1 SUM Contin. E Pausa L Saltar T Herramientas R Volver Reanuda últ. escena Contin. 3_BN68-02655A-00Spa.indd 27 2010-03-04 오후 7:55:1228 Español Funciones avanzadas ¦ Reproducción de varios archivos Reproducción de archivos de vídeo/música/fotos seleccionados 1. Pulse el botón amarillo en la lista de archivos para seleccionar el archivo que desee. 2. Repita el proceso anterior para seleccionar varios archivos. ✎ NOTA x La marca c aparece a la izquierda de los archivos seleccionados. x Para cancelar la selección, pulse de nuevo el botón amarillo. x Para cancelar la selección de todos los archivos, pulse el botón TOOLS y seleccione Deseleccionar todo. 3. Pulse el botón TOOLS y seleccione Reproducir conten. selec.. Reproducción de grupos de archivos de vídeo/música/fotos 1. Cuando se muestre una lista de archivos, vaya a cualquier archivo del grupo deseado. 2. Pulse el botón TOOLS y seleccione Rep.gr. act.. ¦ Funciones adicionales del reproductor multimedia Clasificación de la lista de archivos Pulse el botón azul en la lista de archivos para ordenarlos. Categorías Función Vídeos Música Fotos Vista básica Muestra toda la carpeta. Puede ver una foto seleccionando la carpeta. > > > Título Ordena y muestra los títulos de archivos por símbolo/número/orden alfabético/especial. > > > Preferencia Ordena y muestra los archivos por preferencias. Puede cambiar la preferencia del archivo en la sección de la lista de archivos con el botón verde. > > > Fecha última Ordena y muestra los archivos por la fecha más reciente. > > Fecha primera Ordena y muestra los archivos por la fecha más antigua. > > Artista Ordena los archivos de música por artista y en orden alfabético. > Álbum Ordena los archivos de música por álbum y en orden alfabético. > Género Ordena los archivos de música por género. > Ánimo Ordena los archivos de música por el tipo de estado de ánimo. Puede cambiar la información del tipo de música. > Mensual Ordena y muestra los archivos de fotos por meses. Ordena sólo por meses (de enero a diciembre) sin tener en cuenta el año. > /Movie 01.avi 1/1 SUM Movie 01.avi Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 Movie 03.avi Movie 05.avi Movie 07.avi Movie 09.avi Movie 02.avi Movie 04.avi Movie 06.avi Movie 08.avi Movie 10.avi Cambiar disp. Seleccionar Clasif. T Herramientas Vídeos Archivos 2 sel. Página 3_BN68-02655A-00Spa.indd 28 2010-03-04 오후 7:55:14Español 29 04 Funciones avanzadas Menú de opciones de reproducción de vídeos/música/fotos Pulse el botón TOOLS durante la reproducción de un archivo. Categorías Función Vídeos Música Fotos Título Puede ir a otro archivo directamente. > Modo de repetición Puede reproducir archivos de películas o de música repetidamente. > > Tamaño de imagen Puede ajustar el tamaño de la imagen según las preferencias. > Configuración de la imagen Puede ajustar la configuración de la imagen (pág. 15, 16, 17). > > Configuración del sonido Puede ajustar la configuración del sonido (pág. 17, 18, 19). > > > Config. de subtítulos Puede reproducir el archivo de vídeo con subtítulos. Esta función sólo se activa si los subtítulos tienen el mismo nombre de archivo que el archivo de vídeo. > Detener presentación / Iniciar visionado automático Se puede iniciar o detener una presentación. > Vel. secuencia Puede seleccionar la velocidad de presentación durante la misma. > Música de fondo Puede seleccionar una música de fondo para la presentación. > Zoom Puede ampliar las imágenes en el modo de pantalla completa. > Girar Puede girar las imágenes en el modo de pantalla completa. > Información Puede ver información detallada acerca del archivo reproducido. > > > Config. Uso del menú de configuración ■ Recordar contin. pelíc. (reanudar reproducción) (Activado / Desactivado): Seleccionar para mostrar el mensaje de ayuda emergente para la reproducción de una película desde el punto en que se dejó de ver anteriormente. ■ Obtener código de registro de DivX® VOD : Muestra el código de registro autorizado para el televisor. Si se conecta al sitio web de DivX y registra el código de registro con una cuenta personal, puede descargar el archivo de registro VOD. Si reproduce el registro VOD mediante el reproductor multimedia, el registro se ha terminado. ✎ Para obtener más información sobre DivX® VOD, visite “www.DivX.com”. ■ Obtener código desactivación DivX® VOD : Si DivX® VOD no está registrado, aparece el código de desactivación de registro. Si ejecuta esta función cuando DivX® VOD se ha registrado, el registro actual de DivX® VOD se desactiva. ■ Información: Seleccione para ver la información del dispositivo conectado. 3_BN68-02655A-00Spa.indd 29 2010-03-04 오후 7:55:1430 Español Funciones avanzadas Anynet+ Anynet+ es una función que permite controlar con el mando a distancia del televisor Samsung todos los dispositivos de Samsung ¿Qué es Anynet+?t conectados que sean compatibles con Anynet+. El sistema Anynet+ sólo se puede usar con dispositivos de Samsung que tengan la función Anynet+. Para asegurarse de que el dispositivo de Samsung tenga dicha función, compruebe si lleva el logotipo Anynet+. Para conectar al sistema Home Theatre 1. Conecte los terminales HDMI IN (1(DVI) o 2) del televisor y el terminal HDMI OUT del dispositivo Anynet+ correspondiente mediante un cable HDMI. 2. Conecte el terminal HDMI IN del sistema Home Theatre y el terminal HDMI OUT del dispositivo Anynet+ correspondiente mediante un cable HDMI. ✎NOTA x Conecte el cable óptico entre el terminal DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) del televisor y la entrada de audio digital del sistema Home Theatre. x Si se sigue la conexión anterior, el terminal Optical sólo produce la salida de 2 canales de audio. Sólo oirá sonido de los altavoces frontales izquierdo y derecho y del subwoofer del sistema Home Theatre. Para escuchar el canal de audio 5.1, conecte el terminal DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) del DVD/decodificador de satélite (es decir, dispositivo Anynet 1 o 2) directamente al amplificador o al sistema Home Theater, no al televisor. x Conecte sólo un sistema Home Theatre. x Puede conectar un dispositivo Anynet+ mediante el cable HDMI. Algunos cables HDMI pueden no admitir las funciones Anynet+. x Anynet+ funciona cuando el dispositivo de AV que admite Anynet+ se encuentra en estado de espera o de encendido. x Anynet+ admite hasta 12 dispositivos de AV en total. Tenga en cuenta que puede conectar hasta 3 dispositivos del mismo tipo. Panel posterior del TV Dispositivo Anynet+ 1 Dispositivo Anynet+2 Home Theatre Cable HDMI Cable HDMI Cable HDMI Cable óptico 3_BN68-02655A-00Spa.indd 30 2010-03-04 오후 7:55:14Español 31 04 Funciones avanzadas Menú Anynet+ El menú Anynet+ cambia según el tipo y el estado de los dispositivos Anynet+ conectados al televisor. Menú Anynet+ Descripción Ver la televisión Cambia el modo Anynet+ al modo de emisión de TV. Lista de dispositivos Muestra la lista de dispositivos de Anynet+. MENU (nombre_dispositivo) Muestra los menús del dispositivo conectado. Por ejemplo, si se ha conectado un grabador de DVD, se muestra el menú del disco del grabador de DVD. INFO (nombre_dispositivo) Muestra el menú de reproducción del dispositivo conectado. Por ejemplo, si se ha conectado un grabador de DVD, se muestra el menú del disco del grabador de DVD. Grabación: (*grabador) Inicia inmediatamente la grabación en el grabador. (Sólo está disponible en los dispositivos que admiten la función de grabación.) Detener la grabación: (*grabador) Detiene la grabación. Receptor La reproducción del sonido se efectúa a través del receptor. Cuando hay conectados varios dispositivos de grabación, éstos se muestran como (*grabador), pero si sólo hay conectado un dispositivo, éste se muestra como (*nombre_dispositivo). ¦ Configuración de Anynet+ ■ Configuración Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) (Desactivado / Activado): Para usar la función Anynet+, Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) debe estar configurado como Activado. ✎ Cuando la función Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) está desactivada, todas las operaciones relacionadas con Anynet+ se desactivan. Apagado automático (No / Sí): Configuración de un dispositivo Anynet+ para que se desactive automáticamente cuando el televisor se apaga. ✎ La fuente activa del televisor se debe configurar para que éste utilice la función Anynet+. ✎ Aunque un dispositivo externo aún esté grabando, se puede apagar. ¦ Conmutación entre dispositivos Anynet+ 1. Se muestran todos los dispositivos Anynet+ conectados al televisor. ✎ Si no encuentra el dispositivo que desea, pulse el botón rojo para actualizar la lista. 2. Seleccione un canal y pulse el botón ENTERE. Puede cambiar al dispositivo seleccionado. ✎ Sólo cuando Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) se configura como Activado en el menú Aplicación, aparece el menú Lista de dispositivos. x El cambio al dispositivo seleccionado puede tardar unos 2 minutos. No se puede cancelar la operación de cambio de dispositivo mientras ésta se está efectuando. x Si ha seleccionado el modo de entrada externa pulsando el botón SOURCE, no podrá usar la función Anynet+. Asegúrese de cambiar al dispositivo Anynet+ mediante la Lista de dispositivos. 3_BN68-02655A-00Spa.indd 31 2010-03-04 오후 7:55:1532 Español Funciones avanzadas ¦ Grabación La grabadora de Samsung permite efectuar una grabación de un programa de televisión. 1. Seleccione Grabación. ✎ Cuando hay más de dos dispositivos de grabación x Cuando hay varios dispositivos de grabación conectados, éstos se muestran en una lista. Seleccione un dispositivo de grabación en Lista de dispositivos. ✎ Si no se muestra el dispositivo de grabación, seleccione Lista de dispositivos y pulse el botón rojo para buscar los dispositivos. 2. Pulse el botón EXIT para salir. ✎ Se pueden grabar las transmisiones de la fuente seleccionando Grabación: (nombre_dispositivo). ✎ Si pulsa el botón � (REC), grabará lo que está viendo en ese momento. Si está viendo un vídeo desde otro dispositivo, se graba el vídeo de éste. ✎ Antes de grabar, compruebe si la toma de antena está conectada correctamente al dispositivo de grabación. Para conectar correctamente una antena a un dispositivo de grabación, consulte el manual del usuario del dispositivo de grabación. ¦ Escucha a través de un receptor Se puede escuchar sonido a través de un receptor (como Home Theater) en lugar de hacerlo mediante el Altavoz de TV. 1. Seleccione Receptor y configure como Activado. 2. Pulse el botón EXIT para salir. ✎ Si el receptor sólo admite audio, quizás no se muestre la lista de dispositivos. ✎ El receptor no funcionará si no se ha conectado correctamente el terminal de entrada óptico del receptor con el terminal DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) del televisor. ✎ Cuando el receptor (sistema Home Theatre) está establecido en Activado, se puede oír la salida de sonido del terminal Optical del televisor. Cuando se ve la televisión a través de un DTV (aéreo), el televisor envía el sonido de 5.1 canales al receptor. Cuando la fuente es un componente digital, como un DVD, y está conectada al televisor a través de HDMI, sólo se oye el sonido de 2 canales del receptor. ✎NOTA x Sólo puede controlar los dispositivos Anynet+ mediante el mando a distancia del televisor, no con los botones de éste. x El mando a distancia del televisor puede no funcionar en determinadas circunstancias. En ese caso, vuelva a seleccionar el dispositivo Anynet+. x Las funciones Anynet+ no funcionan con los productos de otros fabricantes. 3_BN68-02655A-00Spa.indd 32 2010-03-04 오후 7:55:15Español 33 04 Funciones avanzadas ¦ Solución de problemas de Anynet+ Problema Posible solución Anynet+ no funciona. • Compruebe si el dispositivo es un dispositivo Anynet+. El sistema Anynet+ sólo admite dispositivos Anynet+. • Conecte sólo un receptor (sistema Home Theatre). • Compruebe si el cable de alimentación de Anynet+ está debidamente conectado. • Compruebe las conexiones de los cables de vídeo/audio/HDMI del dispositivo Anynet+. • Compruebe si Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) está establecido en Activado en el menú de configuración de Anynet+. • Compruebe si el mando a distancia del televisor está en modo TV. • Compruebe si es un mando a distancia exclusivo para Anynet+. • Anynet+ no funciona en algunas situaciones. (Búsqueda de canales, funcionamiento de Media Play o Plug & Play (configuración inicial), etc.) • Cuando se conecta o se desconecta el cable HDMI, se han de buscar de nuevo los dispositivos o volver a apagar y encender el televisor. • Compruebe si la función Anynet+ del dispositivo Anynet+ está activada. Deseo iniciar Anynet+. • Compruebe si el dispositivo Anynet+ está debidamente conectado al TV y si la opción Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) del menú de configuración está establecida en Activado. • A continuación pulse el botón TOOLS para visualizar el menú Anynet+ y seleccione el menú que desee. Deseo salir de Anynet+. • Seleccione Ver la televisión en el menú Anynet+. • Pulse el botón SOURCEdel mando a distancia del televisor y seleccione un dispositivo que no sea Anynet+. • Pulse los botones P >/< y PRE-CH para cambiar el modo TV. (Tenga en cuenta que el botón de canal sólo funciona cuando no hay ningún dispositivo Anynet+ con sintonizador incorporado conectado.) En la pantalla aparece el mensaje “Conectando al dispositivo Anynet+...”. • El mando a distancia no se puede utilizar cuando se está configurando Anynet+ o cambiando a un modo de visualización. • Utilice el mando a distancia cuando haya terminado la configuración de Anynet+ o el cambio al modo de visualización. El dispositivo Anynet+ no funciona. • No se puede utilizar la función de reproducción si se está ejecutando Plug & Play (configuración inicial). El dispositivo conectado no se muestra. • Compruebe si el dispositivo admite las funciones Anynet+. • Compruebe si el cable HDMI está debidamente conectado. • Compruebe si Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) está establecido en Activado en el menú de configuración de Anynet+. • Vuelva a efectuar una búsqueda de dispositivos Anynet+. • Sólo puede conectar un dispositivo Anynet+ mediante el cable HDMI. Algunos cables HDMI pueden no admitir las funciones Anynet+. • Si se ha interrumpido por una situación anormal como la desconexión del cable HDMI o el de alimentación o por un fallo en la corriente eléctrica, deberá repetir la búsqueda del dispositivo. El programa de televisión no se puede grabar. • Compruebe la conexión de la toma de antena del dispositivo de grabación. El sonido del televisor no sale a través del receptor. • Conecte el cable óptico entre el televisor y el receptor. 3_BN68-02655A-00Spa.indd 33 2010-03-04 오후 7:55:1534 Español Información adicional Función de teletexto de los canales analógicos La página de índice de dicho servicio proporciona información sobre el uso de éste. Para que la información del teletexto se visualice correctamente, la recepción del canal debe ser estable. En caso contrario, puede perderse información o algunas páginas pueden no visualizarse. ✎Puede cambiar páginas de teletexto pulsando los botones numéricos del mando a distancia. 1 / (activar teletexto/mezcla): Activa el modo de teletexto en el canal actual. Púlselo dos veces para superponer el teletexto a la pantalla de emisión actual. 2 8 (guardar): Guarda las páginas del teletexto. 3 4 (tamaño): Muestra caracteres de doble tamaño en la parte superior de la pantalla. Si desea mostrarlos también en la parte inferior, vuelva a pulsar el botón. Púlselo de nuevo una vez para volver a la presentación normal. 4 9 (retener): Mantiene en la pantalla la página actual, en el caso de que haya varias páginas secundarias que siguen automáticamente. Para deshacer la acción, vuelva a pulsar el botón. 5 Botones de colores (rojo, verde, amarillo y azul): Si la emisora utiliza el sistema FASTEXT, los distintos temas de una página de teletexto se codificarán en color y podrá seleccionarlos pulsando los botones de color. Pulse el color correspondiente al tema que desee ver. Se muestra una nueva página codificada en colores. Los elementos se pueden seleccionar de la misma manera. Pulse el botón del color correspondiente para ver la página anterior o la siguiente. 6 0 (modo): Selecciona el modo de teletexto (LIST/FLOF). Si se pulsa durante el modo LIST, cambia al modo de guardar lista. En dicho modo se puede guardar la página de teletexto en la lista mediante el botón 8 (guardar). 7 1 (página secundaria): Muestra la página secundaria disponible. 2 (avanzar página): Muestra la siguiente página del teletexto. 8 3 (retroceder página): Muestra la página anterior del teletexto. 9 6 (índice): Muestra la página de índice (contenido) en cualquier momento durante la visualización de teletexto. 0 5 (mostrar): Muestra el texto oculto (respuestas a juegos, por ejemplo). Púlselo de nuevo para volver a la presentación normal. ! 7 (cancelar): Reduce la pantalla del teletexto para superponerla con la emisión actual. @ Página normal de teletexto Sección Contenido A Número de página seleccionado. B Identidad del canal emisor. C Número de página actual o indicaciones de la búsqueda. D Fecha y hora. E Texto. F Información de estado. Información FASTEXT. MUTE MENU CH LIST PRE-CH A B C D TTX/MIX SOURCE RETURN EXIT TOOLS INFO 1 3 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 ! @ 0 3_BN68-02655A-00Spa.indd 34 2010-03-04 오후 7:55:16Español 35 05 Información adicional Montaje de los cables Tipo soporte Sujete los cables con el sujetacables para que éstos no sean visibles a través del soporte transparente. 1 2 3 1 2 3 Tipo montaje mural ✎No tire de los cables con demasiada fuerza cuando los coloque. Podría dañar los terminales de conexión del producto. Instalación del montaje mural Montaje del soporte de protección Al instalar el televisor en una pared, coloque el soporte de protección como se indica. Soporte de protección 3_BN68-02655A-00Spa.indd 35 2010-03-04 오후 7:55:1836 Español Información adicional Preparación para instalar el montaje mural Para instalar un montaje mural, utilice el soporte de anilla 1. Caso A. Instalación del montaje mural de SAMSUNG Caso B. Instalación del montaje mural de otra empresa 1 1 Instalación del equipo de montaje mural El kit de montaje mural (se vende por separado) permite instalar el televisor en una pared. Si desea más información sobre la instalación de los componentes para el montaje mural, consulte las instrucciones que se facilitan con dichos elementos. Si necesita ayuda con la instalación del soporte mural, póngase en contacto con un técnico. Samsung Electronics no se hace responsable de los daños causados al producto o al usuario si éste ha efectuado la instalación del televisor. Especificaciones del equipo de montaje mural (VESA) ✎El kit de montaje mural se vende por separado. Instale el montaje mural en una pared sólida, perpendicular al suelo. Para colocarlo en otros materiales de construcción, póngase en contacto con el distribuidor más cercano. Si se instala en el techo o en una pared inclinada, puede caerse y causar graves lesiones personales. ✎NOTA x Las dimensiones estándar de los equipos de montaje mural se muestran en la tabla siguiente. x Al adquirir el equipo de montaje mural, también se distribuye un manual de instalación detallado y todas las piezas necesarias para el montaje. x No use tornillos que no cumplan las especificaciones de tornillos estándar VESA. x No use tornillos con una longitud superior a la medida estándar o que no cumplan con las especificaciones de tornillos estándar VESA. Los tornillos que sean demasiado largos pueden causar daños en el interior del televisor. x Para montajes murales que no cumplen las especificaciones de tornillos estándar VESA, la longitud de éstos puede variar dependiendo de las especificaciones del montaje mural. x No apriete excesivamente los tornillos, ya que podría dañar el producto o provocar la caída de éste con riesgo de causar lesiones personales. Samsung no se hace responsable de este tipo de accidentes. x Samsung no se hace responsable de daños o lesiones personales cuando se usa un montaje mural que no cumple las especificaciones VESA o si el cliente no sigue las instrucciones de instalación del producto. x No monte el televisor con una inclinación de más de 15 grados. Familia de producto pulgadas Especificaciones VESA (A * B) Tornillo estándar Cantidad TV LED [Ultra delgado] 19~22 75 X 75 M4 4 23~29 200 X 100 M8 32~37 200 X 200 40~55 400 X 400 56~65 600 X 400 No instale el equipo de montaje mural mientras el televisor está encendido. Se podría producir una descarga eléctrica con riesgo de causar lesiones personales. 3_BN68-02655A-00Spa.indd 36 2010-03-04 오후 7:55:20Español 37 05 Información adicional Bloqueo antirrobo Kensington Samsung no suministra el bloqueo antirrobo Kensington. Es un dispositivo que se utiliza para fijar físicamente el sistema cuando se utiliza en un sitio público. El aspecto y el método de bloqueo pueden ser diferentes a los que se muestran en la ilustración según el fabricante. Consulte el manual proporcionado con el bloqueo Kensington para obtener más información sobre el uso correcto. ✎Busque el icono “K” en la parte posterior del televisor. Junto al icono “K” hay una ranura Kensington. 1. Introduzca el dispositivo de bloqueo en la ranura Kensington del TV LED 1 y gírelo como se muestra en 2. 2. Conecte el cable del bloqueo Kensington 3. 3. Fije el bloqueo Kensington a la mesa o a un objeto estático pesado. ✎El dispositivo de bloqueo debe adquirirse por separado. ✎La ubicación de la ranura Kensington puede variar según el televisor. Fijación del televisor a la pared Precaución: Tirar del televisor, empujarlo o colgarse de él puede provocar su caída. En especial, procure que los niños no se cuelguen del televisor ni lo desestabilicen; éste podría caerse sobre ellos y causarles lesiones graves o incluso la muerte. Siga las precauciones de seguridad del folleto de seguridad incluido con el producto. Para mejorar la estabilidad y la seguridad instale un dispositivo antivuelco, como se explica a continuación. ¦ Para impedir que el televisor se caiga 1. Apriete firmemente las grapas sobre la pared con los tornillos. Asegúrese de que los tornillos estén bien afirmados en la pared. ✎ Según el tipo de pared quizás necesite algún material adicional para el anclaje. ✎ Las grapas, los tornillos y la cadena no se suministran con el producto; deberá adquirirlos por separado. 2. Quite los tornillos de la parte central posterior del televisor y con ellos monte las grapas en el televisor. ✎ Quizás con el televisor no vayan incluidos los tornillos. En tal caso debe adquirirlos por separado con estas especificaciones. ✎ Especificaciones de los tornillos x Para 19 ~ 22 pulgadas: M4 x Para 23 ~ 65 pulgadas: M8 3. Monte una cadena fuerte entre las grapas del televisor y de la pared de manera que quede bien tensada. ✎ NOTA x Instale el televisor cerca de la pared para evitar que caiga hacia atrás. x Las grapas de la pared han de estar a la misma o a menor altura que las grapas del televisor. x Cuando desee mover el televisor deberá aflojar la cadena. 4. Compruebe que todas las conexiones estén bien aseguradas. Compruébelas periódicamente para detectar cualquier signo de fatiga o de fallo. Si tiene dudas sobre la seguridad de la instalación, póngase en contacto con un instalador profesional. Pared 1 2 3 Parte posterior del televisor 3_BN68-02655A-00Spa.indd 37 2010-03-04 오후 7:55:2138 Español Información adicional Solución de problemas Si tiene algún problema con el televisor, consulte esta lista en primer lugar. Si ninguno de los consejos funciona, visite “www.samsung.com” y haga clic en Asistencia técnica o llame al centro de atención al cliente que encontrará en la lista de la última página Problemas Soluciones y explicaciones Calidad de la imagen En primer lugar, ejecute la Prueba de imagen para confirmar que el televisor muestra correctamente la imagen de prueba. (Vaya a MENU - Asistencia técnica - Autodiagnóstico - Prueba de imagen) (pág. 21) Si la imagen de la prueba se muestra correctamente, la mala calidad de la imagen puede deberse a la fuente o a la señal. La imagen del televisor no se ve tan bien como en la tienda. • Si tiene un decodificador por cable analógico, actualícelo a digital. Utilice un cable HDMI o de componentes para conseguir una calidad de imagen de alta definición (HD). • Suscriptores de cable/satélite: Pruebe con estaciones de alta definición (HD) en la oferta de canales. • Conexión de antena: Pruebe con emisoras de alta definición (HD) después de ejecutar la programación automática. ✎ Muchos canales de alta definición (HD) mejoran los contenidos SD (definición estándar). • Ajuste la resolución de la salida de vídeo del receptor de cable/decodificador en 1080i o 720p. • Compruebe que está viendo la televisión a la distancia mínima recomendada según el tamaño y la definición de la señal. La imagen se ve distorsionada: error de macrobloques, microbloques, puntos, pixelización • La compresión de los contenidos de vídeo puede causar imágenes distorsionadas especialmente en las escenas de movimiento rápido, como en los deportes y las películas de acción. • Un nivel de señal débil o de mala calidad puede causar imágenes distorsionadas. No es un problema del televisor. El color es de mala calidad o falta. • Si utiliza una conexión de componentes, compruebe que los cables de los componentes estén conectados en los terminales correctos. Las conexiones incorrectas o sueltas pueden originar problemas en el color o que la pantalla se quede en blanco. El color o el brillo es de mala calidad. • Ajuste las opciones de Imagen en el menú del TV. (vaya a los modos Imagen / Color / Brillo / Nitidez) (pág. 15) • Ajuste la opción Ahorro energía en el menú del TV. (vaya a MENU - Imagen - Solución económica - Ahorro energía) (pág. 15) • Intente reiniciar la imagen para ver la configuración de imagen predeterminada. (vaya a MENU - Imagen - Reinicio de la imagen) (pág. 17) Hay una línea de puntos en el borde la pantalla. • Si el tamaño de la imagen está establecido en Ajuste pantalla, cámbielo a 16:9 (pág. 16). • Cambie la resolución del receptor de cable/decodificador. La imagen se ve sólo en blanco y negro. • Si está utilizando una entrada compuesta AV, conecte el cable de vídeo (amarillo) en el terminal verde de la entrada 1 de componentes del televisor. Al cambiar de canal, la imagen se congela, se ve distorsionada o aparece con retraso. • Si está conectado al receptor de cable, reinicie éste Vuelva a conectar el cable de alimentación y espere a que el decodificador se reinicie. Puede tardar hasta 20 minutos. • Establezca la resolución de salida del decodificador de cable en 1080i o 720p. Calidad del sonido En primer lugar, ejecute la Prueba de sonido para confirmar que el audio del televisor funciona correctamente. (Vaya a MENU - Asistencia técnica - Autodiagnóstico - Prueba de sonido) (pág. 21) Si el audio es correcto, el problema del sonido puede provenir de la fuente o la señal. No hay sonido o se oye demasiado bajo con el volumen al máximo. • Compruebe el volumen del dispositivo externo conectado al televisor. La imagen es buena pero no hay sonido. • Configure la opción Seleccionar altavoz como Altavoz de TV en el menú de sonido (pág. 18). • Si utiliza un dispositivo externo, compruebe que los cables de audio estén conectados a los terminales de entrada de audio correctos del televisor. • Si utiliza un dispositivo externo, compruebe que la opción de salida de audio del dispositivo (por ejemplo, quizás deba cambiar la opción de audio del decodificador de cable a HDMI si tiene conectado HDMI al televisor). • Si se utiliza un cable DVI a HDMI, se necesita un cable de audio independiente. • Si el televisor tiene un terminal de auriculares, asegúrese de que éstos no estén conectados. Los altavoces hacen un ruido inapropiado. • Compruebe las conexiones del cable Compruebe que no haya un cable de vídeo conectado a una entrada de audio. • Para la conexión antena/cable, compruebe la potencia de señal. Un nivel de señal débil puede causar distorsiones en el sonido. 3_BN68-02655A-00Spa.indd 38 2010-03-04 오후 7:55:21Español 39 05 Información adicional Problemas Soluciones y explicaciones No hay imagen, no hay vídeo El televisor no se enciende. • Compruebe que el cable de alimentación CA esté bien conectado en la toma de la pared y en el televisor. • Compruebe que la toma de la pared funcione. • Intente pulsar el botón POWER del televisor para asegurarse de que el problema no está en el mando a distancia. Si el televisor se enciende, consulte “El mando a distancia no funciona” a continuación. El televisor se apaga automáticamente. • Compruebe si la opción Temp. de desc. está establecida en Desactivado en el menú Configuración (pág. 19). • Si el televisor está conectado a un PC, compruebe la configuración de la alimentación de éste. • Compruebe que el cable de alimentación CA esté bien conectado en la toma de la pared y en el televisor. • Cuando se ve la televisión con una conexión de antena o cable, el televisor se apaga tras 10~15 si no hay señal. No hay imagen/vídeo. • Compruebe las conexiones de los cables (desconecte y vuelva a conectar todos los cables del televisor y de los dispositivos externos). • Establezca la salida de vídeo de los dispositivos externos (receptor de cable/satélite, DVD, Blu-ray, etc.) de modo que coincida con las conexiones de la entrada de TV. Por ejemplo, si la salida de un dispositivo externo es HDMI, se debe conectar a una entrada HDMI en el televisor. • Compruebe que los dispositivos externos estén encendidos. • Asegúrese de seleccionar la fuente correcta del TV pulsando el botón SOURCE del mando a distancia. Conexión RF (Cable/Antena) El televisor no recibe todos los canales. • Compruebe que el cable de antena esté firmemente conectado. • Ejecute Plug & Play (configuración inicial) para añadir los canales disponibles a la lista de canales. Vaya a MENU - Configuración - Plug & Play (configuración inicial) y espere a que todos los canales disponibles se guarden (pág. 7). • Compruebe la posición de la antena. La imagen se ve distorsionada: error de macrobloques, microbloques, puntos, pixelización • La compresión de los contenidos de vídeo puede causar imágenes distorsionadas especialmente en las escenas de movimiento rápido, como en los deportes y las películas de acción. • Un nivel de señal débil puede causar imágenes distorsionadas. No es un problema del televisor. Conexión de PC Aparece un mensaje de “Modo no compatible”. • Establezca la frecuencia y la resolución de salida del PC de modo que coincida con la resolución admitida por el televisor (pág. 23). “PC” siempre aparece en la lista de fuentes aunque el PC no esté conectado. • Esto es normal; “PC” siempre aparece en la lista de fuentes aunque no haya ningún PC conectado. La imagen es buena pero no hay sonido. • Si utiliza una conexión HDMI, compruebe la configuración del audio del PC. Otros La imagen no se muestra en pantalla completa. • En cada lado se muestran barras negras en los canales de alta definición (HD) cuando se muestran contenidos SD mejorados (4:3). • Barras negras en las partes inferior y superior cuando se ven películas que tienen diferentes formatos que el televisor. • Ajuste la opción del tamaño de imagen del dispositivo externo o del televisor al modo de pantalla completa. El mando a distancia no funciona. • Cambie las pilas del mando a distancia; haga coincidir los polos (+/–). • Limpie la ventana de transmisión del sensor del mando a distancia. • Apunte con el mando a distancia directamente al televisor desde una distancia de 1,5 -2 metros. El mando a distancia del cable/ decodificador no enciende ni apaga el televisor ni ajusta el volumen. • Programe el mando a distancia del cable/decodificador para que haga funcionar el televisor. Consulte el manual del decodificador de cable/satélite para conocer el código del TV SAMSUNG. Aparece un mensaje de “Modo no compatible”. • Compruebe la resolución que admite el televisor y ajuste en consecuencia la resolución de salida del dispositivo externo. Consulte cómo configurar la resolución en la página 23 de este manual. Se advierte un olor a plástico que proviene del televisor. • Este olor es normal y desaparece con el tiempo. La Información de señal del televisor no está disponible en el menú de prueba de autodiagnóstico. • Esta función sólo está disponible en los canales digitales con las conexiones de antena/RF/Coaxial (pág. 21). El televisor está inclinado hacia un lado. • Retire la base del soporte de televisor y vuelva a montarla. El menú del canal se ve de color gris (no disponible) • El menú Canal sólo está disponible cuando está seleccionada la fuente TV. 3_BN68-02655A-00Spa.indd 39 2010-03-04 오후 7:55:2140 Español Información adicional Problemas Soluciones y explicaciones La configuración se pierde después de 30 minutos o cada vez que se apaga el televisor. • Si el televisor está en el modo Demo tienda, la configuración del audio y la imagen se restablecerá cada 30 minutos. Cambie el modo de la configuración de Demo tienda a Uso doméstico en el procedimiento Plug & Play (configuración inicial). Pulse el botón SOURCE para seleccionar el modo TV; vaya a MENU → Configuración → Plug & Play(configuración inicial) → → ENTERE (pág. 7). Pérdida intermitente de audio o vídeo. • Compruebe las conexiones de los cables y vuelva a conectarlos. • La pérdida de audio o vídeo se puede deber a que los cables son demasiado rígidos o gruesos. Debe asegurarse de que los cables sean lo suficientemente flexibles para un largo periodo de uso. En un montaje mural del televisor, es aconsejable utilizar cables con conectores de 90 grados. Puede ver pequeñas partículas si mira de cerca el borde del marco del televisor • Esto es una particularidad del diseño del producto y no es un defecto. El menú PIP no está disponible. • La función PIP sólo está disponible cuando se utiliza una fuente HDMI, PC o de componentes (pág. 21). Aparece el mensaje “Señal codificada” o “Señal débil/Sin señal”. • Si utiliza una TARJETA (CI/CI+) en CAM compruebe que esté correctamente insertada en la ranura. • Si persiste el problema, saque la TARJETA CAM del televisor y vuelva a insertarla. Ha apagado el televisor hace 45 minutos y se ha vuelto a encender. • Esto es normal. El televisor ejecuta la función OTA (en el aire) por sí solo a fin de actualizar el firmware descargado mientras se veía la televisión. Hay problemas de imagen/sonido recurrentes. • Compruebe y cambie la señal/fuente. Puede haber una reacción entre las almohadillas de amortiguación de caucho de la base del soporte y el acabado del mueble. • Para prevenir esto, utilice almohadillas de fieltro en cualquier superficie del televisor que entre en contacto con el mueble. ✎El panel LED TFT utiliza un panel que consta de píxeles de ínfimo tamaño que requieren de una tecnología altamente sofisticada para su fabricación. No obstante, puede que existan unos cuantos píxeles brillantes u oscuros en la pantalla. Estos píxeles no influirán en el rendimiento del aparato. ¦ Licencia Fabricado bajo licencia de Dolby Laboratories. Dolby y el símbolo de la doble D son marcas comerciales de Dolby Laboratories. Manufactured under licence under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and the Symbol are registered trademarks. & DTS 2.0+ Digital Out and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product Includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. DivX Certified to play DivX video up to HD 1080p, including premium content. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX,Inc. This is an official DivX Certified device that plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video.ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ONDEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) content. To generate the registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in the device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com with this code to complete the registration process and learn more about DivX VOD. Pat. 7,295,673; 7,460,688; 7,519,274 3_BN68-02655A-00Spa.indd 40 2010-03-04 오후 7:55:22Español 41 05 Información adicional Especificaciones Panel nativo 1360 x 768 @ 60 Hz Consideraciones medioambientales Temperatura de funcionamiento Humedad de funcionamiento Temperatura de almacenamiento Humedad de almacenamiento 10°C a 40°C (50,00°F a 104,00°F) 10% al 80%, sin condensación -20°C a 45°C (-4°F a 113°F) 5% al 95%, sin condensación Sistema de televisión Analógico: B/G, D/K, L, I (Según la selección del país) Digital: DVB-T/DVB-C Sistema de color/vídeo Analógico: PAL, SECAM, NTSC-4,43, NTSC-3,58, PAL60 Digital: MPEG-2 MP@ML, MPEG-4, H,264/AVC MP@L3, MP@L4,0, HP@L4,0 Sistema de sonido BG, OK NICAM, MPEGl HDMI IN 1 ~ 2 Vídeo: 1080 24p, 1080p, 1080i, 720p 576p, 576i, 480p, 480i Audio: Lineal de dos canales PCM 32/44,1/48 kHz, 16/20/24 bits, Entrada de audio analógico (sólo HDMI IN1) Entrada de PC Soporte giratorio (izquierda/derecha) 0˚ Nombre del modelo UE19C4000 UE22C4000 / UE22C4010 UE26C4000 Tamaño de pantalla (diagonal) 19 pulgadas 22 pulgadas 26 pulgadas Sonido (salida) 3W x 2 3W x 2 5W x 2 Dimensiones (An x Pr x Al) Cuerpo principal Con el soporte 477,6 x 29,9 x 320,6 mm 477,6 x 189,6 x 374,1mm 545,2 x 29,9 x 359,0 mm 545,2 x 189,5 x 411,1 mm 652,8 x 29,9 x 422,8 mm 652,8 x 212,0 x 479,8 mm Peso Sin el soporte Con el soporte 3,6 kg 3,9 kg 3,7 kg 4,1 kg 5,5 kg 6,2 kg ✎El diseño y las especificaciones pueden cambiar sin previo aviso, ✎Para obtener más información sobre la fuente de alimentación y el consumo de energía, consulte la etiqueta adherida al producto, 3_BN68-02655A-00Spa.indd 41 2010-03-04 오후 7:55:2242 Español Información adicional Índice A Actualización del software 22 Admin. de canales 12 Ahorro energía 15 Ajuste automático 17 Altavoz de TV 18 Altavoz externo 18 Amplificar 17 Antena 13 Anynet+ 30 Aparato de vídeo 8 Auriculares 9 Autodiagnóstico 21 B Balance de blanco 15 Balance L/R 17 Bloquear 14 Brillo 15 C Cálido 16 Canales favoritos 13 Cambiar PIN 20 Componente 8 Conexión a un dispositivo de audio 9 Conexión a un PC 23 Contraste dinámico 15 D Definición 15 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT 9, 30 Dinámico 15 DivX® VOD 29 D-sub 23 E Ecualizador 17 Edición de canales 14 Editar nombre 10 EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) 11 Espacio de instalación 2 Especificaciones 41 F Formatos de vídeo 26 Fotos 27 Frecuencia 13 Fuentes 10 G Girar 29 Grabación 32 Guía actual y próxima 11 H HDMI 8, 30 Herramientas 3 Home Theatre 9, 30 I Idioma 20 Indicador de encendido 5 Información de señal 21 L Licencia 40 M Mando a distancia 6 Media Play 24 Melodía 21 Menú de canales 13 Modo de espera 5 Modo de película 16 Modo de repetición 29 Montaje mural 35 Música 27 Música de fondo 29 N Navegar 11 P Picture Size (Tamaño de imagen) 16, 29 Pilas 6 PIP (imagen en imagen) 21 Plug & Play 7 Presentación 27 R Receptor 32 Reloj 19 Resolución óptima 23 S Seleccionar altavoz 18 Seleccionar todo 14 Símbolo 3 Sintonización fina 14 Sólo modo RGB 15 Solución de problemas 38 Soporte de protección 35 Subtítulos 20 Sujetacables 4, 35 T Temporizador 19 Temporizador de desconexión 19 Título 28 Tono color 16 Tono de piel 15 Tono del negro 15 Transparencia de menús 21 U Unidad USB 22, 24 Uso de la vista del canal 12 Uso de la vista planificada 12 Uso de los canales favoritos 13 V Vídeos 25 Virtual Surround 17 Vista básica 28 Volumen 5 Volumen automático 18 3_BN68-02655A-00Spa.indd 42 2010-03-04 오후 7:55:23This page is intentionally left blank. 3_BN68-02655A-00Spa.indd 43 2010-03-04 오후 7:55:232 Português As imagens e ilustrações neste Manual do utilizador servem apenas de referência e podem ser diferentes do produto real. O design e as características técnicas do produto podem ser alterados sem aviso prévio. Aviso sobre a televisão digital 1. As funcionalidades relacionadas com a televisão digital (DVB) só estão disponíveis em países/áreas onde os sinais digitais terrestres DVB-T (MPEG2 e MPEG4 AVC) sejam transmitidos, ou onde consiga aceder a um serviço de televisão por cabo compatível com DVB-C (MPEG2 e MPEG4 AAC). Verifique com o revendedor local a possibilidade de receber sinais DVB-T ou DVB-C. 2. DVB-T é a norma de consórcio europeia DVB para a transmissão de emissão de televisão digital terrestre, enquanto DVB-C é a de transmissão de emissão de televisão digital por cabo. Existem, contudo, algumas funcionalidades diferenciadas, como o EPG (Electronic Programme Guide - Guia de programação electrónico), o VOD (Video On Demand - Vídeo a pedido), entre outras, que não estão incluídas nesta especificação. Por esse motivo, não são suportadas de momento. 3. Embora este televisor respeite as mais recentes normas DVB-T e DVB-C [Agosto de 2008], não é possível garantir a compatibilidade com as futuras transmissões digitais terrestres DVB-T e transmissões digitais por cabo DVB-C. 4. Consoante o país/área onde este televisor é utilizado, alguns fornecedores de televisão por cabo podem cobrar uma taxa adicional por esse serviço e poderá ser necessário concordar com os termos e condições dos seus negócios. 5. Algumas funções da televisão digital podem estar indisponíveis em alguns países ou regiões e o DVB-C poderá não funcionar correctamente com alguns fornecedores de serviços por cabo. 6. Para obter mais informações, contacte o centro de assistência ao cliente local da Samsung. ✎ A qualidade da recepção do televisor pode ser afectada devido a diferenças no método de emissão entre países. Consulte o revendedor autorizado local da SAMSUNG ou o centro de atendimento da Samsung para saber se o desempenho do televisor pode ser melhorado, através da respectiva reconfiguração. Aviso de imagem fixa Evite visualizar imagens fixas (como ficheiros de imagem jpeg) ou elementos de imagens fixas (como logótipos de programas televisivos, imagens panorâmicas ou imagens de formato 4:3, barras de notícias ou de informações sobre a bolsa na parte inferior do ecrã, etc.) no ecrã. A visualização constante de imagens fixas pode provocar efeitos fantasma no ecrã LED, o que afecta a qualidade da imagem. Para reduzir o risco de ocorrência deste efeito, siga as recomendações abaixo: • Evite visualizar o mesmo canal de televisão durante longos períodos. • Tente sempre visualizar as imagens em ecrã inteiro. Utilize o menu de formatos de imagem do televisor para escolher o mais adequado. • Reduza os valores do brilho e do contraste para o mínimo necessário para alcançar a qualidade de imagem pretendida; os valores muito elevados podem acelerar o processo de desgaste. • Utilize com frequência todas as funcionalidades do televisor destinadas a reduzir a retenção da imagem e o desgaste do ecrã; consulte a secção que trata este assunto no manual do utilizador para obter mais informações. Manutenção de um espaço de instalação seguro Mantenha as distâncias recomendadas entre o produto e outros objectos (por exemplo, uma parede) para garantir a ventilação adequada. Caso contrário, pode provocar um incêndio ou danificar o produto devido ao aumento de temperatura no interior do mesmo. ✎ Se utilizar uma base ou suporte de montagem na parede, utilize apenas as peças fornecidas pela Samsung Electronics. x O facto de utilizar peças fornecidas por outro fabricante, pode resultar em danos materiais ou ferimentos graves em caso de queda do produto. ✎ O aspecto exterior pode variar consoante o produto. Instalação com uma base. Instalação com um suporte de montagem na parede. 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm Eliminação Correcta Deste Produto (Resíduos de Equipamentos Eléctricos e Electrónicos) Esta marca apresentada no produto, nos acessórios ou na literatura – indica que o produto e os seus acessórios electrónicos (por exemplo, o carregador, o auricular, o cabo USB) não deverão ser eliminados juntamente com os resíduos domésticos no final do seu período de vida útil. Para impedir danos ao ambiente ou à saúde humana causados pela eliminação incontrolada de resíduos, deverá separar estes equipamentos de outros tipos de resíduos e reciclá-los de forma responsável, para promover uma reutilização sustentável dos recursos materiais. Os utilizadores domésticos deverão contactar o estabelecimento onde adquiriram este produto ou as entidades oficiais locais para obterem informações sobre onde e de que forma podem entregar estes equipamentos para permitir efectuar uma reciclagem segura em termos ambientais. Os utilizadores profissionais deverão contactar o seu fornecedor e consultar os termos e condições do contrato de compra. Este produto e os seus acessórios electrónicos não deverão ser misturados com outros resíduos comerciais para eliminação. Eliminação correcta das baterias existentes neste produto (Aplicável na União Europeia e noutros países europeus com sistemas de recolha de baterias separados.) Esta marca, apresentada na bateria, manual ou embalagem, indica que as baterias existentes neste produto não devem ser eliminadas juntamente com os resíduos domésticos indiferenciados no final do seu período de vida útil. Onde existentes, os símbolos químicos Hg, Cd ou Pb indicam que a bateria contém mercúrio, cádmio ou chumbo acima dos níveis de referência indicados na Directiva CE 2006/66. Se as baterias não forem correctamente eliminadas, estas substâncias poderão ser prejudiciais para a saúde humana ou para o meio ambiente. Para proteger os recursos naturais e promover a reutilização dos materiais, separe as baterias dos outros tipos de resíduos e recicle-as através do sistema gratuito de recolha local de baterias. [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 2 2010-03-03 오전 2:37:363 PORTUGUÊS Português Índice Introdução 4 4 Acessórios 5 Apresentação do painel de controlo 6 Apresentação do telecomando 7 Ligação a uma antena 7 Plug & Play (Configuração inicial) Ligações 8 8 Ligação a um dispositivo AV 9 Ligação a um dispositivo de áudio 10 Alteração da fonte de entrada Funcionalidades básicas 11 11 Como percorrer os menus 11 Utilização do botão INFO (Guia actual e seguinte) 11 Planeamento de visualizações 13 Menu Canal 15 Menu Imagem 17 Menu Som 19 Menu Configurar 21 Menu Assistência Funcionalidades avançadas 23 23 Ligação a um PC 24 Media Play 30 Anynet+ Outras informações 34 34 Funcionalidade de teletexto de canais analógicos 35 Montagem dos cabos 35 Instalação do suporte de montagem na parede 37 Dispositivo anti-roubo Kensington 37 Fixação do televisor à parede 38 Resolução de Problemas 41 Especificações 42 Índice remissivo Verifique o símbolo! tEsta função pode ser utilizada carregando no botão TOOLS do telecomando. Nota Tecla rápida TOOLS [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 3 2010-03-03 오전 2:37:364 Português Introdução Acessórios ✎Verifique se os seguintes acessórios estão incluídos no televisor LED. Se faltar algum acessório, contacte o seu revendedor. ✎A cor e a forma dos itens podem variar consoante os modelos. ✎Os cabos não incluídos na embalagem podem ser adquiridos separadamente y Telecomando e pilhas (2 pilhas AAA) y Manual do utilizador y Cartão de garantia / Manual de segurança (não estão disponíveis em alguns locais) y Pano de limpeza y Cabo de alimentação y Tampa e parafuso (X1) (apenas nos modelos de 26 polegadas) y Anel de suporte (4) (apenas nos modelos de 26 polegadas) y Base de suporte de cabos (apenas nos modelos de 26 polegadas) y Braçadeira de cabos y Suporte para cabos (3) y Adaptador de componente y Adaptador de AV y Adaptador SCART UE19C4000, UE22C4000 / UE22C4010 Consulte o manual fornecido em separado para instalar a base. y Base do suporte y Suporte para monitor UE26C4000 Consulte o manual fornecido em separado para instalar a base. s s s s s (A) (B) 5 (M4 X L12) 5 (M4 X L8) y Base (1) y Base guia (1) y Parafusos (10) ✎Para obter a melhor ligação por cabo a este produto, utilize cabos com a espessura máxima indicada abaixo: y Espessura máxima - 14 mm (M4 X L8) [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 4 2010-03-03 오전 2:37:395 01 Introdução Português Apresentação do painel de controlo ✎A cor e a forma do produto podem variar consoante o modelo. Sensor do telecomando Aponte o telecomando para este ponto no televisor. SOURCEE Alterna entre todas as fontes de entrada disponíveis. No menu no ecrã, utilize este botão tal como utiliza o botão ENTERE do telecomando. MENU Apresenta um menu no ecrã, o OSD (on screen display) das funcionalidades do seu Y televisor. Regula o volume. No OSD, utilize os botões Y tal como utiliza os botões ◄ e ► z do telecomando. Muda de canal. No OSD, utilize os botões z tal como utiliza os botões ▼ e ▲ do telecomando. Indicador de corrente Pisca e apaga-se quando o televisor está ligado; acende-se quando está no modo de espera. P (Alimentação) Liga ou desliga o televisor. Modo de espera Não deixe o televisor no modo de espera durante longos períodos de tempo (por exemplo, quando vai de férias). O televisor continua a consumir uma pequena quantidade de energia eléctrica mesmo quando o botão de alimentação está desligado. É aconselhável desligar o cabo de alimentação. Altifalantes Sensor do telecomando Indicador de corrente [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 5 2010-03-03 오전 2:37:396 Introdução Português Apresentação do telecomando ✎Este é um telecomando especial para pessoas invisuais e tem pontos de Braille no botão Power, nos botões de canais e nos botões de volume. Colocação das pilhas (Tamanho da pilha: AAA) ✎NOTA x Utilize o telecomando a uma distância máxima de 7 metros do televisor. x A incidência de luzes fortes pode afectar o desempenho do telecomando. Evite utilizar lâmpadas fluorescentes especiais ou luzes de néon nas imediações. x A cor e a forma podem variar consoante o modelo. CH LIST TOOLS POWER SOURCE PRE-CH MENU RETURN MEDIA.P A B C D EXIT INFO HDMI TTX/MIX GUIDE P.MODE AD P.SIZE SUBT. S.MODE DUAL Liga e desliga o televisor. Selecciona o modo HDMI directamente. Apresenta e selecciona as fontes de vídeo disponíveis (p. 10). Volta ao canal anterior. Corta o som temporariamente. Muda de canal. Apresenta a lista de canais no ecrã (p. 13). Apresenta o EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) (p. 11). Apresenta informações sobre o ecrã do televisor. Sai do menu. Obter acesso directo aos canais. Regula o volume. Também selecciona Teletexto, Duplo ou Sobrepor. Abre o OSD. Apresenta Media Play (USB) (p. 24). Selecciona rapidamente as funções mais utilizadas. Volta ao menu anterior. Selecciona os itens de menu no ecrã e muda os valores vistos no menu. Estes botões são utilizados para o menu Gestor de Canais, Media Play (USB), etc. Utilize estes botões nos modos Media Play (USB) e Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) (p. 24, 30). (�: controla a gravação para gravadores da Samsung que tenham a funcionalidade Anynet+) P.MODE: prima este botão para seleccionar o modo de imagem (p. 15). S.MODE: prima este botão para seleccionar o modo de som (p. 17). DUAL f-g: Selecção de efeitos sonoros (p. 19). AD: Activa e desactiva a descrição de áudio (p. 18). Esta função não está disponível em alguns locais. P.SIZE: Selecciona o modo de imagem (p. 16). SUBT.: apresenta legendas digitais (p. 20). [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 6 2010-03-03 오전 2:37:407 01 Introdução Português Ligação a uma antena Quando ligar o televisor pela primeira vez, as definições básicas são utilizadas de forma automática. ✎Predefinição: ligação à corrente eléctrica e à antena. ✎Se a ficha do cabo da antena tiver uma forma fora do normal, poderá não ser possível ligá-la à porta de entrada correctamente. Plug & Play (Configuração inicial) Quando ligar o televisor pela primeira vez, uma sequência de avisos no ecrã ajuda-o a configurar as definições básicas. Carregue no botão POWERP. A função Plug & Play só está disponível se a fonte de Introduzir estiver definida para TV. ✎Para regressar ao passo anterior, carregue no botão vermelho. 1 Selecção de um idioma Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ e, em seguida, no botão ENTERE. Seleccione o idioma pretendido para o OSD (On Screen Display - Indicações no ecrã). P POWER 2 Selecção de Demons. Loja ou Util. Domés. Carregue no botão ◄ ou ► e, em seguida, no botão ENTERE. y Seleccione o modo Util. Domés.. O modo Demons. Loja destina-se a locais de venda a retalho. y Reponha as definições da unidade de Demons. Loja para Util. Domés (padrão): carregue no botão de volume do televisor. Quando vir o OSD de volume, carregue sem soltar no botão MENU durante 5 seg. 3 Selecção de um país Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ e, em seguida, no botão ENTERE. Seleccione o país pretendido. Se o país pretendido não existir no menu, seleccione Outros. ✎Depois de seleccionar o país no menu País, alguns modelos permitem avançar para uma opção adicional para definir o número PIN. ✎Quando introduz o número PIN, 0-0-0-0 não está disponível. 4 Selecção de uma antena Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ e, em seguida, no botão ENTERE. Seleccione Antena ou Cabo. 5 Selecção de um canal Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ e, em seguida, no botão ENTERE. Seleccione a origem do canal que pretende memorizar. Se definir a origem da antena para Cabo, torna-se possível atribuir valores numéricos (frequências de canal) aos canais. Para mais informações, consulte Canal → Memor. Auto. (p. 13). ✎Carregue no botão ENTERE em qualquer altura para interromper o processo de memorização. 6 Definição de Modo Relógio Defina Modo Relógio automática ou manualmente. Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar Auto. e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. 7 Fuso Horário Carregue no botão ▲ ou ▼ para seleccionar o fuso horário do local onde se encontra e, em seguida, carregue no botão ENTERE. (consoante o país) 8 Apresentação do Guia de Ligação HD. É apresentado o método de ligação que permite obter a melhor qualidade com o ecrã HD. 9 Desfrute do seu televisor. Carregue no botão ENTERE. Se pretender repor esta funcionalidade... Seleccione Configurar - Plug & Play (Configuração inicial). Introduza o número PIN de 4 dígitos. O número PIN predefinido é “0-0-0- 0”. Se pretender alterar o número PIN, utilize a função Alterar PIN. ANT OUT Antena VHF/UHF ou Cabo Entrada de energia [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 7 2010-03-03 오전 2:37:408 Português Ligações Ligação a um dispositivo AV Com um cabo HDMI ou HDMI/DVI: ligação HD (até 720p/1080i) Dispositivos disponíveis: leitor de DVD, leitor de Blu-ray, caixa de televisão por cabo HD, receptor de satélite HD STB (Set-top box), caixa de televisão por cabo, receptor de satélite STB ✎HDMI IN 1(DVI), 2, PC/DVI AUDIO IN x Quando utilizar uma ligação de cabo HDMI/DVI, tem de utilizar a tomada HDMI IN 1(DVI). Em caso de ligação através de um cabo DVI, utilize um adaptador de cabo DVI a HDMI ou DVI-HDMI (DVI a HDMI) para uma ligação de vídeo e as tomadas PC/DVI AUDIO IN para áudio. x Se ligar um dispositivo externo, como um leitor de DVD / leitor de Blu-ray / caixa de televisão por cabo / receptor de satélite STB que suporte versões HDMI anteriores à 1,3, o televisor pode não funcionar correctamente (por exemplo, pode não emitir imagem / pode não emitir som / imagens tremidas / cores estranhas). x Se o televisor não emitir som após ligar um cabo HDMI, verifique a versão HDMI do dispositivo externo. Se suspeitar que a versão é anterior à 1,3, contacte o fornecedor do dispositivo para confirmar a versão HDMI e solicitar uma actualização. x Recomenda-se que adquira um cabo HDMI certificado. se não ouvir som ou se este não estiver em condições, volte a seleccionar o padrão de som pretendido. Com um cabo de componente (até 720p/1080i) ou de áudio/vídeo (apenas 480i) e um cabo Scart Dispositivos disponíveis: VCR, DVD, leitor de Blu-ray, caixa de televisão por cabo, receptor de satélite STB ✎No modo Ext., DTV Out só suporta áudio e vídeo MPEG SD. ✎Para obter a melhor qualidade de imagem, é aconselhável uma ligação de componente (em detrimento da ligação A/V). ✎Se a ficha do cabo da antena tiver uma forma fora do normal, poderá não ser possível ligá-la à porta de entrada correctamente. HDMI OUT DVI OUT AUDIO OUT R-AUDIO-L R W Leitor de DVD Leitor de DVD Vermelho Branco PR PB Y COMPONENT OUT R G B R B G Y Y W R R W R W AUDIO OUT VIDEO OUT R-AUDIO-L AUDIO OUT R-AUDIO-L R B G R W Y R W EXT Videogravador Leitor de DVD Vermelho Azul Verde Vermelho Branco Amarelo Vermelho Branco Leitor de Blu-ray [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 8 2010-03-03 오전 2:37:42Português 9 02 Ligações Ligação a um dispositivo de áudio Com uma ligação óptica (digital) ou de auscultadores Dispositivos disponíveis: sistema de áudio digital, amplificador, sistema home theatre ✎DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) x Se um sistema de áudio digital estiver ligado à tomada DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL), diminua o volume do televisor e do sistema. x Se o televisor estiver ligado a um dispositivo externo que suporte 5.1 canais, poderá usufruir de áudio de 5.1 canais. x Se o receptor (amplificador ou sistema home theatre DVD) estiver activado, o som é reproduzido a partir da tomada óptica do televisor. Se o televisor receber um sinal DTV, envia som de 5.1 canais para o amplificador ou sistema home theatre DVD. Se a fonte for um componente digital, como um leitor de DVD/leitor de Blu-ray/caixa de televisão por cabo/receptor de satélite STB (Set-top box), e estiver ligada ao televisor através de um cabo HDMI, o amplificador ou sistema home theatre DVD só reproduz áudio de 2 canais. Se pretender ouvir áudio de 5.1 canais, ligue a tomada de saída de áudio digital do seu leitor de DVD/leitor de Blu-ray / caixa de televisão por cabo / receptor de satélite STB directamente a um amplificador ou a um sistema home theatre. ✎Auscultadores H: Pode ligar os auscultadores à respectiva saída existente no televisor. Quando os auscultadores estão ligados, o som dos altifalantes incorporados é desactivado. x A função de som pode ser limitada quando liga os auscultadores ao televisor. x O volume dos auscultadores e o volume do televisor são reguláveis em separado. OPTICAL USB sistema de áudio digital [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 9 2010-03-03 오전 2:37:4210 Português Ligações Alteração da fonte de entrada Lista de Fontes Utilize esta opção para seleccionar o televisor ou uma fonte de entrada externa, tal como um leitor de DVD/leitor de Blu-ray/caixa de televisão por cabo/receptor de satélite STB. ■ TV / Ext. / PC / AV / Componente / HDMI1/DVI / HDMI2 / USB ✎ Em Lista de Fontes, as entradas ligadas são realçadas. ✎ As opções Ext. e PC permanecem sempre activadas. Editar Nome ■ VCR / DVD / STB Cabo / Satélite STB / STB PVR / Receptor AV / Jogos / Câmara de Vídeo / PC / DVI / DVI PC / Dispositivos DVI / TV / IPTV / Blu-ray / HD DVD / DMA: Atribua um nome ao dispositivo ligado às tomadas de entrada para facilitar a selecção da fonte de entrada. ✎ Se ligar um cabo HDMI/DVI à porta HDMI IN 1(DVI), deve definir a porta para o modo DVI PC ou Dispositivos DVI em Editar Nome. LIGAÇÕES Ranhura COMMON INTERFACE Para poder ver canais pagos, tem de introduzir o “CI ou CI+ CARD”. y Se não introduzir o “CI ou CI+ CARD”, alguns canais apresentam a mensagem “Sinal Codificadol”. y As informações de emparelhamento, incluindo um número de telefone, a ID do “CI ou CI+ CARD”, a ID do anfitrião e outras informações são apresentadas cerca de 2 a 3 minutos depois. Se aparecer uma mensagem de erro, contacte o seu fornecedor de serviços. y Assim que concluir a configuração das informações dos canais, a mensagem “Actualização concluída” é apresentada, indicando que a lista de canais já está actualizada. ✎NOTA x Tem de solicitar um “CI ou CI+ CARD” ao fornecedor de serviços por cabo local. x Para retirar o “CI ou CI+ CARD”, puxe-o cuidadosamente para fora com as mãos para não o deixar cair e danificá-lo. x Introduza o “CI ou CI+ CARD” na direcção indicada no mesmo. x A localização da ranhura COMMON INTERFACE pode variar consoante o modelo. x Uma vez que o “CI ou CI+ CARD” não é suportado em alguns países e regiões, consulte o seu revendedor autorizado. x Se detectar problemas, contacte o fornecedor de serviços. x Insira o “CI ou CI+ CARD” que suporta as actuais definições da antena. O ecrã vai ficar distorcido ou não vai aparecer imagem nenhuma. SOURCE [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 10 2010-03-03 오전 2:37:43Português 11 03 Funcionalidades básicas Funcionalidades básicas Como percorrer os menus Antes de utilizar o televisor, siga os passos abaixo para saber como percorrer o menu e seleccionar e ajustar as diferentes funções. CH LIST MUTE POWER SOURCE ON/OFF PRE-CH INTERNET MEDIA.P TOOLS RETURN MEDIA.P AD P.SIZE SUBT. A B C D DUAL EXIT INFO @ TTX/MIX MENU GUIDE 3 2 4 1 1 ENTERE / Botão amarelo: Move o cursor e selecciona um item. Confirma a definição. 2 Botão RETURN: Volta ao menu anterior. 3 Botão MENU: Apresenta o menu principal no ecrã. 4 Botão EXIT: Sai do menu no ecrã. Como utilizar os OSD (On Screen Display - Indicações no ecrã) O passo de acesso pode variar consoante o menu seleccionado. 1 MENU m As opções do menu principal aparecem no ecrã: Imagem, Som, Canal, Configurar, Introduzir, Aplicação, Assistência. 2 ▲ / ▼ Seleccione um ícone com o botão ▲ ou ▼. 3 ENTERE Carregue em ENTERE para aceder ao submenu. 4 ▲ / ▼ Seleccione o submenu pretendido com o botão ▲ ou ▼. 5 ◄ / ► Regule o valor de um item com o botão ◄ ou ►. O ajuste no OSD pode variar consoante o menu seleccionado. 6 ENTERE Carregue em ENTERE para concluir a configuração. 7 EXIT e Carregue em EXIT. Utilização do botão INFO (Guia actual e seguinte) O ecrã identifica o canal actual e o estado de determinadas definições de áudio-vídeo. O Guia actual e seguinte apresenta as informações diárias sobre os programas televisivos de cada canal consoante a hora de emissão. y Desloque-se através de ◄, ► para ver as informações sobre um determinado programa enquanto vê o canal actual. y Desloque-se através de ▲, ▼ para ver as informações sobre outros canais. Se pretender mudar para o canal actualmente seleccionado, carregue no botão ENTERE. DTV Air 15 DEF Life On Venus Avenue 18:00 ~ 6:00 Unclassified No Detaild Information E Planeamento de visualizações Guia As informações do EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) são fornecidas pelas estações emissoras. Se utilizar as grelhas de programação fornecidas pelas emissoras, pode especificar antecipadamente os programas que pretende ver, de forma a que o televisor mude automaticamente para o canal do programa seleccionado à hora especificada. As entradas dos programas podem aparecer em branco ou desactualizadas consoante o estado do canal. INFO GUIDE 18:11 Qui 6 Jan Ver Informação [400019-Euro]BN68-02655A-00L06.indb 11 2010-03-03 오전 2:37:4412 Português Utilização da função Vis. Canal Utilização da função Vista Programada 1 Vermelho (Modo Vis.): apresenta a lista de programas que se seguem ou que estão actualmente em reprodução. 2 Amarelo (+24 horas): apresenta a lista de programas que serão emitidos após 24 horas. 3 Azul (Modo CH): seleccione o tipo de canais que pretende ver na janela Vis. Canal. (Todas, TV, Rádio, Dados/Outros, O Meu Canal 1~4) 4 Informação: apresenta os detalhes do programa seleccionado. 5 k(Página): passa para a página seguinte ou anterior. 6 Botão ENTERE. – Se escolher o programa actual, pode ver o programa seleccionado. – Se escolher o programa seguinte, pode reservar o programa seleccionado a que quer assistir. Para cancelar a programação, carregue novamente no botão ENTERE e seleccione Cancelar Planos. Gestor de Canais Elimine ou defina os canais favoritos e utilize o guia de programação para emissões digitais. Seleccione um canal no ecrã Canais, Os Meus Canais ou Planeado. ■ Canais: apresenta a lista de canais consoante o tipo de canal. ■ *Os Meus Canais: apresenta o grupo do canal. ■ Planeado: apresenta todos os programas actualmente reservados. ✎Utilização dos botões coloridos com o Gestor de Canais. x Vermelho (Antena) : alterna entre Antena ou Cabo. x B Verde (Zoom) : aumenta ou diminui o número de um canal. x Amarelo (Seleccionar): escolha os canais pretendidos e carregue no botão amarelo para definir todos os canais seleccionados ao mesmo tempo. A marca c aparece à esquerda dos canais seleccionados. x Azul (Ordenar) : altera a lista ordenada por nome ou número de canal. x k (Página): passa para a página seguinte ou anterior. x T (Ferramentas) : apresenta o menu da opção Gestor de Canais. (Os menus de opções podem variar consoante a situação.) Ícones do ecrã de estado do canal Ícones Operações A Um canal analógico. c Um canal seleccionado. * Um canal definido como Favorito. ( Um programa que está a ser transmitido. \ Um canal bloqueado. ) Um programa reservado. Funcionalidades básicas DTV Air 800 five Home and Away 18:00 - 18:30 Drama Dani is devastated when scott makes clear his views on marriage... 27 28 800 24 16 6 Discovery DiscoveryH&L five price-drop.tv QVC R4DTT American Chopper Programmes resume at 06:00 Home and... No Information QVC Selection No Information Tine Team Fiv... 18:00 - 19:00 19:00 - 20:00 )Family Affairs )Dark Angel 800 ﬁve Modo Vis. +24 horas Modo CH Informação k Página E Ver Guia 2:10 Ter 1 Jun Vis. Canal - Todas 1 2 3 4 5 6 Hoje DTV Air 800 five Home and Away 18:00 - 18:30 Drama Dani is devastated when scott makes clear his views on marriage... American Chopper Programmes resume at 06:00 Home and... No Information QVC Selection No Information Tine Team Fiv... 18:00 - 19:00 19:00 - 20:00